Model PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/ SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/ SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
PMC
Model PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/
SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/
SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6
Ladder Language Programming Manual, GFZ-61863E/15,
Vol. 2 of 4
February 2005
GFL-002
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages,
currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this
equipment or may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment,
a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation, Inc.

Alarm Master Genius ProLoop Series Six
CIMPLICITY Helpmate PROMACRO Series Three
CIMPLICITY 90–ADS Logicmaster PowerMotion VersaMax
CIMSTAR Modelmaster PowerTRAC VersaPoint
Field Control Motion Mate Series 90 VersaPro
GEnet PACSystems Series Five VuMaster
Proficy Series One Workmaster
©Copyright 2005 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved
B–61863E/15 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
B–61863E/15 PREFACE
PREFACE
This programming manual describes the method of generating

ladder sequence programs for PMC.
It also describes the operation methods of CRT/MDI and
SYSTEM P series for sequence programming.
Renaming of PMC This manual presents programming descriptions for the PMC
Models models listed in the following table. Note that some models have
been renamed; in the product name column, the old names are
enclosed in parentheses, while the new names appear above the
old names. However, the previous specifications are still applied
to the renamed models. Thus, when using the renamed models,
users should:
• Read the old names shown in this manual as the new names.
• Read the old names appearing on the units as the new names.
Applicable models The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Product Name Abbreviations Applicable CNC

FANUC PMC–MODEL PA1 PMC–PA1 FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D
FANUC Series 21–MODEL A
FANUC PMC–MODEL PA3 PMC–PA3 FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F/H

FANUC Series 21–MODEL A
FANUC PMC–MODEL SA1 (Note 1) PMC–SA1 FANUC Series 18–MODEL A/B

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RA1) (PMC–RA1) FANUC Series 20–MODEL A
FANUC Series 21–MODEL B
FANUC Series 20i–MODEL A
FANUC Series 21i–MODEL A/B
Loader control function (Note 2)
FANUC PMC–MODEL SA2 (Note 1) PMC–SA2 FANUC Series 18–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RA2) (PMC–RA2)
FANUC PMC–MODEL SA3 (Note 1) PMC–SA3 FANUC Series 18–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RA3) (PMC–RA3) FANUC Series 20–MODEL A
FANUC PMC–MODEL SA5 (Note 1) PMC–SA5 FANUC Series 21i–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RA5) (PMC–RA5)
FANUC PMC–MODEL SB (Note 1) PMC–SB FANUC Series 16–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB) (PMC–RB)
FANUC PMC–MODEL SB2 (Note 1) PMC–SB2
(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB2) (PMC–RB2)
FANUC PMC–MODEL SB3 (Note 1) PMC–SB3 FANUC Series 16–MODEL A/B

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB3) (PMC–RB3) FANUC Series 18–MODEL B
p–1
PREFACE B–61863E/15
Product Name Abbreviations Applicable CNC

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB4 (Note 1) PMC–SB4 FANUC Series 16–MODEL B
(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB4) (PMC–RB4) FANUC Series 18–MODEL B
FANUC PMC–MODEL SB5 (Note 1) PMC–SB5 FANUC Series 16–MODEL C

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB5) (PMC–RB5) FANUC Series 18–MODEL C
FANUC Power Mate i–MODEL D/H
FANUC PMC–MODEL SB6 (Note 1) PMC–SB6 FANUC Series 16–MODEL C

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB6) (PMC–RB6) FANUC Series 18–MODEL C
FANUC Power Mate i–MODEL D/H
FANUC PMC–MODEL SB7 PMC–SB7 FANUC Series 16i–MODEL B

FANUC Series 18i–MODEL B
FANUC PMC–MODEL SC (Note 1) PMC–SC FANUC Series 16–MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC) (PMC–RC)
FANUC PMC–MODEL SC3 (Note 1) PMC–SC3 FANUC Series 16–MODEL A/B/C

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC3) (PMC–RC3) FANUC Series 18–MODEL B/C
FANUC PMC–MODEL SC4 (Note 1) PMC–SC4 FANUC Series 16–MODEL B/C

(Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC4) (PMC–RC4) FANUC Series 18–MODEL B/C
FANUC PMC–MODEL NB PMC–NB FANUC Series 15–MODEL B
FANUC PMC–MODEL NB2 PMC–NB2
FANUC PMC–MODEL NB6 PMC–NB6 FANUC Series 15i–MODEL A

NOTE
1 These models have been renamed; in the product name
column, the old names are enclosed in parentheses, while
the new names appear above the old names. However, the
previous specifications are still applied to the renamed
models.
Thus, when using the renamed models, users should :
• Read the old names shown in this manual as the new
names.
• Read the old names appearing on the units as the new
names.
2 PMC–SA1 is applied to the loader control side of a CNC
having the loader control function.
The CNC models having the loader control function are as
follows :
FANUC Series 16–MODEL A/B/C
FANUC Series 18–MODEL A/B/C
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL A/B
p–2
B–61863E/15 PREFACE
Other manuals However, it does not include all items required for sequence
programming. For those required for sequence programming
refer to the following manuals.
Name of manual Reference items Application

FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D/F Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-PA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (B-62833EN) PMC-PA3
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL H Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-PA3
CONNECTION MANUAL (B–62683EN)
FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SB5
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–63733EN–1) PMC-SB6
FANUC Series 16/18 Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (B-61803E) PMC-SA2
PMC-SA3
PMC-SB
PMC-SB2
PMC-SB3
PMC-SC
PMC-SC3
FANUC Series 16/18/160/180-MODEL B Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SB3
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-62443E-1) PMC-SB4
PMC-SC3
PMC-SC4
FANUC Series 16/18/160/180-MODEL C Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SB5
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-62753EN-1) PMC-SB6
PMC-SC3
PMC-SC4
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL A Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63003EN-1) PMC-SA5
PMC-SB5
PMC-SB6
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL B Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SB7
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63523EN-1)
FANUC Series 20–FA/TA Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (B–62173E) PMC-SA3
FANUC Series 21/210–MODEL B Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-SA1
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–62703EN–1) PMC-SA3
FANUC Series 15-MODEL B Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-NB
BMI INTERFACE PMC-NB2
CONNECTION MANUAL (B-62073E-1)
FANUC Series 15i/150i-MODEL A Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-NB6
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–63323EN–1)
FANUC PMC C language programming PMC-SC
C LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING MANUAL PMC-SC3
(B-61863E-1) PMC-SC4
PMC-NB
PMC-NB2
Other application The models covered for reference by this manual, and their
model names abbreviations are:
Product name Abbreviation CNC for

FANUC PMC-MODEL P PMC-P FANUC Power Mate-MODEL C
FANUC PMC-MODEL NA PMC-NA FANUC Series 15-MODEL B
p–3
B–61863E/15 Table of Contents
Volume 1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S–1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P–I
I. PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM

1. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 SPECIFICATION OF PMCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 SUMMARY OF SPECIFICATION OF LADDER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.3 WHAT IS A SEQUENCE PROGRAM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.4 CREATION OF INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS (STEPS 1 TO 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.5 CREATION OF LADDER DIAGRAM (STEP 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.6 CODING (STEP 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.7 SEQUENCE PROGRAM ENTRY (STEPS 6, 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.8 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CHECK AND WRITE INTO ROM (STEPS 8 TO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.9 STORAGE AND CONTROL OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (STEPS 12 TO 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.1 EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.2 REPETITIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3 PRIORITY OF EXECUTION (1ST LEVEL, 2ND LEVEL AND 3RD LEVEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.5 PROCESSING I/O SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.5.1 Input Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.5.2 Output Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.5.3 I/O Signals to CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.5.4 Difference of Status of Signals between 1st Level and 2nd Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.5.5 Notes on Input/Output Signals Over a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.6 INTERLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.7 SEQUENCE PROGRAM PROCESSING TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.8 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MEMORY CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3. ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.1 ADDRESSES BETWEEN PMC AND CNC (PMC´NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2 ADDRESSES BETWEEN PMC AND MACHINE TOOL (PMC´MT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2.1 Addresses Between PMC and Machine Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2.2 Assignment of I/O Module Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.2.3 I/O Link Connection Unit Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.2.4 I/O Unit MODEL B Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2.5 Power Mate Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.2.6 FS16i–LA Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
c–1
Table of contents B–61863E/15
3.2.7 Distribution I/O Connection I/O Module and

Distribution I/O Operator’s Panel I/O Module Assignment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2.8 Assignment of Built–in I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.3 INTERNAL RELAY ADDRESSES (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.3.1 Area Managed by the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.4 ADDRESSES FOR MESSAGE SELECTION DISPLAYED ON CRT (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.5 ADDRESS OF COUNTER (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.6 ADDRESS OF KEEP RELAY AND NONVOLATILE MEMORY CONTROL (K) . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.7 ADDRESS OF DATA TABLE (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.8 TIMER ADDRESSES (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.9 LABEL ADDRESSES (JMPB, JMPC, LBL) (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.10 SUBPROGRAM NUMBERS (CALL, CALLU, SP) (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

4.1 DETAILS OF BASIC INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4.1.1 RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.1.2 RD. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.1.3 WRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.1.4 WRT. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.1.5 AND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.1.6 AND. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.1.7 OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.1.8 OR. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.1.9 RD. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.1.10 RD. NOT. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.1.11 AND. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.12 OR. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.13 SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.14 RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

5.1 END1 (1ST LEVEL SEQUENCE PROGRAM END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5.2 END2 (2ND LEVEL SEQUENCE PROGRAM END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.3 END3 (END OF 3RD LEVEL SEQUENCE) (PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6/NB7 ONLY) . . 169
5.4 TMR (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.5 TMRB (FIXED TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
5.6 TMRC (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
5.7 DEC (DECODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.8 DECB (BINARY DECODING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.9 CTR (COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.10 CTRB (FIXED COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5.11 CTRC (COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.12 ROT (ROTATION CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.13 ROTB (BINARY ROTATION CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.14 COD (CODE CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5.15 CODB (BINARY CODE CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
5.16 MOVE (LOGICAL PRODUCT TRANSFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
c–2
B–61863E/15 Table of contents
5.17 MOVOR (DATA TRANSFER AFTER LOGICAL SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

5.18 COM (COMMON LINE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.19 COME (COMMON LINE CONTROL END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.20 JMP (JUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.21 JMPE (JUMP END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.22 PARI (PARITY CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
5.23 DCNV (DATA CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.24 DCNVB (EXTENDED DATA CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.25 COMP (COMPARISON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5.26 COMPB (COMPARISON BETWEEN BINARY DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.27 COIN (COINCIDENCE CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5.28 SFT (SHIFT REGISTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
5.29 DSCH (DATA SEARCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
5.30 DSCHB (BINARY DATA SEARCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.31 XMOV (INDEXED DATA TRANSFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.32 XMOVB (BINARY INDEX MODIFIER DATA TRANSFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.33 ADD (ADDITION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.34 ADDB (BINARY ADDITION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.35 SUB (SUBTRACTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.36 SUBB (BINARY SUBTRACTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.37 MUL (MULTIPLICATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.38 MULB (BINARY MULTIPLICATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5.39 DIV (DIVISION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5.40 DIVB (BINARY DIVISION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5.41 NUME (DEFINITION OF CONSTANT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.42 NUMEB (DEFINITION OF BINARY CONSTANTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.43 DISP (MESSAGE DISPLAY) (PMC–SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4 ONLY) . . . . . . . . 268
5.44 DISPB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
5.45 EXIN (EXTERNAL DATA INPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
5.46 WINDR (READING CNC WINDOW DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
5.47 WINDW (WRITING CNC WINDOW DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
5.48 ARBITRARY FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
5.49 MMCWR (READING MMC WINDOW DATA) (OTHER THAN PMC–PA1/PA3) . . . . . . . . . . . 308
5.50 MMCWW (WRITING MMC WINDOW DATA) (OTHER THAN PMC–PA1/PA3) . . . . . . . . . . . 310
5.51 MOVB (TRANSFER OF 1 BYTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
5.52 MOVW (TRANSFER OF 2 BYTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
5.53 MOVN (TRANSFER OF AN ARBITRARY NUMBER OF BYTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
5.54 MOVD (TRANSFER OF 4 BYTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.55 DIFU (RISING EDGE DETECTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
5.56 DIFD (FALLING EDGE DETECTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
5.57 EOR (EXCLUSIVE OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
5.58 AND (LOGICAL AND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
5.59 OR (LOGICAL OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
5.60 NOT (LOGICAL NOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
5.61 MMC3 R (MMC–III WINDOW DATA READ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
5.62 MMC3W (MMC–III WINDOW DATA WRITE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
5.63 SPCNT (SPINDLE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
c–3
5.64 END (END OF A LADDER PROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

5.65 CALL (CONDITIONAL SUBPROGRAM CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
5.66 CALLU (UNCONDITIONAL SUBPROGRAM CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
5.67 SP (SUBPROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
5.68 SPE (END OF A SUBPROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
5.69 JMPB (LABEL JUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
5.70 JMPC (LABEL JUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
5.71 LBL (LABEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
5.72 AXCTL (AXIS CONTROL BY PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
5.73 PSGNL (POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
5.74 PSGN2 (POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
5.75 NOP (NO OPERATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6. NONVOLATILE MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

6.1 TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY, NONVOLATILE MEMORY CONTROL, DATA TABLE . 365
6.2 READING AND WRITING OF NONVOLATILE MEMORY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
6.3 PMC DATA TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
7. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

7.1 ADDRESSES, SIGNAL NAMES, COMMENTS, AND LINE NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
7.1.1 Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
7.1.2 Signal Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.1.3 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.1.4 Line Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.2 SYMBOLS USED IN THE LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
7.3 LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
7.4 INFINITE NUMBER OF RELAY CONTACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
8. MISCELLANEOUS ITEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
9. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

9.1 EXAMPLES OF STRUCTURED PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
9.1.1 Implementation Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
9.1.2 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
9.1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
9.2 SUBPROGRAMMING AND NESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
9.2.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
9.2.2 Execution Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
9.2.3 Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
9.3 CAUTIONS FOR SUBROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
10. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

10.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
10.2 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
11. INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

11.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
c–4
11.2 SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

11.3 INTERRUPT PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
11.3.1 Interrupt Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
11.3.2 Input/Output Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
11.3.3 Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
11.3.4 Execution Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
11.3.5 Interrupt Enable/Disable/Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
11.3.6 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
11.4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
II. PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI)

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
1.1 FOR MDI UNITS OTHER THAN STANDARD MDI UNITS
(FOR FS20 PMC–SA1 AND SA3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
1.2 AUTOMATIC OPERATION WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
1.3 CLEARING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
1.4 LOADING THE STANDARD LADDER (FOR Power Mate–D/F PMC–PA1 AND PA3) . . . . . . . 425
1.5 FS15i PMC–NB6 OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
1.6 FS16i/18i/21i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
1.7 LADDER PASSWORD FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
1.8 PMC OPERATION FOR LOADER CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
2. PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
3. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) . . . . . . 436
3.1 DISPLAYING TITLE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
3.2 DISPLAY OF SIGNAL STATUS (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
3.3 ALARM SCREEN (ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
3.4 TRACE FUNCTION (TRACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
3.4.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
3.4.2 Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
3.4.3 Starting or Stopping the Trace Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
3.4.4 Trace Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
3.4.5 Automatic Tracing Function at Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
3.5 DISPLAYING THE CONTENTS OF MEMORY (M.SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
3.5.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
3.5.2 Function for Storing Data in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
3.6 FUNCTION FOR DISPLAYING SIGNAL WAVEFORMS (ANALYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
3.6.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
3.6.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
3.6.3 Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
3.6.4 Signal Diagnosis Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
3.6.5 Reading Signals Automatically at Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
3.7 DISPLAYING THE RUNNING STATE OF A USER TASK (USRDGN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
c–5
3.8 DISPLAYING AND SETTING THE CONFIGURATION STATUS OF I/O

DEVICES (IOCHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
3.8.1 I/O Link Connecting Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
3.8.2 I/O Link–II Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
3.9 FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
3.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
3.9.2 Setting/Operation for Enabling Forced Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
3.9.3 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
3.9.4 Modifying the Values of Signals by Forced Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
3.9.5 Setting/Clearing OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
4. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

4.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
4.2 INPUT PMC PARAMETERS FROM MDI PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
4.2.1 Multiple Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
4.3 SETTING AND DISPLAY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
4.3.1 Timer Screen (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
4.3.2 Counter Screen (COUNTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
4.3.3 Keep Relay (KEEPRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
4.3.4 Data Table (DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
4.4 SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
4.4.1 Other Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
4.5 NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
5. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

5.1 LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
5.2 DUMP DISPLAY ON LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
5.3 PARAMETER DISPLAY ON LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
5.3.1 The Value of Functional Instruction Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
5.4 SYMBOL AND COMMENT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
5.5 SEARCH OF SPECIFIED RELAY COIL POINTS IN LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
5.6 STOP OF LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY BY TRIGGER OF SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
5.7 DIVIDING DISPLAY OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
5.8 ON–LINE EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
6. USER PMC SCREEN (PMCMDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

6.1 FOR THE FS16 (PMC–SC, PMC–SC3, OR PMC–SC4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
6.2 FOR THE FS15 (PMC–NB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
III. PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI)

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
1.1 ABOUT THE FS15i PMC–NB6 PROGRAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
1.2 ABOUT THE FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 PROGRAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
2. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

2.1 COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
c–6
2.2 CONNECTING COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
3. SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER MENUS BY SOFTKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
4. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . 520
5. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

5.1 SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING TITLE DATA (TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
5.1.1 Entering Title Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
5.1.2 Deleting Title Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
5.1.3 Editing Character Strings of Title Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
5.2 SEQUENCE PROGRAM GENERATION (LADDER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
5.2.1 Sequence Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
5.2.2 Alteration of Sequence Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
5.2.3 Insert of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
5.2.4 Delete of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
5.2.5 Search of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
5.2.6 Copying the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
5.2.7 Moving the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
5.2.8 Editing Symbol Data and Comment at Once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
5.2.9 Address Change of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
5.3 I/O UNIT ADDRESS SETTING (MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
5.4 SYMBOL DATA SETTING (SYMBOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
5.4.1 Symbol Data and Comment Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
5.4.2 Symbol Data Search (SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
5.4.3 Delete of Symbol Data and Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
5.4.4 Editing Character Strings of Symbol Data and Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
5.4.5 Function for Editing Symbol Data and Comment Data at One Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
5.4.6 Function of Copying Symbol and Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
5.5 MESSAGE DATA SETTING (MESSAGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
5.5.1 Message Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
5.5.2 Searching for an Address (SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
5.5.3 Editing a Character String in Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
5.5.4 Input with a Katakana Identification Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
5.5.5 Copying Message Data (COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
5.5.6 Inputting a Multi–byte Character (D.CHAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
5.5.7 Displaying Input Code (DSPMOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
5.6 CLEARING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND CONDENSATION OF
THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
5.6.1 Clearing the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
5.6.2 Compress the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
5.6.3 Clearing the PMC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
5.7 CROSS REFERENCE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
5.7.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
5.7.2 Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
6. EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

6.1 START AND STOP OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
c–7
6.2 STARTING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

6.3 FORCIBLY STOPPING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
7. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM

AND PMC PARAMETER DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
7.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
7.1.1 C Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
7.2 SET ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
7.3 OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
7.3.1 Transfer to and from a FANUC LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
7.3.2 Transfer to and from a FANUC FD Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
7.3.3 Storage to Flash ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
7.3.4 Storage to a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
7.3.5 Data Input to and Output from other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
7.3.6 Setting the Transfer Speed ([SPEED] Soft Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
7.3.7 Transfer to and from a ROM WRITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
7.3.8 Notes on Using an MDI Keyboard without Cursor Keys
(when using the FS20 PMC–MODEL SA1/SA3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
7.4 I/O ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
7.5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM COPY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.1 Copy Title Data [CPYTTL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.2 Copy a Ladder Program [CPYLAD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.3 Copy Symbol Data and Comment Data [CPYSYM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.4 Copy Message Data [CPYMSG] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.5.5 Copy the Sequence Programs [CPYALL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
7.5.6 Copy I/O Module Data [CPYMDL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
7.6 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
8. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING

THE PROGRAM (MONIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
8.1 DISPLAYING THE GDT (GLOBAL DESCRIPTOR TABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
8.1.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
8.1.2 Descriptions of Displayed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
8.2 DISPLAYING THE MEMORY ALLOCATION INFORMATION OF A
USER PROGRAM CODED IN C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
8.2.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
8.2.2 Displayed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
8.3 DEBUGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
8.3.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
8.3.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
8.3.3 Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
8.3.4 Screen for Displaying Traced Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
8.3.5 Enabling Automatic Debugging at Power–on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
8.3.6 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
8.4 LADDER DEBUGGING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
8.4.1 Screen of Ladder Debugging Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
8.4.2 Soft Key Menu of Ladder Debugging Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
c–8
8.4.3 Step Operation [STEP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

8.4.4 Stop Function of Break with Condition [BRKCTL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
8.5 ONLINE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
8.5.1 Online Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
8.5.2 Setting of online connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
8.5.2.1 How to set at PMC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
8.5.2.2 How to set at NC parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
8.5.2.3 How to set at NC parameter (Power Mate–D/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
8.5.3 Online Function by Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
8.5.3.1 Setting of Ethernet parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
8.5.3.2 Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
8.5.4 Communication Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
8.5.5 About Connection Log of Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
9. ERROR MESSAGES (FOR EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
10. ERROR MESSAGES (FOR I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
11. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
11.1 SELECTING THE PMC PROGRAMMER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
11.2 SETTING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSTEM PARAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
11.3 EDITING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
11.4 EDITING LADDER MNEMONICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
11.4.1 Starting Ladder Mnemonics Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
11.4.2 Confirming the Ladder Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
11.4.3 Modifying the Ladder Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
11.4.4 Ending Ladder Mnemonics Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
11.5 STARTING AND STOPPING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM (RUN/STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
11.6 ERROR MESSAGES (FOR LADDER MNEMONICS EDITING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
11.7 STORING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM INTO FLASH ROM (I/O)
(ONLY FOR THE Power Mate–H AND Power Mate i–D/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
11.8 ERROR DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
11.9 INPUT/OUTPUT LADDER/PMC–PARAMETER BY DPL/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
11.9.1 Input/Output Method to Office Programmer (P–G Mate/Mark II) (Fixed 9600bit/Sec.) . . . . 635
11.9.2 Input/Output Method to FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE (Fixed 4800bit/Sec.) . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
11.10 ON–LINE DEBUGGING FUNCTION (ONLY FOR Power Mate–D/H AND
Power Mate i–D/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
11.10.1 Starting and Stopping the On–line Debugging Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
11.11 ERROR LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
IV. PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION

1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
2. SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

2.1 PMC BASIC MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
c–9
2.2 PMC SCREEN TRANSITION AND RELATED SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
3. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND

INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
3.1 TITLE DATA DISPLAY (TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
3.2 TITLE DATA EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
3.3 SIGNAL STATUS DISPLAY (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
3.4 ALARM SCREEN (ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
3.5 TRACE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
3.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
3.5.2 Setting of Trace Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
3.5.3 Execution of Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
3.5.4 Operation after Execution of Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
3.5.5 Comparison With the Function of FS15–B (PMC–NB/NB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
3.6 I/O LINK MONITOR AND ALLOCATION OF I/O UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
3.6.1 I/O Link Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
3.6.2 I/O Unit Allocation Viewer screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
3.6.3 I/O Unit Allocation Editor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
3.6.3.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
3.6.3.2 Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
3.7 FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
3.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
3.7.1.1 Input mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
3.7.2 Operations to Enable the Forced I/O Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
3.7.2.1 Setting of forcing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
3.7.2.2 Setting of override mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
3.7.3 Forced Input/Output Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
3.7.3.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
3.7.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
4. PMC DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

4.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
4.2 METHOD FOR ENTERING PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
4.3 CONTINUOUS DATA ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
4.4 TIMER SCREEN (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
4.5 COUNTER SCREEN (COUNTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
4.6 KEEP RELAY SCREEN (KEEPRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
4.7 DATA TABLE (DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
5. SETTING MENU (SETING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

5.1 SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING GENERAL SETTINGS (GENERAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
5.2 SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING THE SETTING DATA RELATED
TO EDITING AND DEBUGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
5.3 SCREEN FOR SETTING/DISPLAYING ONLINE MONITOR PARAMETERS (ONLINE) . . . . . 694
5.4 SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING SETTING DATA RELATED TO C LANGUAGE FUNCTION . . . 696
6. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

6.1 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
c–10
6.1.1 Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

6.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
6.1.3 Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
6.1.4 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
6.1.5 Display Format for Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
6.1.6 Functional Instructions of Special Monitor forMat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
6.2 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
6.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
6.2.3 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
6.2.4 Error Messages and Their Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
6.2.5 How to Correct LADDER Program that Never Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
6.3 NET EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
6.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
6.3.3 Functional Instruction List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
6.3.4 Functional Instruction Data Table Editor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
6.3.5 Error Messages and Their Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
6.3.6 Structure of Valid Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
6.4 PROGRAM LIST VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
6.4.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
6.4.3 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
6.5 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
6.5.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
6.5.3 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
6.6 COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
6.6.1 Structures of Collective Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
6.6.2 Operations of Collective Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
6.6.3 How to Pick Up a Ladder Diagram Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
6.7 ADDRESS CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
6.7.1 Constitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
6.7.2 The Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
6.7.3 Error Messages and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
7. PASSWORD PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

7.1 SPECIFICATIONS OF PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
7.2 PASSWORD AND SWITCHING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
7.2.1 Using One of R–Password and RW–Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
7.2.2 Using Both of R–Password and RW–Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
8. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

AND PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
8.1 I/O SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
8.2 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM MEMORY CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
8.3 MEMORY CARD LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
c–11
8.4 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLASH ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788

8.5 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLOPPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
8.6 FLOPPY LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
8.7 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM OTHER INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . . 796
8.8 PORT SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
8.9 I/O SCREEN ERROR MESSAGES (PMC–NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
9. STARTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
10. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

10.1 MENU SCREEN OF MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
10.2 VIEWER/EDITOR OF SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
10.2.1 Viewer Screen of Symbol/Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
10.2.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
10.2.2 Editor Screen of Symbol/Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
10.2.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
10.2.3 Entry Screen of Symbol/Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
10.2.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
10.2.4 Alarm Message and Countermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
10.3 VIEWER/EDITOR SCREEN OF MESSAGE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
10.3.1 Viewer Screen of Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
10.3.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
10.3.2 Editor Screen of Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
10.3.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
10.3.3 Entry Screen of Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
10.3.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
10.3.4 Alarm Message and Countermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
10.4 VIEWER/EDITOR SCREEN OF SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
10.4.1 Viewer Screen of System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
10.4.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
10.4.2 Editor Screen of System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
10.4.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
c–12
Volume 2
V. FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION

1. SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
1.1 SCREEN OPERATION FOR PMC–SA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
1.1.1 Structure of Software Key in PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
1.1.2 Addition of System Keep Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
1.2 SCREEN OPERATION FOR PMC–SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
1.2.1 Structure of Software Key in PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
1.2.2 Expansion of Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
1.2.3 Addition of System Keep Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
2. SETTING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

2.1 SWITCHING SCREENS FOR SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
2.2 SETTING SCREEN OF GENERAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
2.3 MULTI–LANGUAGE ALARM/OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY
FUNCTION SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
2.4 CAUTION SCREEN OF THE SETTING PARAMETER FOR
THE SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
2.5 SETTING PARAMETER SCREEN FOR THE SELECTABLE
I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
2.6 PROGRAMMER PROTECTION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
2.6.1 PROGRAMMER ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K900.1, PMC–SA1: K17.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
2.6.2 HIDE PMC PROGRAM (PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
2.6.3 EDIT ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K901.6, PMC–SA1: K18.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
2.6.4 HIDE PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7: K902.6, PMC–SA1: K19.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
2.6.5 PROTECT PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7: K902.7, PMC–SA1: K19.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
2.6.6 ALLOW PMC STOP (PMC–SB7: K902.2, PMC–SA1: K19.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
2.6.7 RAM WRITE ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K900.4, PMC–SA1: K17.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
2.6.8 DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (PMC–SB7: K900.7, PMC–SA1: K17.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
2.6.9 IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
2.6.10 Protection of Each Function of I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
2.7 EXAMPLE FOR SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
2.8 KEEP RELAYS USED IN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
3. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864

3.1 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
3.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
3.1.3 Setting the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
3.1.4 Display Format for Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
3.2 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
c–13
3.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

3.3 PROGRAM LIST VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
3.3.1 Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
3.3.2 Brief Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
3.3.3 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
3.3.4 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
4. COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

4.1 CALLING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
4.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
4.3 SCREEN OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
4.4 ALARM MESSAGE AND COUNTERMEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
5. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

5.1 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
5.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
5.3 SCREEN OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
5.4 SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
5.5 NET EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
5.5.1 Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
5.5.2 Screen Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
5.6 STRUCTURE OF VALID NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
5.7 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
5.8 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
5.9 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
5.9.1 Screen Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
5.9.2 Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
5.10 ALARM MESSAGE AND COUNTERMEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
5.11 NOTE ON PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
6. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

6.1 SIGNAL TRACE SCREEN (INITIAL SCREEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
6.2 SETTING OF TRACE PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
6.3 SETTING OF SAMPLING ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
6.4 EXECUTION OF TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
6.5 OPERATION AFTER EXECUTION OF TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
6.6 AUTOMATIC START OF TRACE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
6.7 OUTPUT OF RESULT OF TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
7. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941

7.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
7.2 EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
7.3 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
8. SYSTEM PARAMETER (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
9. I/O LINK CONNECTING CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
10. ONLINE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953

10.1 ONLINE SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
c–14
10.2 SETTING OF ONLINE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

10.2.1 How to Set at PMC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
10.2.2 Setting of Online Connection by NC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
10.3 ONLINE FUNCTION BY ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
10.3.1 Setting of Ethernet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
10.3.2 Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
10.4 COMMUNICATION STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
10.5 ABOUT CONNECTION LOG OF ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
VI. STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
1.1 STEP SEQUENCE METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
1.2 GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
1.3 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974

2.1 TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
2.2 EXECUTION OF STEP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . 988

3.1 STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
3.2 INITIAL STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
3.3 TRANSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
3.4 DIVERGENCE OF SELECTIVE SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
3.5 CONVERGENCE OF SELECTIVE SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
3.6 DIVERGENCE OF SIMULTANEOUS SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
3.7 CONVERGENCE OF SIMULTANEOUS SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
3.8 JUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
3.9 LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
3.10 BLOCK STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
3.11 INITIAL BLOCK STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
3.12 END OF BLOCK STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
4. EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999

4.1 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION TRSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
4.2 PMC ADDRESS (S ADDRESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003

5.1 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
5.2 GENERAL RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
5.3 EXCLUSIVE CONTROL FOR FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
6. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

6.1 DISPLAYING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
c–15
6.1.1 Program Configuration List (Main Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

6.1.2 Step Sequence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
6.1.3 Ladder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
6.2 TIMER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
6.2.1 Time Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
6.2.2 Monitoring Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
6.3 MONITOR TIME SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
6.4 EDITING FUNCTION OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
6.4.1 Program Configuration List (Main Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
6.4.2 Step Sequence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
6.4.3 Ladder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
6.5 CORRESPONDING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
6.6 COMPATIBILITY OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

7.1 DISPLAYING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
7.1.1 Hierarchy of Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
7.1.2 Program List Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
7.1.3 Step Sequence Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
7.1.3.1 Structure of screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
7.1.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
7.1.3.3 Setting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
7.1.4 Subprogram List Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
7.1.4.1 Detail screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
7.1.4.2 Brief screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
7.1.4.3 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
7.1.4.4 Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
7.1.5 Ladder Diagram Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
7.1.6 Collective Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
7.2 DISPLAYING RUN STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
7.2.1 Step Sequence State Screen (Whole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
7.2.1.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
7.2.2 Step Sequence State Screen (Subprogram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
7.2.2.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
7.3 TIME MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
7.3.1 Time Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
7.3.2 Time Monitor Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
7.4 EDITING FUNCTION OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
VII. PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series)

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
2. FUNCTIONS OF PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
3. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058

3.1 COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
c–16
3.2 CONNECTIONS OF UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

3.3 KEYBOARD OF SYSTEM P SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
3.3.1 LOAD Key (System Program Loading Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
3.3.2 F Keys (F1 to F0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
3.3.3 R Keys (R0 to R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
3.3.4 Data Keys and Screen Scroll Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
3.4 SETTING OF I/O DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
4. OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
4.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
4.2 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
4.2.1 System Floppy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
4.2.2 Limitations with the SYSTEM P Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
4.2.3 Loading of Floppy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
4.2.4 FANUC LADDER System Floppy Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
4.2.5 Programmer Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
4.2.6 Parameter Setting and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
4.3 PROGRAM EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
4.3.1 Data Display and Setting (Title, Symbol, Ladder Program, Comment,
Message, I/O Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
4.3.2 Programming from Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
4.3.3 Alter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
4.3.4 Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
4.3.5 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
4.3.6 Location Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
4.3.7 Display of Ladder Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
4.3.8 Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
4.3.9 Editing end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
4.4 INPUT OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
4.4.1 Source Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
4.4.2 ROM Format Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
4.5 OUTPUT OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
4.5.1 Source Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
4.5.2 Paper Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
4.6 COLLATION OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
4.6.1 Collation of Source Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
4.7 DELETION OF PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
4.8 SPECIAL USES OF THE R3 KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
4.9 DIRECT EDITING BY LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
4.9.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
4.9.2 Limitations in SYSTEM P Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
4.9.3 Selection of Program Menu by Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
4.9.4 Sequence Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
4.9.5 Substitution of Sequence Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
4.9.6 Additions to Sequence Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
c–17
4.9.7 Deleting a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116

4.9.8 Searching a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
4.9.9 Copying a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
4.9.10 Moving a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
4.9.11 Symbol Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
4.9.12 Compressed Input by [COMAND] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
4.9.13 Ending Edit of a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
4.10 INPUT/OUTPUT OF LADDER PROGRAM WITH P–G AND FLOPPY
CASSETTE/FA CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
4.10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
4.10.2 Setting I/O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
4.10.3 Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
4.10.4 Program Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
4.10.5 Program Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126

5.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
5.2 CONFIGURATION OF COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
5.3 FDLIST COMMAND — FILE ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
5.4 RENAME COMMAND — FILE ATTRIBUTE CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
5.5 SCRATCH COMMAND — DELETION OF FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
5.6 CONDENSE COMMAND — RELEASE OF DELETED AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
5.7 REMOVE COMMAND — FILE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
APPENDIX
A. ERROR CODES LIST (FOR FANUC LADDER P–G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/

SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
B.1 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143
B.2 LOW–SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH–SPEED RESPONSE OF WINDOW FUNCTION . . . . 1143
B.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
B.4 FORMATS AND DETAILS OF CONTROL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
B.4.1 Reading CNC System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
B.4.2 Reading a Tool Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
B.4.3 Writing a Tool Offset (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
B.4.4 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (not Supported by the Power Mate–D or –F) . . . 1154
B.4.5 Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value(:Low–speed Response)
(not Supported by the Power Mate–D or –F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
B.4.6 Reading a Parameter (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
B.4.7 Writing a Parameter (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
B.4.8 Reading Setting Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
B.4.9 Writing Setting Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
B.4.10 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
B.4.11 Writing a Custom Macro Variable (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
c–18
B.4.12 Reading the CNC Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171

B.4.13 Reading the Current Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
B.4.14 Reading the Current Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
B.4.15 Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
B.4.16 Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
B.4.17 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
B.4.18 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Position of Skip Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes . . . . 1186
B.4.19 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
B.4.20 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
B.4.21 Reading Modal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
B.4.22 Reading Diagnosis Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
B.4.23 Reading A/D Conversion Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
B.4.24 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
B.4.25 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool Groups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
B.4.26 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
B.4.27 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life)
(not Supported by the Power Mate D, –F, or Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
B.4.28 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
B.4.29 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation No. (1): Tool No.) . . . . 1213
B.4.30 Reading Tool Life Management Data
(Tool Length Compensation No. (2): Tool Order No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
B.4.31 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No. (1): Tool No.) . . . . . . . . . 1217
B.4.32 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No. (2): Tool Order No.) . . . . 1219
B.4.33 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1) : Tool No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
B.4.34 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (2): Tool Order No.) . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
B.4.35 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
B.4.36 Reading the Actual Spindle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
B.4.37 Entering Data on the Program Check Screen (:Low–speed Response)
(not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
B.4.38 Reading Clock Data (Date and Time) (not available for Power Mate–F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
B.4.39 Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo Motor (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . 1233
B.4.40 Reading Load Information of the Spindle Motor (Serial Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
B.4.41 Reading a Parameter (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
B.4.42 Reading Set Data (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
B.4.43 Reading Diagnosis Data (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
B.4.44 Reading a Character String of the CNC Program Being Executed in the Buffer . . . . . . . . . 1241
B.4.45 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
B.4.46 Reading the Remaining Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
B.4.47 Reading CNC Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
B.4.48 Reading Value of the P–code Macro Variable (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
B.4.49 Writing Value of the P–code Macro Variable (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
B.4.50 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
B.4.51 Registering the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . 1255
B.4.52 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . 1257
B.4.53 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) (:Low–speed Response) . . 1259
B.4.54 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type)
(:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
B.4.55 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number (1) :
Tool Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
c–19
B.4.56 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number (2) :
Tool Operation Sequence Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
B.4.57 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number (1) :
B.4.58 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number (2) :
B.4.59 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Condition (1) :
B.4.60 Writing the Tool Management Data (Tool Condition (2) :
B.4.61 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . 1275
B.4.62 Reading the Estimate Disturbance Torque Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
B.4.63 Reading the Current Program Number (8–digit Program Numbers)
(not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
B.4.64 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
B.4.65 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
B.4.66 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Diameter Offset Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
B.4.67 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
B.4.68 Writing (Registering) Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number)
B.4.69 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number 1)
B.4.70 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Radius Offset Number 1)
B.4.71 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . 1298
B.4.72 Reading Actual Spindle Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
B.4.73 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Statistical Calculation Results) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
B.4.74 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Store Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
B.4.75 Specifying the Number of the Program for I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
B.4.76 Preset of relative coordinate (:Low–speed response)
(not available for Power Mate and Series 21–TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
B.4.77 Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool group) (:Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . 1320
B.4.78 Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool data) (:Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . 1322
B.4.79 Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool life counter and Tool condition)
(:Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
B.4.80 Writing the Tool life Management Data (Arbitrary group number)
(:Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
B.4.81 Writing the Tool life Management Data (Remaining tool life) (:Low–speed response) . . . 1328
B.4.82 Reading the Current Screen Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
B.4.83 Reading Detailed Alarm Information (:Low–speed type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
B.4.84 Reading the Servo Data of Control Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
B.4.85 Exchange of Tool Management Data Number in the Magazine Management Table
B.4.86 Search of Empty Pot (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
B.4.87 New–register of a Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
B.4.88 Writing a Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349
B.4.89 Deletion of a Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
B.4.90 Reading a Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
B.4.91 Writing Each Tool Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
B.4.92 Search of Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
c–20
B.4.93 Shift of Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368

C.1 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
C.2 LOW–SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH–SPEED RESPONSE OF WINDOW FUNCTION . . . . 1370
C.2.1 Functional Instruction WINDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
C.2.2 Functional Instruction WINDW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
C.3 FORMAT AND DETAILS OF THE CONTROL DATA OF
THE WINDR FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
C.3.1 Reading a Tool Offset (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
C.3.2 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
C.3.3 Reading a Parameter (Setting Data) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
C.3.4 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
C.3.5 Reading the CNC Alarm Status (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
C.3.6 Reading the Current Program Number (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
C.3.7 Reading the Current Sequence Number (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
C.3.8 Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
C.3.9 Reading the Absolute Position on a Controlled Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
C.3.10 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
C.3.11 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Position of Skip Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes
(Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
C.3.12 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
C.3.13 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
C.3.14 Reading Modal Data (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
C.3.15 Reading Diagnosis Data (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
C.3.16 Reading A/D Conversion Data for the Feed Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
C.3.17 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) (Low–speed Response) . . 1397
C.3.18 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool Groups)
C.3.19 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . 1398
C.3.20 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
C.3.21 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . 1399
C.3.22 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) (Low–speed Response) . . 1400
C.3.23 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation No.1)
C.3.24 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation No.2)
(Low–speed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
C.3.25 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No.1)
C.3.26 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No.2)
C.3.27 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . 1405
C.3.28 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 2) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . 1406
C.3.29 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
C.3.30 Reading Clock Data (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
C.3.31 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
C.3.32 Reading the Remaining Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
C.3.33 Reading an Estimate Disturbance Torque Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
c–21
C.3.34Reading the Machining Time (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411

C.3.35Reading the Load Current (A/D Conversion Data) for the Spindle Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
C.3.36Reading the Tool Offset Data According to the Specified Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
C.3.37Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Numbers) (Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . 1414
C.3.38Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 1)
(Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
C.3.39 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 1)
(Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
C.3.40 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) (Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . 1417
C.3.41 Reading Real Parameters (Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
C.3.42 Reading the actual Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes. . . . . . . . 1419
C.3.43 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Statistical Calculation Results). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
C.3.44 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Store Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
C.3.45 Reading detailed information of CNC alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
C.4 FORMAT AND DETAILS OF THE CONTROL DATA OF
THE WINDW FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
C.4.1 Writing a Tool Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
C.4.2 Writing a Parameter (Setting Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
C.4.3 Writing a Custom Macro Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
C.4.4 Writing a Data on the Program Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
C.4.5 Writing the Torque Limit Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
C.4.6 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
C.4.7 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
C.4.8 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
C.4.9 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
C.4.10 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . 1436
C.4.11 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 2) . . . . . . . . 1436
C.4.12 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
C.4.13 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
C.4.14 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
C.4.15 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
C.4.16 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
C.4.17 Writing the Tool Offset Data According to the Specified Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
C.4.18 Writing the Superposition Move Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
C.4.19 Writing the Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
C.4.20 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
C.4.21 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
C.4.22 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
C.4.23 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
C.4.24 Writing Real Parameters (Low–speed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448
D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449

D.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
D.2 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
D.2.1 Transfer Between Data Area and Non–volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
D.2.2 Reading of the Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
D.2.3 Reading and Writing the Laser Command Data and Laser Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459

E.1 READING THE WIRE DIAMETER OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
c–22
E.2 WRITING THE WIRE DIAMETER OFFSET (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462

E.3 READING THE PARAMETER (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
E.4 WRITING THE PARAMETER (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
E.5 READING SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
E.6 WRITING SETTING DATA (LOW–SPEED TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
E.7 READING THE CNC ALARM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
E.8 READING MODEL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
E.9 READING MACHINING DISTANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480
E.10 READING THE MEASURED POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
E.11 WRITING THE MEASURED POINT (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0i–P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484

F.1 READING OF TOOL SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
F.1.1 Data Number, Data Attribute, Data Length, Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487
F.2 WRITING OF TOOL SETTING DATA (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
F.3 READING TOOL SETTING DATA BY SPECIFYING TOOL NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
F.4 OTHER WINDOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493
G. SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERSION

(FROM THE PMC–MODEL L/M TO THE PMC–MODEL SB/SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
G.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
G.2 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
G.3 CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
G.4 MODIFYING THE CONVERTED SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496
G.4.1 Modification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496
H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16,

FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
H.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
H.2 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501
H.2.1 Connecting the I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501
H.2.2 Connecting the I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501
H.3 SIGNALS FOR CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
H.3.1 Emergency Stop Signal (*ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
H.3.2 Override Signals (*OV1 to *OV8) and Program Protect Key Signal (KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
H.3.3 Key Switch Signals (Xn, Xn+2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
H.3.4 LED Signals (Ym) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
H.4 SPECIFYING ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
H.4.1 Parameter Menu (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
H.4.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D (PMC–PA1/PA3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507

I.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508
I.2 COMPATIBILITY WITH CNC BASIC SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508
I.3 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI OR PDP/MDI) [LADDER EDITING FUNCTION] . . . . . . . 1509
I.3.1 Component Units and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
c–23
I.3.1.1 Component units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510

I.3.1.2 Connection of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
I.3.1.3 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
I.3.2 Specification and Display of System Parameters (SYSPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
I.3.3 Condense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
I.4 SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF SOFT KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
J. APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515

J.1 FANUC LADDER, FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC LADDER–III,
LADDER EDITING PACKAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516
J.2 FANUC LADDER (SYSTEM P SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518
K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520

K.1 OUTLINE OF LEVELED UP CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
K.2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
K.2.1 CNC ³ Offline Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
K.2.2 Offline Programmer ³ CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
K.2.3 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525
K.3 NB/NB2 DATA COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
K.3.1 Data Transfer Between NB (4047 Series) and FANUC LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
K.3.2 Data Transfer Between NB/NB2 (4048 Series) and FANUC LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
K.3.3 Data Transfer Between NB (4047 Series) and NB (4048 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS . . . . . 1529

L.1 MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS FROM Power Mate–D/H TO Power Mate i–D/H . . . 1530
L.2 MIGRATION FROM THE PMC–NB/NB2 TO THE PMC–NB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532
L.3 MIGRATION FROM THE PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6 TO THE PMC–SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
L.3.1 Compatibility of PMCs for Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
L.3.2 PMC Parameter Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
L.3.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
L.3.2.2 Format for PMC–MODEL SA1/SA5/SB5/SB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
L.3.2.3 Format for PMC–MODEL SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
L.3.2.4 The difference between PMC–SA1/SA5/SB5/SB6 and PMC–SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
L.4 MIGRATION FROM THE Series 0 AND Series 21–B TO Series 0i–A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
L.4.1 Compatible With Series 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
L.4.2 Compatibility With Series 21–MODEL B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550
L.4.3 Limited Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
L.5 COMPATIBILITY OF PMC BETWEEN Series15i–MODEL A AND B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552

M.1 ALARM MESSAGE (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/
SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553
M.2 ALARM MESSAGE (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560
M.3 SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
M.4 SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (C LANGUAGE FUNCTION FOR PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) . . . . 1567
M.5 SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SB5/SB6/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568
c–24
M.6 PMC SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570
N. EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572
O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576

O.1 WHILE STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
O.2 DO–WHILE STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579
O.3 FOR STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1581
O.4 IF ELSE STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583
O.5 SWITCH STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA CODE, AND SPECIAL

CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588
c–25
III. PMC PROGRAMMER
(CRT/MDI)
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) 1. GENERAL
1 GENERAL
This PMC programmer is used to set PMC system parameters and also
generate and execute sequence programs by using soft keys on the
CRT/MDI panel. For this operation, the PMC debugging RAM must be
mounted in the CNC in advance.
For the CRT/MDI panel keys, refer to PMC operation in PARTII, Chapter
1 and 2.
1) Setting and display of PMC system parameters (SYSPRM)
The following system parameters are available.
a) Selection of counter data types (BCD or binary)
b) Selection of division/non–division of ladder program (only
PMC–SC)
c) Parameters for executing C language programs (only for
PMC–SC)
2) Editing of sequence programs (EDIT)
The following editing functions are provided.
a) Clear of memory
b) Title data input
c) Input, insert, search, and delete of sequence programs by ladder
diagram format
d) Input, insert, delete, and search of symbol data
e) Address setting to each module when I/0 unit is used
f) Message data input
3) Execution of sequence programs (RUN/STOP)
The following function is provided to execute sequence programs
a) Sequence program start and stop
4) To write, verify, and read of sequence programs and PMC data, and
to write and read of I/0 sequence programs, followings are provided.
a) Input/output of sequence programs to and from FANUC floppy
disk cassette
b) Input/output of sequence programs to and from debugging RAM
c) Input/output of sequence programs to and from ROM
d) Input/output of PMC parameter data to and from FANUC FD
cassette
5) Displaying the contents of memory for the user C program and
debugging the user C program (MONIT)
a) Displaying the GDT map of the user C program
b) Displaying memory information for the user C program
c) Debugging the user C program
509
1. GENERAL PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
1.1 See Part IV, “PMC–NB6 Manupiration Screen” for an explanation of the
FS15i PMC–NB6.
ABOUT THE FS15i
PMC–NB6
PROGRAMMER
1.2 See Part V, “FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 Manupiration Screen”

for an explanation of the FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7.
ABOUT THE
FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B
PMC–SA1/SB7
PROGRAMMER
510
2. COMPONENT UNITS AND
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) CONNECTIONS
2 COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS
This section describes only the 16/18–MODEL A. For other models,

refer to the order list and the connection manual for each model.
The units required for generating a sequence program and connection
methods are described below.
511
CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
2.1 1) PCB and module for PMC

COMPONENT UNITS This is PCB and module for PMC. The type of board is as follows;
a) Series 16
i) PMC–SB (Main CPU board)
D PMC control module (A20B–2900–0560)
D Debugging RAM module (A20B–2900–0530)
D PMC user ROM
D Editing module (A02B–0120–C160)
ii) PMC–SC (Option 3 board)
D PMC control module
A20B–2900–0390
(When using language programs, work RAM is required.)
A20B–2900–0391
A20B–2900–0143
b) Series 18
i) PMC–SA1/SA2 (Main CPU board)
D PMC control module (A20B–2900–0142) for PMC–SA1
(A20B–2900–0920) for PMC–SA2
D Debugging RAM module (A20B–2900–0530) Common
D PMC user ROM with
PMC–SB
D Editing module (A02B–0120–0160)
512
Configuration of the main CPU board (Series 16)
Connector Connector
Drawing number : A16B–2200–0900 name name Application
LED
PMC–SB
ROM CPU CRT JA1 CRT video signal
13 MDI JA2 MDI keyboard
R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port
R232–2 JD5B RS–232–C serial port
MPG JA3 Manual pulse generator
Module IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK
SPDL–1 JA7A Serial spindle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A–OUT1 JA8A Analog output
APCBAT JA4A APC battery
AMP1 JV1 1st axis servo amplifier

AMP2 JV2 2nd axis servo amplifier
AMP3 JV3 3rd axis servo amplifier
AMP4 JV4 4th axis servo amplifier
ENC1 JF1 1st axis pulse coder
CNA ENC2 JF2 2nd axis pulse coder
ENC3 JF3 3rd axis pulse coder
F–bus
backplane 9 10 11 12 ENC4 JF4 4th axis pulse coder
connector SCALE1 JF21 1st axis scale
SERVO SCALE2 JF22 2nd axis scale
ROM
SCALE3 JF23 3rd axis scale
SCALE4 JF24 4th axis scale
Fig. 2.1 (a) Layout of parts on Main CPU board (Series 16)
Table 2.1 (a) Modules of Main CPU board (Series 16)
No. Module Drawing number Functional outline

1 ROM module A20B–2900–0290 to 0293 ROM for CAP I or macros
2 ROM module A20B–2900–0290 to 0292 ROM for the CNC system
3 SRAM module A20B–2900–0530 RAM for debugging the PMC–SB
4 SRAM module A20B–2900–0530,–0531 RAM for part programs and parameters
A20B–2900–0540,–0541
5 PMC control module A20B–2900–0560 (For PMC–SB) PMC operation control
A20B–2900–0143 (For PMC–SC)
6 CRT control module A20B–2900–0150 to 0152 CRT display control
7 System control module A20B–2900–0101 to 0103 Clear, battery backup, spindle control, etc.
8 I/O interface module A20B–2900–0110 MDI, MPG, RS–232–C, etc.
9 Servo control module A20B–2900–0160 Digital servo control of the 3rd and 4th axes
10 Servo control module A20B–2900–0160 Digital servo control of the 1st and 2nd axes
11 Servo interface module A20B–2900–0370,–0380 3rd/4th axis amplifier/pulse coder interface
12 Servo interface module A20B–2900–0370,–0380 1st/2nd axis amplifier/pulse coder interface
513
Configuration of the option 3 board (Series 16)
Drawing number : A16B–2200–0940 (PMC–SC+CAP II)

A16B–2200–0941 (only for PMC–SC) Connector Connector
A16B–2200–0943 (only for CAP II) Name Name Application
LED
Module
1 2 3 4 5 6
IOLINK JD1A2 FANUC I/O LINK
CNA
7 8 9
F–bus
backplane CPU
connector
Fig. 2.1 (b) Layout of Parts on Option 3 Board (Series 16)
Table 2.1 (b) Modules of Option 3 Board (Series 16)
No. Module Drawing number Functional outline

1 ROM module A20B–2900–0290 to 0293 User ROM for PMC–SC (Mount the RAM module
during debugging.)
2 ROM module A20B–2900–0292 System ROM for PMC–SC
3 DRAM module A20B–2900–0553 Work RAM for PMC–SC
4 PMC control module A20B–2900–0560 PMC operation control and I/O Link control
5 PMC CPU module A20B–2900–0390 For ladder capacity 24000 steps or C language
A20B–2900–0391 Other than the above
514
Configuration of the Main CPU Board (Series 18)

Connector Connector
Drawing number : A16B–2201–0080 Name No. Description
LED
PMC–RA1/RA2 CRT JA1 CRT video signal

ROM MDI JA2 MDI keyboard
16 R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port
R232–2 JD5B RS–232–C serial port
MPG JA3 Manual pulse generator
Module IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK
SPDL–1 JA7A Serial spindle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A–OUT1 JA8A Analog output
APCBAT JA4A Battery for use with the APC
AMP1 JV1 Axis 1 servo amplifier

ENC1 JF1 Axis 1 pulse coder
CNA ENC2 JF2 Axis 2 pulse coder
ENC3 JF3 Axis 3 pulse coder
F–BUS ENC4 JF4 Axis 4 pulse coder
back plane 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SCALE1 JF21 Axis 1 scale
connector
Fig. 2.1 (c) Parts layout for the main CPU board (Series 18)
Table 2.1 (c) Module list for the main CPU board (Series 18)
No. Module name Drawing no. Function outline

1 ROM module A20B–2900–0290 to 0293 ROM for macros or CAP 1
2 ROM module A20B–2900–0290 to 0292 ROM for the CNC system
3 SRAM module A20B–2900–0530 RAM for PMC–SB debug
4 SRAM module A20B–2900–0530,–0531 RAM for parameters and tape memory
A20B–2900–0540,–0541
5 PMC control module A20B–2900–0142 (PMC–SA1) PMC operation control
A20B–2900–0920 (PMC–SA2)
6 Main CPU module A20B–2900–0930 FS18 Main processor
7 System control module A20B–2900–0900 to 0902 Clear, battery backup, spindle control, servo/graphics
software flash ROM
8 I/O interface module A20B–2900–0110 MDI, MPG, RS–232–C
9 Graphics control module A20B–2900–0310 Graphics display control
10 Graphics CPU module A20B–2900–0590 Graphics control CPU
11 CRT control module A20B–2900–0154 to 0156 CRT display control
12 Servo control module A20B–2900–0160 Digital servo control for axes 3 and 4
13 Servo control module A20B–2900–0160 Digital servo control for axes 1 and 2
14 Servo interface module A20B–2900–0380 Amplifier, pulse coder, and interface for axes 3 and 4
15 Servo interface module A20B–2900–0380 Amplifier, pulse coder, and interface for axes 1 and 2
515
2) Debugging RAM
This is used for debugging sequence programs. Since this debugging
RAM memory is backed up by the battery, the memory data contents
are not erased even when turning off the power supply.
CAUTION
If a RAM parity error occurs or when power is first turned on
after installation, the RAM for debugging must be cleared.
(Procedure)
Turn on power to the CNC while pressing the X and O keys
simultaneously. The contents of the RAM for debugging are then
cleared.
3) Editing module
This is a built–in programmer for PMC–SA1, PMC–SA2, SA3,
PMC–SB, PMC–SB2, or SB3 that enables editing sequence
programs.
4) ROM
After debugging, write a sequence program into ROM.
5) ROM WRITER
This unit is used for writing or reading out a sequence program to
ROM.
6) Offline programmer
This is used to transfer a sequence program.
By connecting the Offline programmer to PMC–SA1, –SA2, –SB,
–SB2, –SB3, –SC, or –SC3, the storage of sequence programs in the
floppy, and the output of a sequence program into printer can be done.
516
2.2 (1) Connecting the debugging RAM module

CONNECTING a) PMC–SB, –SB2 and –SB3 : Connect the module to portion 3
shown in Fig. 2.1 (a).
COMPONENT UNITS
b) PMC–SC and PMC–SC3 : Connect the module to portion 1
shown in Fig. 2.1 (b).
c) PMC–SA1, –SA2 and –SA3 : Connect the module to portion 3
shown in Fig. 2.1 (c).
(2) Connecting the editing module for PMC–SA1, –SA2, –SA3, –SB,
–SB2 and –SB3 Connect the module to portion 3 shown in Fig. 2.1
(a).
(3) Connecting ROM
a) PMC–SB, –SB2 and –SB3 : Connect EPROM to portion 13
b) PMC–SC and PMC–SC3 : Connect the ROM module to
portion 1 shown in Fig. 2.1 (b).
c) PMC–SA1, –SA2 and –SA3 : Connect EPROM to portion 16
shown in Fig. 2.1 (c).
Ę : Enabled
∆ : Enabled depending on the option
: Disabled
SA1 SA2 SA3 SB SB2 SB3 SC SC3
RAM module Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
Editing module Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
EPROM Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
ROM module ∆ ∆ Ę Ę
NOTE
1 When 24,000 optional PMC–SB2 and PMC–SB3 ladder
steps are available, 256K bytes of the ROM module can be
used. In this case, connect the ROM module to portion 3
2 Either a RAM module, editing module, or ROM module can
be connected to each board of PMC–SA1, –SA2, –SA3,
–SB, –SB2 and –SB3.
3 Either a RAM module or ROM module can be connected to
each board of PMC–SC and PMC–SC3.
(4) Connecting the off–line programmer

Connect the off–line programmer to the reader/punch interface on the
CNC. There are several connectors for the reader/punch interface on
the CNC. The connector to be used is specified during I/O processing
for the PMC. For details, see Section 7.
517
3. SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER
MENUS BY SOFTKEYS PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
3 SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER MENUS BY SOFTKEYS
To operate the PMC programmer, set bit 1 in K17 of the keep relay area
for PMC parameters to 1, enabling the programmer basic menu to be
displayed. To display the programmer basic menu, press <SYSTEM>
and [PMC] soft key on the MDI keyboard then, press the [NEXT] key.
The programmer basic menu is displayed at the lower part of the CRT
screen to signify the keys as shown in the following figure.
(1) Programmer basic menu
The programmer basic menu and PMC basic menu are selected to
each other alternately by pressing the [NEXT] key. For the PMC basic
menu and operation, see PMC operation in Chapter II.
NOTE
In the following description, the relation between soft keys
and menus is described based on 9–inch CRT/MDI panel.
The 14–inch CRT/MDI panel is different from the 9–inch
CRT/MDI panel about the number of soft keys. Five soft
keys are mounted on the 9–inch CRT/MDI panel, while ten
soft keys are mounted on the 14–inch CRT/MDI panel.
9I monochrome/color CRT/MDI panel (horizontal type) for 16–MA.
RESET key
HELP key Address/numeric keys
Edit keys
Cancel key
INPUT keys
SHIFT key Cursor control keys

Power on/off buttom Soft keys Function keys
Page keys
518
3. SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) MENUS BY SOFTKEYS
(2) Relation between programmer menus and soft keys

The relation between programmer menus and soft keys are different
according to each function as shown in the following figure. These
menus are selected by pressing related keys. For the menu contents,
see the description given later. Refer to this figure for operation.
PMCLAD PMCDGN PMCPRM
Chapter III.6 Chapter III.5 Chapter III.7 Chapter III.4 NEXT
RUN or STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT
RET RET RET RET
TITLE DBGLAD**
LADDER
SYMBOL GDT*
MESAGE USRMEM*
DEBUG*
NEXT
MODULE
CROSS
CLEAR
NOTE
1 Mark “*” is valid for PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB function.
2 Mark “**” is valid for PMC–SA3/SB3 with Editing module or
PMC–SC/SC3 function.
519
4. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
(SYSPRM) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
4 SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

(SYSPRM)
Display the system parameter screen by pressing soft key [SYSPRM] on

the basic programmer menu. Move the cursor to necessary system
parameters and specify them according to the menu displayed on the
screen. When this function is selected, if the sequence program is in
operation, the PMC management software automatically stops this
function.
(1) COUNTER DATA Specifies whether the counter value is used in binary or BCD by
TYPE functional instruction CTR.
CAUTION
After changing a counter data type, set up the counter value
again.
(2) LADDER EXEC Specifies the increment or decrement of processing time of the 1st and 2nd
(valid for PMC– level parts of the ladder program in the range of 1% to 150%. This
SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2) increases or decreases the scanning time of the ladder program. This
parameter influences the processing time of the 3rd level part of the ladder
program and the language program.
If 100% is specified, the time of 5 ms for an 8 ms cycle is used to process
the 1st and 2nd level parts of the ladder program. The remaining 3 ms is
used to process the 3rd level part of the ladder program, language
program, and PMC screen display.
If 120% is specified, the time of 6 ms is used to process the 1st and 2nd
level parts of the ladder program. This reduces the scanning time of the
ladder program, thus enabling the ladder program to be executed at high
speed. Note that the processing time required for the 3rd level part of the
ladder program, language program, and PMC screen display is
substantially reduced. If the undivided system is specified too, this
parameter is validated.
If a value less than 40% is specified, 40% is assumed. If a value greater than
120% is specified, 120% is assumed.
The processing time of the 1st and 2nd parts of the ladder program is
obtained by the following formula:
Processing time of the 1st and
(LADDER EXEC)
2nd parts of the ladder program=5 msec
100
The processing time of the 3rd level part of the ladder program, language
program, and PMC screen display
= 8 ms – (processing time of the 1st and 2nd level parts of the ladder
program)
520
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (SYSPRM)
100% 120%
8 msec 8 msec
1st and 2nd level 1st and 2nd level
parts of the ladder parts of the ladder
program program
5 ms
6 ms
Others Others
3 ms
2 ms
(3) LANGUAGE EXEC Specifies the division ratio of execution for PMC screen display and
RATIO (valid for language program.
PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB/ (0 to 99%)
NB2) Since the execution priority of PMC screen display is higher than
language program tasks, it is usually hard for the tasks to execute
processing while displaying PMC screen. Then this parameter can be
used to set the division ratio for each. Cyclic processing of language
program is therefore possible during PMC screen display. Only language
program tasks are running if PMC screen is not displayed.
(4) IGNORE DIVID CODE Specifies whether the ladder program is executed in the divided system
(valid for PMC–SB (IGNORE DIVID CODE = NO) or in the undivided system.
and–RC)
(5) LANGUAGE ORIGIN Specifies the first address of the link control statement data in the
(valid for PMC–SC/ language program.
SC3/SC4/NB/NB2) Be sure to specify 0 when the language program is not stored.
LANGUAGE AREA and SIZE indicate the area where the language
program is stored. Store the language program in the specified area.
When the language program is stored, the Language Origin is
automatically set by moving the cursor to this item and pressing
[ORIGIN] soft key.
(6) MAX LADDER Specify the maximum size of the ladder program. This parameter can be
AREA SIZE used to increase or decrease the size of the work area used by language
(valid for PMC–SC/ programs. The setting of the parameter takes effect only after power is
SC3/NB) turned on. When the setting is to be changed, therefore, power must be
turned off.
For details, see the FANUC PMC–MODEL SC/SC3/SC4/NB
PROGRAMMING MANUAL C LANGUAGE (B–61863E–1). The
default is the size in kilobytes resulting from conversion of the ladder step
option.
(7) FS0 OPERATOR Specifies whether the Series 0 operator’s panel is connected. When YES
PANEL is selected, specify the actual addresses of DI and DO connected to the
operator’s panel, the address of the key image transferred from the
operator’s panel, and the address of the LED image to be transferred to
the operator’s panel.
(a) KEY DI ADDRESS
Specify a PMC address representing the first address of the external
DI actually connected (X0 to X127, X200 to X327, or X1000 to
X1019).
521
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
(b) LED DO ADDRESS

DO actually connected (Y0 to Y127, Y200 to Y327, or Y1000 to
Y1014).
(c) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
Specify a PMC address representing the first address of the key
image to be referenced by the user program. Usually specify an
arbitrary internal relay (R) area.
(d) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
image to be generated by the user program. Usually specify an
(8) STEP SEQUENCE When creating new programs with the built–in editing function, set this
parameter first, then execute CLEAR ALL or perform clear operation
(turn on power while holding down X and O) at power on.
When selecting the step sequence method: STEP SEQUENCE = YES
When selecting the ladder method: STEP SEQUENCE = NO
(9) I/O Link 2 CHANNEL When creating a new program for assignment of the I/O Link channel 2
(PMC–SB6 for Series with the built–in editing function, set this parameter first, then execute
16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/ CLEAR ALL or perform clear operation (turn on power while holding
210i) down X and O) at power on.
When assigning the I/O Link channel 2
(Note1): I/O LINK 2 CHANNEL = YES
When assigning only the I/O Link channel 1
(Note2): I/O LINK 2 CHANNEL = NO
522
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
NOTE
1. PMC model for FANUC LADDER–II /Ladder Editing
Package is PMC–SB6 (IO–2) or PMC–SB6 (STEP SEQ,
IO–2)(case of using the step sequence method).
2. PMC model of FANUC LADDER–II /Ladder Editing Package
is PMC–SB6 or PMC–SB6 (STEP SEQ)(case of using the
step sequence method).
3. When assigning the I/O Link channel 2, capacity of the
memory used by system increases maximum 5376 bytes
compared to the case of not assigning the I/O Link channel
2. Please adjust the volume of Ladder, symbol, comment,
and message, in order to reduce the sequence program
size to fit for the ROM capacity.
4. FANUC LADDER–II /Ladder Editing Package is used when
converting sequence program for 1 channel (PMC–SB6 or
PMC–SB6 (STEP SEQ)) into sequence program for
expansion (PMC–SB6 (IO–2) or PMC–SB6 (STEP SEQ,
IO–2)). Please refer to ”FANUC LADDER–II OPERATOR’S
MANUAL (B–66184EN/02) APPENDIX 3.3 Convert The
PMC Type of Sequence Program” and ”FANUC OPEN CNC
LADDER EDITING PACKAGE OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(B–62884EN/01–6) APPENDIX D.3 CONVERT THE PMC
TYPE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM”.
PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER

COUNTER DATA TYPE = BINARY/BCD
FS0 OPERATOR PANEL = YES/NO
KEY DI ADDRESS = X100
LED DO ADDRESS = Y100
KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS = R900
LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS = R910

>
[BINARY] [ BCD ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 4(a) PMC–SA series system parameter screen
523
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER
IGNORE DIVIDE CODE = NO/YES
>
[BINARY] [ BCD ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 4(b) PMC–SB series system parameter screen (1st page)
PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER MONIT STOP
COUNTER DATA TYPE = BINARY /BCD
LADDER EXEC = 100% (1–150)
LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO = 50% (0–99)
IGNORE DIVIDE CODE = NO/YES
LANGUAGE ORIGIN = 841000H

(LANGUAGE AREA = 840000H,SIZE = 768KB)
MAX LADDER AREA SIZE = 90KB (1–96)
[BINARY] [ BCD ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 4(c) PMC– SC, SC3 or NB system parameter screen (1st page)
524
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER (1/2) MONIT STOP
IGNORE DIVIDE CODE = YES/NO
>
[BINARY] [ BCD ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 4(d) PMC–SB4/SB6 system parameter screen (1st page)
LADDER EXEC = % (1–150)
LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO = % (0–99)
LANGUAGE ORIGIN = H
(LANGUAGE AREA = H, SIZE = KB)
STEP SEQUENCE = YES/NO

>
[ BINARY ] [ BCD ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 4(e) PMC–SC4/NB2 system parameter screen (1 st page)
Press the [NEXT] key to select the following screen for PMC–SB series,
PMC–SC series, and PMC–NB :
525
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
FS0 OPERATOR PANEL = YES/NO
KEY DI ADDRESS = X100
LED DO ADDRESS = Y100
KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS = R900
LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS = R910
>
[ YES ] [ NO ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 4(f) PMC–SB series, PMC–SC series, or PMC–NB series

parameter screen (2nd page)
STEP SEQUENCE = YES/NO
I/O LINK 2 CHANNEL = YES/NO
>
[ YES ] [ NO ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 4(g) PMC–SB6 system parameter screen (1st page)
526
5. EDITING OF SEQUENCE
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT)
5 EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT)
Press soft key [EDIT] of the programmer basic menu to bring the
following menu. For setting the CLEAR or I/O unit address, press the
[NEXT] key to bring another menu.
Each menu of [EDIT] can be selected by EDIT key, or menu of other EDIT
can be selected by each EDIT menu. When this function is selected, if the
sequence program is in operation, the PMC management software
automatically stops this function.
(Operation)
Perform each operation by pressing necessary menu soft keys. Press
[RETURN] key for resetting to the programmer basic menu.
RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT

(STOP)
RET
TITLE LADDER SYMBOL MESAGE
III.5.1 III.5.2 III.5.4 III.5.5 NEXT
MODULE CROSS CLEAR
III.5.3 III.5.7 III.5.6
PMC EDITION MENU MONIT STOP
SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS
TITLE : TITLE DATA

LADDER : LADDER DIAGRAM
SYMBOL : SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA
MESAGE : MESSAGE DATA
MODULE : I/O MODULE DATA
CLEAR : CLEAR DATA
CROSS : CROSS REFERENCE
[TITLE ] [LADDER] [MESAGE] [ ] [ ]
[MODULE] [ ] [CROSS ] [ ] [CLEAR ]
Fig. 5 Editing basic menu
527
PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
5.1 The title data refers to the title of the sequence program created by the
machine tool builder. The data consists of the following ten items:
SPECIFYING AND
DISPLAYING TITLE D Machine tool builder name (32 characters)
DATA (TITLE) D Machine tool name (32 characters)
D NC and PMC types (32 characters)
D Sequence program number (16 characters)
D Version (4 characters)
D Sequence program drawing number (32 characters)
D Date of sequence program creation (16 characters)
D Sequence program programmer (32 characters)
D ROM programmer (32 characters)
D Comment (32 characters)
The title for the 9″ CRT consists of three screens. The screens are changed
by pressing <PAGE°> or <PAGE±> .
RETURN
RETURN
INSERT DELETE LADDER C LANG
NOTE
When a C language board is installed in the Series 16i/18i,
the title data for C can be edited. With the soft key
[LADDER], the display can be switched to the ladder title
data. With the soft key [C LANG], the display can be
switched to the C title data.
5.1.1 (1) Move the cursor to the desired title data item. Use the cursor keys [°],
[±], [³], [²] to move the cursor.
Entering Title Data
(2) Press the address key and numeric keys to enter the title data, and
press the <INPUT> key.
5.1.2 (1) Move the cursor to the desired title data item. Use the cursor keys [°],
[±], [³], [²] to move the cursor.
Deleting Title Data
(2) After keying in the title data by pressing the desired address keys and
numeric keys, press the <INPUT> key.
528
5.1.3 When the length of the cursor is the same as the maximum number of
Editing Character characters, pressing the [INSERT] key enables the operator to edit
character strings. Then, the length of the cursor is changed to that of one
Strings of Title Data character.
(1) Move the cursor to the desired insertion position with the cursor keys
and enter a character string. Then, the character string is inserted.
(2) Pressing the [DELETE] key deletes the character at the cursor.
PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN
PMC PROGRAM NO. : 1234

EDITION NO. : 12
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM

SERIES : 4061 EDITION : 01
MEMORY USED : 44.0KB

LADDER : 32.0KB
SYMBOL : 10.2KB
MESSAGE : 01.8KB
SCAN TIME : 048 MSEC
[INSERT] [DELETE] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 5.1.3 (a) Title edit screen 1
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f
MACHINE TOOL NAME :

f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f
CNC & PMC TYPE NAME :

f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f
PROGRAM DRAWING NO. :

f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f
Fig. 5.1.3 (b) Title edit screen 2
529
DATE OF PROGRAMING :
f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :
f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f
ROM WRITTEN BY :
f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f
REMARKS :
f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f
Fig. 5.1.3 (c) Title edit screen 3
530
5.2 Input, insert, delete, and search a sequence program as described below.
The relation between these functions and soft keys is as shown below.
SEQUENCE
PROGRAM RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT
(STOP)
GENERATION
RET
(LADDER)
RET
yj jy yj jy Ę j yĘyj FUNCTN
NEXT
––––– COMAND
NEXT
y(S)yj
III 5.3 y(R)yj III 5.7
RET
INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEARCH
NEXT
COPY MOVE CHANGE
Fig. 5.2 Sequence program generation softkeys
NOTE
“y(S)yj”and “y(R)yj” are valid for PMC–PA3, –SA3,
–SB3, –SB4, –SC3, –SC4, and –NB.
Each of EDIT · LADDER software functional instruction keys can be

selected by the [COMAND] key. Type in one of the following character
strings and press software key [COMAND]. The character string within
parentheses “[ ]” can be omitted. “n” after the character string indicates
that a value can be input. For example, if the [COMAND] key is pressed
after “D2” is typed in, the operation can be performed in the same manner
when the <DELNET> key is pressed after “2” is typed in.
I[NSERT] D[ELNET][n] n:value
A[DRESS] SY[MBOL]
S[EARCH] C[OPY][n]
M[OVE][n]
531
NOTE
Soft keys ( [ ] or [ ])([ ] or [ ] ) are used for producing
or deleting an upper left vertical line or upper right vertical line on
the ladder diagram. The solid line display vertical line indicates the
production, while the dotted line display vertical line shows the
deletion. Which one is available is determined by the ladder
diagrams and cursor positions.
When the cursor is set to this position, the upper right vertical line is not produced yet,
and the menu becomes [ ]
When the cursor is set to this position, the upper right vertical line is already produced,
and the menu becomes [ ]
5.2.1 Press soft key [LADDER] for inputting a sequence program. The soft key
Sequence Program menu changes as shown in Fig. 5.2.
Input If a sequence program is not input yet, the right and left vertical lines only
of the ladder diagram are displayed on CRT/MDI.
Start inputting a program with this screen condition. If a previous
program remains unerased from RAM module for debug, clear it
according to the instruction in 5.6 before starting the program input.
Input a ladder diagram by moving the cursor to the desired input position
by using the cursor key.
The following description shows an example of the input of a program of
the basic instruction and a program of the functional instruction.
(1) In case of basic instruction program input;
R0.1 R10.2 R1.7 R20.2
X2.4
The contacts and coils inputtable in one line are as specified below.
9–inch CRT/MDI
10–inch CRT/MDI 7 contact + relay coil
14–inch CRT/MDI
They cannot be input into one line more than specified. If they exceed the specified
range, provide a dummy relay coil halfway.
532
1 Press soft key [ ] after moving the cursor to the start

position.
Symbol [ ] is input to the cursor position and
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL is displayed at the lower
right part of the CRT screen. This is a caution message to
show that the ladder diagram horizontal line is not entered
yet. Input address and bit data next.
2 Press <INPUT> key after inputting R0.1 by using address
key and numeric keys. The address is set on the contact, and
cursor shifts rightward.
3 Input A contact with address R10.2 by the above method 1,
2.
(Note) The order of processes 1 and 2 are interchangeable.
4 Input B contact R1.7
Press soft key [ ], input address R1.7, and then, press
<INPUT> key.
The address is set on the B contact and the cursor shifts
rightward.
5 Press soft key [ ]with the cursor kept as it is.
A right horizontal line is automatically drawn, and a relay
coil symbol is entered near the right vertical line.
6 Press <INPUT> key after inputting R20.2.
The cursor automatically shifts to the input start position of
the next line.
7 Input the OR condition next,
Press soft key [ ], input address X2.4 and then, press
INPUT key. The address is set on the B contact and the cursor
shifts rightward.
8 Press NEXT key, since the soft key of the right horizontal line
of OR is necessary.
9 Press soft key [ ] to input a horizontal line.
When inputting the horizontal bar key ([ ], [ ]), key
in a numerical value and press this bar key, and then the
horizontal line for the frequency will be drawn. However, this
horizontal line will not be drawn over the LINE.
10 Press soft key [ ], and input necessary upper right vertical
line or OR.
533
CAUTION
1 When the ladder program displayed on the screen is incomplete (when, for example, addresses
have not been entered) or erroneous, the screen cannot be scrolled even when a page key is
pressed. Before attempting to scroll the screen, therefore, ensure that the ladder program is
complete and error–free.
However, be careful since the program net (a block corresponding to a range from RD to WRT
Instruction) containing an error is deleted when the screen is switched to an CNC screen.
2 7 contacts + a coil are specified to be inputtable per line from CRT/MDI, any more contacts
exceeding the specified value are not inputtable.
However, this limitation is not applicable to mnemonic sequence programs generated by Offline
programmer. When a sequence program, transferred from the offline programmer to the PMC,
exceeds the length which can be displayed on a single line, the program is displayed using two
or more lines, linked with a continuation symbol. This continuation symbol is not erasable
usually, except when all programs from RD instruction to WRT instruction are erased.
3 If the power is turned off while a ladder program is being displayed in edit mode, that ladder
program will be lost. Always save the program and exit the editing screen before turning off
the power.
4 The termination processing of the ladder (JMP, COM, and other processing) is done when the
EDIT screen is switched to another screen by pressing RET key, it takes several tens second
until the screen is switched completely, if the ladder is large.
5 In the Series 15–MODEL B, Series 16/18–MODEL B/C, and Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL A CNC
that use Flash Memory, the program is not automatically written into Flash Memory once editing
ends. After editing, perform the processing for writing to Flash Memory (see 7.3.3, “FROM” in
Chapter 7 of Part III). Otherwise, the editing results will be lost when the power is turned off.
6 When the user presses the RET key to switch from the edit screen to another screen, the
parameters of functional instructions TMR, TMRB, CRT, DIFU, and DIFD are checked for a
parameter number range error and duplicate parameter number in the ladder termination
processing. If a range error is found, the editing cannot be terminated. If the use of a duplicate
parameter number is found, the guidance message is displayed.
(2) In case of functional instruction program input;

For inputting a functional instruction, press [FUNCTN] soft key, and
then, input instruction symbol of the functional Instruction and SUB
number.
A function command can be input by pressing the [FUNCTN] key
after keying the Function Command No. When pressing the
[FUNCTN] key without keying in the Function Command No., the
function command table is displayed. Key in Function Command No.
and press [INPUT] key.
If you don’t keep the instruction symbol and SUB number into mind,
you can display a functional instruction table covering the
correspondence between instruction on symbols and SUB numbers
automatically by inputting a wrong instruction symbol or a wrong SUB
number and then pressing the soft key [FUNCTN] key or by pressing
soft key [FUNCTN] key only without inputting any other key.
If an aimed functional instruction is not found in the displayed
functional instruction table, press [NEXT] key or [PAGE] key to
brings its subsequent table.
Press [FUNCTN] key when resetting the functional instruction table
to the original ladder diagram.
534
Functional
instruction table
When a wrong functional

instruction is entered or
[FUNCTN] key only is
pressed;
FUNCTN
[NEXT] key (to display the subsequent

functional instruction table)
Functional instruction generation soft key

(Press this key again when resetting the functional instruction
table to the original ladder diagram)
NOTE
If the system is left undone without inputting any data after
pressing soft key [FUNCTN], the other soft keys are not
employ–able. In such a case, press [FUNCTN] key again.
DECB Ę ĘĘĘĘ ĘĘĘĘ ĘĘĘĘ

ĘĘĘĘ
SUB 25 Format Code Specifi– Output

specifi- data cation data
cation address number address
Input functional instruction parameters in the vertical direction

as shown in the following figure when inputting functional
instructions from CRT/MDI panel.
DECB
SUB 25 Ę CRT/MDI
ACT Format specification
ĘĘĘĘ Code data address

ĘĘĘĘ
ĘĘĘĘ Specification number
ĘĘĘĘ Output data address
1 Input a control condition.

Press soft key [ ], input the address and bit data, and
then, press <INPUT> key. The cursor shifts rightward.
2 Input an instruction.
Press soft key [FUNCTN], input SUB number 25, and then,
press <INPUT> key. A functional instruction diagram
appears as shown in the above figure.
3 Input an instruction parameter.
Input the first parameter, format specification, and then, press
<INPUT> key. The cursor automatically lowers downward.
Input three residual parameters in order.
535
5.2.2 The method of altering a generated sequence program is the same as

Alteration of Sequence described in 5.2.1. Move the cursor to the program part to be altered and
input change data.
Programs
5.2.3
Insert of Sequence
Program
RETURN
INSNET INSLIN INSELM
A sequence program is inserted in four ways on the ladder diagram as

described below.
(1) To insert a relay contacts in the horizontal direction.
Simple horizontal insert
Insert
Move the cursor to the position where a sequence program is to be

inserted, and input the program by the method specified in 5.2.1.
When a vertical line is to be deleted
for the insert operation ;
Insert
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
Cursor
1 Set the cursor to the above position.

2 Press soft key [ ] for erasing the upper left vertical line. The
upper left vertical line to the cursor disappears.
3 Press soft key [ ] to produce a upper right vertical line to
the cursor, then, press soft key [ ]. Both verti–cal line
and horizontal line are pro–duced.
536
4 Shift the cursor to a line of contact insert position.

5 Press soft key [ ] to add contacts.
(2) For inserting vertical line;
Insert
For inserting a vertical line as shown in the above figure, the inserting
area is required, correspondingly. In order to produce the area, shift
the entire part after the part to be inserted by one line by moving the
cursor to the ladder diagram within the dotted line range (an optional
part is allowable) and then pressing soft key [INSNET] (see Fig. 5.2).
The lower ladder diagram shifts downward by one line, each time the
[INSNET] key is pressed to produce the area to which a line is to be
inserted.
If a surplus insert area remains unused after the insert processing ends
(if an area corresponding to 3 lines has been reserved when two lines
have been inserted, for example), the area may be left as it is. No
problem arises.
1 Move the cursor to the ladder diagram bounded by a dotted
line.
2 Press soft key [INSNET].
The lower ladder diagram shifts downward by one line.
3 Pressing [INSNET] key without keying in numeric values
will cause one line to be inserted.
4 Pressing [INSNET] key with keying in numeric values will
cause the line to be inserted the number of numeric values
input.
5 After setting the cursor to a position where the contacts is to
be inserted, press soft key [ ]. After setting address data,
press [INPUT] key. The cursor shifts rightward.
6 Press soft key [ ] to produce an OR circuit.
(3) Inserting the 1 NET sequence program lines
Space lines are inserted one by one.
1 Type in the number of lines to be inserted and press the
[INSLIN] key. The lines corresponding to the input number
are inserted. (If the number of lines to be inserted is not typed
in but the [INSLIN] key is pressed, one line is inserted.)
537
Cursor
If the [INSLIN] key is pressed when the cursor is in the

position specified as shown in the above figure on the left, the
line is inserted as shown in the above figure on the right.
(4) Inserting the 1 NET sequence program elements
Elements can be inserted one by one.
1 Type in the number of elements to be inserted and press the
[INSELM] key. The elements corresponding to the input
number are inserted. If the number of elements prefixed by
character “A” is typed in and the [INSELM] key is pressed,
the elements are inserted after the cursor.
(If the number of elements to be inserted is not typed in but
the [INSELM] key is pressed, one element is inserted.)
Cursor
When the [INSELM] key is pressed when the cursor is

positioned as shown in the above figure on the left, the
element is inserted as shown in the above figure on the right.
Cursor
If “A” is typed in when the cursor is positioned as shown in

the above figure on the left and the [INSELEM] key is
pressed, the element is inserted as shown in the above figure
on the right.
538
5.2.4 (1) Delete a part of sequence program by using three kinds of soft keys
after setting the cursor to the portion from which the sequence
Delete of Sequence program is to be deleted.
Program [ ] : Delete of horizontal lines, relay contacts, relay coils, etc.
[ ] : Delete of upper left vertical line to the cursor
[ ] : Delete of upper right vertical line to the cursor
(2) Delete a net of the sequence program (the part from the RD instruction
to the WRT instruction) with the [DELNET] key.
(3) Deleting NETs one by one
RETURN
EXEC CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP
1 Deletion
Move the cursor to the NET to be deleted and press the
[DELETE] key. The NET to be deleted brightly displayed on
the screen.
2 Deleting multiple NETs
Move the cursor with the cursor DOWN key, [C–DOWN]
key, or [SEACH] key to blink the NETs to be deleted. Type
in a value and press the [C–DOWN] key to move the cursor
the number of times specified by this value.
3 Execution Press the [EXEC] key.
Cancel Press the [CANCEL] key.
4 If the NET to be deleted is already known, move the cursor
to the first NET, type in the number of NETs, and press the
[DELNET] key to omit step 2.
539
X 2.0 R20.1 Y 1.2 R6.4
R0.5 For searching the same address as specified

here, set the cursor to this position, and press
soft key [SRCH].
R20.1
R0.5 X 4.2
R21.0 Y 2.0
R20.1 R2.2
R0.4
The same address is searched, and the cursor shifts
to this position.
R10.5
R0.5
5.2.5 Search a sequence program by using the following soft keys. For the
following soft keys, see Fig. 5.2.
Search of Sequence
Program
RETURN
TOP BOTTOM SRCH W–SRCH N–SRCH
NEXT
F–SRCH C–DOWN C–UP
(1) Soft key [TOP]

When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence program is
displayed on the screen and the cursor shifts to this start position.
(2) Soft key [BOTTOM]
When this key is pressed, the last of the sequence program is
displayed on the screen, and the cursor shifts to this position.
(3) Soft key [SRCH]
This key is used to search a specified address. It searches the specified
address from the program of the cursor part to the last program of this
screen, and displays the address on the screen.
540
a) Method of specifying the address by the cursor

Set the cursor to the relay contact part of the address to be
searched and press soft key [SRCH].
The system searches the same address as the address specified by
the cursor from the cursor program on the presently displayed
screen to the end of the program (SUB 48).
When the same address is found, the program part is displayed
on the screen, and the cursor shifts to the address part. If the same
address is not found as a result of this search, an error is displayed.
b) Method of specifying the address by inputting it
Input an address to be searched by using address and numeric
keys and press soft key [SRCH]. The same address as specified
is searched from the program of the cursor part on the presently
displayed screen to the last of the program (SUB 48).
When the same address is found, the program part is displayed
on the screen, and the cursor shifts to the address part.
If the same address is not found as a result of this search, an error
is displayed.
(4) Soft key [W–SRCH]
This key specified an address of the relay coil to be searched, and
searches the relay coil of the specified address from the program at
the cursor part to the end of the program (SUB 48) on this screen.
Then, it displays the relay coil on the screen.
Two methods are available to specify the address of the relay coil to
be searched.
a) Method of specifying the address by cursor
Set the cursor to the relay contact of the relay coil to be searched,
and press soft key [W–SRCH].
The corresponding relay coil is searched from the program of the
cursor part to the end of the program (SUB 48).
When the relay coil is found, the program part is displayed on the
screen, and the cursor shifts to the relay coil.
If no corresponding relay coil is found as a result of search, an
error occurs.
b) Method of specifying the address by inputting it
Input the address of the relay coil to be searched by both address
and numeric keys, and then, press soft key [W–SRCH].
The specified address relay coil is searched from the program of
the cursor part on the presently displayed screen to the end of
program (SUB 48).
When the specified address relay coil is found, the program part
is displayed on the screen, and the cursor shifts to the relay coil.
If no relay coil is found as a result of search, an error is displayed.
(5) Soft key [N–SRCH]
Display the ladder with the specified NET number from the top of the
screen.
If the number is not typed in but the [N–SRCH] key is pressed, the
display is scrolled down by one NET.
541
(6) Soft key [F–SRCH]

Type in the functional instruction number and press the [F–SRCH]
key to start searching the functional instruction. When the [F–SRCH]
key is pressed during execution of a functional instruction, the
functional instruction with the same number as this instruction is
searched.
(7) Searching with cursor keys (<²>, <³>, <°>, <±>)
D Type in the address or symbol and press the cursor key to start
searching the address. When the ”³” key is pressed, the operation
is performed in the same manner when the [SRCH] key is pressed.
D Type in NET NO. and press the cursor key to start searching the NET
NO.
D Type in the functional instruction name or functional instruction
number with “S” and press the cursor key to start searching the
functional instruction.
Example) Type in “END1” or “S1” and press the cursor key to
search functional instruction END1.
5.2.6 The sequence program with multiple NETs can be copied in NETs.
Specify the NET to be copied and the copy position with the cursor. The
Copying the Sequence
number of copies can be also specified.
Program
COPY MOVE
RETURN
UNTIL CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP
TO CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP
1 Copying
Move the cursor to the NET to be copied and press the [COPY] key.
The NET to be copied blinks on the screen.
2 Copying multiple NETs
Move the cursor with the cursor UP/DOWN key, [C–UP] key,
[C–DOWN] key, or [SEARCH] key to blink the NETs to be copied.
Type in a value and press [C–UP] or [C–DOWN] key to scroll up or
down the screen by the number of times specified by this value.
3 Setting the NET to be copied
Press the [UNTIL] key.
4 Specifying the copying address
Press the [TO] key to start copying a NET. The NET is copied into
the position above the cursor. If the number of copies is typed in
before the [TO] key is pressed, the NET is copied the specified
number of times.
542
5 If the cursor is moved to the first NET and the number of NETs is
typed in when the NETs to be copied are known, steps 1 through 3
can be omitted by pressing the [COPY] key.
NOTE
An error NET cannot be copied.
5.2.7 The sequence program with multiple NETs can be moved in NETs.
Specify the NET to be moved and the move position with the cursor. The
Moving the Sequence
number of times of moving NETs can be also specified.
Program
COPY MOVE
RETURN
UNTIL CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP
TO CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP
1 Moving
Move the cursor to the NET to be copied and press the [MOVE] key.
The NET to be moved blinks on the screen.
2 Moving multiple NETs
Moving the cursor with the cursor UP/DOWN key, [C–UP] key,
[C–DOWN] key, or [SEARCH] key to blink the NETs to be moved.
Type in a value and press [C–UP] or [C–DOWN] key to scroll up or
down the screen by the number of times specified by this value.
3 Setting the NET to be moved
Press the [UNTIL] key.
4 Specifying the copying address
Press the [TO] key to start copying a NET.
The NET is moved to the position above the cursor.
5 If the cursor is moved to the first NET and the number of NETs is
typed in when the NETs to be moved are known, step 2 can be omitted
by pressing the [MOVE] key.
NOTE
An error NET cannot be copied.
543
5.2.8 While editing a sequence program, symbol data and comment can be
Editing Symbol Data edited.
and Comment at Once (1) The symbol data and comment assigned to undefined address can be
edited.
a) Move the cursor to the position where a contact or coil is to be
inputted.
b) Enter an address, enter the symbol and comment enclosed in
characters other than alphanumeric characters, then press the soft
key of [contact or coil].
(Example) When the contact X8.4 is assigned the symbol
“*ESP” and the comment “EMERGENCY STOP”.
Operation : Depress [contact] soft key after
entering “X8.4/ *ESP/EMERGENCY STOP/”.
(2) The symbol data and comment assigned to the address already
defined can be edited.
a) Move the cursor on the address part where symbol data or
comment will be edited.
b) Enter the symbol and comment enclosed in characters other than
alphanumeric characters, then press the <INPUT> key.
(Example) When the contact X8.4 is assigned the symbol
“*ESP” and the comment “EMERGENCY STOP”.
Operation : Depress the <INPUT> key after
entering “/*ESP/ EMERGENCY
STOP/”.
(3) The symbol data and comment only can be edited by the similar
operation to the above (1) and (2).
a) For entering “X8.4/*ESP/” or “/*ESP/” with the “INPUT” key,
the symbol data only can be edited.
b) For entering “X8.4//EMERGENCY STOP/” or
“//EMERGENCY STOP/” with the “INPUT” key, the comment
only can be edited.
5.2.9 The address in a sequence program can be replaced with another address
Address Change of by the procedure below.
Sequence Program
COPY MOVE CHANGE
O–ADR CANCEL
N–ADR CANCEL
EXEC CANCEL SEARCH C– DOWN C–UP
544
(1) Changing the address while checking it one by one

a) Press the [CHANGE] key.
b) Input the original address and press the [O–ADR] key.
c) Input the new address and press the [N–ADR] key.
d) Press the [EXEC] key for executing the change. After
completion, the cursor will shift downward to the nearest address
to be changed.
If the [EXEC] key is pressed again at the point, the address
change can be continued.
(2) Changing the address within the specified range
a) Press the [CHANGE] key, and move the cursor to the address to
be changed.
b) Input the original address and press the [O–ADR] key.
c) Input the new address and press the [N–ADR] key.
d) The specified range will be brightened by using the [C–DOWN]
or [C–UP] key.
All the addresses within the specified range can be changed.
e) Press the [EXEC] key for executing the change.
(3) Address designation by a wild card
The address to be changed can be designated by using the “*” code
as a wild card.
(Example) “X*.0” means X0000.0, X0001.0, . . . . , X9999.0.
“X0000.*” means X0000.0, . . . . , X0000.7.
“X*” means X0000, X0001, . . . . , X9999.
The wild card can be used for both of the original address (O–ADR)
and new adress (N–ADR).
The following are examples by wild card.
a) “X0.*” to “D100.*”
X0000.0 ³ D0100.0
X0000.1 ³ D0100.1
:
X0000.7 ³ D0100.7
b) “X*.0” to “X*.7”
X0000.0 ³ X0000.7
X0001.0 ³ X0001.7
:
X9999.0 ³ X9999.7
[Limit items]
D The address of data part in Functional instruction “DISP”
cannot be changed.
D If the original address (O–ADR) and new address (N–ADR) are
different in address name and the byte part of new address
(N–ADR) is specified by a wild card, the change can not be
done.
Example) D1234.0 ³ X*.7, D* ³ X*
545
5.3 Set and delet the address of each module in I/O unit as follows. The
relation between these functions and soft keys is as shown in the
I/O UNIT ADDRESS following figure.
SETTING (MODULE)
RETURN
NEXT
SYSPRM MODULE
RETURN
INPUT SEARCH DELETE PRV.CH NXT.CH
(Note 1) (Note 1)
NEXT
IOSTRT
(Note 1)These soft keys are available, when editing sequence program
is allowed to assign to the I/O Link channel 2.
Fig. 5.3 Address setting for I/O unit

(1) Address setting for each module
1 Press the soft key [MODULE].
The following module address setting screen is displayed.
2 Move the cursor to the address to be set, and input data in the
order of GROUP, BASE, SLOT, and NAME and press
INPUT key. Input a dot (.) as a delimiter of each data.
Example) When setting the AID16A module with group = 0,
base = 0, and slot = 5
0. 0. 5. ID16A
Table 3.2.2 in Section I–3.2 lists the necessary names for the
NAME column.
3 Set all data of the module employed to aimed addresses by
using the cursor key and page key.
546
PMC I/O MODULE
ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME
X000 2 0 2 ID16C Y000 3 0 1 #1 I/O Unit
X001 2 0 2 ID16C Y001 3 0 5 #1 MODEL B
X002 3 0 9 #2 Y002
X003 3 0 9 #2 Y003
X004 3 0 30 #2 Y004 2 0 1 OD16C I/O Unit
X005 3 0 30 #2 Y005 2 0 1 OD16C MODEL A
X006 3 0 10 #2 Y006 2 1 1 OD32D
X007 3 0 10 #2 Y007 2 1 1 OD32D
X008 3 0 20 #2 Y008 2 1 1 OD32D
X009 3 0 20 #2 Y009 2 1 1 OD32D
X010 3 0 0 ## Y010 2 0 3 OD16C
X011 3 0 0 ## Y011 2 0 3 OD16C
X012 3 0 0 ## Y012
X013 3 0 0 ## Y013
X014 0 0 1 FS04A Y014 0 0 1 FS04A
Power
Mate
GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME =
>2.0.4.OD08C
CAUTION
I/O module data items are made valid in the power–on
sequence. When changing settings, be sure to turn off the
power and turn it on to validate the settings.
However, the power need not be turned off and on again to
validate settings when the programmer function version
displays the soft key IOSTRT, (described later (item 4).
Press the IOSTRT key after changing data.
(2) Delete of address

A preset address of each module can be deleted as follows:
1 Move the cursor to the address to be deleted, and press soft
key [DELET] (see Fig. 5.3).
2 The preset address data are deleted.
(3) Soft key [SEARCH]
Searches the type–in address.
1 Type in the address to be searched and press the [SEARCH]
key.
2 The typed–in address starts being displayed from the top of
the screen.
(4) Validate the assignment data.
I/O module data is validated when the power is turned on. If I/O
module data is changed without changing the configuration of the I/O
devices, the new I/O module data is validated when the IOSTRT key
is pressed.
The conditions where the IOSTRT key is displayed depend on the
version of the programmer function.
(5) Soft key [PRV.CH] or [NXT.CH]
1 It is available to assign the I/O Link expansion. This soft key
is to change the I/O Link channel.
547
(6) Error and warning messages issued during the editing of assignment
data
No. Error or warning message Description
1 ERR : GROUP NO. (0–15) The group number must be from 0 to 15.
2 ERR : BASE NO. (0–3) The base number must be from 0 to 3.
3 WARN : BASE NO. MUST BE 0 The base number must be 0 for the I/O Unit–B. It is forcibly set to 0.
4 ERR : SLOT NO. (1–10) The slot number must be from 1 to 10 for the I/O Unit–A.
5 ERR : SLOT NO. (0, 1–30) The slot number must be from 0 to 30 for the I/O Unit–B.
6 ERR : SLOT NO. MUST BE 0 The slot number must be 0 to set the power–on/off information for the I/O Unit–B.
7 ERR : ILLEGAL NAME An invalid or unsupported assignment name has been entered. Enter a correct name.
8 INPUT INVALID An invalid character string has been entered. Reenter with a correct format.
9 INPOSSIBLE WRITE An attempt has been made to edit ROM data. ROM data cannot be edited.
10 ERR : ADDRESS ALREADY ASSIGNED The specified address is already assigned. Assign another address or retry after
deleting the existing data.
11 ERR : ADDRESS OVER An address exceeds the upper limit (X127, Y127). Check the addresses used for the
unit to be set.
12 ERR : SLOT ALREADEY DEFINED The specified slot is already assigned. Check the existing data.
13 WARN : SLOT ALREADY DEFINED The specified slot is already assigned. Check the existing data.
14 ERR : UNIT TYPE MISMATCH (IN OR OUT) An X address cannot be assigned to an output module. A Y address cannot be
assigned to an input module.
15 ERR : UNIT TYPE MISMATCH (MODEL) I/O Unit–A and I/O Unit–B are assigned in the same group. I/O Unit–A and I/O Unit–B
cannot exist in the same group.
548
5.4 A signal name (within 6 alphanumeric characters) can be attached to I/O

signals and internal relays employed in sequence programs.
SYMBOL DATA
SETTING (SYMBOL) Also, a comment (within 30 alphanumeric characters) can be attached to
the relay coils in addition to the symbol name.
Symbol data and comment are displayed together with a ladder diagram
on the CRT/MDI screen as follows.
Signal name
(within 6
characters)
MA SPDALM X2.4 R2.2 Y4.3 ATCALM R100.1 MRDY
MACHINE Comment
READY within 30
APCALM R5.4 MALM characters
MACHINE
10 lines ALARM
Addresses are
issued for those
items for which
symbols are not R120.1 TIND D20.7 R52.1
defined.
APC
If symbol data and comment are defined in signal addresses of the

program, the signal name and comment are displayed as Shown in the
above figure.
If neither symbol data nor comment is defined at an address, the address
is displayed as it is.
A maximum of 64 KBytes can be used for the ladder, symbol, comment,
and data. After the program is initialized, the capacity of the symbol area
and that of the comment area are usually 32KB (28KB for PMC–NB)
each. When additional data is entered causing the total amount of data in
either area to exceed 32KB (28KB for PMC–NB), the area is
automatically extended in 1KB units.
STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT
RETURN
RETURN
INPMOD DELETE SEARCH COPY
Fig. 5.4(a) Setting and display of symbol data
549
When soft key [SYMBOL] is pressed, the following screen is displayed,

and the soft key operation is done hereafter.
SYMBOL & COMMENT 001

ADDRESS SYMBOL COMMENT
*---------* *------*-------*--------------*
Fig. 5.4(b) Symbol data screen
5.4.1 Refer to Fig. 5.4 (a) and Fig. 5.4 (b). Input symbol data and comment on
the screen shown in Fig. 5.4 (b).
Symbol Data and
1 Press <INPUT> key after inputting an address where a symbol and
Comment Input
a comment are to be set.
The input address is set to the ADDRESS column of Fig. 5.4 (b), and
the cursor shifts to the address. The input addresses are arrange and
set in the alphabetic sequence, and they can be inserted halfway.
2 For setting a symbol, shift the cursor rightward by using the cursor
key.
3 After setting symbol data (within 6 alphanumeric characters), press
INPUT key.
The symbol data are set in the SYMBOL column of Fig. 5.4 (b), and
the cursor shifts to the COMMENT column.
4 For inputting a comment, set comment data (within 30 alphanumeric
characters), and press INPUT key.
Comment data are set to the COMMENT column in Fig. 5.4 (b).
Repeat steps 1 to 4 hereafter.
5.4.2 Display the screen shown in Fig. 5.4 (b) and search symbol data
Symbol Data Search (1) After setting an address or symbol data to be searched, press soft key
[SRCH].
(SRCH)
Specified address or symbol data is searched and displayed on the
screen.
The cursor shifts to the corresponding address part.
5.4.3 Move the cursor to the address to be deleted in the ADDRESS column of
Fig. 5.4 (b), and press soft key [DELETE].
Delete of Symbol Data
and Comment
550
5.4.4 The edit modes can be changed by pressing the [INPMOD] soft key as
Editing Character follows:
Strings of Symbol Data Character string edit status
and Comment Data Maximum Insertion mode Replacement
character input (INSERT) mode (ALTER)
”INSERT” is displayed on the screen in the insertion mode. ”ALTER”

is displayed on the screen in the replacement mode.
D When the <INPUT> key is pressed
(1) In the character string edit status
Insertion mode : The entered character is inserted at the cursor.
If the [INPUT] key is pressed after no
character is entered, one space is inserted.
Replacement mode : The character at the cursor is replaced with
the entered character. If the [INPUT] key
is pressed after no character is entered, the
character at the cursor is replaced with one
space.
(2) When the length of the cursor is the same as the number of
characters that can be entered.
The original character string are replaced with the entered
characters.
D When the <DELETE> key is pressed
Insertion mode : The character at the cursor is deleted.
a space.
(2) When the length of the cursor is the same as the number of
characters that can be entered
The character string at the cursor is deleted.
5.4.5 An address, symbol, and comment can be entered at one time.

Function for Editing (1) Editing the symbol and comment assigned to address not defined
Symbol Data and Enter an address, enter the symbol and comment enclosed in
Comment Data at One characters other than alphanumeric characters, then press the
<INPUT> key.
Time
The cursor may be located anywhere. A comment can be omitted.
Example) G0.4 / *EMG / EMERGENCYSW/ <INPUT> key
Address Symbol Comment
(2) Editing the symbol and comment assigned to address already defined
Move the cursor to the desired line of the address whose symbol and
comment are to be edited.
Next, enter the symbol and comment enclosed in characters other than
alphanumeric characters.
Then, press the <INPUT> key. A comment can be omitted.
551
5.4.6 Copy the specified data to re–edit and register it.

Function of Copying
Symbol and Comment INPMOD DELETE SEARCH COPY
Data
RETURN
SYMBOL ALL CANCEL
UNTIL CANCEL
EXEC INPMOD DELETE CANCEL
(1) Press the [COPY] soft key.

(2) Select data to be copied with the corresponding soft key.
[ALL] : The address, symbol data, and comment data are copied.
[SYMBOL] : The address and symbol data are copied.
When either of the above soft keys is pressed, the line at the cursor
is specified as the beginning of the range of the data to be copied.
(3) Specify the range with the [±] and [°] cursor keys.
D A range of more than 15 lines cannot be specified. Up to 15 lines can
be displayed on one screen.
D A range cannot be specified at a position above the cursor position.
When the copy range of the data is specified, the data is displayed
differently.
(4) Press the [UNTIL] soft key to determine the copy range.
(5) Edit the address and symbol data according to the procedure
described in Sections 5.4.1 and 5.4.4.
(6) When updating the data is completed, press the [EXEC] soft key to
register the copied data.
552
5.5 Message data are used for PMC functional instruction DISPB (SUB 41).
MESSAGE DATA The setting and display methods are as shown below.
SETTING (MESSAGE)
(STOP)
RET
RET
INPMOD DELETE SRCH COPY DSPMOD
NEXT
ETC D.CHAR
Fig. 5.5 (a)

When soft key [MESAGE] is pressed, the next screen is displayed, and
setting operation can be done hereafter.
MESSAGE 001
NO. MESSAGE
A 00.0
A 00.1
A 01.1
Fig. 5.5 (b) Message data screen

After initialization, the capacity of the message area is approx. 2.1KB.
When additional data is entered causing the total amount of data in the
area to exceed 2.1KB, the message area is automatically extended in 1KB
units to a maximum of 64KB.
553
5.5.1 Refer to Fig. 5.5 (a) and Fig. 5.5 (b). Display the screen shown in Fig. 5.5
Message Data Input (b).
1 Display a number to set a message data by using PAGE key.
2 Shift the cursor to this number by the cursor key.
3 After setting message data, press INPUT key.
If the message data has already been entered, it is deleted and the set
data is entered.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 hereafter.
5.5.2 (1) Specify an address to be searched for, and press the [SRCH] soft key.
Searching for an Then, the specified address is searched for and displayed on the
screen.
Address (SRCH)
5.5.3 Edit modes can be changed by pressing the [INPMOD] soft key as
Editing a Character follows:
String in Message Data Character string edit status
Maximum char- Insertion input Replacement input

acter input (32 (INSERT) (ALTER)
characters)
The edit mode is changed every time the [INPMOD] soft key is pressed.
[INSERT] is displayed on the screen in the insertion mode.
[ALTER] is displayed on the screen in the replacement mode.
D When the <INPUT> key is pressed
Insertion mode : The entered character is inserted at the cursor.
the entered character.
(2) When the maximum number of characters are entered
The original character string at the cursor is replaced with the
entered characters.
D When the <DELETE> key is pressed
Insertion mode : The character at the cursor is deleted.
a space.
(2) When the maximum number of characters are entered
The character string at the cursor is deleted.
(3) When the cursor is located at the address field
The entire message data specified at the address is deleted.
554
5.5.4 If no “@” key on the MDI key, pressing the [ETC] soft key enables the
Input with a Katakana operator to enter the data enclosed between at signs (@).
Identification Code When the soft key is pressed, ”ETC CODE” is displayed on the screen.
5.5.5 Move the cursor to the message number to be copied and press the
[COPY] key.
Copying Message Data
(COPY) Then press the [EXEC] key after moving the cursor to the message
number in which it is copied.
5.5.6 The input mode becomes multi–byte character by pressing the [D.CHAR]
Inputting a Multi–byte key.
Character (D.CHAR) (@02, 01@ are added to input data automatically.)
For example, “4873 [INPUT]” is processed as “@02487301@”.
5.5.7 The ASCII code enclosed with @ characters is displayed in the form of
Displaying Input Code screen display by pressing the [DSPMOD] key.
(DSPMOD) Example) Katakana : “@B6C532@” ³ “ ” is displayed.
Multi–byte character :
“@0248733E6F44643B5F01@100”
³“ ” is displayed.
555
5.6
CLEARING THE
RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM
SEQUENCE (STOP)
PROGRAM AND RET
CONDENSATION OF
THE SEQUENCE
PROGRAM RET NEXT
MODULE CROSS CLEAR
CLRTTL CLRLAD CLRSYM CLRMSG CLRLNG
NEXT
CLRALL CLRMDL CONDNS CLRPRM CLREXT
CLRTMR CLRCNT CLRKPR CLRDT
NEXT
CLRALL
5.6.1 Clears each data in the sequence program

Clearing the Sequence The function of the key is as follows:
Program (1) [CLRTTL] : Clears the title data.
(2) [CLRLAD] : Clears the ladder program.
(3) [CLRSYM] : Clears the symbol and comment data.
If the extend symbol and comment data is cleared,
the field is restored to the original size.
(4) [CLRMSG] : Clears the message data.
If the extend message data is cleared, the field is
restored tothe original size.
(5) [CLRLNG] : The C language area is cleared. Clear the C language
area before transferring a C program. When a C
language board is installed in the Series 16i/18i, this
item is displayed.
(6) [CLRALL] : Clear all data described in the above (1) to (4). Clear
also the C language programs for models which
create C language programs, such as models
PMC–SC, SC3, SC4, NB, and NB2.
Press this soft key when the message “PLEASE
CLEAR ALL” is displayed.
(7) [CLRMDL] : Clears the I/O module data.
556
(8) [CONDNS] : Compress the sequence program in 1KB units.

The detail will be explained chapter 5.6.2.
(9) [CLRPRM] : Clears each parameter data.
The detail will be explained chapter 5.6.3.
(10) [CLREXT] : Clears the expand nonvolatile memory (valid for
PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2)
CAUTION
When using a system that incorporates flash ROM, clear the
flash ROM before writing to it. If the power is turned on again
without performing this operation, sequence program data
is not cleared.
5.6.2 Compresses the sequence program in 1KB units.

Compress the (1) [CONDNS] : Compresses the unused area in the message, symbol,
Sequence Program or comment area in the sequence program in 1KB
units when the capacity of the unused area extends
1KB. The unused area, which is the size less than
1KB, will not be compressed.
5.6.3 Clears each PMC parameter.

Clearing the PMC The function of the key is as follows:
Parameter (1) [CLRTMR] : Clears timer data.
(2) [CLRCNT] : Clears counter data.
(3) [CLRKPR] : Clears keep relay data.
(4) [CLRDT] : Clears data table.
(5) [CLRALL] : Clear all data described in the above (1) to (4).
CAUTION
1 These functions require the same condition as PMC data
setting in operation. For [CLRALL], all conditions are
required. See ”Chapter II. 4. PMC PARAMETER SETTING
AND DISPLAY”.
2 Contents of E addresses are not cleared by [CLRALL].
557
5.7 The cross reference is displayed for PMC address and functional
instruction used in a sequence program.
CROSS REFERENCE
DISPLAY Cross reference display has the following functions.
(1) Display NET number by specifying the PMC address.
(2) Display the address list by specifying PMC address name (G, F, Y,
· · ).
(3) Display a functional instruction list.
(4) Display NET number by specifying the functional instruction
number.
5.7.1 Pressing the [CROSS] key displays the cross reference screen for setting
parameters.
Operation
Press soft key [CRSREF] in the parameter setting screen for displaying
the cross reference of address and functional instruction in use. Press soft
key [CRSPRM] to return to the parameter setting screen from cross
reference display.

(STOP)
RET
NEXT
MODULE CROSS CLEAR
RET
CRSREF INPUT INIT
CRSPRM
558
5.7.2 To display cross reference, the address and reference type need to be
Parameter Setting specified on the parameter screen.
Screen
Display the reference of 1. In “SELECT CROSS TYPE”, input “1”.
addresses which are 2. In “1: REFERENCE ADDRESS”, input addresses which should be
used. displayed. (maximum number of input: 8)
3. Press [CRSREF] key.
The address, symbol, relay and the NET number will be displayed as
shown in Fig. 5.7.2 (b).
PMC CROSS REFERENCE

SELECT CROSS TYPE = 1
( 1:ADDRESS 2:ADRS KIND 3:FUNCTION.NO )
1:REFERENCE ADDRESS
1 = X0000.0 5 =
2 = 6 =
3 = 7 =
4 = 8 =
2:ADRS KIND =
( G /F /Y /X /A /R /K /C /D /P /L )
3:FUNCTION.NO = ( ALL=0 )
[CRSREF] [INPUT ] [ ] [ INIT ] [ ]
Fig. 5.7.2 (a) Cross reference setting (TYPE1)
PMC CROSS REFERENCE
X0000.0 ABCDE
: 1 2
( ) : 4 32
[CRSPRM] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 5.7.2 (b) Cross reference display (TYPE1)
559

each address name 2. In “2: ADRS KIND”, input the address name.
The bit/byte addresses and the related symbol in the sequence
program will be displayed as shown in Fig.5.7.2 (d).
PMC CROSS REFERENCE

1:REFERENCE ADDRESS
1 = X0000.0 5 =
2 = 6 =
3 = 7 =
4 = 8 =
2:ADRS KIND = X
( G /F /Y /X /A /R /K /C /D /P /L )
Fig. 5.7.2 (c) Cross reference setting (TYPE2)
PMC CROSS REFERENCE
HEAD CHARACTER = X
USED ADDRESS = X0000.0

SYMBOL NAME = ABCDE
X0000
SYMBOL NOTHING
[CRSPRM] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 5.7.2 (d) Cross reference display (TYPE2)
560
Display a functional 1. In “SELECT CROSS TYPE”, input “3”.

instruction list in use 2. In “3: FUNCTION. NO”, input “0”.
The functional instruction name and the functional instruction
number in the sequence program will be displayed as shown in
Fig.5.7.2 (f).
PMC CROSS REFERENCE

1:REFERENCE ADDRESS
1 = X0000.0 5 =
2 = 6 =
3 = 7 =
4 = 8 =
2:ADRS KIND =
( G /F /Y /X /A /R /K /C /D /P /L )
Fig. 5.7.2 (e) Cross reference setting (TYPE3)
PMC CROSS REFERENCE
FUNCTION NAME END1( 1) END2( 2)

COD( 7)
[CRSPRM] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 5.7.2 (f) Cross reference display (TYPE3)
561

functional instruction 2. In “3: FUNCTION. NO”, input the functional instruction number.
(FUNCTION. NO =
number of the functional 3. Press [CRSREF] key.
instruction) The functional instruction name, functional instruction number and
NET number in the sequence program will be displayed as shown in
Fig.5.7.2 (g).
PMC CROSS REFERENCE
FUNCTION NO. = 7
FUNCTION NAME = COD
USED NET NO. = 6 14
[CRSPRM] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 5.7.2 (g) Displaying of cross reference (TYPE3)
562
6. EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM
6 EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM
563
PROGRAM PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
6.1 Start and Stop of a sequence program are described as follows.

START AND STOP OF
PMCLAD PMCDCN PMCPPM
A SEQUENCE
PROGRAM RETURN

or STOP
Fig. 6.1 The sequence program execution software key

An operable sequence program is usually automatically started when
power is turned on if the program is stored in ROM. However, the
program is not started if it is stored in RAM.
(1) Start of a sequence program (RUN)
When a sequence program is at the stopped state, pressing the [RUN]
key causes the sequence program to run displaying the software key
as [STOP].
The ladder program starts from the beginning. However, whether
C–language programs start from the beginning depends on the
function selected in advance.
a) When a C–language program starts from the beginning
Functions selected in advance: Ladder editing, reading the
system parameter, reading a sequence program using
input/output processing
b) When a C–language program does not start from the beginning
but restarts from the next step after stopping
Function selected in advance: Functions other than the function
in item (a)
NOTE
Both ladder and C–language programs start from the
beginning immediately after the power is turned on.
(2) Stop of a sequence program (STOP)

When a sequence program is at the run state, pressing the [STOP] key
causes the sequence program to stop displaying the software key as
[RUN].
564
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM
6.2 The sequence program can be automatically started immediately after

power–on, when bit 2 of keep relay K17 (PMC parameter) is set to 1.
STARTING THE
SEQUENCE NOTE
PROGRAM For the Series 16/18–MODEL B/C, Series
16i/18i/21i/15i–MODEL A, automatic start is specified
when bit 2 of K17 is set to 0.
6.3 To forcibly stop starting the sequence program in ROM or RAM, at

power–on, turn on the power by pressing the [Z] key while pressing the
FORCIBLY [CAN] key. (Except for PMC–NB/NB2)
STOPPING THE
This method is effective for locating the error when a system error occurs
SEQUENCE after power is turned on and when the error may be caused by the sequence
PROGRAM program.
Never perform this operation in a normal state.
WARNING
In normal operation, do not use the Z + CAN keys to stop the
sequence program forcibly.
565
7. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING
THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND
PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
7 WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE

PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA
When the [I/O] key is pressed, the sequence program and PMC data are
written, read, or collated for the specified device. Operations are
performed with cursor keys and soft keys.
RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM
RETURN
EXEC CANCEL (NO.)
566
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA
7.1 When the [I/O] key is pressed, the sequence program and PMC data are
written, read, or collated for the specified device. Operations are
OVERVIEW performed with cursor keys and soft keys.
RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM
RETURN
EXEC CANCEL (NO.)
NEXT
SPEED
PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP
CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = HOST
DATA KIND =
(ALL:LADDER + LANGUAGE)
FUNCTION =
>
ALM
[ EXEC ] [CANCEL] [ HOST ] [FDCAS ] [F–ROM ]
[Case of FS16/18]
CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = HOST
DATA KIND =
FUNCTION =
>
[ EXEC ] [CANCEL] [ HOST ] [FDCAS ] [ROMWRT]
[ ] [OTHERS] [SPEED ] [ ] [ COPY ]
567
CAUTION
The sequence program can be output while the ladder is
being executed, but the output speed is low. When the
sequence program is input while the ladder is being
executed, the execution of the ladder is automatically
stopped.
7.1.1 Conventionally, C programs have been managed together with ladder

programs. For this reason, when only a ladder program is to be modified
C Input/Output
as shown in Fig. 7.1.1 (a), the program linked with a C program needs to
be replaced.
With the FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i, ladder programs and C
programs are managed separately. So, each program can be edited and
replaced independently of the other programs as shown in Fig. 7.1.1 (b).
NC
Ladder Download Ladder

+ Upload
C +
C
Download
C
Fig. 7.1.1 (a) Ladder and C structure for FANUC Series 16B/16C
NC
Ladder Download Ladder

Upload
C Download C
Upload
Fig. 7.1.1 (b) Ladder and C structure for FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i
568
7.2 (1) CHANNEL

SET ITEMS Specify which connector the reader/punch interface (such as
RS–232C) is connected to. CHANNEL must be set when HOST,
FDCAS, or OTHERS is selected for DEVICE.
(2) DEVICE
Select the device with which the PMC inputs or outputs data, using
soft keys.
Soft key Description
HOST Transfers data with a FANUC LADDER (P–G, P–G Mate, or personal
computer).
(See Subsection 7.3.1 for details.)
FDCAS Transfers data with a FANUC FD cassette.
F–ROM Transfers data with flash EEPROM. This is where the sequence program is
stored.
M–CARD Transfers data with a memory card.
(See Subsection 7.3.4 or details.)
OTHERS Transfers data with other input/output devices.
SPEED Used to set transfer conditions when RS–232C is used.
ROMWRT Transfers data with a ROM WRITER.
(See Subsection 7.3.7 for details)
NOTE
Some functions cannot be used with some PMC models.
See Section 7.3.
(3) DATA KIND

Select the type of output data using soft keys. DATA KIND must be
set when FDCAS, M–CARD, or OTHERS is selected for DEVICE.
DATA KIND CONTENTS
ALL Output the data of sequence program and C program
LADDER Output the data of sequence program
(Ladder, Symbol, Comment, Message, etc.)
PARAM Output PMC Parameters
(Note 1) (TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY, DATA TABLE, etc.)
C–LANG Outputs a C program.
(Note 2)
NOTE
1 The conditions of outputting PMC parameters
1) When sequence program is stopped
You can input/output them.
2) When sequence program is executed
You must satisfy the following conditions.
Output (WRITE) Set NC to “EDIT” mode.
Input (READ) . . . Set NC to “Emergency Stop” status,
and, set “PWE” of NC parameters to 1.
2 When a C language board is installed in the Series 16i/18i,
the item of C–LANG is displayed, and C program output is
enabled.
569
(4) FUNCTION
Select the direction of data transfer between the PMC and
input/output device.
Item Description
WRITE Outputs data from the PMC to an input/output device.
READ Inputs data from an input/output device to the PMC.
COMPARE Collates data in the PMC and an input/output device.
(Note) PMC data cannot be collated.
DELETE Deletes a file in FDCAS or M–CARD.
LIST Lists the files in FDCAS or M–CARD.
BLANK Performs blank check for F–ROM.
ERASE Clears the data in F–ROM.
FORMAT Initializes M–CARD (clears all data).
(5) FILE NO.

FILE NO. is displayed when FDCAS or M–CARD is selected for
DEVICE. Specify the file number or file name for WRITE, READ,
COMPARE, or DELETE processing. Note the following restrictions
on the file name when FDCAS or M–CARD is selected for DEVICE:
FDCAS (FANUC FD M–CARD (MEMORY
CASSETTE) CARD)
Number of characters Up to 17 characters following @ Up to 8 characters following @
in the file name or #. The file is written after the or #(*1).
existing files.
When the same name An error occurs. Delete the The new file is written over the
as an existing file is existing file and reoutput the existing file (the contents of the
specified new file. existing file are lost).
When –1 is specified The file is written after the The system names the file and
for the file name existing files. writes it(*2).
When 0 is specified for The file is written and all the The system names the file and
the file name existing files are deleted. writes it(*2).
NOTE
1 Name the file in the MS–DOS format (up to eight characters
for the file name with up to three characters for the
extension).
Example) FILE NO. = @12345678.123
FILE NO. = #LADDER.EXE
2 If the file name is not specified, the system names the file
as follows:
The model name is
DATA KIND File name
PMC–NB for the
ALL model–name.ALL
PMC–NB and PMC–RA
LADDER model–name.LAD
for the PMC–SA1 or
PARAM model–name.PRM PMC–SA3.
570
7.3
OPERATIONS
7.3.1 (a) Setting the channel

Transfer to and from a Move the cursor to “CHANNEL = .” Check that an RS–232C cable
is connected to the main board. Enter the number (1 or 2)
FANUC LADDER corresponding to the connector. The correspondence between the
connector and CHANNEL is as follows:
CHANNEL = 1 : JD5A (main board)
CHANNEL = 2 : JD5B (main board)
(b) Setting the transfer conditions
Press the [SPEED] soft key and set each condition. See Subsection
7.3.6 for details.
(c) Writing, reading, or collating the sequence program
Item Operation
DEVICE Press the [HOST] soft key.
Press the [EXEC] soft key and to make the NC ready for operation.
Select necessary items on a FANUC LADDER and start transfer.
NOTE
1 WRITE, READ, or COMPARE is automatically switched by
operation on a FANUC LADDER.
2 This operation can not be used with PMC–SB7.
7.3.2 Reads or writes the sequence program, C programs, or PMC parameter.

Transfer to and from a
FANUC FD Cassette
CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = FDCAS
DATA KIND = ALL

FUNCTION = WRITE
FILE NO. = –1
(–1:ADD,0:INIT,OR @ NAME)
>
ALM
(a) Setting the channel

Enter the number of the channel used at ”CHANNEL = .” See (a) in
Subsection 7.3.1 for details.
571

7.3.6 for details.
(c) Writing a file
Item Operation
DEVICE Press the [FDCAS] soft key.
FUNCTION Press the [WRITE] soft key.
DATA KIND Select the type of data to be output (see (3) in Section 7.2).
FILE NO. Name the file within 17 characters. –1 is displayed if no name is entered
(see (5) in Section 7.2).
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start outputting the file.

(d) Reading a file
Item Operation
FUNCTION Press the [READ] soft key.
FILE NO. Enter the number or name of the file to be input.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start inputting the file.

(e) Collating a file
Item Operation
FUNCTION Press the [COMPAR] soft key.
FILE NO. Enter the number or name of the file to be collated.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start collating the file.
Note
PMC data cannot be collated. The data the file is to be
collated with depends on the file.
(f) Deleting a file

Item Operation
FUNCTION Press the [DELETE] soft key.
FILE NO. Enter the number or name of the file to be deleted.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start deleting the file.

(g) Listing the files
Item Operation
FUNCTION Press the [LIST] soft key.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start listing the files.
572
7.3.3
Storage to Flash ROM Ę : Supported
: Not supported
FS21i
Power Power Mate–H FS21/ FS16–A FS16–B FS16–C
FS18 FS16i FS15B
Mate–D/F/G FS20 210MB FS21–A FS18–B FS18–C
FS18i
Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
Formerly, a RAM module or ROM module was necessary for storing

programs. Using Flash Memory, however, programs can be ROM–stored
on the PMC board.
CAUTION
1 If the power is turned off without performing the writing
operation, the updated sequence program is not stored.
2 The CNC must be placed in the emergency stop state when
data is read from or written to Flash Memory.
3 Even if the sequence program is cleared with the X and O
keys at power–on, the contents of Flash Memory are not
cleared. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, the
sequence program in Flash Memory is read. To clear the
contents of Flash Memory, write Flash Memory after
clearing the sequence program with X and O.
CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = F–ROM
DATA KIND =
FUNCTION = WRITE
RAM SIZE = A ( MAX SIZE = B )

PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS (EXEC?)
>
ALM
(a) Writing data to FLASH ROM

Item Operation
DEVICE Press the [F–ROM] soft key.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start outputting data.
573
CAUTION
1 Operation in PMC–NB/NB2
(a)If data is stored in FLASH ROM, a message is displayed
to confirm writing.
(b)RAM SIZE indicates the size of the sequence program.
MAX SIZE indicates the size of the ROM option in the
PMC.
A: 64K bytes, B: 128K bytes, C: 256K bytes,
D: 512K bytes, E: 1M bytes
2 When a C board is installed in the Series 16i/18i, ladder
programs and C programs must be written into FLASH ROM
separately.
(a)When a ladder program is written into FLASH ROM,
select [LADDER] from the DATA KIND item.
When a C program is written into FLASH ROM, select
[C–LANG] from the DATA KIND item.
(b)Select [WRITE] from the FUNCTION item.
(c) Press the [EXEC] soft key to start writing to FLASH ROM.
(b) Reading data from FLASH ROM

Item Operation
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start inputting data.

(c) Comparing data in FLASH ROM
Item Operation
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start comparing data.

(d) Checking if data is stored in FLASH ROM
Item Operation
FUNCTION Press the [BLANK] soft key.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to check if data is stored in FLASH ROM.
CAUTION
Operation in PMC–NB
When data is stored in FLASH ROM : BLANK ERROR is
displayed.
When no data is stored in FLASH ROM : BLANK
COMPLETE is displayed.
574
(e) Deleting data in FLASH ROM

Item Operation
FUNCTION Press the [ERASE] soft key.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start deleting data.
NOTE
In FS16B/18B, [READ], [COMPAR], [BLANK] and [ERASE]
functions are unavailable.
7.3.4
Storage to a Memory Ę : Supported
: Not supported
Card
FS21i
Power Power Mate–H FS21/ FS16–A FS16–B FS16–C
FS18 FS16i FS15B
Mate–D/F/G FS20 210MB FS21–A FS18–B FS18–C
FS18i
Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
NOTE
This function is not supported on DPL/MDI of Power
Mate–H.
Sequence programs and data are input from or output to a memory card
as described below. The memory card to which data is input from or
output to can directly send or receive data to or from the programming unit
(FANUC LADDER).
The supported function and the kind of memory card is shown as below.
Any kind of card has to be conformed to TYPE 1 to 2 of PCMCIA (The
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association ) 2.0 (or
later) or TYPE 1 to 2 of JEIDA (Japanese Electronics Development
Association) 4.0 (or later) . And the format is based on MS–DOS FAT file
system.
NOTE
With the Power Mate–H, FS20, FS21/210MB, FS16–A,
FS18–A, FS16–B, FS18–B, FS16–C, FS18–C, and FS15B,
cards having a capacity of more than 32M bytes cannot be
used.
575
The case of FS20,FS18B,FS16B FS18C, FS16C PMC

Ę : Supported
: Not supported
Flash Memory
SRAM Card ATA Card
Card
Read of a file Ę Ę
Format of a card Ę
Write of a file Ę
Delete of a file Ę
List of a file Ę Ę
The case of FS15B(PMC–NB)

Ę : Supported
: Not supported
Flash Memory Card
SRAM Card Supported Unsupported ATA Card
Card Card
Read of a file Ę Ę Ę
Format of a card Ę Ę
Write of a file Ę Ę
Delete of a file Ę
List of a file Ę Ę Ę
The case of FS16i, FS18i, FS21i

Ę : Supported
: Not supported
Flash Memory Card
Card Card
Read of a file Ę Ę Ę Ę
Format of a card Ę Ę Ę
Write of a file Ę Ę Ę
Delete of a file Ę Ę
List of a file Ę Ę Ę Ę
(1) Flash memory card writing

The following kinds of flash memory card are supported.
S Intel Series 2 Flash Memory Cards (or compatible cards)
Attribute memory is needed for any card.
Files can be written on the card that is formatted by MS–DOS. But
there are following limitations.
S It is impossible to alter a file that is already written.
S A card that is formatted by Flash File System can not be used.
(Neither Read nor List)
S The data can not be written in the last 128Kbyte of the card. So,
available size of a card is (Card_size – 128Kbyte). Please refer to
the following figure.
576
Before Writing
File–A
File–B
File–C
Add
File–D
128Kbyte
After writing
File–A
File–B
File–C
File–D
128Kbyte
“CLOSE ERROR” is displayed and File–D cannot be saved.

In the part of the ,the data of File–D is written. But ”read” and
”list” functions are not available for File–D.
After this operation, any file cannot be written to this card.
There are following limitations due to the system that formats the
flash memory card.
577
(a) When the card formatted and written files by FANUC products
is used by other systems.
Ramu–zou CardPro
Note1) Note2)
Add of file Not supported function
List of file Ę Ę
NOTE
1 Ramu–zou is a memory card reader/writer that is made by
ADTEK SYSTEM SCIENCE.
2 CardPro is a memory card reader/writer that is made by
Data I/O.
(b) When the card formatted and written files by other system is used
by FANUC products.
CardPro
Ramu–zou
Note3)
Add of file Ę
List of file Ę Ę
NOTE
If you use the CardPro to format a flash memory card, type
the following command.
CPFORMAT drive–name: /F:FLASHFAT /NOCIS
578
(2) Operation
The operation is almost the same as Subsection 7.3.2 except that steps
(a) and (b) are not necessary for a memory card.
CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = M–CARD
DATA KIND = PARAM

FUNCTION = WRITE
FILE NO. = –1
(–1:ADD, 0:INIT, OR@ NAME)
>
ALM
[M–CARD] [OTHER] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(a) Formatting the memory card

Item Operation
DEVICE Press the [M–CARD] soft key.
FUNCTION Press the [FORMAT] soft key.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start formatting.

(b) Writing a file
Item Operation
DATA KIND Select the type of data to be output.
(See (3) in Section 7.2)
FILE NO. Name the file within 8 characters. –1 is displayed if no name is entered.
(See (5) in Section 7.2)
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start outputting the file.

If the file name is not specified, the system names the file as follows:
DATA KIND File name The model name is PMC–NB

for the PMC–NB and PMC–RA
ALL model–name.ALL
for the PMC–SA1 or SA3.
LADDER model–name.LAD
PARAM model–name.PRM
(c) Reading a file

Item Operation
FILE NO. Enter the number or name of the file to be input.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start inputting the file.
579
(d) Collating a file

Item Operation
FILE NO. Enter the number or name of the file to be collated.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start collating the file.
CAUTION
PMC data cannot be collated.
The data to collate is determined by the contents of a
selected file.
(e) Deleting a file

Item Operation
FUNCTION Press the [DELETE] soft key.
FILE NO. Enter the number or name of the file to be deleted.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start deleting the file.

(f) Listing the files
Item Operation
FUNCTION Press the [LIST] soft key.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start listing the files.
580
7.3.5
Data Input to and Ę : Supported
Output from other : Not supported
Devices Power
FS20
FS21/
FS18 FS16 FS18B FS16B
FS16–C
FS21i
FS16i FS15B
Mate 210MB FS18–C
FS18i
Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
Reads or writes the sequence program, Pascal or C programs, or PMC

data.
CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = OTHERS
DATA KIND = ALL

FUNCTION = WRITE
>
ALM
[M–CARD] [OTHERS] [SPEED ] [ ] [ ]
(a) Setting the channel

Enter the number of the channel used at ”CHANNEL = .” See (a) in
Subsection 7.3.1 for details.
7.3.6 for details.
(c) Outputting data (PMC to input/output device)
Item Operation
DEVICE Press the [OTHERS] soft key.
DATA KIND Select the type of data to be output (see (3) in Section 7.2).
Set the input/output device so that it is ready to accept data (wait state).
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start outputting data.

(d) Inputting data (input/output device to PMC)
Item Operation
Press the [EXEC] soft key and wait until data input finishes.
The input/output device starts outputting data.
581
CAUTION
If DATA ERROR is displayed when a C program is written
with the Series 16i/18i, perform the following:
1 Clear the C language area by pressing soft keys [EDIT],
[CLEAR], [CLRLNG], then [EXEC].
2 Read the C program again.
3 On the system parameter screen, set LANGUAGE
ORIGIN.
4 Write the C program into FLASH ROM.
(e) Collating data

Item Operation
Press the [EXEC] soft key and wait until data collation finishes.
The input/output device starts outputting data.
NOTE
PMC data cannot be collated. The data the file is to be
collated with depends on the file.
7.3.6
Setting the Transfer Ę : Supported
: Not supported
Speed ([SPEED] Soft FS21i
Power FS21/ FS16–C
Key) Mate
FS20
210MB
FS18 FS16 FS18B FS16B
FS18–C
FS16i FS15B
FS18i
Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
PMC SPEED OTHERS MONIT STOP

BAUD RATE = 3
(0:1200,1:2400,2:4800,3:9600,4:19200)
PARITY BIT = 0
(0:NONE,1:ODD,2:EVEN)
STOP BIT = 1
(0:1BIT,1:2BIT)
WRITE CODE = 1
(0:ASCII,1:ISO)
>
ALM
[INPUT ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ INIT ]
582
The items shown above must be set when RS–232C is used for
communication. Move the cursor to each item and enter a number.
Pressing the [INIT] soft key sets each item to the initial value. “WRITE
CODE = ” is displayed only when OTHERS is selected for DEVICE.
The table below lists the setting for communication with a FANUC
LADDER.
Setting on the
Setting on the PMC
Item personal
(SPEED screen)
computer
Baud rate (bps) 9600 BAUD RATE = 3 (9600bps)
Character length 8 bits
Parity check No parity PARITY BIT = 0 (NONE)
Number of stop bits 2 bits STOP BIT = 1 (2BIT)
X parameter None
7.3.7
Transfer to and from a Ę : Supported
ROM WRITER : Not supported
FS21i
Power FS21/ FS16–C
FS20 FS18 FS16 FS18B FS16B FS16i FS15B
Mate 210MB FS18–C
FS18i
Ę Ę
Reads or writes the sequence program, Pascal or C programs, or PMC

data.
This function is valid for the built–in programer function.
(a) Writing a file
Item Operation
DEVICE Press the [ROMWRT] soft key.
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start outputting the data.

(b) Reading a file
Item Operation
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start inputting the data.

(c) Collating a file
Item Operation
Press the [EXEC] soft key to start collating the data.
583
7.3.8 When the machine tool builder creates a MDI keyboard which has no
Notes on Using an MDI cursor keys on the PMC–MODEL SA1/SA3 of the FS 20, note the
following methods of operation. Ladder diagrams cannot be edited using
Keyboard without the ladder–diagram–edit memory card.
Cursor Keys
On each setting screen, when an item is specified, the cursor automatically
(when using the FS20
moves to the next item to be specified. When the item at the cursor need
PMC–MODEL SA1/SA3) not be modified, specify the same value again. When the item at the
bottom of the screen has been specified, the cursor automatically moves
to the item at the top of the screen (CHANNEL setting). When the return
key (leftmost soft key) is pressed to exit from the I/O screen, the cursor
automatically moves to the top of the screen. Examples of setting items
are shown below.
Example 1) When a ladder program is output to an off–line programmer
(such as the P–G or a personal computer)
1 CHANNEL setting : Enter the desired channel number,
then press the <INPUT> key or
[(NO.)] key. To use the current value,
just press the <INPUT> key or
[(NO.)] key.
2 DEVICE setting : Press the [HOST] key. The cursor
returns to the CHANNEL setting
position to enable CHANNEL
setting.
Example 2) When a ladder program is written into an F–ROM
1 CHANNEL setting : No specification required. To move
the cursor, perform the operation
described in 1 of Example 1.
2 DEVICE setting : Press the [F–ROM] key.
3 FUNCTION setting : No specification required. To change
the CHANNEL setting, press the
[WRITE] key to return the cursor to
the CHANNEL setting position.
Example 3) When a ladder program or a PMC parameter is read from or
written into an FDCAS (M–CARD)
1 CHANNEL setting : See 1 of Example 1 (or 1 of Example
2).
2 DEVICE setting : Press the [FDCAS] ([M–CARD]) key.
3 DATA KIND setting: Press the [LADDER] key for ladder
operation. Press the [PARAM] key
for PMC–parameter operation.
4 FUNCTION setting : Press the [READ]/[WRITE] key.
5 FILE NO. setting : Enter the desired file number or file
name, then press the <INPUT> key or
[EXEC] key. When the current value
is used, just press the <INPUT> key.
The cursor automatically returns to
the CHANNEL setting position. The
setting can be modified.
In each example, pressing the [EXEC] key after setting data executes the
corresponding processing.
584
7.4
I/O ERROR
MESSAGES
Message CONTENTS ³ OPERATION
PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program is already stored in the FLASH ROM (during blank check).
PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS (EXEC ?) A program is already stored in the FLASH ROM (during writing or deleting data).
Action) Press the EXEC key again when the message is displayed. Data is then written
or deleted.
PROGRAM NOTHING No program is in the FLASH ROM.
F ERASE ERROR The FLASH ROM is faulty and must be replaced. Consult your FANUC service office.
L
A WRITE ERROR
S READ ERROR
H
ANOTHER USED The FLASH ROM is being used by a device other than the PMC.
R
O MUST BE IN EMG STOP NOT EMG STOP The CNC is not in the emergency stop state.
M
NO OPTION There is no ROM cassette option.
SIZE ERROR The size of the program exceeds the FLASH ROM size (during writing of the sequence
program).
Action) Use the CONDENSEM function (EDIT/CLEAR screen). If the error persists, the
FLASH ROM size must be increased.
The size of the program exceeds the RAM size (during reading of the sequence program).
Action) The RAM size must be increased.
I/O OPEN ERROR nn nn = –1: The RS–232C interface is being used by a device other than the PMC.
Action) Check if another device is using the RS–232C interface.
Check that, on the online setting screen (Section 8.5.1 in Part III), NOT USE is
set for the RS–232C item.
nn = 6: There is no RS–232C option.
nn = 20: The RS–232C interface is connected incorrectly.
Action) Check that the connection and the setting, such as channel and baud rate, are
H correct.
O
S I/O WRITE ERROR nn nn = 20: The RS–232C interface is connected incorrectly.
T Action) Check that the connection and the setting, such as channel and baud rate, are
. correct.
F nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed normally.
D Action) Check if a cable is disconnected.
C
A I/O READ ERROR nn nn = 20: The RS–232C interface is connected incorrectly.
S Action) Check that the connection and the setting, such as channel and baud rate, are
. correct.
O nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed normally.
T Action) Check if a cable is disconnected.
H ADDRESS IS OUT OF RANGE (xxxxxx) Data other than that stored in the PMC debugging RAM area has been transferred.
E xxxxxx: Transfer address
R
S DATA ERROR Invalid data was read.
Action) Check the cable and setting (SPEED).
When a C program is read into the Series 16i/18i:
Action) Clear the C language area by pressing soft keys [EDIT], [CLEAR], [CLRLNG],
then [EXEC].
PROGRAM DATA ERROR Data output contains an error
Action) On the alarm screen, check the details of the alarm.
585
Message CONTENTS ³ OPERATION

CREATE ERROR The file name is invalid.
Action) Name the file is the MS–DOS format (see(5) of Section 7.2).
NO MORE SPACE The memory card capacity is insufficient.
WRITE ERROR Action) Replace the memory card or delete unnecessary files and retry.
NOT READY The memory card is not mounted.
Action) Confirm if the memory card is mounted correctly.
MOUNT ERROR The memory card is not formatted.
Action) Format the memory card (see (a) of Subsection 7.3.4).
WRITE PROTECT The memory card is protected.
Action) Remove the protection of the memory card.
BATTERY ALARM The battery of the memory card is not enough.
M Action) Exchange the battery of the memory card.
E
M FILE NOT FOUND Specified file number or file name is not found.
O Action) Confirm the file number or the file name by LIST.
R DELETE ERROR The file cannot be deleted.
Y Action) Change the attribute of the file.
C PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS The file name already exists.
A Action) Change to other file name.
R
D I/O WRITE ERROR nn nn=30 : The memory card is not mounted.
I/O READ ERROR nn Action) Confirm if the memory card is mounted correctly.
I/O COMPARE ERROR nn nn=31 : The data cannot be written to the memory card.
I/O DELETE ERROR nn Action) Remove the protection of the memory card.
I/O LIST ERROR nn Exchange the memory card for the S–RAM card.
I/O FORMAT ERROR nn nn=32 : The battery of the memory card is not enough.
Action) Exchange the battery of the memory card.
nn=102: The memory card capacity is insufficient.
Action) Replace the memory card or delete unnecessary files and retry.
nn=135: The memory card is not formatted.
nn=105: ditto
Action) Format the memory card.
nn=114: Specified file is not found.
Action) Confirm the file number or the file name by LIST.
nn=115: Specified file is protected.
Action) Confirm the attribute of the file.
R SIZE OVER WRITE The ROM size is smaller than the program size.
O Response) Increase the ROM size.
M
W
R ROM WRITER ERROR nnnnn An error has occurred in the ROM writer.
I Response) Refer to the “ROM Writer Operator’s Manual.”
T
E
R
COMPARE ERR XXXXXX = AA:BB The data between DEVICE and PMC is different.
CONT?(Y/N) XXXXXX : Address
aa : The data in PMC
bb : The data in DEVICE
C Action) If you continue it, press Y key.
o Otherwise, press N key.
m DATA ERROR Invalid data was read.
m Action) Check the cable and setting (SPEED).
o When a C program is read into the Series 16i/18i:
n Action) Clear the C language area by pressing soft keys [EDIT], [CLEAR], [CLRLNG],
then [EXEC].
PROGRAM DATA ERROR Data output contains an error.
Action) On the alarm screen, check the details of the alarm.
586
7.5 The data items of the sequence program stored in EPROM can be copied
into the debugging RAM module for PMC–SA1, PMC–SA2, PMC–SB,
SEQUENCE and PMC–SB2.
PROGRAM COPY
The following shows the relationship between the function and soft keys.
FUNCTION
RETURN
EXEC CANCEL (NO.)
NEXT
ROM COPY
CPYTTL CPYLAD CPYSYM CPYMSG
NEXT
CPYALL CPYMDL
7.5.1 Copies title data.

Copy Title Data
[CPYTTL]
7.5.2 Copies a ladder program.

Copy a Ladder
Program [CPYLAD]
7.5.3 Copies symbol data and comment data.

Copy Symbol Data and
Comment Data
[CPYSYM]
7.5.4 Copies message data.

Copy Message Data
[CPYMSG]
587
7.5.5 Copies all the sequence programs into the debugging RAM.
Copy the Sequence
Programs [CPYALL]
7.5.6 Copies I/O module data.

Copy I/O Module Data
[CPYMDL] CAUTION
If the I/O module data is different from the currently selected
data during copying in Subsection 7.5.5 or 7.5.6, turn off the
power and restart the system.
7.6 Two channels cannot be used for the reader/punch interface at the same
time. Before performing these I/O operations, be sure to terminate the
RESTRICTIONS system other than the PMC and processing through the reader/punch
interface in the PMC program.
588
8. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT)
8 FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND

DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT)
Press the [MONIT] soft key on the basic programmer menu to display the
basic monitor menu shown in Fig. 8. Pressing an appropriate soft key
enables the user to display memory areas used for a user program written
in the C language or to debug a program.
f : Can be used
: Cannot be used
∆ : Can be used (with some restrictious)
PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2
∆ ∆ Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
NOTE
The functions indicated with ∆ can be used in a Series
16i/18i machine with the C language board mounted.
Work RAM is necessary (A02B–0120–H987 for the
PMC–SC, SC3, and SC4 and A02B–0162–J151 or
A02B–0162–J152 for the PMC–NB and NB2).
These functions facilitate debugging a user program created by the

machine tool builder in the C language. If the settings are erroneous, a
system error may occur or the system may be shut down. Specify the
settings correctly.
For details of operation, refer to the “PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2
Programming Manual (C language)” (B–61863E–1).
The following figure shows the soft key related to these functions.

(STOP)
RET
DBGLAD ONLINE GDT USRMEM DEBUG
III 8.4 III 8.5 III 8.1 III 8.2 III 8.3
589
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
PMC MONITOR MENU MONIT STOP
SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS
DBGLAD : DEBUG LADDER DIAGRAM

GDT : DESCRIPTOR TABLE MAP
USRMEM : USER MEMORY INFORMATION
DEBUG : DEBUG FUNCTION
[DBGLAD] [ ONLINE ] [ GDT ] [USRMEM] [DEBUG ]
Fig. 8 Basic monitor menu
590
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.1 Information of a User Program Coded in C

DISPLAYING THE GDT Nos. 32 to 95 defined in a user program can be displayed.
GDT (GLOBAL The specified GDTs can also be dumped.
DESCRIPTOR TABLE) The following figure shows the soft keys related to this function.
GDT USRMEM DEBUG
RET
NO.SRH M.DUMP
RET
SEARCH INPUT
NEXT
BYTE WORD D.WORD
8.1.1 (1) Press the [GDT] soft key to display the user GDT information shown
in Fig. 8.1.1 (a).
Operation
(2) Use the [NO. SRH] key to search for the GDT table with a desired
number.
(3) Press the [M. DUMP] key to dump the data of the GDT number which
is displayed at the top.
(4) Press the [NEXT] key on the memory dump screen.
Pressing the [BYTE] key displays the data in units of bytes.
Pressing the [WORD] key displays the data in units of words, where
one word equals two bytes. Pressing the [D. WORD] key displays
the data in units of double words, or four bytes.
See Fig. 8.1.1 (b).
(5) When bit 4 of keep relay K17 is set to 1, the contents of RAM can be
changed in units of the specified length on the memory dump screen
by moving the cursor to the data to be changed.
WARNING
Depending on the settings, a user program may operate
erroneously, causing a system error. Be sure to specify the
correct settings.
591
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
PMC DESCRIPTOR TABLE(GDT) MONIT RUN
NO. ACCESS USE BASE LIMIT

032 RW 16 0016000AH 0000056FH
033 RW 16 0016005AH 0000023FH
034 RW 16 00160300H 00000040H
035 RW 16 00160340H 00000234H
036 ER 16 00823000H 00000058H
037 ER 16 0084FB7CH 0000070AH
038 NULL DESCRIPTOR
039 ER 16 0084FF88H 0000292FH
040 RW 16 00160A6CH 0000005AH
041 RW 16 00160600H 00000402H
>
[NO.SRH] [ ] [ ] [M.DUMP] [ ]
Fig. 8.1.1(a) User GDT information
PMC DESCRIPTOR TABLE(GDT) MONIT RUN

032 RW 16 0016000AH 0000056FH
033 RW 16 0016005AH 0000023FH
Y Y
[NO.SRH] [ ] [ ] [M.DUMP] [ ]
PMC MEMORY DUMP(GDT NO.032) MONIT RUN
103:0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ......

103:0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ......
103:0020 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 .....
Dumped
information of
GDT NO.32
Fig. 8.1.1(b) Memory dump
592
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.1.2
Descriptions of
Displayed Items

32 ER 16 00862340H 0000523FH
Segment limit
Segment base
Segment type
Segment attribute
GDT NO.
(1) Access attribute of a segment

Code Description
RO Read–only data segment
RW Read/write data segment
ROD Read–only downward–expansion data segment
RWD Read/write downward–expansion data segment
EO Execute–only code segment
ER Execute/read code segment
(2) Segment type

Code Description
16 16–bit segment
32 32–bit segment
NOTE
A user program created with the IC286 compiler is
segmented in 16–bit units.
(3) Undefined segment

NULL DESCRIPTOR is displayed for an undefined segment.
593
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.2 The segment information of the following areas defined by a user program
for each task can be displayed and the contents of the areas can be dumped.
DISPLAYING THE
MEMORY D Data area
ALLOCATION D Stack area
INFORMATION OF A D Common memory area
USER PROGRAM The PMC management software dynamically allocates the areas
mentioned above at locations which are different from those defined by
CODED IN C. the user program.
The system allocates the data area at activation. When the system is not
activated after the user program has been loaded, the data area is located
at the address defined by the user program. Be sure to refer to the area after
the system starts.
The following figure shows the soft keys related to this function.
GDT USRMEM DEBUG
RET
TASK.D TASK.S COM.D M.DUMP
RET
SEARCH INPUT
NEXT
BYTE WORD D.WORD
8.2.1 (1) Press the [USRMEM] soft key. Depending on which soft key is
pressed next (see below), the task memory information of a user
Operation program is displayed on the screen as shown in Fig. 8.2.1 (a) to (c).
Soft keys
[TASK. D] : Displays the information of allocating task data.
[TASK. S] : Displays the information of allocating task stacks.
[COM.D] : Displays the information of common memory
allocation.
(2) A task data area and stack area are displayed for each task ID. The
information for all the common memory defined by user link control
statements is displayed.
(3) Pressing the [M. DUMP] key on each allocation information screen
enables the contents of the memory related to the item which is
displayed at the top to be dumped.
(4) Operation on the memory dump screen is the same as that described
in Section 8.1.
(5) When bit 4 of keep relay K17 is set to 1, the contents of RAM can be
changed in units of the specified length on the memory dump screen
by moving the cursor to the data to be changed.
594
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
WARNING
Depending on the settings, a user program may operate
erroneously, causing a system error. Be sure to specify the
correct settings.
PMC USER MEMORY(TASK DATA) MONIT RUN
ID NAME GDT BASE LIMIT

10 TASK–O01 039 00160050H 00010100H
11 TASK–O02 040 00160060H 00004100H
12 TASK–O03 041 00160070H 00005100H
13 TASK–O04 042 00160080H 00000160H
14 TASK–O05 043 00160210H 00000170H
15 TASK–O06 044 00160110H 00000110H
>
[TASK.D] [TASK.S] [COM.D ] [M.DUMP] [ ]
Fig. 8.2.1(a) Information of a task data area
PMC USER MEMORY(TASK STACK) MONIT RUN

10 TASK–O01 239 00161050H 00010100H
11 TASK–O02 240 00161060H 00004100H
12 TASK–O03 241 00161070H 00005100H
13 TASK–O04 242 00161080H 00000160H
14 TASK–O05 243 00161210H 00000170H
15 TASK–O06 244 00161110H 00000110H
>
Fig. 8.2.1(b) Information of a task stack area
595
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
PMC USER MEMORY(COMMON DATA) MONIT RUN
NO. GDT BASE LIMIT

01 042 00162010H 00000100H
02 045 00162020H 000A0100H
03 047 00162030H 0000D000H
04 048 00162040H 0000A100H
>
Fig. 8.2.1(c) Information of a common memory data area
8.2.2 (1) Items displayed for a task data area and stack area
Displayed Items

10 TASK–001 032 00160010H 00000100H
Segment limit
Segment base
GDT No.
Task name
Task ID
(2) Items displayed for a common memory area
NO GDT BASE LIMIT

01 032 00160010H 00000100H
Segment limit
Segment base
GDT NO.
Common memory No.
596
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.3 There are two ways to check if a user program operates as intended. One
is to execute the program while displaying the sequence on an external
DEBUGGING unit such as a display monitor. The other is to execute the program to a
specified point (breakpoint), and check if the internal data items such as
program work areas are correct.
This PMC debugging function checks programs using breakpoints.
8.3.1 (1) Number of breakpoints: Up to 4

Specifications (2) Number of portions to be traced: 8
(3) Capacity of memory used for storing traced data: Up to 256 bytes,
up to 32 bytes for each traced portion
8.3.2 Press the [DEBUG] soft key to display the parameter screen for
Operation debugging. Pressing the [D.DUMP] key on the parameter screen displays
the contents of the CPU registers and specified internal data items at the
breakpoint.
To return from the data display screen to the parameter screen, press the
[D.PRM] soft key.
After the parameters are set, but before the program is interrupted, DBG
blinks at the bottom right of the PMC screen. The breakpoint numbers
BP1 to BP4 are also displayed at the bottom of the debug function screen.
When the program is interrupted at a breakpoint, BRK blinks at the
bottom right of the PMC screen. At this time, the breakpoint number,
from BP1 to BP4, is displayed in reverse at the bottom of the debug
function screen.
The following figure shows soft keys related to this function.
GDT USRMEM DEBUG
RET
D.DUMP BRK.NO EXEC INIT
RET
D.PRM BRK.NO
597
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.3.3 When the debug function is used, it is necessary to set the break conditions
Parameter Screen on the parameter screen. When using a 9” screen, press the <PAGE↓> key
to set a trace data area for a breakpoint.
(1) Setting parameters
(a) BREAK SEG.ADR
Specify the effective address of the breakpoint using a segment
address. When data is accessed, specify the break address using
a segment address.
Use a key, such as EOB, to delimit a segment and an offset. Do
not use alphanumeric keys.
NOTE
In data access, an even boundary or 4–byte boundary is
assumed according to the type of ACCESS LENGTH,
described later.
Example)
When the break address is GDT.NO = 32,
OFFSETADDRESS = 101, specify 103; 101, obtained using
the following formula:
32 (GDT.NO) x 8 + 3 = 259 = 103 (Hex)
S When ACCESS LENGTH = WORD is specified with
BREAK SEG.ADR = 103; 101
An access to 103; 100–101 causes a break.
S When ACCESS LENGTH = D.WORD is specified with
BREAK SEG.ADR = 103; 101
An access to 103; 100–103 causes a break.
(b) BREAK COND.

Specify a break condition.
0 (EXEC) : A program is interrupted at the specified
effective address.
1 (WRITE) : A program is interrupted when it writes
data to the specified address.
2 (READ/WRITE) : A program is interrupted when it writes
data to or read data from the specified
address.
(c) ACCESS LENGTH
Specify the address type of a breakpoint.
0 (BYTE) : An address is specified in units of bytes for
read/write operation at the specified address
and for when a program is interrupted at the
specified effective address.
1 (WORD) : An address is specified in units of words for
read/write operation at the specified address.
2 (D.WORD) : An address is specified in units of two words
for read/write operation at the specified
address.
(d) PASS COUNT
Specify the number of times a break condition is satisfied before
the program is interrupted, in the range of 1 to 65535.
598
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
(e) TASK ID
Specify the task ID of a program. This parameter is convenient
for identifying the program when it is to be interrupted at a
breakpoint located in a function called from multiple tasks or is
located in common memory.
(f) TASK STATUS
Specify how to handle the task when a program is interrupted.
0 (PASS) : The task continues after the program is
interrupted.
1 (STOP) : The user task stops when the program is
interrupted. The ladder program does not stop.
CAUTION
To restart the user program, press the [STOP] key to stop
the sequence program and then press the [RUN] key to start
the program on the basic menu using the RUN/STOP
function.
(g) BREAK AVAIL.

Specify whether the parameters for each breakpoint are valid or
invalid.
(h) NO. TRACE ADR.
Using segment addresses, specify up to eight addresses from
which data is traced when a program is interrupted at a
breakpoint. Up to 32 bytes are stored for each address.
Use a key, such as EOB, to delimit a segment and an offset. Do
not use alphanumeric keys.
To initialize these addresses only, enter 0; 0.
CAUTION
If the addresses are specified erroneously, the following two
items, TYPE and LENGTH, cannot be specified.
(i) TYPE
Specify an address type with which traced data is displayed.
0 (BYTE) : Data is displayed in units of bytes.
1 (WORD) : Data is displayed in units of words.
2 (D.WORD) : Data is displayed in units of double words.
(j) LENGTH
Specify the length of traced data to be displayed.
(2) Starting processing for a breakpoint
When the parameters for each breakpoint are correctly specified,
press the [EXEC] soft key on the parameter screen to start the
processing for the currently selected breakpoint. The breakpoint
number, from BP1 to BP4, is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
(3) Initializing data used for debugging
To initialize the parameters and memory used for storing traced data,
press the [INIT] soft key on the parameter screen. The parameter and
memory for the currently selected breakpoint are then initialized.
599
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
(4) Changing a breakpoint

Up to four breakpoints can be specified. For each breakpoint,
parameters are specified and traced data is stored. To select a desired
breakpoint, press the [BRK.NO] soft key on the parameter screen.
The breakpoint is selected in the order of BP1, BP2, BP3, and BP4.
PMC DEBUG (PARAM) MONIT RUN
BREAK POINT NO.1
BREAK SEG.ADR = 0000:00000000

BREAK COND. = 0 ( 0:E 1:W 2:RW )
ACCESS LENGTH = 0 ( 0:B 1:W 3:D )
PASS COUNT = 32767
TASK ID = 1 ( 0:ALL / 10–25 )
TASK STATUS = 0 ( 0:PASS 1:STOP )
BREAK AVAIL. = 0 ( 0:NO 1:YES )
>
[D.DUMP] [BRK.NO] [ EXEC ] [ INIT ] [ ]
Fig. 8.3.3 (a) Screen for specifying a break condition
PMC DEBUG (PARAM) MONIT RUN
BREAK POINT NO.1

NO. DUMP ADR. TYPE LENGTH
(0:B/1:W/2:D) (32BYTE)
01 0000:00000000 0 10
02 0000:00000000 1 9
03 0000:00000000 2 8
04 0000:00000000 0 7
05 0000:00000000 1 6
06 0000:00000000 2 5
07 0000:00000000 0 4
08 0000:00000000 1 3
>
[D.DUMP] [BRK.NO] [ EXEC ] [ INIT ] [ ]
Fig. 8.3.3 (b) Screen for specifying data to be traced
600
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.3.4 When a program is interrupted under the break condition specified on the
Screen for Displaying parameter screen, BRK blinks at the bottom right of the PMC screen. The
breakpoint number at which the program has been interrupted is displayed
Traced Data in reverse at the bottom of the debug function screen.
To display the traced data, press the [D.DUMP] soft key on the parameter
screen, then press the [BRK.NO] key to select the screen for displaying
the traced data corresponding to the breakpoint.
The following items are displayed.
(1) REGISTER
Displays the contents of the CPU registers.
(2) MEMORY
Displays the contents of memory at addresses of the traced data
specified on the parameter screen.
When the contents are displayed on multiple pages, scroll the screen,
if necessary, using the <PAGE°>, <PAGE±>, <°>, or, <±> key.
PMC DEBUG (DUMP) MONIT RUN

BREAK POINT NO.1(0000:00000000)
REGISTER
EAX=00000000 EBX=00000000 ECX=00000000
EDX=00000000 ESI=00000000 EDI=00000000
EBP=00000000 ESP=00000000 IEP=00000000
DS=0000 ES=0000 FS=0000 GS=0000
SS=0000 CS=0000 EFLAGS=00000000
CONTENS OF MEMORY
01 0000:00000000 00000000 00000000
02 0000:00000000 00000000 00000000
03 0000:00000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
04 0000:00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000
>
[D.PRM ] [BRK.NO] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 8.3.4 Screen for displaying traced data
8.3.5 As parameters used for debugging and traces data are stored in the
retained memory, they are not lost when the power is turned off.
Enabling Automatic
Debugging at When bit 1 of keep relay K18 is set to 1 after break condition parameters
Power–on are correctly specified, debugging is automatically enabled when the
power is turned on.
8.3.6 (1) Specify a break address (BREAK SEG.ADR) in the area used by the
user program.
Notes
If a break address is specified in the area which is used by the PMC
management software, the system may hang up.
(2) Debug function is incorporated in the CPU, reduces the CPU speed.
Do not use the function during normal system operation.
601
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.4
LADDER Ę : Can be used
: Cannot be used
DEBUGGING ∆ : To use this function, a ladder editing module is required
FUNCTION PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2
∆ ∆ Ę ∆ Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
NOTE
PMC–PA3 is usable with the Power Mate–H.
Using this function, Step Operations and Stop Operations listed below are
possible. Step Operations are to execute ladder by specified step (single
instruction, single net, and specified block). Stop Operations are to stop
the execution of ladder when specified condition becomes true.
(1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.
(2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position.
(3) Step Operation to execute from current position to specified contact
or coil instruction.
(4) Stop Operation to execute from the first step and stop the execution
at specified contact or coil instruction.
(5) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder by a trigger of signal
condition. (Optionally, a trigger counter can be specified.)
(6) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing one
scan. (Optionally, a scan counter can be specified.)
8.4.1
Screen of Ladder
Debugging Function LADDER *TITLE DATA REMARKS 32 BYTES * NET 00001–00004 MONIT RUN
X1000.0 Y1000.0
X1000.1 Y1000.1
ABSDE
SUB36 2
X1000.0 RST ADDB Y1000.3
D0000
[ 0]
FGHI ACT 1
D0000
[ 0]
X1000.0 Y1000.5
ACC=1 STK=0000 0011 OF=0 SF=1 ZF=1
[SEARCH ] [ STEP ] [ BRKCTL ] [ ] [ DUMP ]
[ RUN ] [ ADRESS ] [ DPARA ] [ONLEDT ] [ RESET ]
Fig. 8.4.1 Screen of ladder debugging function
602
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.4.2 For this operation, press [DBGLAD] soft key to bring the following
Soft Key Menu of menu.
Ladder Debugging
Function DBGLAD ONLINE GDT USRMEM DEBUG
RET
SEARCH STEP BRKCTL DUMP
Subsec. 8.4.3 Subsec. 8.4.4 NEXT
RUN ADRESS DPARA ONLEDT RESET

(STOP) (SYMBOL) (NDPARA)
The function of the soft key is as follows.

(1) [SEARCH] : is used to specify several types of search functions.
(2) [STEP] : is used to specify several types of Step Functions.
This function can not be used when the ladder
program is being executed.
(3) [BRKCTL] : is used to specify Stop Functions.
This function is to stop the execution of ladder when
specified condition becomes true. This function can
not be used when the ladder program is being
executed.
(4) [DUMP] : is used to display the contents of PMC address in the
2 lines at the bottom of CRT where the last NET is
normally displayed.
(5) [RUN] : is used to switch the monitor mode from STOP to
RUN, or vice versa.
(6) [ADRESS] : is used to switch the symbol display mode from
SYMBOL to ADDRESS, or vice versa.
(7) [DPARA] : is used to switch the mode for displaying the
contents of functional instruction parameters from
NDPARA (No Display Parameter) mode to DPARA
(Display Parameter) mode, or vice versa.
(8) [ONLEDT] : is used to edit the ladder program without stopping
the execution. Editing is limited within the
operations which do not change the size of ladder.
(9) [RESET] : is used to initialize the Step Function and Stop
Function.
NOTE
See Chapter II. 5.3 and 5.4 for details of (7) or (8).
603
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.4.3 Using this function, Step Operations such as single step, single net, and
Step Operation [STEP] block steps until specified instruction are possible.
[Function]
(1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.
(2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position.
(3) Step operation to execute from current position to specified contact
or coil instruction.
[Displaying of Step] The step result is shown below the ladder diagram.
See “Fig. 8.4.1”
“ACC=1 STK=0000 0011 OF=0 SF=0 ZF=1”
ACC : result of operation
STK : contents of stack (1 byte)
OF : overflow (0=NO, 1=YES)
SF : sign (0=NO, 1=YES)
ZF : zero (0=NO, 1=YES)
For this operation, press [STEP] soft key to bring the following menu.
RET
ELMMNT NETMNT BLOCK B.SRCH TRNS.B
SEARCH START
The function of the soft key is as follows.

(1) [STEP] : A blinking cursor shows the current position at
which the execution is stopped. y moving the cursor,
a position at which the execution is to be stopped can
be specified.
(2) [ELMMNT] : is used to execute one instruction from current
position.
(3) [NETMNT] : is used to execute one net from current position.
(4) [BLOCK] : is used to execute from current position to specified
instruction. If specified instruction is not executed
because it is skipped by conditional JMP or CALL
instructions, the execution will stop at the END
instruction, END1 (SUB 1), END2 (SUB 2), or
END3 (SUB 48), of the current level.
(5) [B.SRCH] : is used to search the instruction at which the
execution is currently stopped.
(6) [TRNS.B] : is used to transfer the current status of input signals
to the synchronous buffer so that succeeding
instructions could operate on refreshed inputs when
the execution is continued from current position.
(For more about the synchronous buffer, see Chapter
I.2.5 Processing I/O Signal)
604
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
CAUTION
Normally, transferring to the synchronous buffer is
automatically performed at the beginning of the 2nd level
ladder.
8.4.4 Using this function, the execution of the ladder can be stopped when
Stop Function of Break specified condition becomes true. Then, the signal condition can be
checked.
with Condition
[BRKCTL] [Function]
(1) Stop operation to execute from the first step and then to stop at
specified contact or coil instruction. (Optionally, a trigger counter
can be specified to stop after the instruction is executed specified
times.)
(2) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a trigger
condition specified by signal becomes true. (Optionally, a trigger
counter can be specified to stop after the trigger becomes true
specified times.)
(3) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing a scan.
(Optionally, a scan counter can be specified to stop after executing
specified times of scans.) The execution is started by pressing
[START] key.
[Displaying of specified trigger]
The specified address, specified condition, and specified count are shown
at the title display position. (See Fig. 8.4.1.)
“MODE :ON :X0000. 0 : 0 : 0000/12345”
COUNT : trigger counter

(present counter/specified counter)
POINT : trigger point at which the trigger
condition is checked (default is 0)
0 the top of the 1st level seq
1 after END1
2 after END2
3 after END3
ADR : specified trigger address
ON : signal turn on (TRGON),

OFF : turn off (TRGOFF)
See Section II–5.6.

[Displaying of specified scan]
The current count and specified count are shown at the title display
position.
“SCAN COUNT : 00000/00003”
counter of scan (present counter/specified counter)
To perform this function, press the [BRKCTL] soft key to display the
menu below.
605
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
RET
TRIGER SCAN INIT START

(STOP)
TRGON TRGOFF
The function of [BRKCTL] soft key is as follows.

(1) [TRIGER] : is used to specify the trigger condition by signal.
Trigger condition has to be specified according to the
following syntax. And then, the execution is started by
pressing [START] key.
“ADR ; PONIT (0–3) ; COUNT +
[TRGON/ TRGOFF]”
ADR : specified trigger address
POINT : trigger point at which the trigger condition
is checked (default is 0)
0 the top of the 1st level sequence
1 after END1
2 after END2
3 after END3
COUNT : counter of checked trigger (default is 1)
(1 to 65535)
(2) [TRGON] : is used to specify “turn on” trigger to stop the execution
when the signal is transitioned from off to on status.
(3) [TRGOFF] : is used to specify “turn off” trigger to stop the
execution when the signal is transitioned from on to off
status.
(4) [DUMP] : is used to display the contents of PMC address in the
2 lines at the bottom of CRT where the last NET is
normally displayed.
(5) [SCAN] : is used to specify a stop function by scan counter. To
specify a scan counter, input as follows.
“counter + [SCAN]”. (counter: 1 to 65535)
When the counter is not specified, it is recognized as
1.
After specifying the scan counter, the execution is
started by pressing [START] key.
(6) [INIT] : is used to initialize the stop function with break
condition.
(7) [START] : is used to start the execution after specifying the
condition to stop.
606
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.5
f : Usable
ONLINE FUNCTION ∆ : See Note
: Not usable
PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2
∆ ∆ ∆ Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
NOTE
1 PMC–PA3 is usable with the Power Mate–D/H.
2 PMC–SA1 is usable with the loader control function of the
Series 21i.
3 PMC–SA3 is usable with the FANUC NC Board.
4 If the system is set up to use the on–line function, that line
is occupied, and cannot be used with other input/output
functions. To use the line with other input/output functions,
set up the system so as not to use the on–line function.
If the system is set up to use the on–line function, the
following functions cannot be used:
D [PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], [SYSPRM], [TRACE],
[ANALYS], [USRDGN], [DGNLAD], [GDT], [USRMEM]
5 It is recommended that the on–line function be used when
a ladder is debugged. An on–line connection may be
broken depending on the operational status of CNC/PMC.
With the online function of the FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC

LADDER–III, or ladder editing package, the following can be performed
using the personal computer:
D Ladder monitor display
D Online ladder editing (This cannot be used with the PMC–SA1.)
D PMC parameter display and editing
D Signal state monitor display and modifications
D Input/output to and from the PMC (loading from the PMC, storing to
the PMC)
D Writing to FLASH ROM
Before this online function can be used, communication conditions must
be set in the PMC built into the CNC.
607
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.5.1
Online Setting Screen
Fig. 8.5.1 Online monitor setting screen

Meanings of Soft key
EMG ST : Terminates communication forcibly. Use this key if
communication becomes abnormal and the connection
cannot be terminated normally.
INIT : Initializes the parameters to their default values.
NOTE
1 In case of configuration of CNC with which neither Ethernet
nor HSSB is available, the item of ”HIGH SPEED I/F” is not
displayed.
2 In case of display which has 5+2 soft key, two pages are
used for this setting screen.
Switch the page by <Page Up> or <Page Down> key.
8.5.2 To communicate with FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC LADDER–III or

Setting of online Ladder Editing Package, you need to put the PMC system in waiting
situation of the connection. There are two ways for setting this, setting at
connection PMC screen and setting in NC parameter. Also, there are three connection
types, for example Ethernet, RS–232C or HSSB.
608
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.5.2.1 To display the soft key [MONIT] in the PMC main menu screen, set
How to set at PMC ”PROGRAMMER
ENABLE” to ”YES” in the setting screen. When pushing the soft key
Screen
[MONIT]–>[ONLINE], the online setting screen is displayed. (Fig.
8.5.1)
1. Case of connection by RS–232C (FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC
LADDER–III)
(1) Check that ”NOT USE” is selected at the ”RS–232C” item.
(2) Set the parameter of ”CHANNEL” and ”BAUD RATE”.
(3) Move the cursor to the ”RS–232C” item with Up or Down Cursor
key.
(4) Select ”USE” with Left or Right Cursor key.
2. Case of connection by Ethernet (FANUC LADDER–III, Ladder
Editing Package)
(1) Move the cursor to the ”HIGH SPEED I/F” item with Up or Down
Cursor key.
3. Case of connection by HSSB (Ladder Editing Package)
Cursor key.
NOTE
1 When both ”RS–232C = USE” and ”HIGH SPEED I/F =
USE” are selected, the PMC system will communicate with
the application which is connected at first. If PMC system is
already connecting with an application, it can not connect
with other applications.
2 When you use the online function by Ethernet, the setting
of Ethernet parameters at CNC is necessary in advance.
3 Loader control function can not connect with FANUC
LADDER–III or Ladder Editing Package by Ethernet.
609
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.5.2.2 (1) Display the No.24 of NC parameter.

How to set at NC (2) To connect by Ethernet or HSSB, input ”0”, ”11” or ”12”.
parameter To connect by RS–232C, input ”1”, ”2”, ”11” or ”12”.
Contents of NC parameter No.24.
NC parameter Setting of the PMC online monitor screen

No.24 RS–232C HIGH SPEED I/F Meanings
S When ”HIGH SPEED I/F” is not displayed (disabled)
NOT CHANGED –
The settings on the screen are enabled as is.
0
S When ”HIGH SPEED I/F” is displayed (enabled)
NOT USE USE The item of ”RS–232C” is changed to ”NOT USE”.
The item of ”HIGH SPEED I/F” is changed to ”USE”.
The item of ”CHANNEL” is set ”1” and the item of ”RS–232C” is

1 USE (Channel 1) NOT USE changed to ”USE”.
The item of ”HIGH SPEED I/F” is changed to ”NOT USE”.
The item of ”CHANNEL” is set ”2” and the item of ”RS–232C” is

2 USE (Channel 2) NOT USE changed to ”USE”.
The item of ”HIGH SPEED I/F” is changed to ”NOT USE”.
The item of ”CHANNEL” is set ”1” and the item of ”RS–232C” and
11 USE (Channel 1) USE
”HIGH SPEED I/F” are changed to ”USE”.
The item of ”CHANNEL” is set ”2” and the item of ”RS–232C” and
12 USE (Channel 2) USE
”HIGH SPEED I/F” are changed to ”USE”.
3 to 10
(Reserved) (Reserved) Don’t use this setting.
13 to 254
Terminates communication forcibly.It is the same effect as soft key

255 NOT USE NOT USE
[EMG ST].
NOTE
1 If the value of No.24 in NC parameter is changed, the setting
of the online monitor screen of PMC is automatically
changed too. This NC parameter is made effective
immediately after changing setting of the parameter.
2 Even if the setting of the online monitor screen of PMC is
changed, the value of No.24 in NC parameter is not
changed
610
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.5.2.3 (1) Display the No.101 of NC parameter.

How to set at NC (2) To connect by RS–232C, input ”1” to No.101#6.
parameter (Power
Mate–D/H) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 1
#6 0 : Online monitor driver is not used.

1 : Online monitor driver is used.
NOTE
1 In case of Power Mate–D 2 path–control, only a parameter
for 1 path is available.
2 The online monitor driver occupies the line while it is
operating. In this state, other input/output functions cannot
use the line. For other input/output functions to use the line,
it is necessary to display the above–mentioned parameter
and stop the online monitor driver.
3 While the online monitor driver is operating, the following
functions cannot be used.
D [PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], [SYSPRM] on CRT/MDI
D [EDIT], [SYSTEM PARAM], [I/O] on DPL/MDI
4 In case of operating NC, the screen display of NC (Position,
etc.) might be slow when using input/output functions (Load
program, Store program, etc.). There is no problem in the
operation of NC. It is recommended to use input/output
functions while NC is not operating.
5 When the screen made by C language executor is
displayed, the communication may be slow down. It is
recommended to use input/output functions after moving to
other screens (Position, etc).
611
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.5.3
Online Function by
Ethernet
8.5.3.1 When you try to connect FANUC LADDER–III or Ladder Editing

Setting of Ethernet Package (Window version) with CNC by Ethernet, it is necessary to set
some Ethernet parameters. The setting of Ethernet parameters can be set
parameters
in the following Ethernet parameter screen of CNC. Please refer to
”FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPERATOR’S
MANUAL” (B–63354EN) about the detail of the setting screen and
setting parameters. The setting item necessary for Ethernet connection for
PMC online function is as follows.
– IP ADDRESS (Set the IP address of CNC. 192.168.0.1
etc.)
– SUBNET MASK (Set the mask address of the IP address.
255.255.255.0 etc.)
– ROUTER IP ADDRESS (If you use the router, set the Router IP
Address.)
– PORT NUMBER (TCP) (8193 etc.)
612
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.5.3.2 The procedures for online connection with PMC and the offline
Starting online programmer (FANUC LADDER–III, Ladder Editing Package for
windows) by Ethernet are as follows.
communication by
(Example: FANUC LADDER–III)
offline programmer
(Ethernet connection) (1) Start up FANUC LADDER–III, and click the [Communication] on
[Tool] menu.
(2) Select the [Network Address] tab and push the <Add Host> button.
Input the ”IP Address” and ”Port No.” inputted by ”8.5.3.1 Setting of
Ethernet parameters”.
613
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
(3) Select the [Setting] tab, and add the IP Address to ”Use device”.
(4) Push the <Connect> button for start of the communication.

Ladder Editing Package can be connected by the same operation too.
Refer to ”FANUC LADDER–III OPERATOR’S MANUAL”
(B–66234EN) as for the detail of operation of FANUC LADDER–III.
Refer to ”LADDER EDITING PACKAGE (Windows) OPERATOR’S
MANUAL” (B–63484EN) as for the detail operation of Ladder Editing
Package.
CAUTION
1 When one of the following screens is displayed at PMC, the
online communication can not be used. Change to other
screens from the following screens, and use the online
function.
[PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], [SYSPRM], [TRACE], [USRDGN],
[DBGLAD], [GDT], [USRMEM]
2 When the online function is used with RS–232C, the
selected channel is occupied by the PMC system. To use
other input/output functions with RS–232C, specify other
channel setting than the one used by online function.
614
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
8.5.4 The communication status of RS–232C and HIGH SPEED I/F are
Communication Status displayed at the online monitor screen during the online communication.
Fig. 8.5.4 Online monitor setting screen
USE TIME : The maximum time in the communication processing is dis-

played.
RS–232C : The communication condition of RS–232C is displayed.
HIGH SPEED I/F : The communication condition of HIGH SPEED I/F is dis-
played.
ETHER_BOARD : Displayed during the communication with Ethernet board.
The IP address of the communication partner is displayed.
HSSB : Displayed during the communication with HSSB.
The display messages and the meanings are shown in the table of below.
Displayed messages Meanings
INACTIVE The communication is inactive.
STOPPING The communication is being stopped.(Wait for the

termination of communication)
STARTING The communication is being started.(Wait for the

termination of communication over another commu-
nication path)
STAND–BY The communication is active and in standby mode.
CONNECTED The communication is active and being connected.
NO OPTION The port can be not opened because there is not

option of RS–232C.
BAD PARAMETER Invalid open parameters are specified.
TIMEOUT ERROR A time–out has occurred and communication is

aborted.
615
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
TIMEOUT(K) ERROR A time–out has occurred and communication is

aborted.
BCC ERROR A Block Check Code (packet parity) error has oc-
curred.
PARITY ERROR A parity error has occurred.
OVER–RUN ERROR A reception overrun has occurred and the commu-

nication can not recover.
SEQUENCE ERROR Packets are out of sequence.(Incorrect procedure)
DATA ERROR Incorrect packets have been received through retry

process.
QUEUE OVERFLOW The transmit/receive queue has overflowed.
DISCONNECTED Communication has been terminated successfully.
NO CONNECTION The cable is disconnected.
PORT BUSY ERROR The RS–232C port is already used.
8.5.5 If any errors have occurred during Ethernet connection, the contents of the
errors are displayed at ”ETHLOG” screen of CNC. Refer to this screen
About Connection Log
when the communication does not start.
of Ethernet
616
AREAS AND DEBUGGING
Connection Log Meanings and countermeasures
SnpErr:PDU=m,n,[x] date time An error has occurred during the online communication.
m, n : Online communication information that is internal information of a system.
SnpErr:PDU=n,[x] date time
x : Error information
SnpErr:TaskTimeOut[x] date time 6001 PMC does not support the Ethernet.Confirm the Series/Edition of PMC
software.
6003 Unsupported command data was received.Confirm the Series/Edition of
Ethernet board software.
6004 There was an error in command dataConfirm the Series/Edition of
6005 PMC does not receive command data.Confirm the communication sta-
tus at the online setting screen of PMC.
6010 PMC does not receive command data.Confirm if ”HIGH SPEED
I/F=USE” is selected and other application is not connected at the online
setting screen of PMC.
6011 Time–out error occurred at PMC.Increase the value of ”Time Out” in
[Network Address] of [Communication] menu for FANUC LADDER–III or
Ladder Editing Package.
6012 PMC does not receive command data because it is busy for proces-
sing.Confirm the communication status at the online setting screen of
PMC.
6013 Time–out error occurred at PMCIncrease the value of ”Time Out” in
[Network Address] of [Communication] menu for FANUC LADDER–III or
6101 PMC received an unsupported function code.Confirm the Series/Edition
of PMC software.
date : The date when the error occurred.
Ex.) ”0126” means January 26th.
time : The time when the error occurred.
Ex.) ”1623” means 4:23 PM.
617
9. ERROR MESSAGES
(FOR EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
9 ERROR MESSAGES (FOR EDIT)
Error messages (For EDIT 1)
Message Contents and solution

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The address of the relay/coil is not set.
FUNCTION NOT FOUND There is no functional instruction of the input number.
COM FUNCTION MISSING The functional instruction COM(SUB9) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of COM and COME(SUB29) is incorrect.
Or, the number of coil controlled by COM is specified by the model which the number
cannot be specified.(It is possible to specify the number of coil only on PMC–RB/RC.)
EDIT BUFFER OVER There is no empty area of the buffer for the editing.
(solution) Please reduce NET under editing.
END FUNCTION MISSING Functional instruction END1, END2, END3 and END do not exist
Or, there are error net in END1, END2, END3, END.
Or, order of END1, END2, END3, and END is not correct.
ERROR NET FOUND There is an error net.
ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. The wrong number of the functional instruction is searched.
FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL The functional instruction is not correctly connected.
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal line of the net is not connected.
ILLEGAL NET CLEARED Because the power had been turn off while editing LADDER, some net under editing was cleared.
ILLEGAL OPERATION Operation is not correct.
The value is not specified and only INPUT key was pushed.
The address data is not correctly inputted.
Because the space to display the instruction on screen is not enough, the functional instruction
cannot be made.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED The symbol which was inputted is not defined.
INPUT INVALID There is an incorrect input data.
Non–numerical value was inputted with COPY,INSLIN,C–UP, C–DOWN etc.
The input address was specified for write coil.
An illegal character was specified for the data table.
NET TOO LARGE The input net is larger than the editing buffer.
(solution) Please reduce the net under editing.
JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The functional instruction JMP(SUB10) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of JMP and JMPE(SUB30) is incorrect.
The number of coil to jump is specified by the model which the number of coil cannot specified.
(It is possible to specify the coil number only on PMC–SB/SC.)
LADDER BROKEN LADDER is broken.
LADDER ILLEGAL There is an incorrect LADDER.
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE You try to edit sequence program on the ROM.
OBJECT BUFFER OVER The sequence program area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the LADDER.
PARAMETER NOTHING There is no parameter of the functional instruction.
PLEASE COMPLETE NET The error net was found in LADDER.
(solution) After correcting the error net, please continue operating.
PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO. Please input the number of the functional instruction.
(solution) If you do not input the functional instruction, please push soft key ”FUNC” again.
PROGRAM MODULE NOTHING You tried to edit though there was neither RAM for debugging nor ROM for sequence program.
RELAY COIL FORBIT There is an unnecessary relay or coil.
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING The relay or the coil does not suffice.
PLEASE CLEAR ALL It is impossible to recover the sequence program.
(solution) Please clear the all data.
618
9. ERROR MESSAGES
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (FOR EDIT)
Error messages (For EDIT 2)

SYMBOL DATA DUPLICATE The same symbol name is defined in other place.
COMMENT DATA OVERFLOW The comment data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the comment.
SYMBOL DATA OVERFLOW The symbol data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the symbol.
VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL There is an incorrect vertical line of the net.
MESSAGE DATA OVERFLOW The message data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the message.
1ST LEVEL EXECUTE TIME OVER The 1st level of LADDER is too large to complete execution in time.
(solution) Please reduce the 1st level of LADDER.
PARA NO.RANGE ERR : A parameter number used for a functional instruction falls outside the allowable range.
functional–instructionname (solution) Change the parameter number to a value within the allowable range.
PARA NO.DUPLICATE : A parameter number used for a functional instruction is specified more than once.
functional–instructionname (solution) Change the number to a number that has not yet been used if duplicate execution causes
EXIT ? an error.
Error messages (during automatic F–ROM writing after ladder editing)

PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists in flash ROM. (Upon BLANK execution)
PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists in flash ROM.
(EXEC?) (Action) While the message is being displayed, press the EXEC key again to execute
WRITE or ERASE. (Upon WRITE or ERASE execution)
PROGRAM NOTHING No program exists in flash ROM.
ERASE ERROR Flash ROM has failed and requires replacement. Contact a FANUC service
F–ROM WRITE ERROR 13 representative.
F–ROM WRITE ERROR 28
WRITE ERROR
READ ERROR
ANOTHER USED A unit other than the PMC is using the flash ROM.
MUST BE IN EMG STOP The CNC is not in emergency stop mode.
NOT EMG STOP
NO OPTION The ROM cassette option is not provided.
SIZE ERROR The size of a sequence program is larger than that of the flash ROM. (Upon WRITE
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE (SIZE OVER) execution)
NO SPACE (Action) Try the CONDENSE function (on the EDIT/CLEAR screen). If the problem
F–ROM WRITE ERROR 1 persists, increase the flash ROM size.
F–ROM WRITE ERROR 15 The size of a sequence program to be read is larger than that of RAM. (Upon READ
F–ROM WRITE ERROR 35 execution)
(Action) Increase the RAM size.
619
10. ERROR MESSAGES (FOR I/O) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
10 ERROR MESSAGES (FOR I/O)
Error messages (For I/O 2)

I/O OPEN ERROR nn An error occurs when the reader/puncher interface was started.
nn = –1 Because the interface is used with NC etc., the interface is not able to be opened by PMC
side.
(solution) After other functions finishes using the line, please execute again.
6 There is no option for the interface.
20 The interface cannot be opened.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm setting of the
baud rate etc.
I/O WRITE ERROR nn An output error occurred in the reader/puncher interface.
nn = 20 The state of the interface is not correct.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm setting the baud
rate etc.
22 Opponent side is not ready to receive.
(solution) Please confirm the power supply on the opponent side. Or, please initialize the
interface.
I/O READ ERROR nn An input error occurred in the reader/puncher interface.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm setting the baud
rate etc.
21 The data is not sent from the opponent side.
(solution) Please confirm the power supply on the opponent side.
I/O LIST ERROR nn An error occurred in directory read processing from FD Cassette.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm setting of the baud
rate etc.
COMPARE ERR xxxxxx = aa:bb A compare error occurred.
CONT?(Y/N) xxxxxx : The Address where the compare error occurred.
aa : The data on PMC side
bb : The data on device side
Enter ’Y’ to continue processing.
ADDRESS IS OUT OF The data transferred to the address out of the PMC debugging RAM area.
RANGE(xxxxxx) xxxxxx : Transferred address.
(solution) Please confirm the address of the transferring data.
LADDER : Please confirm the model setting.
C language : Please confirm setting the address in the link control statement and build file.
ROM WRITER ERROR nnnnnn An error occurred in the ROM writer.
620
11. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI)
B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate)
11 PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI)

(ONLY FOR THE Power Mate)
The DPL/MDI panel is used to set PMC system parameters and create and
execute the sequence program.
(1) Setting and displaying PMC system parameters (SYSTEM PARAM)
– The type of counter data (BCD or binary) can be selected.
(2) Editing the sequence program (EDIT)
– The sequence program can be edited (input, addition, search, and
deletion) by using the ladder mnemonics display.
(3) Executing the sequence program (RUN/STOP)
– The execution of the sequence program can be started and
stopped.
(4) Storing the sequence program into FLASH ROM (I/O)
– The sequence program can be stored into FLASH ROM (only for
the Power Mate–H and Power Mate i–D/H).
The DPL/MDI panel is shown below.
X
O N G AXIS
DGNOS
PARAM POS
Y K/A G X
F M S T OPR
ALARM PRGRM
F RD WRT NOT
H # / EOB &@ MENU

SUB OR AND STK NO. VAR
P
7 8 9 P I READ INSRT
Q
4 5 6 T/C J WRITE DELET
R
1 2 3 D/R K
ALTER
0 –/+ & CAN INPUT
Fig. 11 DPL/MDI panel for Power Mate
621
(ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15
NOTE
1 With the PMC programmer (DPL/MDI) function, the
characters indicated at the lower–left part of each key are
used.
2 When the <D/R> key is pressed once, the left–hand
character is valid. When the <D/R> key is pressed twice, the
right–hand character is valid.
The screen configuration for the PMC programmer (DPL/MDI) function

is as follows:
PMC programmer menu Sequence program start and stop

<INPUT>or<READ>
PMC PRG MENU 1/3 LADDER RUN/STOP
>RUN/STOP MONITOR (STOP)
<CAN>or<WRITE>
<↑> <↓>
<INPUT> PMC editing menu <INPUT> Editing ladder mnemonics

or<READ> or<READ>
PMC PRG MENU 2/3 PMC EDIT 1/1 N0001
>EDIT >LADDER RD X0000.0
<CAN>or <CAN>or
<WRITE> <WRITE>
<↑> <↓>
<INPUT> Setting and displaying PMC system parameters

or<READ>
PMC PRG MENU 3/3 CTR TYPE=BCD
>SYSTEM PARAM (BINARY=0/BCD=1)
<CAN>or
<WRITE>
The Power Mater–H supports the following screen:
<↑> <↓>
Screen for storing the sequence
<INPUT> program into FLASH ROM
or<WRITE>
PMC PRG MENU 4/4 DEVICE=F–ROM
>I/O >WRITE Y/N[YES]
<CAN>
622
11.1 To operate the PMC programmer, set K17#1 of the keep relay area for
PMC parameters to 1, then press the <PRGRM> key two times on the
SELECTING THE DPL/MDI (press the <PRGRM> key further when the program screen is
PMC PROGRAMMER selected), thus causing the PMC programmer menu to be displayed.
MENU
Program screen PMC programmer menu screen
<O0001> N010!G90 PMC PRG MENU 1/3

G01 G43 X10 ; <PRGRM> >RUN/STOP
Can be switched only when K17#1 = 1.
To return to the CNC screen, press the <POS>, <PRGRM>, <VAR>,

<DGNOS/PARAM>, or <ALARM> key.
<POS> Current
Position screen
<PRGRM>
Program screen
<PRGRM>
PMC programmer screen (K17#1=1)
(PMC programmer menu)
(PMC editing menu) <ALARM>
Alarm/Message screen
<DGNOS/
PARAM>
Parameter/Diagnostic screen
<VAR>
Offset/Setting/Macro
Variable screen
The following keys on the DPL/MDI panel are used for PMC operation:
1 <POS>, <PRGRM>, <VAR>, <DGNOS/PARAM>, <ALARM> key
Returns to the CNC screen.
2 <↑> key
Shifts the cursor upward.
3 <↓> key
Shifts the cursor downward.
4 <INPUT>, <READ> key
Selects a function when the PMC programmer menu or PMC editing
menu is displayed.
5 <CAN>, <WRITE> key
Returns to the previous menu from the PMC programmer menu or
PMC editing menu.
623
11.2 Selecting SYSTEM PARAM on the PMC programmer menu displays the
system parameter screen. If the sequence program is running, selecting
SETTING AND this function automatically stops the program.
DISPLAYING SYSTEM
1 Display the PMC programmer menu.
PARAMETERS
2 Display the SYSTEM PARAM item by pressing the <↓> or <↑> key.
(SYSTEM PARAM)
PMC PRG MENU 3/3
>SYSTEM PARAM
3 Press the <INPUT> or <READ> key. The system parameter screen

appears.
CTR TYPE = BIN

(BINARY=0/BCD=1)
4 The current counter data type is displayed on the screen.

(a) Specify the type of the counter value to be used for the CTR
functional instruction, as binary or BCD (enter <0> for binary or
<1> for BCD).
(b) Press the <INPUT> key.
The counter data type is set.
5 Pressing the <CAN> or <WRITE> key displays the PMC
programmer menu.
CAUTION
If the PMC parameter keep relay K19#0 is set to 1, the
screen for writing a sequence program into FLASH ROM is
displayed upon the completion of editing. (This is applicable
to the Power Mate–H and Power Mate i–D/H only).
DEVICE=F–ROM
>WRITE Y/N [YES]
Write a sequence program into FLASH ROM as explained

in Section 11.7.
624
11.3 Selecting EDIT on the PMC programmer menu displays the editing
menu.
EDITING THE
SEQUENCE 1 Display the PMC programmer menu.
PROGRAM (EDIT) 2 Display the EDIT item by pressing the <↓> or <↑> key.
PMC PRG MENU 2/3

>EDIT
3 Press the <INPUT> or <READ> key. The PMC editing menu

appears.
PMC EDIT 1/1

>LADDER
To end editing and display the PMC programmer menu, press the <CAN>
or <WRITE> key.
625
11.4
EDITING LADDER
MNEMONICS
11.4.1 When ladder mnemonic editing (LADDER) is selected from the PMC
Starting Ladder edit menu, the ladder mnemonic edit screen is displayed.
When this function is selected, the sequence program stops.
Mnemonics Editing
1 Display the PMC edit menu screen.
2 Display the LADDER item by pressing the <±> or <°> key.
PMC EDIT 1/1

>LADDER
3 Press the <INPUT> or <READ> key.

When a password is set for the ladder: Proceed to step 4.
When no password is set for the ladder: Proceed to step 6.
4 If a password is set, a password clear request is displayed.
PASSWORD (R/W)
NOTE
For a ladder for which a password has been set, the ladder
mnemonic editing function cannot be started unless the
correct password is entered. Once the password is cleared,
the password remains cleared until the power is turned off
then back on.
5 Enter the password, then press the <INPUT> key.
NOTE
The entered password is not displayed (not echoed back on
the screen).
If the entered password is incorrect, the following error message is

displayed.
FALSE PASSWORD
If the <INPUT> key is pressed at this time, the screen display returns
to the password clear request screen.
If the <CAN> key is pressed at this time, the screen display returns
to the PMC edit menu.
If the entered password is correct, the password is cleared.
626
6 A sequence program is displayed.

Step number
> N0001
RD X0000.0
Instruction
11.4.2 1 Cursor scroll (scroll per step)

Pressing the <↑> cursor key displays the instruction one step before
Confirming the Ladder
that currently displayed. Pressing the <↓> cursor key displays the
Mnemonics instruction one step after that currently displayed.
2 Specifying the step number
Entering <NO.>, <step number>, then <INPUT> displays the
instruction having the entered step number.
(The <↓> cursor key can be used instead of the <INPUT> key.)
(Example) <NO.>, <123>, <↓>
N0123
SUB 50 PSGNL
3 Relay search
Entering <address number> then <↓> searches for the relay
including the entered address.
(Example) <X0.2>, <↓>
N0105
AND X0000.2
4 Relay coil search

Entering <WRT>, <address number>, then <↓> searches for the
relay coil including the entered address.
(Example) <WRT>, <Y33.5>, <↓>
N0187
WRT. NOT Y0033.5
5 Functional instruction search

Entering <SUB>, <functional instruction number>, then <↓>
searches for the entered functional instruction.
(Example) <SUB>, <50>, <↓>
N0123
SUB 50 PSGNL
627
NOTE
1 Relay search, relay coil search, and functional instruction
search are started from the current screen. If the relay, relay
coil, or instruction is not found by the end of the ladder
program, search is performed from the beginning of the
ladder program to the step at which search was started. If
still not found, ”NOT FOUND” is displayed.
N0105 NOT FOUND
AND X0000.2
2 Display of some instructions may differ from that for FANUC

LADDER.
P–G, personal–computer FANUC LADDER Ladder mnemonics editing
(a) RD.NOT.STK RD.N.STK
(b) TMR timer–number SUB 03 TMR

P001 timer–number
(c) DEC code–signal–address SUB 04 DEC

(PRM) decode–instruction P001 code–signal–address
P002 decode–instruction
The above also applies when modifying the ladder

mnemonics.
11.4.3 1 Changing an instruction

Modifying the Ladder (a) Display the instruction to be changed.
Mnemonics (b) Enter a new instruction.
(c) Press the <ALTER> key.
(Example) <OR>, <Y32.4>, <ALTER>
N1234
AND R0123.4
Before change
N1234
OR Y0032.4
After change
CAUTION
If changing the instruction causes the memory capacity to
be exceeded, the <ALTER> key is ignored without changing
the instruction.
2 Deleting an instruction
(a) Display the instruction to be deleted.
(b) Press the <DELET> key.
The instruction is deleted and the next instruction is displayed.
628
3 Inserting an instruction
(a) Display the instruction after which an instruction is to be inserted.
(b) Enter the instruction to be inserted.
(c) Press the <INSRT> key.
(Example) <AND>, <STK>, <INSRT>
N1234
AND R0123.4
Before insertion
N1234
AND.STK
After insertion
NOTE
If inserting the instruction causes the memory capacity to be
exceeded, the <INSRT> key is ignored without inserting the
instruction.
4 Deleting the ladder program

(a) Enter <–9999>.
(b) Press the <DELET> key.
The whole ladder program is deleted.
NOTE
In editing the functional instruction TMR, TMRB, CTR,
DIFU, DIFD, the range and the multiple use of parameters
are checked.
When the parameter is out of range error, it can not be
inputted. When parameter is multiple use error, the error
message is displayed on the screen.
(Example) Error message of multiple use.
N00010 TMR (DUP)

P001 50
629
11.4.4 1 Press the <CAN> or <WRITE> key.

Ending Ladder 2 ”EXECUTING” is displayed.
Mnemonics Editing
N0001
EXECUTING
3 The PMC editing menu appears.
NOTE
1 If the sequence program contains an error, the PMC editing
menu is not displayed but an error message appears on the
screen.
(Example) Error message
END FUNCTION
MISSING
Pressing the <↑> or <↓> cursor key displays the ladder

mnemonics editing screen.
2 Pressing the <POS>, <PRGRM>, <VAR>,
<DGNOS/PARAM>, or <ALARM> key during the editing of
the sequence program displays the CNC screen by forcibly
terminating editing even if the program contains an error.
3 When K19#0 of the keep relay area for PMC parameter is
set to 1, the screen for storing the sequence program into
FLASH ROM is displayed after ladder editing. (Only for
Power Mate–H, Power Mate i–D/H)
DEVICE=F–ROM
>WRITE Y/N [YES]
Please refer to the item 11.7 and storing the sequence

program into FLASH ROM.
4 When parameter is multiple use error, the error message is
displayed on the screen.
(Example) Error message
FUNC. PARAM NO.

DUPLICATE
Pressing the <↑> or <↓> cursor key displays the ladder

mnemonics editing screen. Pressing <CAN> or <WRITE>
key again displays the PMC programmer menu.
630
11.5 Selecting RUN/STOP on the PMC programmer menu displays the

sequence program start/stop screen.
STARTING AND
STOPPING THE 1 Display the PMC programmer menu.
SEQUENCE 2 Display the RUN/STOP item by pressing the <↓> or <↑> key.
PROGRAM PMC PRG MENU 1/3
(RUN/STOP) >RUN/STOP
3 Press the <INPUT> or <READ> key. The sequence program

start/stop screen appears.
LADDER RUN/STOP
MONITOR [RUN]
4 The current execution state of the sequence program is displayed on

the screen.
Pressing the <↓> or <↑> key switches the state between running and
stopped.
5 Pressing the <CAN> or <WRITE> key displays the PMC
programmer menu.
CAUTION
When the sequence program cannot be started(RUN), the
alarm of PMC occurred. Please confirm the alarm status
referring to “11.11 Error List”.
631
11.6
Displayed error message Error description (operator action)
ERROR MESSAGES 1 COIL NOTHING No coil is specified for a functional instruction
(FOR LADDER using a coil.
MNEMONICS 2 COM FUNCTION MISSING The use of the COM (SUB9) functional
instruction is incorrect.
EDITING) 3 END FUNCTION MISSING The END1 or END2 functional instruction is
missing (or ERROR NET).
4 JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The use of the JMP (SUB10) functional
instruction is incorrect.
5 LADDER BROKEN The ladder program is corrupted.
6 OBJECT BUFFER OVER The user program RAM is full.
(Note) (Perform condensation or reduce the
size of the ladder program.)
7 PLEASE CLEAR ALL The sequence program has become unrecov-
erable due to power–off during editing.
8 1ST LEVEL EXEC TIME OVER The ladder first level is too great.
9 FUNC, PARAM NO. OUT OF There is out of range error in the parameter of
RANGE functional instruction TMR, TMRB, CTR,
DIFU, DIFD. It is displayed when mnemonics
editing is finished.
10 FUNC. PARAM NO. DUPLICATE There is multiple use error in the parameter of
functional instruction TMR, TMRB, CTR,
DIFU, DIFD. It is displayed when mnemonics
editing is finished.
11 Nxxxxx yyyy (RNG) There is out of range error in the parameter of
P0001 nnn functional instruction TMR, TMRB, CTR,
DIFU, DIFD.
xxxxx : Step number
yyyy : Functional instruction
nnn : Parameter
12 Nxxxxx yyyy (DUP) There is multiple use error in the parameter of
P0001 nnn functional instruction TMR, TMRB, CTR,
DIFU, DIFD.
xxxxx : Step number
yyyy : Functional instruction
nnn : Parameter
632
11.7 Selecting I/O on the PMC programmer menu displays the screen for
storing the sequence program into FLASH ROM. Before attempting to
STORING THE store the sequence program into FLASH ROM, place the CNC in the
SEQUENCE emergency stop state.
PROGRAM INTO (1) Display the PMC programmer menu.
FLASH ROM (I/O) (2) Display the I/O item by pressing the <↓> or <↑> key.
(ONLY FOR THE
Power Mate–H AND PMC PRG MENU 4/4
>I/O
Power Mate i–D/H)
(3) Press the <INPUT> or <WRITE> key. The sequence program
storage screen appears. Pressing the <↓> or <↑> key switches display
between [YES] and [NO].
<↓>
DEVICE=F–ROM DEVICE=F–ROM
>WRITE!Y/N[YES] >WRITE!Y/N[NO ]
<↑>
(4) When [NO] is displayed, pressing the <INPUT> key displays the
sequence program storage screen. When [YES] is displayed, pressing
the <INPUT> key starts writing the sequence program into FLASH
ROM.
”EXECUTING” is displayed during writing.
WRITE TO F–ROM ”EXECUTING” BLINKS.

EXECUTING
Once the sequence program has been written normally,

”COMPLETE” is displayed.
WRITE TO F–ROM
COMPLETE
NOTE
If an error occurs, an error message appears on the screen.
Example Example error message
NOT EMG STOP
To return to the sequence program storage screen, press the <↑> or

<↓> key.
(5) Pressing the <CAN> key displays the PMC programmer menu.
633
11.8 The table below lists the details of the errors which may occur during
storage into FLASH ROM using the DPL/MDI (only for the Power
ERROR DETAILS Mate–H and Power Mate i–D/H).
Error message Description
PROGRAM DATA The ladder data in RAM is invalid. Alternatively,
ERROR there is no RAM or ROM.
SIZE ERROR The program exceeds the maximum size which can
be written into F–ROM.
NOT EMG STOP The CNC is not in the emergency stop state.
OPEN ERROR The OPEN processing has failed.
ERASE ERROR The ERASE processing has failed.
The F–ROM cannot be erased. Alternatively, the
F–ROM is defective.
WRITE ERROR The WRITE processing has failed.
The F–ROM cannot be written. Alternatively, the
F–ROM is defective.
634
11.9
INPUT/OUTPUT
LADDER/
PMC–PARAMETER
BY DPL/MDI
11.9.1 D Method of Inputting/Outputting Ladder

Input/Output Method to (1) Select “Diagnose screen” by key in <DGNOS> key.
Office Programmer (2) Key in <READ>key or <WRITE> key.
(P–G Mate/Mark II) (3) Turn on <F8> key from the office programmer menu screen, and
(Fixed 9600bit/Sec.) key in menu number “5<NL>” or “3<NL>”.
11.9.2 D Method of Inputting Ladder and PMC–Parameter.

Input/Output Method to (1) Select “Diagnose screen” by key in <DGNOS>key.
FANUC FLOPPY (2) Key in <NO.>key.
CASSETTE (3) Key in the number of a file containing ladders or PMC parameters.
(Fixed 4800bit/Sec.) (4) Key in <READ>key.
CAUTION
In case of input PMC–Parameter, it is necessary to set
following conditions.
(a)Emergency stop condition, and NC–Parameter PWE=1.
(b)Stop condition the Ladder program.
D Method of Outoutting Ladder.

(1) Select “Diagnose screen” by key in <DGNOS>key.
(2) Key in <NO.>key and optionally key in [Files No.].
(3) Key in <WRITE>.
D Method of Outputting PMC–Patameter.

(1) Select “PMC STATUS screen” by key in <DIGNOS>key.
(2) Key in <No.> key and optionally key in [File No.].
(3) Key in <WRITE>.
CAUTION
In case of output PMC–Parameter, it is necessary to set
following condition.
(a)Edit mode.
(b)Stop condition the Ladder program.
635
11.10 The on–line debugging function enables the monitoring and modification
of ladder programs and signal status on personal computer’s screen using
ON–LINE a personal computer connected to the Power Mate through an RS–232C
DEBUGGING cable.
FUNCTION
(ONLY FOR Power CAUTION
Mate–D/H AND Power The additional option of the Ladder On–line debugging
function is necessary to use the on–line debugging function
Mate i–D/H)
on PMC–PA3 for Power Mate–D.
FANUC FANUC LADDER–II is necessary to use the on–line debugging

function. (This software is a programming system for developing
FANUC PMC sequence programs which operate on IBM PC/AT and
compatible computers.)
Software name Specification Personal computer

FANUC LADDER–II A08B–9201–J503 IBM PC/AT and compatible
In this section, only the parameter of on–line monitor driver for Power
Mate–H and attention in use is described. Other points(connection of
cable with personal computer, details of the operation, etc.) are described
in the following manual.
Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items

FANUC LADDER–II OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–66184EN On–line function
11.10.1 When using the on–line debugging function to connect a personal

Starting and Stopping computer to the PMC, first start the driver that provides the
communication function of the PMC.
the On–line Debugging When starting or stopping the driver, it is necessary to set either of the
Function following parameters.
D Parameter screen for on–line monitor(dPARAMETERS FOR ONLINE
MONITORc)
Pressing the [MONIT] then [ONLINE] soft keys on the PMC menu
screen causes the on–line monitor parameter screen to appear.
ParameterdRS–232Cc = dUSEc : On–line monitor driver is used.
dNOT USEc: On–line monitor driver is not
used.
CAUTION
The CRT/MDI is necessary when the parameter is set on the
“PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR” screen.
636
D Parameter in the Power Mate–D/H (No.0101#6)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101
#6 = 0 : On–line monitor driver is not used.

1 : On–line monitor driver is used.
NOTE
In case of Power Mate–D two–path control, only the
parameter of first path side is effective.
When either of the following conditions consists, the on–line monitor

driver is started.
DParameter “RS–232C” is “USE”
DBit 6 of parameter No.0101 is “1”
CAUTION
1 The on–line monitor driver occupies the line while it is
operating.
In this state, other input/output functions cannot use the
line.
If other input/output functions use the line, it is necessary to
display the above–mentioned parameter and stop the
on–line monitor driver.
2 While the on–line monitor driver is operating, the following
functions cannot be used.
D[PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], [SYSPRM] on CRT/MDI
D[EDIT], [SYSTEM PARAM], [I/O] on DPL/MDI
3 In case of operating NC, the screen display of NC(Position,
etc.) might be slow when using input/output functions(Load
from PMC, Store to PMC, etc.). There is no problem in the
operation of NC. It is recommended to using input/output
functions while NC is not operating.
4 When the screen made by C language executor is
displayed, the communication speed decreases. It is
recommended to use input/output functions after moving to
other screens(Position, etc.).
637
11.11 If in alarm is issued in the PMC, the alarn message is displayed on the
CRT (PMC ALARM MESSAGE screeen). But in case of DPL/MDI, it
ERROR LIST is displayed only by R–relay status (ON or Off).
Refer to the “APPENDIX L.ALARM MESSAGE LIST” for more
information.
(1) Error ststus at power on or PROGRAM DOWN LOAD.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9044
1 ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR (RAM)
3 ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR (OPTION)
4 ER04 LADDER OBJECT TYPE ERROR
7 ER07 NO OPTION (LADDER STEP)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9046
0 ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR (PROGRAM RAM)
1 ER17 PROGRAM PARITY
2 ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O
3 ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR
4 ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA ERROR
5 ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR
6 ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING
7 ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER
638
IV. PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 1. OVERVIEW
1 OVERVIEW
In the NC system, clicking the [PMC] soft key on the [SYSTEM] menu
enables the setting and display of data related to the PMC. The following
screens are used to specify and display the PMC–related data.
(1) Ladder diagram display and editing (PMCLAD)
(2) Displaying PMC input/output signals and internal relay (PMCDGN)
(a) Title data screen
(b) Status screen
(c) Alarm screen
(d) Trace screen
(e) I/O Link monitor screen
(3) PMC data setting and display (PMCPRM)
(f) Timer
(g) Counter
(h) Keep relay
(i) Data table
(4) Specifying PMC setting data (SETING)
(j) General setting data
(k) Setting data related to editing and debugging
(l) Online monitor parameter
(5) Writing, reading, and collating sequence programs and PMC
parameters (I/O)
641
2. SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU
SELECTION PROCEDURE PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
2 SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE
While the <SYSTEM> function key on the LCD/MDI is held down,

clicking the [PMC] soft key displays the following PMC basic menu.
642
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SELECTION PROCEDURE
2.1
Title line
PMC BASIC MENU Status line
Key in buffer
Soft key
(1) Title line

This line displays the title of each PMC system screen.
It also displays the status of the PMC system at the right–hand end.
RUN STOP . . . . Whether the sequence program is running is
indicated. [RUN] means that the sequence
program is running. [STOP] means that the
sequence program is at a halt.
ALM . . . . . . . . . This character string appears if a PMC alarm has
occurred.
(2) Status line
This line displays NC information. The display is the same as that on
the NC system screen.
(3) Key–in buffer
This area displays the data that was typed in.
(4) Soft key
The soft key field consists of a soft key at both ends and ten soft keys
in between. The left–end key has the following meaning:
Return key . . Clicking this key returns you to the previous
screen.
If the built–in debug function is disabled (bit 1 of K900 = 0), the basic
menu appears as follows:
643
644
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SELECTION PROCEDURE
2.2
PMC SCREEN
TRANSITION AND
RELATED SOFT
KEYS
NC system screen
PMC
<
PMC basic menu screen
PMCLAD Ladder diagram display/editing screen
<
TITLE Title screen
PMCDGN STATUS Status screen
<
ALARM Alarm screen
TRACE Trace screen
I/O Link connection display

I/O LINK screen
TIMER Timer screen
PMCPRM Counter screen

COUNTR
<
KEEPRL Keep relay screen
DATA Data table screen
Setting menu screen

SETING
< GENERAL General setting data
EDIT/
DEBUG Data related to editing and debugging
ONLINE Online parameter setting
Continues to the next page
645
Continues from the previous page
I/O I/O screen

<
RUN
Program restart function
or
STOP
TITLE Title data editor screen
SYMBOL Symbol and comment data editor

COMENT screen
MISC Symbol and comment data editor

DATA MESSAGE screen
<
I/O I/O unit assignment editor screen
MODULE
SYSTEM System parameter editor screen

PARAM
646
3. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN)
3 DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND

INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN)
647
(PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
3.1 The title data corresponds to the title of a sequence program. It consists
of the following items:
TITLE DATA DISPLAY
(TITLE)
D Machine tool builder name (32 characters)

D Machine name (32 characters)
D NC/PMC type (32 characters)
D Edition (2 characters)
D Sequence program drawing (32 characters)
D Sequence program creation date (16 characters)
D Sequence program creator name (32 characters)
D ROM writer operator name (32 characters)
In addition, the following data is displayed:
D PMC basic software series and edition
D Amount of memory occupied by each set of sequence data
D PMC basic software type and sequence program PMC type
D Current, maximum, and minimum execution time of the ladder
program
When the [EDIT] soft key is pressed, the Title Editor Screen appears.
NOTE
1 When ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” is set to ”YES” on the
GENERAL screen of Setting screen, the [EDIT] soft key
appears on the Title Data Display screen.
2 If the [EDIT] soft key is pressed while Online function is
being executed, the ”ONLINE MONITOR IS ACTIVE”
message is displayed and the Title Editor screen does not
appear.
648
3.2 When the [EDIT] soft key is pressed on the Title Data Display screen, the
Title Data Editor screen appears.
TITLE DATA EDITOR
SCREEN
On this screen, you can edit the following ten items.

D Machine tool builder name (32 characters)
D Machine name (32 characters)
D NC/PMC type (32 characters)
D Edition (2 characters)
D Sequence program drawing (32 characters)
D Sequence program creation date (16 characters)
D Sequence program creator name (32 characters)
D ROM writer operator name (32 characters)
Move the cursor to the item and input the comment. If you initialize the
item on the cursor, press the [DELETE] soft key.
If you do not save the edited data into Flash ROM, edited data is cleared
by power OFF.
When finishing the edit, the following message is displayed to confirm
to write to Flash ROM.
DO YOU WANT TO WRITE PROGRAM INTO FLASH ROM?
The following soft key is displayed. ”YES” soft key saves the data. ”NO”
soft key does not save the data.
Pressing these soft keys causes a return to Title Data Display screen.
NOTE
When ”WRITE TO FROM (EDIT)” is set to ”YES” on the
EDIT/DEBUG screen of Setting screen, saving operation
into Flash ROM is enabled.
649
3.3 This screen displays the contents at all the addresses (X, Y, F, G, R, A, C,
T, K, D, M, and N) specified in programs. Each content display is a string
SIGNAL STATUS of 0 and 1 with a hexadecimal indication at the right end.
DISPLAY (STATUS)
Operating procedure
(1) Click the [STATUS] soft key. The screen shown above appears.
(2) Specify the desired address by keying it in, then click the [SEARCH]
soft key.
(3) A sequence of data starting at the specified address is displayed as a
bit patterns.
(4) To specify another address for display, click a cursor key, page key, or
the [SEARCH] soft key.
(5) When you want to change the status of the signals, press [FORCE] soft
key. So, the forced I/O screen appears.
NOTE
The [FORCE] soft key is displayed only when the following
conditions are satisfied.
In the GENERAL screen of PMC setting:
Set ”SIGNAL STATUS WRITE ENABLE” to ”YES”.
Or
Set ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to ”YES”.
(6) The signals of X/Y addresses which are set into overridden mode are
marked with ”–>” on the left in the forced I/O screen. That shows the
setting of override signals.
650
3.4 If an alarm condition occurs in the PMC, clicking the [PMC] soft key from
the NC system displays the following alarm message instead of the PMC
ALARM SCREEN basic menu. The soft keys displayed on this screen remain the same as
(ALARM) on the PMC basic module screen. In addition, character string “ALM”
appears on the title line.
If the alarm condition is fatal, no sequence program will be executed.
For an explanation of the alarm messages displayed on this screen, see

APPENDIX M, “ALARM MESSAGE LIST.”
651
3.5
TRACE SCREEN
3.5.1 On the trace screen, you can trace specified signals. The result of the trace
Overview is displayed as the time chart of signals.
There are two tracing modes. One is the ”Time Cycle” mode that samples
the state of the signals at every specified cycle time. The other is the
”Signal Transition” mode that samples the status of the signals when the
signals that are watched at every specified time are changed.
Pushing [TRACE] soft key displays the following screen.
To execute tracing, setting of the trace parameter is necessary. Pushing the

[SETING] soft key displays ”Parameter Setting” screen. The trace
function is able to run automatically by the setting on ”PMC Setting”
screen when the power is switched on. In this case, setting of the trace
parameter is necessary in advance.
NOTE
As for the setting of automatic running for the trace function,
please refer to ”IV–5.1 Screen for Displaying General
Settings (GENERAL)”
652
3.5.2 Pushing the [SETING] soft key displays the ”Parameter Setting” screen.
Setting of Trace The following is the screen example of the trace execution by ”TIME
CYCLE” mode.
Parameter
”Parameter Setting” has two screens. The page number is displayed on

up right of the screen. The page key changes these screens.
Pushing [<] soft key displays ”PMC Signal Trace” screen.
The following is the screen example of the trace execution by ”SIGNAL
TRANSITION” mode.
653
D SAMPLING MODE
Determines the sampling mode. Select one by cursor key or soft key.
Soft keys display when the cursor is put on ”SAMPLING
MODE”.
Explanation:
TIME CYCLE Samples at every specified cycle time.
SIGNAL TRANSITION Samples when the signal changes.
INIT Initializes all the settings. (This soft key
is always displayed in page 1.)
D SAMPLING RESOLUTION
The resolution of sampling is inputted. The default value is the
minimum resolution (8msec). The range of the value is from 8msec to
1000msec. Inputted value is rounded down to the multiple of 8msec.
D SAMPLING TIME
This parameter is displayed when ”TIME CYCLE” is set on
”SAMPLING MODE”. The execution time of trace is inputted. The
value of ”SAMPLING SESOLUTION” or the number of specified
signal address changes the range of the value that is able to input. The
range is displayed on the right of the edit box.
D SAMPLING FRAME
This parameter is displayed when ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on
”SAMPLING MODE”. The number of sampling is inputted. The
value of ”SAMPLING SESOLUTION” or the number of specified
signal addresses changes the range of the value that is able to input.
The range is displayed on the right of the edit box.
D STOP CONDITION
Determines the condition to stop the trace. Select one by cursor key
or soft key.
Soft keys display when the cursor is put on ”STOP
CONDITION”.
Explanation:
NONE Does not stop the tracing automatically.
BUFFER FULL Stops the tracing when the buffer becomes full.
TRIGGER Stops the tracing by trigger
D STOP CONDITION TRIGGER ADDRESS
When ”TRIGGER” is set on ”STOP CONDITION”, this parameter is
enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as stop trigger.
Only bit address or corresponding symbols can be inputted. Byte
address cannot be inputted.
Soft keys display when the cursor is put on ”STOP CONDITION
TRIGGER ADDRESS”.
654
Explanation:
DELETE Clears the value in the edit box.
SYMBOL Changes the address display to the symbol name
display and changes the soft key to [ADDRESS].
After that, following soft keys are displayed.
ADDRESS Changes the symbol name display to the address

display and changes the soft key to [SYMBOL].
D STOP CONDITION TRIGGER MODE
enabled. Input trigger mode when the trace is stopped. Select one by
cursor key or soft key.
Soft keys display when the cursor is put on ”STOP CONDITION
TRIGGER MODE”.
Explanation:
RISING EDGE Stops the tracing automatically by rising up of
the trigger signal.
FALLING EDGE Stops the tracing automatically by falling
down of the trigger signal.
BOTH EDGE Stops the tracing automatically by rising up or
falling down of the trigger signal.
D STOP CONDITION TRIGGER POSITION
enabled. Input the ratio of the sampling time or number which
specifies the position where specified trigger condition is on.
If you would like to examine the transitions of the signal before the
trigger condition, you should set a big value in this parameter. If you
would like to examine the transitions of the signal after the trigger
condition, you should set a small value in this parameter.
Example: The case that sampling time is 10 second and trigger
position is set as ”10%”.
Trigger position
1sec 9sec
–1 0 9 (SEC)
The graph is displayed on the right of the edit box. The edge of the left
hand is as 0% and the edge of the right hand is as 100%. The position
indicated by the input value is displayed as a gauge.
D SAMPLING CONDITION
When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE”, this
parameter is enabled. Select one by cursor key or soft key.
655

CONDITION”.
Explanation:
TRIGGER Samples the status of specified signals when
the specified sampling condition is on.
ANY CHANGE Samples the status of specified signals when
the signals change
The address of the signals that should be sampled is set on Parameter
Setting screen page2.
D SAMPLING CONDITION TRIGGER ADDRESS
When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE”, and
”TRIGGER” is set on ”SAMPLING CONDITION”, this parameter is
enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as sampling trigger.
Only bit address or corresponding symbol can be inputted. Byte
address cannot be inputted.
CONDITION TRIGGER ADDRESS”.
The contents of the soft keys are same as ”STOP CONDITION

TRIGGER ADDRESS”.
D SAMPLING CONDITION TRIGGER MODE
enabled. Input trigger mode that determines the condition of specified
trigger.
CONDITION TRIGGER MODE”.
Explanation:
RISING EDGE Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up of the trigger signal.
FALLING EDGE Samples the status of specified signals by
BOTH EDGE Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up or falling down of the trigger signal.
ON Samples the status of specified signals during
the trigger signal is on.
OFF Samples the status of specified signals during
the trigger signal is off.
656
D SAMPLING ADDRESS
In page 2 of Parameter Setting screen, you can set the addresses or
symbols that should be sampled.
Move the cursor into edit box and input PMC signal address or
symbol.
In case of inputting discrete bit addresses, any bit address can be
inputted. Moreover, when you input byte address, all bits of the
address (bit0–bit7) are set automatically.
Maximum 32 points of signal address can be inputted. Increasing the
number of the signal address changes the capacity of ”SAMPLING
TIME” or ”SAMPLING FRAME” in page1. If the capacity is
changed, the warning message is displayed.
Example of warning message:
In case of ”TIME CYCLE” mode
”SAMPLING TIME IS REDUCED TO n SEC.”
In case of ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” mode
”SAMPLING FRAME IS REDUCED TO n COUNT.”
The ”n” means the maximum value that is able to input.
Explanation of the soft keys:
DELETE Clears the value of the edit box on the cursor.
SYMBOL Changes the address display to the symbol
display. However, display of the address that is
not defined the symbol does not change. This
soft key also changes to ”ADDRESS”. The
following soft keys are displayed.
MOVE UP Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor for
the signal above one line.
MOVE DOWN Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor for
the signal below one line.
DELETE ALL Clears all of the value of the edit box.
657
ADDRESS Changes the symbol display into the address

display and changes the soft key to
”SYMBOL”.
D TRIGGER SETTING OF THE SAMPLING SIGNALS
When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE” and
”ANY CHANGE” is set on ”SAMPLING CONDITION”, the check
boxes on the right of the sampling address or symbols are displayed
as follows. Check the signals that should trigger the sampling in the
setting signals.
Pushing [TRIGGER ON] soft key sets the trigger on. Pushing
[TRIGGER OFF] soft key sets the trigger off. The default setting is
trigger on for all signals. The contents of other soft keys are same as
”SAMPLING ADDRESS”.
658
3.5.3 On trace screen, pushing [START] soft key starts the execution of trace
Execution of Trace after you set the trace parameter correctly. The following is the screen
example of the trace execution by ”TIME CYCLE” mode.
The result of trace is immediately displayed during execution of the trace.

When the stop condition that is set in parameter setting screen is satisfied
the execution is finished. Pushing [STOP] soft key aborts the execution.
The following is the screen example of the trace execution by ”SIGNAL
TRANSITION” mode.
In ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” mode, graphic display is not refreshed until

any signal for sampling trigger changes.
659
3.5.4 When the execution is finished, the result of trace is displayed. The
Operation after following is the screen example of trace by ”TIME CYCLE” mode.
Execution of Trace
The cursor indicating current position is initially displayed on the original

point (0 point).
The position of the cursor is displayed in ”CURSOR POSITION” in the
upper of the screen. The cursor can move horizontally.
The following is the screen example of trace by ”SIGNAL
TRANSITION” mode.
660
After the execution, following operation is enabled.

(1) SCROLL OF SCREEN
Using cursor up/down key and page up/down key enables the vertical
scroll for the specified signal. Using cursor right/left key, [NEXT>>]
soft key and [PREV<<] soft key enables the horizontal scroll of the
graph.
(2) AUTOMATIC CALCULATION OF THE SELECTED RANGE
Pushing [POS MARK] soft key marks the current position and
displays the mark cursor. If the mark cursor duplicates with the current
position cursor, the current position cursor has priority of display. The
”MARK POSITION” that shows the position of the mark cursor and
”SELECT RANGE” that shows the range between the mark cursor
and the current position cursor are displayed in the upper of screen.
Moving the current position cursor changes these values. Pushing
[POS MARK] again releases the select range mode.
(3) ZOOM IN/ZOOM OUT OF WAVEFORM

Pushing [ZOOM IN] soft key magnifies the display of chart. Pushing
[ZOOM OUT] soft key reduces the display of chart. Pushing these soft
keys also change the scale value of the graduation on the graph. When
trace is just finished, the default zooming level was the most magnified
level. In [ZOOM OUT] mode, gray box is displayed as following
screen example when the transitions of signal cannot be expressed
accurately enough. The limitation of [ZOOM OUT] displays all of
result of the trace in one page.
661
(4) EXCHANGE OF SAMPLING SIGNAL

Pushing [MOVE UP] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by the
signal cursor for the signal one line above. Pushing [MOVE DOWN]
soft key exchanges the signal indicated by the signal cursor for the
signal one line below. The result of the operation is cancelled by the
execution of trace or putting the power off. When you would like to
preserve the order of displayed signals against the executing or
powering off, please change the order on ”SAMPLING ADDRESS”
screen.
3.5.5 The trace function for PMC–NB6 is different from the trace function,
Comparison With the [PMCDGN] [TRACE], or the analysis function, [PMCDGN]
[ANALYS], for PMC–NB/NB2 in the specification of display and setting
Function of FS15–B parameter.
(PMC–NB/NB2) However, you can get the same result of the trace as PMC–NB/NB2 by
parameter setting.
The way of setting of the parameters to get the same result of the trace as
PMC–NB/NB2 is described as follows.
662
(1) Setting equivalent to the [TRACE] screen for PMC–NB/NB2

The parameters in page 1
By setting ”SAMPLING MODE” = ”SIGNAL TRANSITION”,

sampling equivalent to [TRACE] function of PMC–NB/NB2 is
performed.
Furthermore, enhancements on PMC–NB6 are the ability to change
the sampling cycle time and the capacity of sampling data by setting
”RESOLUTION” and ”FRAME” parameters. In addition, the result
of sampling is displayed in easy to understand format of time chart.
The parameters in page 2
663
If you input signals from bit0 to bit7 into ”SAMPLING ADDRESS”,

this setting is equivalent to input of the byte address for
PMC–NB/NB2. The trigger setting of the sampling signals is
equivalent to the set of mask data (”MASK DATA”) for
PMC–NB/NB2.
(2) Setting equivalent to none trigger start of the [ANALYS] screen for
PMC–NB/NB2 (CONDITION = 0 and TRIGGER MODE = 0)
(3) Setting equivalent to ”TRIGGER MODE” = ”0:AFTER”,

”1:ABOUT”, ”2:BEFORE” of the [ANALYS] screen for
PMC–NB/NB2
The value of ”TRIGGER POSITION” is equivalent to ”AFTER”,

”ABOUT”, ”BEFORE” for PMC–NB/NB2. The value ”0” means
”AFTER”. The value ”100” means ”BEFORE”. The value from ”1”
to ”99” means ”ABOUT”.
664
The point of the enhancement is the ability to adjust the ratio of data
before and after the trigger position.
(4) Setting equivalent to ”TRIGGER MODE” = ”3:ONLY” of the
[ANALYS] screen for PMC–NB/NB2
The example samples the signals specified in page 2 when the

sampling condition specified in ”SAMPLING CONDITION” is on.
665
3.6 The I/O Link Monitor screen and the I/O Unit Allocation screens are for
checking I/O Link connection and for allocating I/O Unit.
I/O LINK MONITOR
AND ALLOCATION D I/O Link Monitor screen: I/O Units connected via I/O Link are
displayed in order of Group number.
OF I/O UNIT D I/O Unit Allocation viewer screen: I/O Units Allocation to X and Y
addresses are displayed.
D I/O Unit Allocation Editor screen: I/O Units can be allocated to X and
Y addresses.
Change of screens
NOTE
Soft key [EDIT] appears only when programmer function is
enabled by setting ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to ”YES” at
GENERAL screen of PMC Settings. While Online Monitor
function is active, you can not reach I/O Unit Allocation
Editor screen. To use I/O Unit Allocation Editor function, you
have to disable Online Monitor function at PMC Setting
screen by choosing ”NOT USE” for ”RS–232–C” and
”F–BUS” settings.
666
3.6.1 I/O Link Monitor screen shows the types and the ID codes of I/O Units
I/O Link Monitor screen that are connected to I/O Link in order of Group number.
You can confirm the connection of I/O Units type at this screen.
Call this screen by pressing of soft key [I/O LINK] in PMCDGN.
Table 3.6.1. Displayed type and true type of I/O Units
Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
CONNECTION UNIT 80 Connection Unit
OPERATOR PANEL Connection Unit for Operators

82
Panel
I/O–B3 83 I/O B3
IO UNIT–MODEL B 84, I/O Unit–MODEL A

86,
87
PLC SERIES 90–30 PLC SERIES 90–30

45
POWER MATE / IO LINK BETA 4A Power Mate or I/O Link Beta
SERIES 0 50 Series 0
OPERATOR IF BOARD (MPG1) Machine Operators Panel Inter-

53
face
LINK CONNECTION UNIT 96 I/O Link Connecting Unit
I/O UNIT–MODEL B I/O Unit–MODEL B

9E
667
Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
R–J MATE 61 R–J Mate
CONNECTOR PANEL MODULE A9 I/O module for connector panel
OPERATOR PANEL A1 AA I/O module for operator’s panel
OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG3) 6B Operator Interface(with MPG)
LOADER I/O AF I/O Board for Loader
ROBOCUT DIF B0 DIF Board for ROBOCUT
ROBOCUT MIF B1 MIF Board for ROBOCUT
I/O CARD B2 I/O board
ROBOSHOT I/O CARD A B3 I/O for ROBOSHOT
LOADER I/O (MATRIX) B4 I/O Board for Loader(Matrix)
PROCESS I/O FA B5 Process I/O for R–J3
PROCESS IO 89 Process I/O for R–X
I/O LINK ADAPTER 8B I/O Link adapter
ROBOT CONTROLLER 52 Controller for R–X
PLC SERIES 90 54 PLC SERIES 90
OPERATOR PANEL 95 I/O for Series 0
LASER OSCILLATOR 97 Laser Oscillator
FIXED I/O TYPE A 98 I/O for Robot Type A
FIXED I/O TYPE B 99 I/O for Robot Type B
AS–I CONVERTER 77 AS–i Converter
OPERATOER PANEL B I/O Module(for Operator Panel

A8
48/32)
MACHINE OPERATOER PANEL I/O Module(for Machine Operator

A8
A Panel of 0 Type)
CONNECTION UNIT C1 (MPG) A8 Connection Unit C1(with MPG)
MACHINE OPERATOER PANEL I/O Module (for Machine Operator

A8
B Panel )
I/O MODULE WITH LCD A8 LCD display embedded I/O
UNKNOWN UNIT – Unsupported I/O Unit
CAUTION
I/O Units not for Series FS15i are written in Table 3.6.1.
668
3.6.2 I/O Link Allocation Viewer screen shows I/O Units allocation to X and
I/O Unit Allocation Y addresses.
You can confirm the allocation of I/O Units at this screen.
Viewer screen Call this screen by pressing of soft key [I/O LINK] → [I/O MODULE]
in PMCDGN.
669
3.6.3 Allocate I/O Units to X and Y addresses at I/O Unit Allocation Editor
I/O Unit Allocation screen.
Call this screen by pressing soft key [I/O LINK] → [I/O MODULE] →
Editor screen [EDIT] in PMCDGN.
3.6.3.1 Soft Keys in I/O Unit Allocation Editor screen

Operations
(1) Allocation I/O Units to X and Y addresses

(1.1)Set the cursor at address to which you will allocate new I/O Unit.
(1.2)Type ”Group. Base. Slot. Name” and press INPUT key.
Ex) In case you allocate ”Group=1, Base=0, Slot=5,
Name=ID16A” to X10, set the cursor at X10 and 1.0.5.
ID16C ”INPUT”
670
NOTE
As to the allocation name of I/O Unit, please refer to ”FANUC
PMC Programming Manual (LADDER Language) Chapter
I, 3.2 Table3.2.2”
(1.3)The I/O Unit is allocated to address of the cursor position for the
I/O Unit size.
In case of above example (1.2), I/O Unit is allocated at X10 and
X11 like as follows.
671
CAUTION
1 Turn off and on the power after you store the Ladder to Flash
ROM in order to make the allocation effective.
2 The Ladder program is not stopped automatically when you
open I/O Unit Allocation Viewer screen or Editor screen.
(2) Delete allocation

(2.1)Set the cursor at allocation of which you will delete and press soft
key [DELETE].
(2.2)The allocation is deleted.
(3) Delete all allocation
(3.1)Press the right end soft key.
(3.2)Press soft key [CLEAR ALL].
(3.3)”ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE ALL ALLOCATION DATA?”
is displayed.
(3.4)Press soft key [YES].
(3.5)Allocation of X and Y are all deleted.
672
3.6.3.2
Error Message Error message Meaning and solution
Meaning:
GROUP NUMBER Too large Group number is input.
IS TOO LARGE Solution:
Input Group Number below 16.
Meaning:
Too large Base number is input.
BASE NUMBER IS
TOO LARGE Solution:
I/O Unit–B (##,#1–#10): Input Base number 0
Other I/O Unit: Input 0 or 1.
Meaning:
Too large Slot number is input.
SLOT NUMBER IS
TOO LARGE Solution:
I/O Unit–B: Input Slot number below 31
Other I/O Unit: Input Slot number below 11
Meaning:
Too small Slot number is input.
SLOT NUMBER IS
TOO SMALL Solution:
I/O Unit–B: Input Slot number 0 or above
Other I/O Unit: Input Slot number above 0
Meaning:
I/O Unit for X is allocated to Y address or I/O Unit for Y
I/O UNIT NAME is allocated to X address.
MISMATCH
Solution:
Confirm the I/O Unit Name and the address
Meaning:
I/O Unit name is not correct.
ILLEGAL I/O UNIT
NAME Solution:
Input correct name described at Chapter I.3.2 Table
3.2.2.
Meaning:
There is no enough space for the size of I/O Unit you
will allocate.
Meaning:
NOT ENOUGH This message is displayed also in case you will allo-
SPACE cate to the address in which other I/O Unit has been
allocated.
Solution:
Re–Input the allocation after you delete the allocation
under the cursor and make space.
673
3.7
FORCED
INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION
3.7.1 This is the function to change the status of the signals at arbitrary PMC
address forcibly. If the input X is forced with this function, the sequence
Overview
program can be debugged without the machine. If the output Y is forced,
the wiring for the machine can be checked without the sequence program.
3.7.1.1 This function has two kinds of input modes. These modes can be used
Input mode properly according to the purpose.
(1) Forcing mode
This mode is applied to all of PMC addresses. However, the signals
changed by this function must be overwritten when the sequence
program or operator input in the same address. As a result, the forced
I/O function becomes ineffective.
Machine
I/O address
overwrite
X,Y
overwrite
Ladder overwrite G,F,R,T,K,C,D
Ex1: R0 is forced in the following ladder program.
X0.0
MOVE 1111
1111
K0
R0
1. The initial state of the signal is as follows.

X0.0 = OFF, K0 = 55H, R0 = 00h
2. R0 is forced to FFh.
X0.0 =OFF, K0 = 55h, R0 = FFh
3. If X0.0 is turned ON, R0 is overwritten by the ladder program.
X0.0 = ON, K0 = 55h, R0 = 55h
674
Ex2: I/O UNIT–MODEL A is connected with X0. And X0 is forced

to be changed.
The input value from a I/O UNIT–MODEL A is periodically
transferred to X0. Therefore, even if you change the value of X0
forcedly, the I/O UNIT–MODEL A would overwrite the input
value at next cycle.
I/O Unit–MODEL A NC
X0 = FFh X0 = FFh
X0 is forced to 00h X0 = 00h
X0 is overwritten by the I/O Unit–MODEL A.
X0 = FFh X0 = FFh
The cyclic transfer might be performed to the addresses at which any I/O
device is not assigned. So, you should use the forced I/O function in the
forcing mode without I/O devices when debugging any X addresses. As
for the debug of the ladder program with I/O devices, use the forced I/O
function in Override mode explained in next paragraph.
675
(2) Override Mode

In this mode, the ladder program and the I/O devices does not
overwrite the signals which are forced to be changed. You can specify
the override mode into arbitrary X/Y addresses. The X/Y addresses in
which is not set the override mode is in the forcing mode.
Ex) I/O UNIT–MODEL A is connected with X0. And X0 is forced
to be changed.
X0 = FFh X0 = FFh
D X0 is set in Override mode.
The input value from the I/O UNIT–MODEL A is disabled.
X0 = FFh X0 = FFh
D The X0 is forced to 00h
X0 = FFh X0 = 00h
Therefore, the forced I/O function for X addresses in the Override mode
can be used to debug the ladder program with some I/O devices. If you
set the override mode into Y addresses, The value forced to be changed
is output to the I/O devices.
676
CAUTION
1 In the Override mode, the refresh cycle of the I/O signal is 8msec, which is synchronized with
the 1st level of the ladder program. Usually, the refresh cycle of the I/O link is 2msec. So, the
timing of the signals for I/O devices is delayed. Pay attention the change of work of the ladder
program which depends on the timing of the I/O devices.
2 The processing time of the 2nd level of the ladder program might get longer in the override
mode.
3 The relay coils which are set in the override mode are displayed as the processing result of the
ladder program in the ladder monitor screen. The output value for the I/O devices is forced to
be changed. Pay attention that the values on the ladder monitor screen does not correspond
with the output values for the I/O devices.
Ex.): I/O UNIT–MODEL A is connected with Y0. And Y0.0 is forced to be changed.
Usually, the display values on the ladder screen correspond with the output values for the
I/O UNIT–MODEL A as follows.
X0.0 Y0.0
OFF OFF
Y0.0=OFF
Ladder Monitor
If you set ”1” into the Y0.0 in the override mode, the value is output to the I/O
UNIT–MODEL A as follows.
X0.0 Y0.0
OFF OFF
Y0.0=ON
Ladder Monitor
WARNING
When you change the signals by the forcing I/O function, you have to pay special attention.
Inappropriate use of this function may cause unexpected reaction of machine. You have to
make it sure that nobody is near the machine when you use this function.
677
3.7.2 The following setting is necessary to enable each mode.

Operations to Enable
the Forced I/O
Function
3.7.2.1 In the GENERAL screen of PMC setting:

Setting of forcing mode Set ”SIGNAL STATUS WRITE ENABLE” to ”YES”.
Or
Set ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to ”YES”.
3.7.2.2 In the GENERAL screen of PMC setting:

Setting of override mode Set ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to ”YES”.
Or, In the EDIT/DEBUG screen of PMC setting:
Set ”OVERRIDE ENABLE” to ”YES”.
Then, turn on the power supply again.
CAUTION
1 Please disable the forced I/O function when the machine is
shipped.
2 The setting ”OVERRIDE ENABLE” is set to ”NO”
automatically and the override function becomes disabled
when the setting ”PROGRAM ENABLE” to ”NO” and turning
off the power supply.
3 The settings of the override mode are not kept after turning
off the power supply. All bits of X and Y are not in the
override mode just after turning on the power supply.
678
3.7.3 In this screen, you can change the value of arbitrary address forcibly. You
Forced Input/Output can use the two input modes, i.e. the forcing mode and the override mode.
To display this screen, press the soft–key [FORCE] in the signal status
Screen screen. The following operations are available in this screen.
D Search of address [SEARCH]
D Signal on [ON]
D Signal off [OFF]
D Display of signal status screen [STATUS]
D Setting of override signal (Effective only when override mode)
[OVRIDE SET]
D Release from override signal (Effective only when override mode)
[OVRIDE RESET]
D Release form all override signal (Effective only when override mode)
[INIT]
Forced I/O screen in the override mode
679
3.7.3.1
Screen structure
Input Mode
Display area of signal status
Key Input Line Message Line
(1) When the override mode, The string ”OVERRIDE” is displayed above
the screen.
(2) The status of each signal is displayed in the area of the signal status.
(3) Each bit of X/Y which is set into the override is displayed on the screen
as follows.
X address:
(Input signal from the I/O devices)→(Input signal to the ladder)
The hexadecimal numbers on the right of the screen is the overridden
input signals to ladder.
Y address:
(Output signal from the ladder)→(Output signal to the I/O devices)
The hexadecimal numbers on the right of the screen is the overridden
output signals from the ladder.
(4) In the message line, some system messages like error messages are
displayed.
680
3.7.3.2
Operations
The soft–keys in this screen
Forcing Mode
Search of address Go to Signal Status Screen
Signal On Signal Off
Override Mode
Search of address Go to Signal Status Screen
Signal On Signal Off

Release of All Override
Set of Override signal Release of Override signal
(1) Operations by the soft–keys

a. [SEARCH] Search of address
This searches the bit address or the byte address to display on the
screen.
b. [ON] Signal On
The signal on the cursor is sets into on. The operation for Both the
bit signal and the byte signal is enabled by the length of the cursor.
c. [OFF] Signal Off
The signal on the cursor is sets into off. The operation for Both the
bit signal and the byte signal is enabled by the length of the cursor.
d. [STATUS] Return to the signal status screen
This returns the signal status screen.
e. [OVRIDE SET] Setting or Override signal
This sets the X/Y address on the cursor into the override signal.
(a) Setting for bit
Move the cursor on the bit and press the soft–key [OVRIDE
SET].
(b) Setting for byte
Move the cursor on the byte(all bit) and press the soft–key
[OVRIDE SET].
681
As for the override signal, the status of the override signal is set the
status of the signal just before pressing the soft–key [OVRIDE SET].
The bit set the override is added the ”→” display on the screen. The
actual signals before overridden are also displayed.
X address
(Actual input signal from the I/O devices)→(Overridden Input
signal to the ladder)
Y address
(Actual output signal from the ladder)→(Overridden output
signal to the I/O devices)
f. [OVRIDE RESET] Release of override signal

This releases the setting of override signal about the X/Y address
on the cursor.
The status of signal returns to the status before overridden by the
operation.
(a) Setting for bit
Move the cursor on the bit and press the soft–key [OVRIDE
RESET].
Move the cursor on the byte(all bit) and press the soft–key
[OVRIDE RESET].
g. [INIT] Release of all the overridden signals
This releases the setting of all override signals in X/Y addresses.
(2) Operations by other keys
a. Input key
This key is used to change the signal status.
(a) Setting for bit
D Input ”1” and press the input key to set into on.
D Input ”0” and press the input key to set into off.
D Simply press the input key to toggle the signal status on and
off.
Input the 8–digits binary and press the input key. (When the
number is less than 8, it is input from bit 0.)
Ex. : In the case of inputting ”100”, input as follows.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
b. The cursor keys
Select the object of signal by the cursor keys. When pressing the
left cursor key on the ”bit 7” or the right cursor key on the ”bit 0”,
the cursor becomes the byte cursor. You can change the byte(whole
of bits) of the address.
c. The page keys
You can scroll the screen by these keys
682
4. PMC DATA SETTING AND
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION DISPLAY (PMCPRM)
4 PMC DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM)
683
DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
4.1 This screen enables the entry and display of parameters for the timers,
counters, keep relay, and data tables, which are held in nonvolatile
OVERVIEW memory. To use this procedure, first click the [PMCPRM] soft key on the
PMC basic module.
4.2 Usually, no data can be entered for PMC parameters because they are
protected. The following two methods can be used to make it possible to
METHOD FOR enter data for them.
ENTERING PMC D If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (usually, this method
PARAMETERS should be used when the machine is operating.)
i) Place the NC in MDI mode or bring it to an emergency stop.
ii) Set “PWE” on the NC setting screen to 1 (see the following table).
iii) Alternatively, set the program protect signal (KEY4) to 1 (only if
counters or data tables are involved).
iv) The parameters are released from protection; so data can be entered
for them (see the following table).
PWE KEY4
Timer f
Counter f f
Keep relay f
Data table f f
v) After entering data for the parameters, return “PWE” or the KEY4
signal to the previous state.
D If the sequence program can be stopped (STOP state), for example,
while it is being debugged
i) Stop the sequence program.
ii) The parameter protection is released; so data can be entered for
them.
WARNING
If a sequence program is stopped while the machine is
operating, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Before
stopping the sequence program, make sure that nobody is
near the machine and that the tool cannot interfere with the
workpiece or machine. Incorrect operation of the machine
presents an extreme risk of death or serious injury to the
user. Damage the tool, workpiece, and/or the machine is
also likely.
An attempt to enter data for protected parameters causes the error

message “WRITE PROTECT” to be displayed.
684
4.3 It is possible to enter data continuously on each of the timer, counter, keep
relay, and data table screens. After continuous data entry, the cursor
CONTINUOUS DATA appears at the bottom of the most recently entered data.
ENTRY D Entry
(1) Use “;” (EOB) as a data delimiter.
(Example) “100;200;300;” + “INPUT” key
(2) Use “;=” to enter the same value as the previous data.
(Example) Entering “100;=;=;200;=” + “INPUT” key causes the
following data to be entered: 100,100,100,200,200
(3) Use “;;” to skip an address for entry.
(Example) Entering “100;;200;” + “INPUT” key causes the
second data item to be skipped from entry.
4.4 This screen is used to set and display the timer values for the machine
instruction timers (SUB3).
TIMER SCREEN
(TIMER)
Table contents
D NO.: Counter number specified for a machine instruction
counter
D ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
D DATA: Timer value
Timer number Minimum timer value Maximum timer value
that can be specified that can be specified
1 to 8 48ms 1572.8 s
9 to 150 8ms 262.1 s
685
4.5 This screen is used to set and display the maximum and minimum counter
values for machine instruction counters (SUB5).
COUNTER SCREEN
(COUNTR)
Table contents
D NO.: Counter number specified for a machine instruction
counter
D ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
D PRESET: Maximum counter value (a minimum counter value is
specified by a counter instruction)
D CURRENT: Current counter value
Counter types and maximum values
Counter type PRESET maximum value CURRENT maximum value
BINARY 32767 32767
BCD 9999 9999
686
4.6 This screen is used for setting and displaying the Keep Relays.
KEEP RELAY
SCREEN (KEEPRL)
Contents of the table

D ADDRESS: Address refered by sequence Program
D 0–7 Contents of each bit
D HEX: Value of the byte data by hexadecimal nortatin
Since Keep Relay is nonvolatile memory, the contents are not lost even
if you turn off the power .
Keep Relay area consists of parts as follows.
User area K0 – K39
Special use area (Note) K900 – K909
CAUTION
Do not use the Special use area , because the relays in this
area are reserved for PMC system software use, and they
affect behavior of the PMC software. Set ”0” to any relays
that are not mentioned below, to prevent unexpected
behavior of PMC.
687
(1) Special use area ( K900 – K909)

PMC type PMC–NB6
Special use area 1 K900
Reserved K901 – K909
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K900 DTBL DSP MEMINP AUTORUN PRGRAM LADMASK
#7 DTBLDSP 0 : The Data Table Controlling Data screen is displayed.

1 : The Data Table Controlling Data screen is not displayed.
#4 MEMINP 0 : The status of signals is not allowed to be modified.
1 : The status of signals is allowed to be modified.
This setting is effective for the following screens.
Embedded PMC:
* LADDER Diagram Monitor screen (Forced I/O function)
FANUC LADDER–II and Ladder Editting Package
* Signal Status Screen (Online function)
#2 AUTORUN 0 : Sequence program starts automatically at power on.
1 : Sequence program starts by pressing of soft key [RUN]
#1 PRGRAM 0 : Embedded debug function is unavilable.
1 : Embedded debug function is avilable.
This setting is effective for the following screens and functions
Embedded PMC:
* LADDER Diagram Editor screen, I/O Unit Allocation Editor screen
* I/O screen
* Ladder transfer function
* Ladder Editor Screen (Online function)
#0 LADMASK 0 : Ladder diagram is displayed.
1 : Ladder diagram is not displayed.
This setting is effective for the following screens and functions
Embedded PMC:
* LADDER Diagram Editor screen, I/O Unit Allocation Editor screen
* I/O screen
* Ladder transfer function
* Ladder Editor Screen (Online function)
CAUTION
Set always ”0” to any other relays in Special us area than
mentioned above, to prevent unexpected behavior of PMC.
688
4.7 There are two data table types (data table control data table and data table).
DATA TABLE (DATA) (1) Data table control data screen (C.DATA)
Clicking the [DATA] soft key displays the data table control data
setting screen for data table management.
Table contents
D GROUP TABLE COUNT:Number of data items in the data table
D NO.: Group number
D ADDRESS: Data table start address (the same address can be
specified for different groups.)
D PARAMETER: Table parameter(NOTE)
D TYPE: Data length (0 = 1 byte, 1 = 2 bytes, 2 = 4 bytes)
D DATA: Number of data items in each data table
Soft key definitions
[G.DATA]: Clicking this soft key switches to the screen for setting
and displaying the data in the data table.
[G.CONT]: After the number of groups is entered, clicking this soft
key asserts the number of groups for the data table.
[NO.SRH]: After a group number is entered, clicking this soft key
moves the cursor to the specified group.
[INIT]: Clicking this soft key initializes the data table.
* The initial data is as follows:
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE DATA
001 D0000 00000000 0 8000
689
NOTE
The meanings of the table parameters are as follows:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0: Binary format
1: BCD format
0: Input protection disabled
1: Input protection enabled
0: Binary or BCD format (with bit 0 valid)
1: Hexadecimal format (with bit 0 invalid)
(2) Data table screen

If the data table control data is specified, clicking the [G.DATA] soft
key on the data table control data screen displays the data table setting
screen.
Table contents
D NO.
D ADDRESS: Address used by the sequence program
D DATA
Soft key definitions
[C.DATA]: Clicking this soft key switches to the data table control
data screen.
[G–SRCH]: After the entry of a group number for a data table to be
searched in another group, clicking this key moves the
cursor to the beginning of that group.
[SEARCH]: After the entry of an address, clicking this key moves the
cursor to the specified address within the currently
selected group. When entering the address, the “D” can
be omitted from the beginning of the address. After
entering “101” for example, clicking this key moves the
cursor to data using D101.
690
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 5. SETTING MENU (SETING)
5 SETTING MENU (SETING)
Clicking the [SETING] soft key on the PMC basic module screen displays
the following setting menu screen.
Menu contents
1. GENERAL: Screen for displaying general setting data
2. EDIT/DEBUG: Screen for displaying setting data related to
editing and debugging
3. ONLINE: Screen for displaying the communication
settings for the online–function. (It is
displayed by setting “PROGRAMMER
ENABLE” to “YES” on the GENERAL
screen.)
4. C LANGUAGE: Screen for displaying setting data related to C
Language function.
Clicking the soft keys explained above displays the respective setting
screens.
Some of the settings on this screen are saved to the keep relay. It is
possible to prevent changes to that part of the settings on this setting
screen, using a sequence program for writing to the keep relay.
691
5. SETTING MENU (SETING) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
5.1 Clicking the [GENERAL] soft key displays the following screen.
SCREEN FOR
DISPLAYING
GENERAL SETTINGS
(GENERAL)
D PROGRAMMER ENABLE
YES: The built–in debug function is used.
NO: The built–in debug function is not used.
D AUTOMATIC LADDER START
AUTO: The sequence program is executed automatically when
the power is switched on.
MANUAL: The sequence program is executed by clicking the
sequence program execution soft key.
D SIGNAL STATUS WRITE ENABLE
YES: The online function can be used to enter data on the signal status
screen.
NO: The online function is prevented from entering data on the
signal status screen.
D DATA TABLE CONTROL SCREEN
YES: The PMC parameter data table control screen is displayed.
NO: The PMC parameter data table control screen is not displayed.
D SIGNAL TRACE START
AUTO: Trace function is executed automatically when the power
is switched on.
MANUAL: Trace function is executed by operating soft key.
692
5.2
SCREEN FOR
DISPLAYING THE
SETTING DATA
RELATED TO
EDITING AND
DEBUGGING
D WRITE TO FROM (EDIT)

YES: The ladder program is automatically written to F–ROM after
editing.
NO: The ladder program is not automatically written to F–ROM
after editing.
D OVERRIDE ENABLE
YES: The override mode becomes enabled.
NO: The override mode becomes disabled.
CAUTION
This parameter is effective when turning on the power
supply after setting.
Turn on the power supply if setting this parameter.
Set this parameter ”NO” when the machine is shipped.
693
5.3 If PROGRAMMER ENABLE is set to YES on the GENERAL screen,

the [ONLINE] soft key appears on the setting menu screen. Clicking this
SCREEN FOR soft key displays the following screen.
SETTING/DISPLAYIN
G ONLINE MONITOR
PARAMETERS
(ONLINE)
Menu descriptions
D CPU ID
The CPU ID value is displayed. The value can also be entered here,
but its entry is usually not necessary.
D RS–232C (prompt)
USE: An RS–232C port can be connected to FANUC
LADDER–II.
NOT USE: No RS–232C port is used.
Note) If no RS–232C is to be connected to FANUC LADDER–II,
select NOT USE.
D CHANNEL
A channel number to be used is displayed. The number can also be
entered.
D BAUD RATE
300: A baud rate of 300 is specified.
D PARITY
NONE: No parity is specified.
ODD: Odd parity is specified.
EVEN: Even parity is specified.
694
D STOP BIT
1 BIT: The number of stop bits is set to 1.
2 BITS: The number of stop bits is set to 2.
D TIMER 1
The value in communication parameter timer 1 is displayed. The value
can also be entered, but its specification is usually not necessary.
D TIMER 2
D TIMER 3
D MAX PACKET SIZE
The maximum packet size for the communication parameter is
displayed. The size can also be entered, but its specification is usually
not necessary.
D RS–232C (status display)
The status of an RS–232C port is displayed.
INACTIVE: No RS–232C port is in use.
STOPPING: An RS–232C port is closed.
STARTING: An RS–232C port is open.
STAND–BY: An RS–232C port is waiting to be connected to
FANUC LADDER–II.
CONNECTED: An RS–232C port has been connected to FANUC
LADDER–II.
If the ladder editing package is included in the system configuration, the
F–BUS prompt menu appears above the RS–232C status display menu,
and the F–BUS status display menu appears below the RS–232C status
display menu.
D F–BUS (prompt)
USE: An F–BUS port can be connected to the ladder editing
package.
NOT USE: No F–BUS port will be connected to the ladder editing
package.
D F–BUS (status display)
The status of an F–BUS port is displayed.
INACTIVE: No F–BUS port is in use.
STOPPING: An F–BUS port is closed.
STARTING: An F–BUS port is open.
STAND–BY: An F–BUS port is waiting to be connected to
FANUC LADDER–II.
CONNECTED: An F–BUS port has been connected to FANUC
LADDER–II.
Soft key descriptions
[EMGSTOP]: Clicking this key causes communication to be
terminated. It is used if it is impossible to terminate a
connection due to abnormal communication.
[INIT]: Clicking this key initializes the parameter settings.
695
5.4
SCREEN FOR
DISPLAYING
SETTING DATA
RELATED TO C
LANGUAGE
FUNCTION
D FUNCTION KEY EFFECTIVE

YES: Function keys are enabled when the user program displays the
user screen.
NO: Function keys are disabled when the user program displays the
user screen.
D INITIALIZE PMC–MDI SCREEN
YES: When the screen is switched to the PMCMDI screen, the display
screen is initialized.
NO: When the screen is switched to the PMCMDI screen, the display
screen is not initialized.
D REJECT LANGUAGE
YES: The program of C language is not activated.
NO: The program of C language is activated.
696
6. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR
6 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR
The LADDER Diagram Monitor screen displays the LADDER Diagram

with the status of the signals in the diagram. You can watch how the
LADDER Program works at this LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
The LADDER Diagram Editor screen allows you to change the LADDER
Diagram, adding relays and functional instructions, and change the action
of LADDER Diagram.
Press soft key [PMCLAD] at PMC Main Menu to reach the LADDER
Diagram Monitor/Editor screen.
NOTE
You can hide [PMCLAD] soft key at PMC Main Menu by
setting the keep relay of K900.0 to 1.
LADDER Diagram Monitor/Editor function consists of following

screens.
LADDER Diagram Monitor screen (LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen)
Displays LADDER Diagram and the current status of relays and
others.
LADDER Diagram Editor screen
Edits LADDER Diagram by the net.
Net Editor screen
Edits the structure of a net in LADDER Diagram
697
AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
Program List Viewer screen

Chooses the subprogram to be displayed at LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen.
Program List Editor screen
Edits LADDER Diagram by the subprogram. Also chooses the
subprogram to be displayed at LADDER Diagram Editor screen.
These screens can be reached as described bellow.
698
NOTE
1 When [PMCLAD] soft key is pressed at first time after CNC
power cycle, Program List Viewer screen is displayed. Then
use [ZOOM] soft key to select subprogram to reach
LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, and the subprogram that
you have selected appears on the screen. Once you
choose subprogram, pressing [PMCLAD] soft key will
directly reach LADDER Diagram Monitor screen. Changing
LADDER program by I/O function will make the Program List
screen appear at [PMCLAD] soft key again. See ”Program
List screen” for more detail. (404A/04 does not have
Program List Viewer screen. LADDER Diagram Monitor
screen can be reached directly from PMC Main Menu
always.)
2 404A/04 can not display LADDER program that is protected
by Password function. To view a protected LADDER
program, you need FANUC LADDER–II, LADDER Editing
Package, or upgrade version to 404A/05 or later. 404A/05
or later will ask for password when necessary.
3 [EDIT] soft key in LADDER Diagram Monitor screen
appears only when Programmer function is enabled: to
enable Programmer function, set ”PROGRAMMER
ENABLE” to ”YES” at GENERAL screen of PMC Settings.
While Online Monitor function is active, you can not reach
LADDER Diagram Editor screen. To use LADDER Diagram
Editor function, you have to disable Online Monitor function
at PMC Setting screen: choose ”NOT USE”.
699
6.1 LADDER Diagram Monitor screen shows the on/off status of contacts
and coils, and the contents of address specified for parameter of functional
LADDER DIAGRAM instructions. You can investigate how the LADDER program is working
MONITOR SCREEN by this monitor screen.
You can use following operation at this screen, including ”Forced I/O
function (Forcing mode)”, by which you can force the relay or the address
parameters of functional instructions to a new status or value.
D Switch subprogram to show [LIST]
D Search for address or others [SEARCH MENU]
D Show data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
D Go to LADDER Diagram Editor screen [EDIT]
D Forced I/O function (Forcing mode) ”number” + INPUT key
700
6.1.1
Screen Structures Title information (REMARKS) Current subprogram Current position Range to search
Area for LADDER Diagram
Key input line Message line Additional information line
(a) Screen Structure

1. Title information (REMARKS) of the LADDER Program, the
current subprogram, and the current position information of the
Diagram displayed in this screen, are displayed above the
LADDER Diagram.
When you select a subprogram to be displayed, range for search
function is indicated at right of the top line as ”LOCAL” or
”GLOBAL”. In case of ”LOCAL”, the range for search function
is restricted within the current subprogram. In case of
”GLOBAL”, on the other hand, search function searches whole
of LADDER program, and switch current subprogram
automatically according to the result of searching.
2. In the additional information line near the bottom of the screen,
the following information of the address under the cursor when
the cursor is shown.
D Net number of the net with the cursor
D Address and its symbol and comment information
D Current value
3. In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be
displayed depending on the situation.
4. In the area for LADDER Diagram, 8 or 9 relays side by side, and
10 relays in vertical can be displayed at maximum.
(b) LADDER Diagram
1. The Functional Instruction occupies less space than the Diagram
of PMC–NB/NB2 for FS15B. And some names of control
conditions are shortened as follows:
UPDOWN → UPD CTR (SUB5), CTRC (SUB55)
CONT → CNT SFT (SUB33)
CIRC → CIR SPCNT (SUB46)
OVRD → OVD SPCNT (SUB46)
701
2. Nets wider than the screen width are displayed as ”Continuous

Net” using continuous marks (”>A1>”).
Same continuous marks mean they are connected with each other.
(c) Monitor
1. Contacts and coils are displayed in different colors according to
the status of the signal. The status of power flow is not displayed.
2. The contents of address parameters of functional instructions are
not shown in default setting. With the extended functional
instruction format, you can see the contents of the parameters.
See ”Setting Screen” for the detail.
(d) Displaying Symbols and Comments
1. If an address has a symbol name assigned, the symbol name will
be displayed instead of the address itself at default setting. You
can force not to show symbol by setting. See ”Setting Screen”
for the detail.
2. If the address used with coil has a comment string assigned, the
comment strings will be displayed at the right margin beside the
coil. You can use this margin area to display an additional relay
instead of the comment string by setting: at this setting, one more
relay can be displayed in each diagram line. See ”Setting Screen”
for the detail.
702
6.1.2
Operations Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen on PMC–NB6
Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen
Program List LADDER Diagram Editor Screen Settings
Display Data Table Switches to Collective

Monitor screen
Search soft keys

Search Write Coil Pick up a Ladder Search next
Diagram net
Search Functional
Instruction Switch range
Jump to
Top/Bottom Search Address or Net Search previous
(a) Operation with Soft–keys

1. [LIST] Go to Program List Viewer screen
Goes to Program List Viewer screen to choose subprogram to be
displayed at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
2. [SEARCH MENU] Search & Jump
Change soft keys to ”Search soft keys”. Use Return key [<] to
return to the ”Main soft keys”.
”Search soft keys” consists of followings:
D [TOP BOTTOM] Jump to Top/Bottom
Jumps to the top of LADDER Program. If the top is
displayed already, then jump to the bottom.
D [SEARCH] Search Address/Net
Searches the PMC address or the net according to the
preceding string. You can specify both of bit address and byte
address.
When digits are entered, the digits are supposed to be a net
number and the screen will jump to the net of the net number.
When a string other than digits is entered, the string is
examined as a symbol for some PMC address at first. If the
string matches a symbol, then the address that the symbol
means will be searched for.
If no symbol matches the string, then the string is examined
as PMC address at next. If the string indicates correct PMC
address, then the address will be searched for.
When cursor is hidden, the net that has the specified net
number or contains the specified address will be shown at the
top of the screen.
When cursor is shown, the cursor moves to the relay or the
parameter to show the found address directly.
D [WRITE SEARCH] Search Write Coil
Searches for the write coils with the address that entered
string means. Any contacts with the address are ignored.
D [FUNC SEARCH] Search Functional Instruction
Searches for the functional instructions by its SUB number
or its mnemonic name such as ”TMR” or ”END2”.
703
D [PICKUP] Picking up ladder nets.

Picks up ladder nets with coil which you want to monitor, on
Collective Monitor screen. When picks up is complete, the
” ” mark displayed to the top of net..
D [PREV] Search previous
Repeats to search the same thing backward (upward).
D [NEXT] Search next
Repeats to search the same thing forward (downward).
D [GLOBAL] / [LOCAL] Change range for searching
Changes the range for searching between GLOBAL and
LOCAL; GOBAL means whole of program, and LOCAL
means within the displaying subprogram. Current range for
searching is indicated at right of the information line at top
of screen.
3. [DATA TABLE] Go to Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer
screen
Goes to Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen to
examine contents of Data Table of functional instructions such as
COD (SUB 7) and CODB (SUB 27), which have Data Table in
themselves. This soft key appears only when the cursor is on a
functional instruction that has Data Table.
4. [EDIT] Go to LADDER Diagram Editor screen
Goes to LADDER Diagram Editor screen. This soft key appears
only when Programmer function1 is enabled. And activating
Online Monitor function2 disables this soft key.
5. [SWITCH] Switches to Collective Monitor screen.
Switches to Collective Monitor screen.
6. [SCREEN SETING] Screen settings
Goes to setting screen for LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
You can change various settings for LADDER Diagram Monitor
screen at the screen. Use Return key [<] to return to LADDER
Diagram Monitor screen. See ”Settings for LADDER Diagram
Monitor” section for the detail.
(b) Other operations
1. Cursor move keys, Page change keys
With cursor hidden, you can move diagram in the screen by
up/down Cursor move keys and Page change keys.
Function of Cursor keys when cursor is hidden
With cursor displayed, you can move the cursor by all cursor
move keys and Page change keys. When cursor is placed on some
relay or some address parameter of a functional instruction, the
information about the address under cursor is displayed at
”Additional Information Line”.
704
1 To enable Programmer function, go to GENERAL screen of PMC

Settings, and choose ”YES” at item ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE”.
2 To deactivate Online Monitor function, go to ONLIEN screen of
PMC Settings, and choose ”NOT USE” at settings of ”RS–232C” and
”F–BUS” (if appears).
2. ”number” + INPUT key
When cursor is shown, you can force the value of the address
under cursor by entering new value as ”number” + INPUT key.
In this screen, Forced I/O function is limited only to Forcing
mode. This Forced I/O function asks you to confirm your
intention before it takes effect. Once it is confirmed that you
actually want to change value by this function, you can change
the value of the same relay or parameter without further
confirmation. However, after you move cursor or you operate
other functions, you will be asked when you use the Forced I/O
function again.
WARNING
1 You have to pay special attention to use Forced I/O function
to change status of signals. Inappropriate use of Forced I/O
function may cause unexpected reaction of machine. You
have to make it sure that nobody is near the machine
when you use this function.
2 As you use Forcing mode of Forced I/O function to change
status of signal, however, the signal may look proof against
Forced I/O function, because LADDER program or I/O
device writes into the signal repeatedly. In this case, even
if the signal looks unchanged, actual signal may be
changed in very short moment. You should be careful for
the reaction of machine to such signal changes.
NOTE
1 Forced I/O function is enabled when ”SIGNAL STATUS
WRITE ENABLE” setting is set to ”YES” in GENERAL
screen of PMC Settings. If the setting is ”NO”, INPUT key
will be just ignored.
2 Parameters of timer functional instructions, TMR, TMRB,
and TMRC, which have special monitor formats, are not
supported by Forced I/O function.
(c) Notes for Search function

1. The string followed by [SEARCH] is treated as symbol first. In
case that the symbol ”D0” is assigned to the bit address ”R0.0”,
the operation ”D0” + [SEARCH] will search the bit address
”R0.0”, instead of byte address ”D0”.3
2. To search the symbol that consists of only digit characters, which
will usually be treated as net number, you can use leading space
to specify explicitly the string is symbol. For example, while
”123” + [SEARCH] will search the 123rd net from top of the
LADDER, ”_123” + [SEARCH] (”_” is space) will search
address with symbol ”123”.
705
3 In this case, you can still search the byte address ”D0” by entering
”D00”. The excess ”0” avoids the conflict with the symbol ”D0”.
3. When the range for searching is GLOBAL, and the target is found
in other than displaying subprogram, the screen will automatically
switch to the subprogram to which the found target belongs.
Searching GLOBAL net number that current subprogram does not
contain, for example, the subprogram that contains the net of the net
number will appear in the screen, displaying the net.
(d) Shortcuts
1. Right/left cursor move keys that are following some string means
searching forward/backward. You can use following strings for
this search operation:
D Digits for net number
D ”1” for top, ”0” for bottom
D ”S” + digits, for Functional instructions
D Other string for symbol or bit/byte address
D Leading space always makes the string treated as a symbol
or address.
Example: ”_123”+[SEARCH] (”_” means space) will search
the symbol ”123” instead of the 123rd net.
2. When cursor is hidden, left/right cursor move keys without string
act just like [PREV]/[NEXT] soft keys.
3. String followed by [SEARCH MENU] soft key in ”PMCLAD
Main soft keys” starts searching directly. In this case, [SEARCH
MENU] soft key acts just like right cursor move key.
4. [SEARCH] soft key in ”Search soft keys” without string searches
the address or the functional instruction under cursor forward. If
cursor is hidden, or cursor is placed neither on a relay nor on a
functional instruction, this operation just repeats the last
successful search forward, just like [NEXT] soft key.
5. [WRITE SEARCH] soft key without string searches forward a
write coil of the same address with relay under cursor. If cursor
is hidden, or cursor is not placed on a relay, this operation will
search a write coil of the bit address that is searched at last
successful search. If the last search was not made with bit
address, the last entered string for searching is used to determine
what bit address is to be searched for a write coil.
6. [FUNC SEARCH] soft key without string searches forward the
same functional instruction with one under cursor. If cursor is
hidden, or cursor is not placed on a functional instruction, this
operation will search a functional instruction that is searched at
last successful search. If the last search was not made for
functional instruction, the last entered string for searching is used
to determine what functional instruction is to be searched.
7. [LIST] soft key following string that indicates subprogram,
switches subprogram on LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
Examples for strings to specify subprogram are following:
”L1” Level 1
”P10”, ”10” Subprogram ”P10”
”0”(zero), ”G” Whole of LADDER program (Global)
706
6.1.3 Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen shows the contents of
Functional Instruction data table that belongs to some functional instructions.
To reach this screen, at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, press [DATA
Data Table Viewer TABLE] soft key that is displayed when the cursor is on the following
Screen functional instructions which have a data table.
D Functional Instruction COD (SUB7)
D Functional Instruction CODB (SUB27)
Following operations are available at this screen.
D Search for data table number. [SEARCH NUMBER]
D Search for data value. [SEARCH VALUE]
D Change the displaying data digits. [BCD2],[BCD4]
(These soft keys can be operated
only at Functional Instruction
Data Table Viewer screen of
Functional Instruction COD.)
Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of Functional

Instruction COD.
707
(1) Screen Structures
1. The functional instruction name, the number of data table, data

length and data type are displayed above the Data Table.
3. In case of functional instruction COD, the data of 6 lines and 14
columns can be displayed in the area for Data table.
In case of functional instruction CODB, the data of 4 lines and
14 columns can be displayed in the area for Data table.
(2) Operations
Soft keys of Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of
functional insturction COD.
Softkeys of Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of

functional insturction CODB.
1. [SEARCH NUMBER] Search for data table number

Searches the data table number which you specified.
Then the cursor is displayed on the data of the target number.
And the cursor is disappeared when you operate something.
708
2. [SEARCH VALUE] Search for data value

Searches the data value which you specified.
Then the cursor is displayed on the target data.
3. [BCD2] Display BCD2 digits
Changes the display data type to 2 digits of BCD. This operation
only switches the display data type. So it does never edit the data
on memory.
on memory.
You can scroll screen by right/left cursor move keys and Page
change keys.
709
6.1.4
Setting Screen
1st page of setting screen
(a) Setting items

LADDER Diagram Monitor Setting screen contains the setting items
below:
D ADDRESS NOTATION
Determines whether the bit and byte addresses in the LADDER
Diagram are displayed as corresponding symbols, or the
addresses themselves.
SYMBOL (default)
Addresses that have a symbol are displayed by the symbols.
Addresses without symbols are displayed by the addresses
themselves.
ADDRESS
All addresses are displayed as the addresses themselves even
if they have a symbol.
D FUNCTION STYLE
Change the shape of functional instructions. There are three
options as below. You have to choose other than ”COMPACT”
to show the current values of address parameters of functional
instructions.
COMPACT (default)
Occupies least space in diagram. Monitors of current values
of address parameters are omitted.
WIDE
Extends the box horizontally to reserve spaces for the
monitors of current values of address parameters. The box
becomes wider than COMPACT.
710
TALL
Extends the box vertically to reserve spaces for the monitors
of current values of address parameters. The box becomes
taller than COMPACT.
Display styles of functional instructions
The displays of current values of address parameters change their

format according to each parameter. Refer to the table in
”Display Format for Parameters” for detail.
When you place the cursor on an address parameter, its current
value is displayed in the ”Additional Information Line” in both
formats of binary decimal, and BCD (or hexadecimal binary).
D RELAY COMMENT
Set the style of relay comment. These are three options as below.
When you display relay comment, less ladder diagram nets are
shown.
NONE (default)
Relay comments are not displayed.
1 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in one line. Up to 15
characters can be displayed. Characters after 16th character
will not be displayed. Width of a relay with comment of more
than 7 characters will be extended.
2 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in two lines. Up to 30
characters can be displayed. Width of a relay with comment
of more than 7 characters will be extended.
Display styles of relay comment
NONE
1 LINE
2 LINE
711
D SHOW COIL COMMENT

Determines whether to show coil comments.
YES (default)
Right margin of 2 lines of 15 characters is reserved for
display of coil comments.
NO
Right margin is used to extend diagram by one more relay,
instead of showing coil comment. The screen position bar is
also displayed at the right edge of the screen in this option.
Show Coil comment setting
D SHOW CURSOR
Determines whether to show cursor.
YES
Cursor is displayed. Cursor move keys will move the cursor.
When the cursor is placed on bit or byte addresses, the
information of the address is displayed at ”Additional
Information Line”. When you search something with the
cursor displayed, the cursor goes directly where it is found.
This option is recommended for search operation with
LADDER program that contains many large nets.
NO (default)
Cursor is not displayed. Up/down cursor move keys will
scroll the contents of screen directly. When you search
something with the cursor hidden, the net, which contains it,
will appear at the top of the screen.
D SUBPROGRAM NET NUMBER
Determines whether a net number is counted as ”LOCAL”
starting from the top of current subprogram, or is counted as
”GLOBAL” starting from the top of whole program. This setting
also affects the expression of net number at searching nets by
number.
LOCAL
Net number starts from 1 at top of current subprogram. Net
number is defined only within current subprogram. The net
number information at upper right of the screen is displayed
in the format ”displaying range / nets in subprogram NET”.
GLOBAL (default)
Net number starts from 1 at top of Level 1 program. Net
number is defined identically at whole of program. The net
number information at upper right of the screen is displayed
in the format ”displaying range / subprogram range NET”.
712
Definition of Net number
D WRAP SEARCH ENABLED

Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top to
continue to search.
YES (default)
Downward search will continue to search from top of
LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upward search will also
continue to search from bottom when reaches to top.
NO
Search process will fail when reached top or bottom, and
displays an error message at Message Line.
Wrap search
713
D DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING

Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays, and
functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram can be
changed in the colors and the shapes. Samples of ”Off Contact”,
”On Contact”, ”Monitor of Parameter in functional instruction”
are displayed at right side. These samples change their
appearance according to the following current settings.
For the color setting, LADDER diagram is categorized into these
three parts, and you can specify their colors independently.
BOLD DIAGRAM
Sets thickness of diagram lines. This setting also affects
shapes of relays.
YES (default)
Diagram is drawn with thick lines. Relays are drawn in more
distinct shapes. You have to choose this option to make
following ”VARIABLE RELAY SYMBOL” setting
effective.
NO
Diagram is drawn with thin lines. Relays are drawn in
smaller shapes.
Bold Diagram setting
714
NOTE
The setting ”BOLD DIAGRAM” requires ”Character
registration function” of CNC software, which is supported
by Series F002 version 03 or later. If CNC software does not
support it, diagram is always displayed with thin lines.
VARIABLE RELAY SYMBOL

Determines whether to change the shapes of relays according to
their on/off status, or to fix their shapes. This setting is effective
only when the setting ”BOLD DIAGRAM” is set to ”YES”.
YES
Shapes of relays change according to their on/off status. This
option is effective only when the setting ”BOLD
DIAGRAM” is set to ”YES”. If it is set to ”NO”, shapes of
relays will not change regardless of this setting.
NO (default)
Shapes of relays will not change.
Change of relay shapes at on/off status
NOTE
The setting ”VARIABLE RELAY SYMBOL” requires
”Character registration function” of CNC software, which is
supported by Series F002 version 03 or later. If CNC
software does not support it, shapes of relay will not change
according to their status.
ADDRESS COLOR
ADDRESS BACKGROUND
Colors for the relay address are set. You can specify these colors
by entering color number, or by moving right and left cursor. 16
colors (from No.0 to No.15) are available. Foreground color
should be different from background one.
DIAGRAM COLOR
DIAGRAM BACKGROUND
General color and its background color for LADDER Diagram.
You can specify these colors by entering color number, or by
using right and left cursor move keys to change the color number.
You can use 16 numbers from 0 to 15; however, some different
number may correspond to the same color. You can not specify
the same number to the foreground and the background colors.
715
ACTIVE RELAY COLOR

ACTIVE RELAY BACKGROUND
Color setting for the active relay. When a contact allows power
flow, and when a coil receives power, they are active and are
displayed with this color setting. When contacts and coils are not
active, they are displayed with ”general color”. You can specify
these colors in the same manner as color setting of DIAGRAM
COLOR and DIAGRAM BACKGROUND.
PARAMETER COLOR
PARAMETER BACKGROUND
Color setting for the monitor of functional instruction
parameters. They are displayed when functional instructions are
displayed in the shape other than ”COMPACT”. You can specify
these colors in the same manner as color setting of DIAGRAM
COLOR and DIAGRAM BACKGROUND.
COMMENT COLOR
COMMENT BACKGROUND
Colors for the relay comment are set. You can specify these
colors by entering color number, or by moving right and left
cursor. 16 colors (from No.0 to No.15) are available. Foreground
color should be different from background one.
(b) Soft keys
LADDER Diagram Monitor Setting screen has the soft keys of options
and following:
D [INIT] Initialize all settings
All settings will be initialized to the default values.
716
6.1.5 The following table shows all monitor formats for each parameter of each
Display Format for functional instruction.
Parameters NOTE
1 ”Variable” in ”Monitor Format” field means that this
parameter changes its size according to the other
parameter. Refer to the descriptions for each functional
instruction for detail.
2 Functional instruction with ”*” mark has Data table.
No. Name Parameter Monitor Format No. Name Parameter Monitor Format
1 END1 – – 18 XMOV 1 constant
2 END2 – – 2 4–digits BCD
3 TMR 1 special 3 4–digits BCD
4 DEC 1 2–digits BCD 4 4–digits BCD
2 constant 19 ADD 1 constant
5 CTR 1 special 2 4–digits BCD
6 ROT 1 constant 3 4–digits BCD
2 4–digits BCD 4 4–digits BCD
3 4–digits BCD 20 SUB 1 constant
7 COD * 1 constant 3 4–digits BCD
2 2–DIGITS BCD 4 4–digits BCD
3 4–digits BCD 21 MUL 1 constant
8 MOVE 1 constant 2 4–digits BCD
2 constant 3 4–digits BCD
3 2–digits HEX 4 4–digits BCD
4 2–digits HEX 22 DIV 1 constant
9 COM 1 constant 2 4–digits BCD
10 JMP 1 constant 3 4–digits BCD
11 PARI 1 1–byte binary 4 4–digits BCD
14 DCNV 1 no monitor 23 NUME 1 constant
2 no monitor 2 4–digits BCD
15 COMP 1 constant 24 TMRB 1 constant
2 4–digits BCD 2 special
3 4–digits BCD 25 DECB 1 constant
16 COIN 1 constant 2 variable binary
2 4–digits BCD 3 constant
3 4–digits BCD 4 2–digits HEX
17 DSCH 1 constant 26 ROTB 1 constant
2 4–digits BCD 2 variable binary
5 variable binary
717
27 CODB * 1 constant 40 NUMEB 1 constant
2 constant 2 constant
3 1–byte binary 3 variable binary
4 variable binary 41 DISPB 1 constant
28 MOVOR 1 2–digits HEX 42 EXIN 1 8–digits HEX
2 2–digits HEX 43 MOVB 1 1–byte binary
3 2–digits HEX 2 1–byte binary
29 COME – – 44 MOVW 1 2–bytes binary
30 JMPE – – 2 2–bytes binary
31 DCNVB 1 constant 45 MOVN 1 constant
2 no monitor 2 4–bytes binary
3 no monitor 3 4–bytes binary
32 COMPB 1 constant 46 SPCNT 1 4–bytes binary
2 constant or 2 no monitor
variable binary 3 8–digits HEX
3 variable binary 48 END3 – –
33 SFT 1 4–digits HEX 51 WINDR 1 2–bytes binary
34 DSCHB 1 constant 52 WINDW 1 2–bytes binary
2 variable binary 53 AXCTL 1 constant
3 variable binary 2 8–digits HEX
4 variable binary 54 TMRC 1 constant
5 variable binary 2 special
35 XMOVB 1 constant 3 special
2 variable binary 55 CTRC 1 2–bytes binary
3 variable binary 2 2–bytes binary
4 variable binary 57 DIFU 1 constant
5 variable binary 58 DIFD 1 constant
36 ADDB 1 constant 59 EOR 1 constant
2 variable binary 2 variable HEX
3 constant or 3 constant or
variable binary variable HEX
37 SUBB 1 constant 60 AND 1 constant
38 MULB 1 constant 61 OR 1 constant
39 DIVB 1 constant 62 NOT 1 constant
3 constant or 3 variable HEX
variable binary 64 END – –
4 variable binary 65 CALL 1 no monitor
718
No. Name Parameter Monitor Format

66 CALLU 1 no monitor
68 JMPB 1 no monitor
69 LBL 1 no monitor
70 NOP 1 constant
71 SP 1 no monitor
72 SPE – –
73 JMPC 1 no monitor
6.1.6
Functional Instructions
of Special Monitor
forMat
TMR Displays in ”Current/Preset” format by seconds

Displays in ”Current/Preset” format by BCD or binary according to the Counter Type setting in LADDER
CTR
Program.
TMRB Displays current value by seconds (Preset value is displayed by milliseconds)
The 2nd parameter shows preset value, and the 3rd parameter shows current value as their monitor
displays.
These two monitor displays changes their format according to the 1st parameter as below:
1st Parameter Precision Display Format
0 8 ms by second
TMRC
1 48 ms by second
2 1 second HH:MM:SS
3 10 second HH:MM:SS
4 1 minute HH:MM
719
6.2 At LADDER Diagram Editor screen you can edit LADDER program to
change its behavior.
LADDER DIAGRAM To reach LADDER Diagram Editor screen, press [EDIT] soft key at
EDITOR SCREEN LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
Following operations are available at LADDER Diagram Editor screen.
For more detail of these operations, refer to the descriptions of each key
to operate.
D Delete by net [DELETE]

D Move by net [CUT] & [PASTE]
D Copy by net [COPY] & [PASTE]
D Change address of ”bit address” + INPUT key
contacts and coils
D Change parameters of ”number” or ”byte address” + INPUT
functional instructions key
D Add new net [NEW NET]
D Change construction of net [ZOOM]
D Make changes effective [UPDATE]
D Abandon changes [RESTORE]
You can modify LADDER even while the LADDER is running. At

modifying running LADDER, the modified LADDER will not run just
after each operation to modify it. PMC system preserves the LADDER
at the point of entering LADDER Diagram Editor screen, and the
preserved LADDER will continue to run while editing operation. When
exiting LADDER Diagram Editor screen, or pressing [UPDATE] soft
key, the modified LADDER starts to run and the modifications take
effects.
720
NOTE
1 [EDIT] soft key in LADDER Diagram Monitor screen
appears only when Programmer function is enabled. To
enable Programmer function, set ”PROGRAMMER
ENABLE” to ”YES” at GENERAL screen of PMC Settings.
While Online Monitor function is active, you can not reach
LADDER Diagram Editor screen. To use LADDER Diagram
Editor function, you have to disable Online Monitor function
at PMC Setting screen: choose ”NOT USE”.
2 To edit LADDER protected by password, you have to unlock
the protection first. Enter ”password” + INPUT key to unlock
it when password is requested.
721
6.2.1
Screen Structures

1. It is basically same with LADDER Diagram Monitor screen,
except that no monitor displays of relays and parameters of
functional instructions are displayed.
2. At right side of LADDER Diagram area, a position bar is always
displayed, which indicates screen position within current
subprogram: in LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, this position
bar is exclusively displayed with comments of write coil.
Sometimes, this position bar hides a part of write coil comments.
(b) LADDER Diagram
1. Style of LADDER Diagram is basically same with LADDER
Diagram Monitor screen, except that functional instructions are
drawn always in ”COMPACT” format that has no monitor
displays.
2. Cursor is shown always. And the net, which will be an object of
following editing operations, is emphasized in screen.
722
6.2.2
Operations
Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Editor Screen
Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Editor screen
Program List Add new net Select nets Cut nets Paste nets
Change to Edit net Make changes Delete nets Copy nets

Search soft keys effective
Sub soft–keys of LADDER Editor screen

Run/stop LADDER
Address change Restore Setting screen Abandon changes

1. [LIST] Go to Program List Editor screen
Goes to Program List Editor screen to choose which subprogram
to be edited at LADDER Diagram Editor screen. The Program
List Editor screen can also edit subprograms; remove some
subprograms, or add new one.
2. [SEARCH MENU] Search & Jump
return to the ”Main soft keys”.
”Search soft keys” are quite same with ones of LADDER
Diagram Monitor screen. See descriptions of search functions of
LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
3. [ZOOM] Change construction of net
Goes to Net Editor screen to modify structure of the selected net.
For detail of editing operation at Net Editor screen, see
descriptions of Net Editor screen.
4. [NEW NET] Add new net
Create and add new net to cursor position. Pressing this soft key
reaches Net Editor screen, so that new net is constructed.
For detail of editing operation at Net Editor screen, see
descriptions of Net Editor screen.
5. [UPDATE] Make changes effective
Updates running LADDER program to currently edited
LADDER program, so that the all modifications will take effects,
and remains Editor screen. If it succeeds to update running
LADDER, edited LADDER starts to run.
Before updating LADDER program, edited LADDER program
is checked. If some problem is found, a message is displayed, and
updating process aborts. At some kind of error, cursor jumps
where the error is detected.
723
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running
LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program in
wrong way, or update LADDER program with the machine
in improper status, it may cause unexpected reaction of the
machine. You have to make it sure that modifications you
make on LADDER program is appropriate, machine is in
proper status, and nobody is near the machine, when you
update LADDER program.
CAUTION
At updating LADDER program, it may take rather long time
to complete updating process in some cases according to
the activity of LADDER program. If it takes too long time, or
never complete at updating process, cancel updating
process and correct LADDER program, following
instructions in Subsection 6.2.5 ”How to correct LADDER
program that never stops”.
6. [SELECT NET] Select multiple nets

Selects multiple nets for following operations such as
[DELETE].
Pressing [SELECT NET] soft key leads to a mode to select one
or more nets for following editing operation. Use cursor move
keys and search functions to select nets, as you like. Being in
mode to select nets is indicated by dented [SELECT NET] soft
key, and the information of selected nets is shown in additional
information line at near bottom of screen.
7. [DELETE] Delete net
Deletes selected nets. The nets deleted by [DELETE] soft key are
lost. If you [DELETE] wrong nets, you have to abandon the all
modifications you have made, and restore LADDER program to
the original one before editing operation.
8. [CUT] Cut nets
Cuts selected nets. The cut nets are preserved in Paste Buffer, and
disappear from diagram. The contents of Paste Buffer before
[CUT] operation are lost.
[CUT] and [PASTE] soft keys are used to move nets.
The Paste Buffer can contain approx. 8000 steps maximum, and
[CUT] may fail to cut nets of over 8000 steps.
724
9. [COPY] Copy nets

Copy selected nets into Paste Buffer. No change on diagram will
be made. The contents of Paste Buffer before [COPY] operation
are lost.
[COPY] and [PASTE] soft keys are used to copy nets.
The Paste Buffer can contain approx. 8000 steps maximum, and
[COPY] may fail to copy nets of over 8000 steps.
10. [PASTE] Paste nets

Pastes nets at cursor position, which were stored into Paste Buffer
by [CUT] or [COPY] soft key.
Pressing [PASTE] soft key while selecting nets using [SELECT

NET] soft key, alters the selected nets with the nets in Paste
Buffer.
725
Pasting nets using [PASTE] soft key will not remove contents of
Paste Buffer. The contents of Paste Buffer will remain until
turning CNC power off.
11. [CHANGE ADRE] Change of Used Address
The addresses used in Ladder program can be changed to other
addresses.
As for the details, refer to ”4.1 Address change”.
12. [RESTORE] Abandon changes
Abandons all changes, and restores LADDER program to the one
at entering LADDER Diagram Editor screen, or last updated one
using [UPDATE] soft key. This soft key is useful when you make
wrong modifications and hard to recover from them.
13. [SCREEN SETING] Screen settings
Goes to setting screen for LADDER Diagram Editor screen. You
can change various settings for LADDER Diagram Editor screen
at the screen. Use Return key [<] to return to LADDER Diagram
Editor screen. See ”Settings for LADDER Diagram Editor”
section for the detail.
14. [RUN] / [STOP] Run and stop LADDER program
Controls LADDER program execution. [RUN] soft key makes
LADDER run, and [STOP] soft key makes LADDER stop. Both
soft keys will confirm your intention. When you are sure to run
or stop LADDER program, press [YES] to take an action.
WARNING
1 You have to pay special attention to run/stop LADDER
program. Running/stopping LADDER program in a wrong
timing, or with machine in improper status, may cause
unexpected reaction of machine. You have to make it sure
that machine is in proper status, and nobody is near the
machine when you run/stop LADDER program.
2 At stopping LADDER program, it may take rather long time
to complete to stop it in some cases according to the activity
of LADDER program. If LADDER takes too long time to
stop, or never stop, correct LADDER program, following
instructions in Subsection ”6.2.5 How to correct LADDER
726
15. [CANCEL EDIT] Abortion of edit

This aborts the contents of the edit and exits from this screen.
16. [<] Exit Editor
Updates running LADDER program to edited LADDER
program, so that the all modifications will take effects, and exits
Editor screen. If it succeeds to update running LADDER, edited
LADDER starts to run.
Before updating LADDER program, edited LADDER program
is checked. If some problem is found, a message is displayed,
updating process aborts and you can not exit this screen. At some
kind of error, cursor jumps where the error is detected.
The function keys such as SYSTEM key will not work when the
LADDER Diagram Editor screen is active.
WARNING
1 You have to pay special attention to modify running
LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program in
wrong way, or update LADDER program with the machine
in improper status, may cause unexpected reaction of the
machine. You have to make it sure that modifications you
make on LADDER program is appropriate, machine is
in proper status, and nobody is near the machine, when
you update LADDER program.
2 At updating LADDER program, it may take rather long time
to complete updating process in some cases according to
the activity of LADDER program. If it takes too long time, or
never complete at updating process, cancel updating
process and correct LADDER program, following
instructions in Subsection ”6.2.5 How to correct LADDER

Cursor move keys and Page change keys move cursor on screen.
When cursor is placed on some relay or some address parameter
of a functional instruction, the information about the address
under cursor is displayed at ”Additional Information Line”.
2. ”bit address” + INPUT key
Changes bit address of relay under cursor.
3. ”number” or ”byte address” + INPUT key
Changes parameter of functional instructions under cursor.
But, there are some parameters that can not change by this
operation. If you see a message that means that this parameter can
not be changed, use Net Editor screen to change the parameter.
(c) Shortcuts
1. Same shortcut search operations with LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen are available. For their detail, see descriptions
about Shortcut operations of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
2. Same shortcut operations using [LIST] soft key with LADDER
Diagram Monitor screen are available.
727
6.2.3
Setting Screen
(a) Setting items

LADDER Diagram Editor Setting screen contains the setting items
below:
D ADDRESS NOTATION
Diagram are displayed as corresponding symbols, or the
addresses themselves.
SYMBOL (default)
themselves.
ADDRESS
D RELAY COMMENT
Set the style of relay comment. These are three options as below.
When you display relay comment, less ladder diagram nets are
shown.
NONE (default)
Relay comments are not displayed.
1 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in one line. Up to 15
characters can be displayed. Characters after 16th character
will not be displayed. Width of a relay with comment of more
than 7 characters will be extended.
2 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in two lines. Up to 30
characters can be displayed. Width of a relay with comment
of more than 7 characters will be extended.
728
Display style of relay comment
NONE
1 LINE
2 LINE
D SHOW COIL COMMENT

Determines whether to show coil comments. Unlike LADDER
Diagram Monitor screen, the screen position gauge is always
displayed at the right edge of the screen.
YES (default)
Right margin of 2 lines of 15 characters is reserved for
display of coil comments.
NO
instead of showing coil comment.
Determines whether a net number is counted as ”LOCAL” starting

from the top of current subprogram, or is counted as ”GLOBAL”
starting from the top of whole program. This setting also affects the
expression of net number at searching nets by number.
LOCAL
number information at upper right of the screen is displayed in the
format ”displaying range / nets in subprogram NET”.
GLOBAL (default)
Net number starts from 1 at top of Level 1 program. Net number
is defined identically at whole of program. The net number
information at upper right of the screen is displayed in the format
”displaying range / subprogram range NET”.
729

continue to search.
YES (default)
Downward search will continue to search from top of LADDER
when reaches to bottom. Upward search will also continue to
search from bottom when reaches to top.
NO
Search process will fail when reached top or bottom, and displays
an error message at Message Line.
D FORCE POSTPROCESS AFTER EDIT

Decides whether the post–processing after editing LADDER
program, which makes LADDER program ready to run, will be
always done, or will be done only when LADDER program is
actually modified, at exiting LADDER Diagram Editor screen.
YES (default)
The post–processing will be always done at exiting LADDER
Diagram Editor screen. Even at exiting Editor screen just after
entering it, LADDER structure will be checked because of the
post–processing.
NO
The post–processing will be done only after LADDER program
is actually modified. Before any modification on LADDER
program is done, you can always exit Editor screen without any
errors, even if the LADDER program has an error originally and
can not be executed.
730

Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays, and
functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram can be
changed in the colors and the shapes. Samples of ”Normal net”,
”Selected net”, ”Protected net” are displayed at right side. These
samples change their appearance according to the following current
settings.
For the color setting, LADDER diagram is categorized into these
three parts, and you can specify their colors independently, by
entering color number, or by using right and left cursor move keys to
change the color number. You can use 16 numbers from 0 to 15;
however, some different number may correspond to the same color.
You can not specify the same number to the foreground and the
background colors of a part.
BOLD DIAGRAM
Sets thickness of diagram lines. This setting also affects shapes
of relays.
YES (default)
Diagram is drawn with thick lines. Relays are drawn in more
distinct shapes. You have to choose this option to make
following ”VARIABLE RELAY SYMBOL” setting
effective.
NO
Diagram is drawn with thin lines. Relays are drawn in
smaller shapes.
731
NOTE
The setting ”BOLD DIAGRAM” requires ”Character
registration function” of CNC software, which is supported
by Series F002 version 03 or later. If CNC software does not
support it, diagram is always displayed with thin lines.
ADDRESS COLOR
ADDRESS BACKGROUND
Colors for the relay address are set. You can specify these colors
by entering color number, or by moving right and left cursor. 16
colors (from No.0 to No.15) are available. Foreground color
should be different from background one.
DIAGRAM COLOR
DIAGRAM BACKGROUND
General color and its background color for LADDER Diagram.
SELECTED NET COLOR
SELECTED NET BACKGROUND
Color setting for the selected net. The nets that will be object of
following editing operation are displayed with this color setting.
PROTECTED NET COLOR
PROTECTED NET BACKGROUND
Color setting for the nets protected from editing operations. The
protected nets can not be selected as object of editing operations.
The nets with following functional instructions are protected
from deleting and creating when a subprogram (not whole
program) is chosen to edit.
END1 END3 SP
END2 END SPE
COMMENT COLOR
COMMENT BACKGROUND
Colors for the relay comment are set. You can specify these
colors by entering color number, or by moving right and left
cursor. 16 colors (from No.0 to No.15) are available. Foreground
color should be different from background one.
(b) Soft keys
LADDER Diagram Editor Setting screen has the soft keys of options
and following:
732
6.2.4 Pressing Return key [<] or [UPDATE] soft key will analyze edited
Error Messages and LADDER program and try to generate executable objects. If some error
is found at analyzing phase, you will see error message on screen, and
Their Solutions according to kind of error, cursor may jump to the place where the error
is found.
Following table shows error messages expected at LADDER analysis and
their meanings and solutions.
Error message Meaning and solution
Meaning:
CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.
CALL/CALLU IN
BAD LEVEL. Solution:
CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2 or in subpro-
grams. Do not use any other places.
Meaning:
COME is found between JMP and JMPE, and COM
and corresponding COME have different JMP/JMPE
status.
COME IN JMP. Solution:
COME and corresponding COM must have same
JMP/JMPE status. Review COM range and JMP
range, to adjust not to overlap with each other: it is
possible that one range includes the other completely.
Meaning:
There is no COM that corresponds to this COME.
COME WITHOUT
COM. Solution:
If COM is missing, add it in proper position. If the
COME is unnecessary, remove it.
DUPLICATE Meaning:
END1. Multiple END1, END2, or END3 are found.
DUPLICATE Solution:
END2. Remove extra END1, END2, or END3.
DUPLICATE
END3.
Meaning:
Same L–address is used in plural LBLs.
DUPLICATE LBL. Solution:
If some of these LBLs are unnecessary, remove them.
If all of these LBLs is necessary, assign other L–ad-
dresses to them to make all LBLs unique.
Meaning:
Same P–address is used in plural SPs.
DUPLICATE P AD- Solution:
DRESS. If some of these SPs are unnecessary, remove them.
If all of these SPs is necessary, assign other P–ad-
dresses to them to make all SPs unique.
733
Meaning:
Plural TMRs, CTRs, TMRBs, DIFUs, or DIFDs have
DUPLICATE TMR the same number as their parameter.
NUMBER.(WARN- This is warning.
ING)
DUPLICATE CTR Solution:
NUMBER.(WARN- If some of them are unnecessary, remove them. If all
ING) of them are necessary, assign other number to pa-
DUPLICATE rameter of them to make them unique.
TMRB NUM- If two or more instructions with same parameter
BER.(WARNING) number will never be active simultaneously at one
DUPLICATE DIFU/ time, the LADDER program has a possibility to work
DIFD NUM- correctly, however, it is recommended from safety
BER.(WARNING) and maintenance points of view, that all these
instructions should have different parameter num-
ber with each other.
Meaning:
END IN COM. END, END1, END2, or END3 is found between COM
END1 IN COM. and COME.
END2 IN COM. Solution:
END3 IN COM. If COME is missing, add it in proper position. If COM
is unnecessary, remove it.
Meaning:
END IN JMP. END, END1, END2, or END3 is found between JMP
END1 IN JMP. and JMPE.
END2 IN JMP. Solution:
END3 IN JMP. If JMPE is missing, add it in proper position. If JMP is
unnecessary, remove it.
Meaning:
END is found between SP and SPE.
END IN SP. Solution:
If SPE is missing, add it in proper position. If END is
in wrong place, move it to proper position.
GARBAGE AFTER Meaning:

END. There are some nets after END, END2, or END3,
GARBAGE AFTER which will not be executed.
END2. Solution:
GARBAGE AFTER Remove unnecessary nets, and move necessary nets
END3. to proper position so that they will be executed.
ILLEGAL TMR Meaning:

NUMBER. TMR, CTR, TMRB, DIFU, or DIFD has parameter
ILLEGAL CTR number that is out of range.
NUMBER. Solution:
ILLEGAL TMRB If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct number not
NUMBER. to exceed the maximum number defined by each
ILLEGAL DIFU/ PMC model.
DIFD NUMBER.
734
Meaning:
JMP and corresponding JMPE have different COM/
COME status.
JMP/JMPE TO Solution:
BAD COM LEVEL. JMP and corresponding JMPE must have same
COM/COME status. Review JMP range and COM
Meaning:
JMP and its destination differ in COM/COME status.
JMPB OVER COM Solution:
BORDER. JMPB and its destination must have same COM/
COME status. Review range of JMPB and COM
Meaning:
JMPB jumps to different program level.
JMPB OVER LEV- Solution:
EL. JMPB can only jump to the same program level, or
within a subprogram. If the JMPB is unnecessary,
remove it. If LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in
proper position. If it should be JMPC, correct it.
Meaning:
JMPC is used in other than subprogram.
JMPC IN BAD Solution:
LEVEL. JMPC is used to jump from a subprogram to level 2.
If the JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If it should be
JMPB or JMP, correct it.
Meaning:
JMPC jumps to LBL between COM and COME.
Solution:
JMPC INTO COM. LBL for JMPC must be located out of any COM and
COME pair. If the JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If
the LBL is located wrong, move it to correct position.
If the L–address of JMPC is wrong, correct it.
Meaning:
JMPE is found between COM and COME, and JMP
and corresponding JMPE have different COM/COME
status.
JMPE IN COM. Solution:
JMPE and corresponding JMP must have same
COM/COME status. Review JMP range and COM
Meaning:
There is no JMP that corresponds to this JMPE.
JMPE WITHOUT
JMP. Solution:
If JMP is missing, add it in proper position. If the
JMPE is unnecessary, remove it.
735
Meaning:
LADDER PRO- LADDER program may be broken by some reason.
GRAM IS BRO- Solution:
KEN. This LADDER program must be all cleared once, and
remake LADDER program.
Meaning:
Can not find proper LBL for JMPB.
LBL FOR JMPB
NOT FOUND. Solution:
If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL is missing,
add it in proper position.
Meaning:
Destination of JMPC is not level 2.
Solution:
LBL FOR JMPC IN JMPC is used to jump from a subprogram to level 2.
BAD LEVEL If the JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If another LBL
of same L–address that the JMPC is intended to jump
exists in the subprogram, assign different L–address
to these two LBLs. If it should be JMPB or JMP, cor-
rect it.
Meaning:
Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.
LBL FOR JMPC Solution:
NOT FOUND. If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL is missing,
add it in proper position: JMPC jumps into level 2. If it
should be JMPB or JMP, correct it.
Meaning:
There is no COME that corresponds to this COM.
MISSING COME
FOR THIS COM. Solution:
If COME is missing, add it in proper position. If COM
is unnecessary, remove it.
Meaning:
There is no JMPE that corresponds to this JMP.
MISSING JMPE
FOR THIS JMP. Solution:
If JMPE is missing, add it in proper position. If JMP is
Meaning:
There is no SPE that corresponds to this SP.
MISSING SPE
FOR THIS SP. Solution:
If SPE is missing, add it in proper position. If SP is
NO END. Meaning:
NO END1. END, END1, END2, or END3 is not found.
NO END2. Solution:
NO END3. Add END, END1, END2, or END3 in proper position.
Meaning:
Subprogram that is called by CALL/CALLU is not
NO SUCH SUB- found.
PROGRAM. Solution:
If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. If the subpro-
gram is missing, create it.
736
Meaning:
Write coil is necessary, but is not found.
NO WRITE COIL.
Solution:
Add proper write coil.
Meaning:
SP is found in wrong place.
SP IN BAD LEV-
EL. Solution:
SP can be used at top of a subprogram. Correct it so
that no SP exists in other place.
Meaning:
SP is found in level 3.
SP IN LEVEL3. Solution:
If END3 is located wrong, move it to correct position.
If the SP is unnecessary, remove it.
Meaning:
SP or SPE is found between COM and COME.
SP/SPE IN COM. Solution:
If COME is missing, add it in proper position. If the
COM is unnecessary, remove it.
Meaning:
SP or SPE is found between JMP and JMPE.
SP/SPE IN JMP. Solution:
If JMPE is missing, add it in proper position. If the
JMP is unnecessary, remove it.
Meaning:
There is no SP that corresponds to this SPE.
SPE WITHOUT
SP. Solution:
If SP is missing, add it in proper position. If the SPE is
Meaning:
There are too many LBLs.
TOO MANY LBL. Solution:
Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this error still occurs,
adjust the construction of program to use less LBLs.
Meaning:
Unsupported instruction for this PMC model is found.
UNAVAILABLE Solution:
INSTRUCTION. Confirm that this LADDER program is correct one. If
this program is correct one, all these unsupported
instructions have to be removed.
737
6.2.5 If the following functional instructions are used with their ACT
How to Correct conditions (or RST conditions) are kept ON improperly, an attempt to
stop LADDER may take much time, or may not stop it actually.
LADDER Program that
Never Stops D WINDR / WINDW
In case of window function of high–speed response, this will not
cause the problem even if its ACT is stuck to ON.
D EXIN
D AXCTL
This will cause the problem also when RST condition is stuck to
ON.
D JMPB
When it jumps to the LBL before JMPB itself.
D JMPC
When it jumps to the LBL which leads to reach the same JMPC
again.
When LADDER can not stop, any operation to modify LADDER
program may take much time to complete, or may not complete.
Processes such as followings will be affected by this problem:
1. Stop LADDER program by [STOP] soft key.
2. Read new LADDER program from memory card or other devices
at I/O screen while current LADDER program is running.
3. Update running LADDER program at LADDER Diagram Editor
screen, by exiting the screen with return key [<], or by [UPDATE]
soft key.
To avoid this problem, find above–mentioned functional instructions
whose ACT condition (or RST condition) is kept ON, and follow
instructions below to correct LADDER program to use these functional
instructions properly:
1. Confirm that machine is in safe condition, and then turn off
CNC’s power.
2. Turn on CNC’s power, with ”CAN” and ”Z” keys keeping held
down until CNC’s finishes starting up completely, not to run
LADDER program automatically.
3. Go to LADDER Diagram Editor screen, find the instruction that
cause the trouble, modify logic around the instruction, so that
ACT condition (or RST condition) will once turn OFF after every
time the process of the instruction completes. In case that JMPB
or JMPC repeats same process, examine the condition to jump,
and reconstruct the structure of LADDER if necessary.
4. Write LADDER program into flash ROM at I/O screen.
5. Run LADDER program.
If the problem still remains after correction, there may be another
functional instruction that causes the trouble in the same way. Repeat
finding and correcting them in the same way, until the trouble is resolved.
738
6.3 At Net Editor screen, you can create new net, and modify existing net.
When [ZOOM] soft key is used to reach Net Editor screen, this screen is
NET EDITOR in ”Modify Mode” to modify existing net. When [NEW NET] soft key
SCREEN is used, this screen is in ”New Mode” to create new net from nothing.
Following operations are available at this screen:
D The setting parameter is as follows: ”PROGRAM ENABLE = YES”
(K17#1 = 1 or K900#1 = 1).
D Place new contacts and coils ”bit address” + [ ], [ ], etc.
D Change type of contacts and coils [ ], [ ], etc.
D Place new functional instructions [FUNC]
D Change type of functional instructions [FUNC]
D Erase contacts, coils, and functional instructions [ ]
D Draw/erase connecting lines [ ], [ ], [ ]
D Edit data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
D Insert line/column [INSERT LINE], [INSERT COLUMN],
[APPEND COLUMN]
D Change address of contacts and coils ”bit address” + INPUT key
D Change parameters of functional instructions ”number” or ”byte
address” + INPUT key
D Abandon modifications [RESTORE]
739
6.3.1
Screen Structures
(a) Screen structure

1. It is basically same with LADDER Diagram Editor screen, except
that only one net is in this screen, and that position bar at right
edge of screen does not appear at this screen.
2. Current edit mode is indicated at right of the top line as ”NEW
MODE” or ”MODFY MODE”. When [ZOOM] soft key at
LADDER Editor screen is used to reach Net Editor screen, the
screen is in Modify mode, and when [NEW NET] soft key is used,
it is in New mode.
3. Current net number is displayed at right of the top line. The net
number is same with the net number in previous LADDER
Diagram Editor screen.
4. Net Editor screen expands image of net horizontally for a wider
net according to its width, while LADDER Diagram
Monitor/Editor screen folds nets wider than screen width. When
net width is expanded over screen width, attempt to move cursor
out of screen will scroll net image to the direction.
The net of maximum size occupies area of 1024 elements, but
actually available area may be little less for internal use according
to the internal condition: ”element” means the space that is
occupied by single relay.
740
6.3.2
Operations Soft keys of Net Editor screen of PMC–NB6
Main soft keys of Net Editor screen
Horizontal Left vertical Go to

B contact Inverted coil connection connection next net
A contact Normal coil Functional Delete Right vertical

instructions connection
Sub soft keys of Net Editor screen Abortion of Edit
Reset coil Abandon changes Insert column
Set coil Edit Data table Insert line Append column

1. [ ],[ ],[ ],[ ],[ S
],[ R
]
Place relays (contacts and coils), or change type of existing
relays.
When one of these relay soft keys is pressed at cursor on blank
place, new relay of the soft key is placed under the cursor. When
the soft key follows a string that means a bit address, the bit
address is assigned to the newly placed relay. If no bit address
is given, last entered bit address is automatically used for the new
relay. If no bit address has been entered yet, the new relay will
have no address assigned to it. Contacts can be placed at other
than rightmost column, and coils can be placed at rightmost
column only.
Moving cursor onto an existing relay, pressing a relay soft key of
different type changes the type of relay under the cursor. But,
changing coil to contact, and changing contact to coil are
forbidden.
2. [FUNC] Enter and change functional instruction

Places functional instruction, or changes type of existing
functional instruction.
When [FUNC] soft key is pressed at cursor on blank place, new
functional instruction will be placed under the cursor: list of
available functional instructions is displayed, then choose type of
functional instruction to be entered. When [FUNC] soft key
follows a string that means number or name of a functional
instruction, the specified functional instruction is entered
directly, without the list screen.
Moving cursor onto an existing functional instruction, pressing
[FUNC] soft key changes the type of functional instruction under
the cursor.
741
3. [ ] Draw horizontal connection

Draws horizontal connection line. Or alters an existing relay to
horizontal line.
4. [ ] Erase relays and functional instructions
Erases relays and functional instructions under cursor.
5. [ ],[ ] Draw and erase vertical connection
Draw vertical connection line upward from right or left edge of
relay or horizontal line under cursor. Or erase existing vertical
lines.
If the relay or line under the cursor has no vertical line upward,
these soft keys have solid arrows, and indicate that pressing them
means drawing lines. On the other hand, if a vertical line already
exists under the cursor, arrows in these soft keys become pale
([ ], [ ]), and indicate that pressing them means
erasing lines.
6. [NEXT NET] Go to next net

Finishes editing current net, and goes to next net.
If [ZOOM] soft key at LADDER Diagram Editor screen is used
to reach Net Editor screen, [NEXT NET] will finish modifying
current net, and the next net will be an object of further editing
operation.
Action of [NEXT NET] soft key in Modify mode (modifying an existing net)
If [NEW NET] soft key at LADDER Diagram Editor screen is

used to reach Net Editor screen, [NEXT NET] will finish creating
current net, insert it into the LADDER program, and start with
blank to create another new net to be inserted next to the current
net.
Action of [NEXT NET] soft key in Modify mode (modifying an existing net)
742
7. [DATA TABLE] Edit data table

Reaches Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen to edit
data table of functional instruction under cursor. This soft key
appears only when cursor is on a functional instruction that has
data table with it.
For detail of editing operation of data table, see descriptions of
”Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen”.
8. [RESTORE] Abandon changes
Abandons all changes, and restores net to the one at starting
editing this net. If [NEW NET] soft key at LADDER Diagram
Editor screen is used to reach Net Editor screen, it will be back
to blank net, and if [ZOOM] soft key is used, it will be back to
the old net before modifications in this screen.
9. [INSERT LINE] Insert line
Inserts one blank line at cursor position. Diagram elements at or
below vertical cursor position will be shifted downward by one
line. Inserting line at middle of functional instruction box will
expand the box vertically to make a space between the input
conditions.
10. [INSERT COLUMN] Insert column

Inserts one blank column at cursor position. Diagram elements
at or on right of horizontal cursor position will be shifted to right
by one column. And if there is no room to shift the elements, a
new column is added and the Diagram area will be expanded to
right.
743
11. [APPEND COLUMN] Append column

Inserts one blank column at right of cursor position. Diagram
elements on right of horizontal cursor position will be shifted to
right by one column. And if necessary, net will be expanded to
right.
12. [<] Exit editor screen

Analyzes current editing net, and store it into LADDER program.
If some error is found in the net, it still remains Net Editor screen,
and an error message will be displayed. According to a kind of
error, cursor may indicate where the error is detected.
13. [CANCEL EDIT] Abortion of edit
This aborts the contents of the edit and exits from this screen.
Net Editor screen expands image of net horizontally for a wider
net according to its width, while LADDER Diagram
Monitor/Editor screen folds nets wider than screen width. When
net width is expanded over screen width, attempt to move cursor
out of screen will scroll net image to the direction.
The net of maximum size occupies area of 1024 elements, but
actually available area may be little less for internal use according
to the internal condition: ”element” means the space that is
3. ”number” / ”byte address” + INPUT key
744
6.3.3 Pressing [FUNC] soft key at Net Editor screen reaches Functional
Functional Instruction Instruction List screen at which you choose a functional instruction to be
entered from list of all available functional instructions.
List Screen
Operations at this screen are below:

1. [SELECT] Select a functional instruction
Selects a functional instruction. The functional instruction under
cursor at that time is chosen, and entered into the editing net.
2. [SORT NUMBER], [SORT NAME] Rearrange functional
instructions list
Rearrange functional instructions list in two ways. [SORT
NUMBER] soft key arranges the list in numerical order with their
identifying numbers, on the other hand, [SORT NAME] soft key
arranges it in alphabetical order with their names. At beginning,
the list is arranged in alphabetical order.
3. [<] Quit selecting
Quits selecting functional instruction, and return to Net Editor
screen.
1. Cursor move keys
Cursor move keys move cursor on screen. According to the
cursor position, the functional instruction to be selected changes.
2. INPUT key
Act just like [SELECT] soft key.
(c) Shortcuts
1. [SELECT] soft key and INPUT key following number or name
of a functional instruction will select the specified functional
instruction directly, instead of the one under cursor.
2. When [FUNC] soft key in Net editor screen is pressed following
a string that means number or name of a functional instruction,
the specified functional instruction is entered directly, without
displaying Functional Instruction List screen.
745
6.3.4 At Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen, you can edit the
Functional Instruction contents of data table that belongs to some functional instructions.
To reach this screen, at Net Editor screen, press [DATA TABLE] soft key
Data Table Editor that is displayed when the cursor is on the following functional
Screen instructions which have a data table.
D Functional Instruction COD (SUB7)
Following edit operations are available at this screen.
D Change the data table value. ”number” + INPUT key
D Change the data length. [BYTE], [WORD], [D.WORD]
(These soft keys can be operated
only at Functional Instruction
Data Table Editor screen of
Functional Instruction CODB.)
D Change the number of data. [COUNT]
D Initialize all of data [INIT]
Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen of Functional

Instruction CODB.
746
(1) Screen Structures

It is same with Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen.
(b) Display data
The cursor is shown always. You can edit the data that is pointed
by the cursor.
(2) Operations
Soft keys of Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen of
functional instruction COD.
Soft keys of Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen of

functional instruction CODB.
1. [SEARCH NUMBER] Search for data table number

2. [SEARCH VALUE] Search for data value
747

on memory.
on memory.
NOTE
In the functional instruction COD (SUB7), the data type of
the data table can dynamically be changed either BCD2 or
BCD4 by ”BYT” which is one of input condition. So the data
type of the data table is decided when the functional
instruction COD is executed. Decide the display data digit
according to the status of ”BYT” by pressing either [BCD2]
soft key or [BCD4] soft key.
After turning the power on, the default displaying data type
is BCD4 digits. But if you change data type by pressing
[BCD2] soft key or [BCD4] soft key, the data type is kept until
you change again.
The data table of functional instruction COD is stored in the
memory as BCD4 digits type.
If you change the data type from BCD4 digits to BCD2 digits,
the data is displayed without higher 2–digits. But the data
of higher 2–digits is kept in the memory. So you return the
data type from BCD2 digits to BCD4 digits, the former BCD4
digits is recovered.
The input range of the data obeys the current data type.
5. [BYTE] Change to the BYTE length

Changes data length to 1 byte. If overflowed data is found, the
cursor points it, and this operation aborts. Then, correct it and
press [BYTE] soft key again.
6. [WORD] Change to the 2 BYTE length
Changes data length to 2 byte. If overflowed data is found, the
cursor points it, and this operation aborts. Then, correct it and
press [WORD] soft key again.
7. [WORD] Change to the 4 BYTE length
Changes data length to 4 byte.
NOTE
On functional instruction CODB, the data type is decided by
the first parameter of it.
So, if you change data type, the first parameter is changed
too.
When you added functional instruction CODB to ladder
program, the default data type is BYTE.
748
8. [COUNT] Change the number of data

Changes the number of data. If you expanded the number of data,
”0” is set to expanded data as default.
NOTE
In case of functional instruction COD, the number of data is
decided by the first parameter of it.
In case of functional instruction CODB, the number of data
is decided by the second parameter of it.
If you change the number of data, these parameters are
changed too.
9. [INIT] Initialize all of data

Initializes all of data to ”0”. The number of data is not changed.
You can move the cursor by all cursor move keys and Page change
keys.
11. ”number” + INPUT key
Changes the data that is pointed by the cursor.
The input range of the data obeys the data length and the display
data type.
Ex.) The case of functional instruction COD and displaying
BCD2 digits
The available data range: 0 to 99
Ex.) The case of functional instruction CODB and length of 2
BYTE
The available data range: –32768 to 32767
And you can input multiple numbers by the following methods.
(1) ”;”(EOB) is used for separating data.
(Ex.) Press the INPUT key after typing ”100;200;300;”
(2) ”;=” is used for inputting the same value as preceding data.
(Ex.) Press the INPUT key after typing ”100;=;=;200;=”,
and it becomes ”100,100,100,200,200”.
(3) ”;;” is used for skipping an input address.
(Ex.) Press the INPUT key after typing ”100;;100”. The
second data is not inputted.
749
6.3.5 Return key [<] or [NEXT NET] soft key analyzes current editing net, and
Error Messages and produce executable object of the net: new object of LADDER program is
not yet effective at this time. If some error is found through the analysis,
Their Solutions an error message is displayed, and cursor may indicate where the error is
detected, according to type of error.
Following table shows error messages expected at net analysis and their
meanings and solutions.
Meaning:
When a net contains more than one coil, the coils
ALL COIL MUST should not have any contact beside them that affects
HAVE SAME IN- only one of the coils.
PUT Solution:
Left terminals of all coils in a net must be connected to
same input point.
Meaning:
Coil is located in bad position.
BAD COIL LOCA- Solution:
TION Coil can be located only at rightmost column. Any coil
located at other place must be erased once, and
place necessary coils in correct place.
Meaning:
Some condition input of functional instruction is not
connected correctly.
Solution:
BAD CONDITION Check the connection of all condition inputs of the
functional instruction. Especially for functional instruc-
tion that has more than one condition input, check if
connections to condition inputs interfere with each
other.
Meaning:
FUNCTION AF- Functional instruction is used in output section of net:
TER DI- refer to next section for detail.
VERGENCE IS Solution:
FORBIDDEN Functional instruction can not be used in output sec-
tion of net. If necessary, divide the net into plural nets.
Meaning:
Net is too complicated to analyze.
NET IS TOO COM- Solution:
PLICATED Examine every connection, and find unnecessarily
bending connection, or coils that are connected to
different point.
Meaning:
There is signal connected to nowhere.
NO CONNECTION Solution:
Find gap that is expected to be connected, and cor-
rect the connection.
750
Meaning:
No signal is provided for logical operation.
NO INPUT FOR Solution:
OPERATION Coil without input, or coil connected to output of func-
tional instruction that has no output, causes this error.
If coil is not necessary, remove it. If necessary,
connect it to meaningful input.
Meaning:
No logical operation with functional instruction output
OPERATION AF- is permitted, except write coils.
TER FUNCTION Solution:
IS FORBIDDEN Output of functional instruction can not be connected
to a contact, nor to conjunction with other signal that
will be implemented by logical–or operation.
Meaning:
Relay with blank address, or blank parameter of func-
PARAMETER IS tional instruction, is found.
NOT SUPPLIED Solution:
Enter all of the relay addresses, and parameters of
functional instructions.
Meaning:
Some contacts are connected with short circuit.
SHORT CIRCUIT Solution:
Find contact with terminals connected by short circuit,
and correct connections.
Meaning:
A net is too large. When the net is converted to an
object, the number of steps exceeds 256.
TOO LARGE NET Solution:
Locate a net portion that can be divided into smaller,
multiple nets. Then, divide the net so as to reduce the
number of steps per net.
Meaning:
TOO MANY Too many functional instructions are in one net.
FUNCTIONS IN Solution:
NET Only one functional instruction is allowed to constitute
a net. If necessary, divide the net into plural nets.
Meaning:
WRITE COIL EX- Write coil is expected, but not found.
PECTED Solution:
Add proper write coil to the net.
751
6.3.6 Valid net for PMC–NB6 must have following structure:

Structure of Valid Net
”Input section” consists of contacts and functional instruction, and the

result of operations of input section is led to ”Convergence point”. After
the convergence point, there is ”Output section” that consists of coils
only. The ”Convergence point” is the nearest point to right power line,
where all connections join with each other to gather into single
connection.
Input section contains at least one relay or functional instruction,

however, output section may contain nothing.
Valid net for PMC–NB6 is also restricted in following rules:

D Only one functional instruction is available for a net.
D Functional instruction can be placed only at last (rightmost) of input
section.
D Only coils can be contained in output section.
752
6.4 Program List Viewer screen shows the list of subprogram of the Ladder.
You can select one subprogram then the content of program is displayed.
PROGRAM LIST This screen also shows the detail information (program type, symbol
VIEWER SCREEN name, comment, program size, program net count, the start net number
in all of the program and protect condition) for subprogram.
To reach this screen, at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, press [LIST]
soft key.
D Show the content of selected program. [ZOOM]
(Go to LADDER Diagram Monitor screen)
D Search for program. [SEARCH]
D Go to Program List Setting screen. [LIST SETING]
Program List Viewer screen (Detail)
You can select Detail viewer format or Brief viewer format on Program
List Viewer screen.
The default viewer format is Detail viewer format.
See ”Setting screen for Program List Viewer screen” section for more
detail.
753
6.4.1
Screen Structures (1) Program List Viewer screen (Detail)
Program List Viewer screen (Detail) shows the detail information that
are program size, program net count and so on for program.

1. The title information (REMARKS) of the Ladder Program and
the total program count are displayed above the Program List.
3. In the area for Program List, 14 data can be displayed at
maximum.
(b) Area of Program List
1. The icon ” L ” means program type of Ladder. It is displayed in
the ”L/S” field for each program.
NOTE
Displaying L requires ”Character registration function” of
CNC software, which is supported by Series F002 version
03 or later. If CNC software does not support it, Ladder
program type is always displayed ”L”.
2. Program name is displayed in the ”PROG NO.” field for each

program.
There are three kinds of program names.
PROGRAM : It means the whole program.
LEVELn (n=1,2,3) : It means the Ladder level 1, 2 and 3.
Pm (m=1 to 2000) : It means subprogram.
3. The symbol is displayed in the ”SYMBOL” field for each
program.
If no symbol is set into the subprogram, the ”SYMBOL” field
will be blank.
754
4. The comment is displayed in the ”COMMENT” field for each

program.
If no comment is set into the subprogram, the ”COMMENT”
field will be blank.
5. The program size is displayed in the ”SIZE (BYTE)” field for
each program.
If the program size is not over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in byte.
If it is over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in kilo (1024) byte with
”K”.
Ex.) The case that program size is not over 1024 byte.
1023 bytes : ”1023” is shown.
Ex.) The case that program size is over 1024 byte.
20000 bytes : ”19.5K” is shown.
6. In the ”NET COUNT” field for each program, total number of
nets in the program and first net number of the program in the
whole Ladder program are displayed as follows.
Total number of nets in the program* / First global net number
of the program in the whole Ladder program*
* Maximum is 99,999.
7. The status of protection is displayed in the ”P” field for each
program.
Following icons mean the status of protection.
(Lock) : Monitoring and editing program are
disabled.
(Magnifying glass) : Monitoring program is enabled.
Editing program is disabled.
(Pencil) : Monitoring and editing program are
enabled.
NOTE
The displaying icons requires ”Character registration
function” of CNC software, which is supported by Series
F002 version 03 or later. If CNC software does not support
it, the statuses of protection are displayed as follows.
P : Monitoring and editing program are disabled.
R : Monitoring program is enabled.
Editing program is disabled.
Space : Monitoring and editing program are enabled.
(2) Program List Viewer screen (Brief)

Program List Viewer screen (Brief) shows less information than
Program List Viewer screen (Detail), to increase the number of items.
The program type, the status of protection and the name or symbol are
displayed for each program.
The detail information of program that is pointed by the cursor is
displayed on additional information line.
755

1. The title information (REMARKS) of the Ladder Program and
the total program count are displayed above the Program List.
3. In additional information line near the bottom of the screen, the
following information is displayed for the program under the
cursor.
D program name
D symbol, comment
D program size
D total number of nets
D First global net number of the program in the whole Ladder
program.
4. In the Program List area, the programs 14 lines and 5 columns can
be displayed in maximum.
The following items are displayed in Program List area of Program
List Viewer screen.
The meanings of these items are the same as the items of Program List
Viewer screen (Detail).
D Program type.
D Status of protection
D Program name or symbol. (See ”Screen Setting for Program List
Viewer screen” section for selecting this item.)
756
6.4.2
Operations

1. [ZOOM] Display the contents of program
Goes to LADDER Diagram Monitor screen. If you press
[ZOOM] soft key without strings, the program under the cursor
is displayed at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
If you entered program name (See (c) 1. for detail) or symbol
before pressing [ZOOM] soft key, the program according to the
preceding string is searched and the program is displayed at
LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
But, when the selected program is protected to monitor, you have
to unlock the protection.
2. [SEARCH] Search for program
Searches the program. If you entered program name (See (c) 1.
for detail) or symbol and press [SEARCH] soft key, the program
according to the preceding string is searched, the cursor points the
program.
3. [LIST SETING] Screen Settings
Goes to setting screen for Program List Viewer screen. You can
change various settings for Program List Viewer screen at the
screen. Use Return key [<] to return to Program List Viewer
screen. See ”Settings for Program List Viewer screen” section for
the detail.
You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page change
keys.
And if you entered program name (See (c) 1. for detail) or symbol
and press Right cursor move key, the program according to the
preceding string is searched, the cursor points the program.
2. INPUT key
You can operate same as [ZOOM] soft key.
(c) Note of searching operations
1. When program is searched by program name, the strings that
show each program are as follows.
PROGRAM : ”0”(Zero) or ”G”
LEVEL1, 2, 3 : ”L” + Number
Ex.) ”L1”, ”L01”, etc
Pn : Number or ”P” + Number
Ex.) ”1”, ”P1”, ”P01”
2. Search function by [SEARCH] soft key or Right cursor move key
tries to suppose the given word as an item to be searched in
following order.
(i) The string for PROGRAM or LEVEL : ”0”(Zero), ”G”,
”L” + Number
The number for subprogram : Number
(ii) Symbol
(iii) The string for subprogram : ”P” + Number
757
6.4.3
Setting Screen
(a) Setting items

Program List Viewer/Editor screen contains the setting items below:
D VIEW FORMAT
Determines whether the list data in the Program List
Viewer/Editor screen are displayed as detail format, or brief
format themselves.
DETAIL (default)
The Program List Viewer/Editor screen shows Detail
information for each program.
The items of detail information are program type, program
name, symbol, comment, program size, program net count
and status of protection.
BRIEF
The Program List Viewer/Editor screen shows less
information than DETAIL, to increase the number of items.
The program type, the status of protection and the name or
symbol are displayed for each program.
The detail information of program that is pointed by the
cursor is displayed on additional information line.
D ADDRESS NOTATION
Determines whether the programs in the Program List
Viewer/Editor screen are displayed as corresponding symbols, or
the addresses themselves.
SYMBOL (default)
themselves.
ADDRESS
758
D SORT BY
Viewer/Editor screen are displayed in order of program number,
or symbol name themselves. And When ADDRESS NOTAION
is SYMBOL, this determination is enabled. So if ADDRESS
NOTAION is ADDRESS, the programs are always displayed in
order of program number.
PROGRAM NUMBER (default)
The programs are displayed in order of program number.
SYMBOL
Programs that have a symbol are displayed in order of the
symbol name. Programs without symbols are displayed in
order of program number after programs with the symbols.
PROGRAM, LEVEL1, LEVEL2, and LEVEL3 are out of
target of sort.
D PROTECTED PROGRAM
Determines whether protected programs in the Program List
Viewer/Editor screen are displayed or not. On each screen, the
protected program means as follows.
On Program List Viewer screen : the program is protected to
monitor.
On Program List Editor screen : the program is protected to
edit.
SHOW (default)
The protected programs are displayed in the Program List
Viewer/Editor screen.
HIDE
The protected programs are not displayed in the Program List
D FRAME NET IN SUBPROGRAM MODE
Frame net means functional instruction END1, 2 and 3 on
LEVEL 1,2,3, and functional instruction SP and SPE on
subprogram.
It determines whether the frame net in the LADDER Diagram
Monitor/Editor screen are displayed or not, when you selected the
program and press [ZOOM] soft key in the Program List
SHOW (default)
The frame net is displayed in the LADDER Diagram
Monitor/Editor screen.
HIDE
The frame net is not displayed in the LADDER Diagram
759
6.5 At Program List Editor screen you can create new program and delete a
program in addition to the function of Program List Viewer screen.
PROGRAM LIST To reach this screen, press [LIST] soft key at LADDER Diagram Editor
EDITOR SCREEN screen.
Following operations are available at Program List Editor screen. For
more detail of these operations, refer to the descriptions of each key to
operate.
D Create new program [NEW]
D Delete a program [DELETE]
Program List Editor screen (Datail)
List Editor screen.
The default viewer format is Detail viewer format.
See ”Setting screen for Program List Viewer screen” section for more
detail.
760
6.5.1
Screen Structures (1) Program List Editor screen(Detail)
Program List Editor screen (Detail) shows the detail information that
are program size, program net count and so on for program.

It is basically same with Program List Viewer screen (Detail).
It is basically same with Program List Viewer screen (Detail).
761
(2) Program List Editor screen (Brief)

Program List Viewer screen (Brief) shows less information than
Program List Viewer screen (Detail), to increase the number of items.
The program type, the status of protection and the name or symbol are

It is basically same with Program List Viewer screen (Brief).
It is basically same with Program List Viewer screen (Brief).
762
6.5.2
Operations

Goes to LADDER Diagram Editor screen. The operation is
basically same with Program List Viewer screen. See
”Operations for Program List Viewer screen” section for the
detail.
The operation is basically same with Program List Viewer screen.
See ”Operations for Program List Viewer screen” section for the
detail.
3. [LIST SETING] Screen Settings
The operation is basically same with Program List Viewer screen.
See ”Operations for Program List Viewer screen” section for the
detail.
4. [NEW] Create new program
If you entered program name (See ”Note of searching operations
for Program List Viewer screen” section for the detail) or symbol
and press [NEW] soft key, the program will be checked its
existence. If such program is not found, new program will be
created. The created program is inserted automatically into the
program list and the cursor points it.
The following ladder nets are created automatically according to
the type of created program by this operation.
LEVEL1 : Functional instruction END1
Subprogram : Functional instruction SP, SPE
If the status of protection of the program is enabled to edit, this
operation is available.
5. [DELETE] Delete a program
Deletes a program. If you entered no strings and press [DELETE]
soft key, the program under the cursor is deleted. If you entered
program name (See ”Note of searching operations for Program
List Viewer screen” section for the detail) or symbol and press
[DELETE] soft key, the program will be checked its existence,
and will be deleted if such program is found.
But, PROGRAM, LEVEL1 and LEVEL2 should always exist on
program list.
If you delete these programs, the contents of program are
abandoned. But these programs do not disappear on program list.
763
6.5.3 Screen settings of Program List Editor screen are basically same with
Setting Screen them of Program List Viewer screen. See ”Screen settings for Program
List Viewer screen” section for the detail.
764
6.6 On Collective Monitor screen, only the necessary ladder nets can be
displayed by specifying ladder nets.
COLLECTIVE Collective Monitor screen displayed by pressing soft key [ZOOM] after
MONITOR FUNCTION moving the cursor to ”COLLECT” program position on Program List
Viewer screen, or Press soft key [SWITCH] on Ladder Diagram Monitor
screen.
Program List Viewer screen
Ladder Diagram Monitor screen
765
6.6.1
Structures of Title information(REMARKS) Collective monitor mode Number of picked up nets
Collective Monitor
Screen
Key input line Message line Additional information line

1. It is basically the same as LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
2. ”COLLECTIVE MONITOR” displayed in the area for the current
subprogram above the screen means that this screen is the
Collective Monitor screen.
(b) LADDER Diagram
1. Any ladder diagram is not displayed first. Ladder nets selected by
the operation of a coil search and picking up nets, is added.
2. 128 nets or less of ladder net can be displayed on Collective
Monitor screen. When adding more new nets, most recently added
128 nets are displayed.
766
6.6.2
Operations of
Soft keys of Collective Monitor screen of PMC–NB6
Collective Monitor
Main soft keys of Collective Monitor screen
Screen Initialization of Collective
Program List Jump to the ladder diagram net Monitor screen
Pick up a ladder Switches to Ladder Delete a net Display data table Screen setting
diagram net Diagram Monitor screen
(a) Operations using the soft keys

1. [LIST] Calling Program List Viewer screen.
Calls Program List Viewer screen. On Program List Viewer screen,
you can switch subprograms to be displayed on Ladder Diagram
Viewer screen.
2. [PICKUP] Picking up ladder nets.
Collective Monitor screen. About how to pick up refer to ”6.6.3
How to pick up a ladder diagram net”.
3. [JUMP] Jump to a ladder net.
On Ladder Diagram Monitor screen, search the ladder net at a
cursor position on Collective Monitor screen and jumps to the
ladder net. This soft key appears by setting ”SHOW CURSOR”
to ”YES” on the setting screen.
4. [SWITCH] Switches to Ladder Diagram Monitor screen.
Switches to Ladder Diagram Monitor screen.
5. [ERASE] Quits to dislpay a ladder diagram net on the screen. (1
net)
Quits to dislpay a ladder diagram net (only 1 net) whch is picked
up on Collective Monitor screen. This soft key appears by setting
”SHOW CURSOR” to ”YES” on the setting screen.
6. [ERASE ALL] Quits to dislpay a ladder diagram net on the screen.
(all nets)
Quits to dislpay ladder diagram nets (all net) whch is picked up on
7. [DATA TABLE] Go to Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer
screen.
8. [SCREEN SETING] Screen settings.
Calling the setting screen for Collective Monitor screen. You can
chenged each settings of a ladder diagram display. Return to
Collective Monitor screen when press the return key [<].
767
(b) Other Operations

When cursor is placed on some relay or some address parameter of
a functional instruction, the information about the address under
cursor is displayed at ”Additional Information Line”.
6.6.3 The operation for picking up ladder nets which you want to monitor on
How to Pick Up a Collective Monitor screen is as follows.
Ladder Diagram Net (1) Specification of ladder nets on Collective Monitor screen
a) Specify the address by key input
1. Enter the address which you want to monitor. (ex. Y0.0)
2. Press [PICKUP] soft key.
3. The net with the coil, which you specified by ”1”, is picked up
to the top of screen.
b) Specification of address from the ladder net on the Collective
Monitor screen
1. Move the cursor to a relay on the ladder net which uses address
that you want to monitor. (ex. Y19.3)
3. The net with the coil, which uses the address that you specified
by ”1”, is picked up to the top of screen and the cursor moves
to the specified coil position.
Collective Monitor screen (specification of ladder net on the screen)
768
(2) Specification of ladder nets on the Ladder Diagram Monitor screen

1. Move the cursor to a relay on the ladder net which uses address that
you want to monitor. (ex. R0.5)
2. Press [SEARCH MENU] soft key.
3. Switches Softleys display. And then, press [PICKUP] soft key.
4. The ” ” mark is displayed to the left of net. When you switshed
to Collective Monitor screen, the net with the coil, which uses the
address that you specified by ”1”, is picked up to the top of screen.
Ladder Diagram Monitor screen (picked up of ladder net on the screen)
Collective Monitor screen (specification of ladder net on the Ladder Diagram

Monitor screen)
769
6.7 You can change the addresses used in the ladder program into other
addresses.
ADDRESS CHANGE Pressing the soft–key ”CHANGE ADRS” changes to the mode of the
address change.
770
6.7.1
Constitution
Ladder Display Area
Key input line Message line Address input line
(a) Key input line

The input data are displayed in the line.
(b) Message line
The confirmation massages and the error messages are displayed in the
line.
(c) Address input line
You can input the address used in the ladder program as ”old address”
and the address into which you would like to alter it as ”new address”.
You can input either an address or a symbol.
6.7.2 (a) Input of address

The Operation Input a string followed by ”input” key as the address.
Wild card specification
You can specify the wild card ”*” in the part of bit address.
Example: X100.* → X100.0 – X100.7
The followings cause the input error ”ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS”.
(1) The wild card is specified in the symbol.
Ex: ALWYS*
(2) The wild card is specified in the part except bit address.
Ex: X10*.0 X10*.*
(3) The wild card is specified in the byte address.
Ex: X10*
(b) The operation by soft–keys
771
[ALTER] altering into the address specified in ”NEW ADDRESS”

This key alters the address shown by the cursor in the ladder
diagram into the address specified in ”NEW ADDRESS”.
This key is not displayed in case that the cursor does not show the
target address in the ladder diagram.
[ALL] altering all the address into the address specified in ”NEW
ADDRESS”
This key alters the address in ”OLD ADDRESS” into the address
in ”NEW ADDRESS” in a lump. If the global program is selected,
the altering is executed in the global program. If a local program
is selected, the altering is executed in the local program.
The following messages are displayed before the execution and
after the execution.
In case of the global program:
(Confirmation message before altering)
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO ALTER ALL ADDRESS IN
THE GLOBAL?
(After altering)
”Altering number” ADDRESS ARE ALTERED INTO ”New
address” IN THE GLOBAL.
In case of the local program
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO ALTER ALL ADDRESS IN
THE LOCAL?
(After altering)
”Altering number” ADDRESS ARE ALTERED INTO ”New
address” IN THE LOCAL.
[⇔] Change of the cursor position
This key changes the cursor position between ”OLD ADDRESS”
and ”NEW ADDRESS” alternately.
[MOVE SYMBOL] Move of symbol
This key deletes the symbol of ”OLD ADDRESS” and defines the
symbol in ”NEW ADDRESS”.
The following messages are displayed before the execution and
after the execution.
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO MOVE THE SYMBOL?
(After altering)
THE SYMBOL WAS MOVED.
[PREV] Search previous
This key searches the address which is specified in ”OLD
ADDRESS” backward.
[NEXT] Search next
This key searches the address which is specified in ”OLD
ADDRESS” forward.
[GLOBAL/LOCAL] Change range for searching
This key changes the range for searching between GLOBAL and
LOCAL. This key appears when a local program is selected in the
program list screen.
772
[PICKUP ADRS] Picking up address on cursor

This key picks up the address on the cursor in the ladder diagram
and set it in ”OLD ADDRESS” or ”NEW ADDRESS”.
[USE CHECK] Check used address
This key checks the address in ”NEW ADDRESS” whether it is
already used in the ladder diagram.
6.7.3
Error Messages and Error Message Meaning and Solution
Solutions
D Bit address cannot be replaced with Byte address.
BIT ADDRESS IS
REQUIRED Solution:
Replace address with same type.
D Byte address cannot be replaced with Bit address.

BYTE ADDRESS
IS REQUIRED Solution:
Replace address with same type.
D The string that is irregular PMC address is input.

D The wild card is specified incorrectly.
ILLEGAL PMC D The address is not input in ether ”OLD ADDRESS” or
ADDRESS ”NEW ADDRESS”.
Solution:
Input correct address.
D The address in WRITE COIL cannot be replaced with

the bit address with write protection.
D The address in output parameter in functional instruc-
THE ADDRESS IS
tion write parameter cannot be replaced with the ad-
READ ONLY
dress with write protection.
Solution:
Change to unprotected address.
D The address type of ”OLD ADDRESS” is not same as

THE ADDRESS one of ”NEW ADDRESS”.
TYPE ARE Solution:
MISMATCHED Set correct address in ”OLD ADDRESS” and ”NEW
ADDRESS”.
D Symbol is not defined in the address in ”OLD AD-

***** DOSE NOT DRESS”.
HAVE SYMBOL Solution:
Define a symbol in the address in ”OLD ADDRESS”.
D A symbol has been defined in the address in ”NEW

ADDRESS”
***** ALREADY
HAS SYMBOL Solution:
Delete the symbol in the address in ”NEW AD-
DRESS”.
773
7. PASSWORD PROTECTION PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
7 PASSWORD PROTECTION
The password function protects the LADDER Diagram Monitor screen

and the LADDER Diagram Editor screen. If the password function is
enabled, it is impossible to display or edit the ladder program. The
protection was unlocked when entering the password, which is set on
FANUC LADDER–II or LADDER Editing Package.
774
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 7. PASSWORD PROTECTION
7.1
SPECIFICATIONS OF (a) Password type
PASSWORD There are two password types.
One is the ”R–password” to protect against reading. Another is the
”RW–password” to protect against reading and writing.
(b) Available characters for password
The string that satisfies following condition can be set as the
password.
D The string length is less than 8 characters.
D Only capital letters and numerals.
(c) Screens protected by password
The following screen is protected by the password.
D Ladder diagram monitor screen
D Ladder diagram editor screen
(d) Indicator of protection status
The status of protected program is displayed in the Program List
Viewer screen and the Program List Editor screen. See ” program list
screen (detail) for Program List Viewer screen” section for more
detail.
(e) How to unlock password protection
Before a screen protected by the password is displayed, the password
is inquired. The password is able to be unlocked when the strings of
password are entered.
NOTE
1 Once the password has been unlocked, the system never
inquires the password except turning the power on again or
replacing the ladder program by I/O function.
2 404A/04 can not display LADDER program that is protected
by Password function. To view a protected LADDER
program, you need FANUC LADDER–II, LADDER Editing
Package, or upgrade version to 404A/05 or later. 404A/05
or later will ask for password when necessary.
3 When turning the power on pressing both ”X” key and ”O”
key, the ladder program will be cleared regardless of
password protection.
775
7. PASSWORD PROTECTION PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
7.2
PASSWORD AND
SWITCHING SCREEN
7.2.1 The LADDER Diagram Monitor screen and the Ladder Diagram Editor
Using One of screen are protected by the password.
R–Password and
RW–Password
NOTE
When [PMCLAD] soft key is pressed at first time after CNC
use [ZOOM] soft key to select subprogram to reach the
LADDER Diagram Monitor screen. The message ”ENTER
PASSWORD TO READ” is displayed and the password is
inquired. If you enter R–password or RW–password, the
subprogram that you have selected appears on the screen.
Once you choose subprogram, pressing [PMCLAD] soft key
will directly reach the LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
776
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 7. PASSWORD PROTECTION
7.2.2 The LADDER Diagram Monitor screen and the LADDER Diagram
Using Both of Display screen are protected by the following password.
R–Password and D The LADDER Diagram Monitor screen: R–password or
RW–Password RW–password
D The LADDER Diagram Display screen: RW–password
NOTE
1 When [PMCLAD] soft key is pressed at first time after CNC
use [ZOOM] soft key to select subprogram to reach the
LADDER Diagram Monitor screen. The message ”ENTER
PASSWORD TO READ” is displayed and the password is
inquired. If you enter R–password or RW–password, the
subprogram that you have selected appears on the screen.
Once you choose subprogram, pressing [PMCLAD] soft key
will directly reach the LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
2 When [EDIT] soft key is pressed in the LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen, the message ”ENTER PASSWORD TO
WRITE” is displayed and the password is inquired. If you
enter RW–password, the LADDEER Diagram Editor screen
is displayed. However, if you have already entered
RW–password in program list viewer screen, the password
is never inquired in the LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
777
8. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING
SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND
PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
8 WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE

PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS
778
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS
8.1 When the soft–key [I/O] on the PMC main menu screen is pressed, the
following screen appears.
I/O SCREEN
On this screen, sequence programs, PMC parameters and C language

program can be written to the specified device, read from the device, and
compared. The question selection cursor, which moves vertically from
one question to another, is displayed, as is the option selection cursor,
which moves horizontally form one option to another. The displayed
soft–keys differ depending on the position of the question selection
cursor.
The following types of devices can be used for input/output. The desired
device type can be selected by positioning the question selection cursor
to ”DEVICE” and the option selection cursor to that type or by selecting
the soft–key corresponding the type.
MEMORY CARD Data can be output to and input from a memory
card.
FLASH ROM Data can be output to and input from flash
ROM.
FLOPPY Data can be output to and input from handy
files or floppy cassettes.
OTHERS Data can be output to and input from other
input/output devices.
When you read a file form an I/O device, one of the following messages
appear and whether to continue the operation is confirmed.
Sequence program:
THE FILE CONTAINS LADDER PROGRAM. PROCEED TO
READ IT ?
C language program:
THE FILE CONTAINS C LANGUAGE PROGRAM. PROCEED
TO READ IT ?
779
PMC parameters:
THE FILE CONTAINS PMC PARAMETER. PROCEED TO
READ IT ?
Others:
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT
When you proceed to read a sequence program or a C language program,
the ladder program stops automatically. When you proceed to read PMC
parameters, new PMC parameters will be stored even if the ladder
program is running.
WARNING
1 If a Ladder program or a C language program is input while
a Ladder program is being executed, the execution of the
Ladder program and the C language program stop
automatically. You have to pay special attention to stop
Ladder program. Stopping Ladder program in a wrong
machine when you stop Ladder program.
2 At stopping Ladder program, it may take rather long time to
completely stop it in some cases according to the activity of
Ladder program. If Ladder takes too long time to stop, or
never stop, correct Ladder program, following instructions
in section ”II. PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) 6.2.5 How to
correct LADDER program that never stops”.
3 If the PMC parameters are input while a Ladder program is
being executed, You have to pay special attention to input
it. Because changed PMC parameters may cause
unexpected effect to Ladder, you have to make it sure that
PMC parameters does not affect the Ladder when you input
PMC parameters.
4 Set bit 1 of keep relay K900 to 0 when the machine tool is
shipped.
780
In STATUS area in the lower part of the screen, a detailed explanation of

execution and the execution status are displayed. During write, read, and
comparison, the size of the data already transferred is indicated as the
status of the execution. The following gives a display example shown
when PMC parameters are written to a memory card:
NOTE
1 The [I/O] soft key is displayed by setting bit 1 of keep relay
K900 to 1.
2 For an explanation of error messages on I/O screen, see
section 8.9, ”I/O screen Error Messages”.
3 The message ”C LANGUAGE” is not displayed when the C
language board is not installed.
781
8.2
OUTPUTTING TO
AND INPUTTING
FROM MEMORY
CARDS
When ”MEMORY CARD” is selected for DEVICE, output to and input

from memory cards are enabled.
D FUNCTION
A data I/O command appears. Select FUNCTION with the item select
cursor, then select an item by moving the content selection soft key
horizontally or pressing an appropriate soft key.
Soft keys displayed when the question selection cursor is positioned to
”FUNCTION”
Explanation of options
WRITE: Outputs data from the PMC to a memory card.
READ: Inputs data from a memory card to the PMC.
COMPARE: Compares the sequence programs on the PMC with those
on a memory card.
DELETE: Deletes files from a memory card.
(Files on a flash card cannot be deleted.)
FORMAT: Formats a memory card.
CAUTION
When ”FORMAT” is selected and executed, all data in the
memory card is lost. Be careful when executing this
function.
782
When you read a file from a memory card, one of following messages
appears and whether to operate the important thing is confirmed.
Sequence program:
READ IT?
C language program:
TO READ IT?
PMC parameters:
READ IT?
Other:
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT
program is running.
WARNING
being executed, You have to pay special attention to input
it. Because changed PMC parameters may cause
unexpected effect to Ladder, you have to make it sure that
PMC parameters does not affect the Ladder when you input
PMC parameters.
shipped.
783
D KIND OF DATA
KIND OF DATA is displayed only when ”WRITE” is selected for
”FUNCTION.”
Set the type of data to be output by moving the cursor horizontally to
that type or by pressing the corresponding soft key.
Soft keys displayed when the question selection cursor is positioned
to”KIND OF DATA”
LADDER: Outputs sequence programs only.
PARAMETER: Outputs PMC parameters.
C LANGUAGE: Outputs C language program.
D FILE NO.
FILE NO. is displayed only when ”READ,” ”COMPARE,” or
”DELETE” is selected for ”FUNCTION.” Enter the file number in the
edit box.
D FILE NAME
FILE NAME is displayed when ”WRITE,” ”READ,” ”COMPARE,”
or ”DELETE” is selected for ”FUNCTION.” Enter the file name in the
edit box.
When ”READ,” ”COMPARE,” or ”DELETE” is selected for
”FUNCTION,” the file name corresponding to the file number entered
in ”FILE NO.” is displayed automatically.
The file name must be in MS–DOS format: a file name of up to eight
characters followed by an extension of up to three characters. When
”WRITE” is selected for ”FUNCTION” and the file name is not
entered, the following names are automatically assumed.
DATA KIND File name
LADDER PMCNB6.LAD
PARAMETER PMCNB6.PRM
CAUTION
When both ”FILE NO.” and ”FILE NAME” are displayed at
the same time, and a value is entered for ”FILE NO.” and
another file name is entered in ”FILE NAME,” the value
entered in ”FILE NO.” is erased and the file name entered
in ”FILE NAME” becomes effective.
784
Explanation of soft keys

[EXEC]: Executes the function selected for ”FUNCTION.”
During execution, the soft key disappears and the
[CANCEL] soft key appears to the right of the key.
[CANCEL]: Cancels the execution of the function. When the function
terminates normally, the soft key disappears.
[LIST]: Replaces the current display with the memory card list
screen. See Section 12.1.3, ”Memory Card List Screen”
for details.
The PMC–NB6 supports the following memory cards:
Ę : Supported
: Not supported
Flash Memory Card(*)
writing writing
Read of a file Ę Ę Ę Ę
Format of a card Ę Ę Ę
Write of a file Ę Ę Ę
Delete of a file Ę Ę
List of a file Ę Ę Ę Ę
NOTE(*)
For an explanation of supported flash memory cards, see
”(1) Writing to flash memory cards” in Section III.7.3.4.
785
8.3 When MEMORY CARD is selected in DEVICE, pressing the [LIST] soft
key displays the following screen:
MEMORY CARD LIST
SCREEN
If a memory card holding files is in the slot, the contents of the memory
card are displayed as shown in the above.
NOTE
Up to 128 files can be displayed on this screen. When 129
or more files are saved in the memory card, the 129th and
subsequent files are ignored.
When a file is selected on this screen, the screen display can be returned
to the previous screen. To select a file, place the cursor at the name of the
file, then press either the [SELECT] soft key or the INPUT key. After the
key entry, the screen display switches to the previous screen
automatically. In this case, the cursor is positioned at READ on the
FUNCTION menu, and the number and name of the file selected on the
list screen are indicated in the FILE NO. and FILE NAME fields,
respectively. A display example is shown below.
786
To return the screen display to the previous screen without selecting a file,
press the return key.
When the memory card is replaced with another card while the list screen
is being displayed, the displayed information is not updated
automatically. In this case, press the [REFRESH] soft key. The contents
of the new memory card are then displayed.
[SELECT]: Selects a file, and returns the screen display to the
previous screen.
[REFRESH]: Redisplays the contents of the memory card.
787
8.4
OUTPUTTING TO
AND INPUTTING
FROM FLASH ROM
When “FLASH ROM” is selected for DEVICE, output to and input from
flash ROM are enabled.
NOTE
The above screen is displayed when the C language board
is installed. When the C language board is not installed,
only LADDER is indicated on the menu of the KIND OF
DATA.
D FUNCTION
The available data input/output commands are displayed. Select the
desired command by moving the cursor horizontally to that command
or select it with the corresponding soft key.
Soft keys displayed when the cursor is positioned to ”FUNCTION”
WRITE: Outputs sequence programs from the PMC to flash
ROM.
READ: Inputs sequence programs from flash ROM to the PMC.
COMPARE: Compares the sequence programs on the PMC with those
on flash ROM.
When you read a file from a flash ROM, one of following messages
Sequence program:
READ IT?
788
C language program:
TO READ IT?
PMC parameters:
READ IT?
Other:
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT
program is running.
WARNING
shipped.
D KIND OF DATA
Displayed only when WRITE is selected in FUNCTION. Set the type
of the data you want to output by moving the cursor horizontally or by
using a soft key. C LANGUAGE appears only when the C language
board is installed.
Soft keys displayed when the item select cursor is placed at KIND OF
DATA
Explanation
LADDER: Outputs sequence programs only.
C LANGUAGE: Outputs programs in C.
[EXEC]: Executes the function selected for “FUNCTION.”
789
NOTE
When a program is written, it may take much time to initialize
the flash ROM. During initialization, ”INITIALIZING FLASH
ROM” appears in the STATUS field in the lower part of the
screen.
790
8.5
OUTPUTTING TO
AND INPUTTING
FROM FLOPPY
When ”FLOPPY” is selected for ”DEVICE”, output to and input from

floppy cassette or handy file that is connected via RS–232C are enabled.
D FUNCTION
Soft keys displayed when the question selection cursor is
positioned to ”FUNCTION”
WRITE Outputs data from the PMC to a floppy disk or handy
file.
READ Inputs data from a floppy disk or handy file to the
PMC.
COMPARE Compares the sequence program on the PMC with
those on a floppy disk or handy file.
DELETE Delete a file from a floppy disk or handy file.
DELETE ALL Deletes all files from a floppy disk or handy file.
CAUTION
”DELETE ALL” command is not use for following floppy
cassette.
FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER A13B–0131–B001
When you read a file from a floppy cassete or a handy file, one of
following messages appears and whether to operate the important thing
is confirmed.
791
Sequence program:
READ IT?
C language program:
TO READ IT?
PMC parameters:
READ IT?
Other:
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT
program is running.
WARNING
being executed, You have to special attention to input it.
Because changed PMC parameters, may cause
unexpected effect to Ladder. You have to make it sure that
PMC parameters are not effect to Ladder when you input
PMC parameters.
shipped.
792
D KIND OF DATA
”KIND OF DATA” is displayed only when ”WRITE” is selected for
”FUNCTION”.
that command or select it with the corresponding soft key.
positioned to ”KIND OF DATA”
LADDER Outputs sequence program.
PARAMETER Outputs PMC parameters.
D FILE NO.
”FILE NO.” is displayed only when ”READ”, ”COMPARE”, or
”DELETE” is selected for ”FUNCTION”.
Enter the file number in the edit box.
D FILE NANE
”FILE NAME” is displayed when ”WRITE”, ”READ”,
”COMPARE”, or ”DELETE” is selected for ”FUNCTION”.
Enter the file name in the edit box.
When ”READ”, ”COMPARE”, or ”DELETE” is selected for
”FUNCTION”, the file name corresponding to the file number entered
in ”FILE NO.” is displayed automatically.
When you output to or input from floppy disk formatted in DOS
format, the file name must be in MS–DOS format: a file name of up
to eight characters followed by an extension of up to three characters.
When you output to or input from floppy disk formatted in FANUC
format, a file name of up to 17 characters will be input.
When ”WRITE” is selected for ”FUNCTION” and the file name is not
entered, the following names are automatically assumed.
DATA KIND File name
LADDER PMCNB6.LAD
PARAM PMCNB6.PRM
CAUTION
1 When both ”FILE NO.” and ”FILE NAME” are displayed at
the same time, and a value is entered for ”FILE NO.” and
another file name is entered in ”FILE NAME”, the value
entered in ”FILE NO.” is erased and the file name entered
in ”FILE NAME” becomes effective.
2 Specifying the same name as that of an existing file results
in an error.
793

[EXEC] Executes the function selected for ”FUNCTION”.
[CANCEL] Cancels the execution of the function. When the
function terminates normally, the soft key
disappears.
[LIST] Replaces the current display with the Floppy list
screen. See Section 8.6, ”Floppy List Screen” for
details.
[PORT SETING] Replaces the current display with the screen for
setting communication parameters. See Section
8.8, ”Port Setting Screen” for details.
794
8.6 When ”FLOPPY” is selected for ”DEVICE”, pressing the [LIST] soft key
display the following screen.
FLOPPY LIST
SCREEN
The contents of the floppy cassettes or the handy files are displayed. When
a file is selected on this screen, the screen display can be returned to the
previous screen. To select the file, place the cursor at the name of the file,
then press either the [SELECT] soft key or the INPUT key. After the key
entry, the screen display switches to the previous screen automatically. In
this case, the cursor is positioned at ”READ” on the ”FUNCTION” menu,
and the number and name of the file selected on the list screen are
indicated in the ”FILE NO.” and ”FILE NAME” fields, respectively.
To return the screen display to the previous screen without selecting a file,
press the return key.
When the floppy cassette or the handy file is replaced with another one
while the list screen is being displayed, the displayed information is not
updated automatically. In this case, press the [REFRESH] soft key. The
contents are then displayed.
NOTE
Up to 128 files can be displayed on this screen. When 129
or more files are saved, the 129th and subsequent files are
ignored.

[SELECT] Selects a file, and returns the screen display to the
previous screen.
[REFRESH]Redisplays the contents of floppy cassette or handy file.
795
8.7
OUTPUTTING TO
AND INPUTTING
FROM OTHER
INPUT/OUTPUT
DEVICES
When ”OTHERS” is selected for ”DEVICE”, output to and input from

other input/output devices are enabled.
D FUNCTION
positioned to ”FUNCTION”
WRITE Outputs data from the PMC to other input/output device.
READ Inputs data from other input/output device to the PMC.
COMPARE Compares the sequence program on the PMC with those
on other input/output device.
When you read a file from a I/O device, one of following messages
Sequence program:
READ IT?
C language program:
TO READ IT?
PMC parameters:
READ IT?
Other:
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT
796

program is running.
WARNING
being executed, You have to special attention to input it.
Because changed PMC parameters, may cause
unexpected effect to Ladder. You have to make it sure that
PMC parameters are not effect to Ladder when you input
PMC parameters.
shipped.
797
D KIND OF DATA
”KIND OF DATA” is displayed only when ”WRITE” is selected for
”FUNCTION”.
that command or select it with the corresponding soft key.
positioned to ”KIND OF DATA”
LADDER Outputs sequence program.
PARAMETER Outputs PMC parameters.
[EXEC] Executes the function selected for ”FUNCTION”.
[CANCEL] Cancels the execution of the function. When the
function terminates normally, the soft key
disappears.
[PORT SETING] Replaces the current display with the screen for
setting communication parameters. See Section
8.8, ”Port Setting Screen” for details.
798
8.8 When ”FLOPPY” or ”OTHERS” is selected for ”DEVICE”, the [PORT

SETING] soft key is displayed. When the key is pressed, the following
PORT SETTING screen appears. The following gives a display example shown when
SCREEN ”OTHERS” is selected for ”DEVICE”.
This screen allows the setting of the communication data required for
communication using the RS–232C. Communication data can be set for
each of the two types of devices independently of the other.
Selected device type is displayed to ”DEVICE” menu on screen.
Explanation of each question
D CHANNEL
Check that an RS–232C cable is connected to the main board of the
control unit. Directly enter the number corresponding to the connected
connector.
1 .......... JD5A
2 .......... JD5B
D BAUDRATE
1200: Sets the baud rate to ”1200”.
D STOP BIT
1 BIT: Sets the number of stop bits to ”1”.
2 BIT: Sets the number of stop bits to ”2”.
D WRITE CODE
”WRITE CODE” is displayed when ”OTHERS” is selected for
”DEVICE”.
ASCII: Sets the output code to ”ASCII”.
ISO: Sets the output code to ”ISO”.
799
NOTE
Parity is always ”NONE”.

[INIT] Sets all the parameters to their initial values.
Initial values
DEVICE = FLOPPY DEVICE = OTHERS
CHANNEL 1 1
BAUD RATE 4800 4800
STOP BIT 2 BITS 2 BITS
WRITE CODE (None) ISO
800
8.9 The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their meanings
and actions are listed below.
I/O SCREEN ERROR
MESSAGES D Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation
(PMC–NB6) Displayed error
Meaning and action
message
MEMORYCARD IS NOT No memory card is installed.

READY Action: Check whether a memory card is installed.
MEMORYCARD IS There is no available space in the memory card.

FULL Action: Delete files to create available space.
The memory card is write–protected.

MEMORYCARD IS
WRITE PROTECTED Action: Release the write protection of the
memory card.
MEMORYCARD IS NOT The memory card cannot be recognized.

FORMATTED Action: Format the memory card.
There are too many files.

TOO MANY FILES IN
MEMORYCARD Action: Delete unnecessary files to reduce the
number of files.
The specified file cannot be found.

FILE NOT FOUND Action: On the list screen, check the file name or
file number.
Write to the specified file is not permitted.

FILE IS READ–ONLY
Action: Check the attributes of the file.
The file name is illegal.

FILE NAME IS INVALID
Action: Specify the file name in MS–DOS form.
The memory card cannot be formatted.

CAN NOT FORMAT Action: The NC cannot format this memory card.
MEMORYCARD Use another unit such as a personal com-
puter to format the memory card.
This memory card is not supported.

UNSUPPORTED
MEMORYCARD Action: Replace the memory card with another
one.
An error occurred when a file was deleted from the

CAN NOT DELETE FILE memory card.
Action: Check the attributes of the file.
The battery of the memory card has become

MEMORYCARD weak.
BATTERY ALARM
Action: Replace the battery of the memory card.
THIS FILE NAME IS The file name is already used.

ALREADY USED Action: Change the file name to another one.
The memory card cannot be accessed.

MEMORYCARD
ACCESS ERROR Action: Replace the memory card with another
one.
DIFFERENCE FOUND File comparison detected a mismatch.
801
Displayed error
Meaning and action
message
MEMORYCARD IS Another PMC user is using the memory card.

LOCKED BY OTHER Action: Wait until the PMC user completes proces-
FUNCTION sing, then retry.
An attempt was made to read a file, but its ROM

MEMORY CARD data ID was illegal.
HEADER ROM DATA ID
IS ILLEGAL Action: This file cannot be read. Check the type
of the file.
An attempt was made to read a file, but its ROM

FLASH ROM HEADER data ID was illegal.
ROM DATA ID IS
ILLEGAL Action: This file cannot be read. Check the type
of the file.
COMPARE OF C The compare function for programs in C is not

LANGUAGE PROGRAM supported.
IS NOT SUPPORTED
The file number cannot be selected.

FILE NUMBER CAN Action: If the file does not exist, the key entry is
NOT SELECTED invalid. If this error occurs even when the
cursor is placed at a file name, contact the
FANUC service center.
The entered file number is not present. The en-

THE FILE NUMBER tered number exceeds the total number of files.
DOES NOT EXIST Action: Check the total number of files on the list
screen.
A value up to 128 can be entered as the file num-

FILE NUMBER IS ber.
RESTRICTED TO ”128”
Action: Enter a numeric value not exceeding 128.
An error due to an internal factor occurred. Details

INTERNAL ERROR on the error are displayed in parentheses.
(xxxxxxxxxx) Action: Contact the FANUC service center, and
report the displayed message correctly.
D Error messages displayed during FLASH ROM I/O operation
Displayed error
Meaning and action
message
The system is not in the emergency stop state.

NOT IN EMG STOP
MODE Action: Place the system in the emergency stop
state.
INVALID LADDER The transfer program is illegal.

PROGRAM Action: Check the program.
INVALID C LANGUAGE
PROGRAM
DIFFERENCE FOUND A file comparison detected a mismatch.
FLASH ROM IS Another PMC user is using the FLASH ROM.

LOCKED BY OTHER Action: Wait until the PMC user completes proces-
FUNCTION. sing, then retry.
802
Displayed error
Meaning and action
message
The C language board cannot be recognized.

C LANGUAGE BOARD
IS NOT IMPLEMENTED Action: Check whether the C language board is
installed.
An error due to an internal factor occurred. Details

INTERNAL ERROR on the error are displayed in parentheses.
(xxxxxxxxxx) Action: Contact the FANUC service center, and
report the displayed message correctly.
D Error messages displayed during floppy cassettes, handy files or other

input/output devices I/O operation.
Displayed error
Meaning and action
message
Specified file is not PMC parameter format.

BAD PMC PARAMETER
FORMAT Action: Specify file of PMC parameter format, or
check the contents of the file.
Specified file is not handy file format.

BAD HANDY FILE
FORMAT Action: Specify file of handy file format, or check
the contents of the file.
Can not recognize the format of specified file.

UNKNOWN FILE Action: Specify file of recognizable format such
FORMAT as PMC parameter format, or check the
contents of the file.
Need file name or file number to identify file to

FILE NAME OR FILE read, compare, or delete.
NUMBER IS REQUIRED Action: Specify file name or file number for the
operation.
Communication with the I/O device has been time-

out.
COMMUNICATION
TIMEOUT Action: Check the communication parameters
such as baud rate, and retry to communi-
cate.
Any I/O device is not connected, or some error has

occurred in it.
I/O DEVICE IS NOT Action: Check the power of I/O device is ON.
ATTACHED OR IN Check the I/O device is connected.
ERROR STATUS Check the cable that connects I/O de-
vice with PMC is correct one.
If some error has occurred in I/O de-
vice, solve it.
RECEIVED BAD DATA: Invalid data has been received.

CHECK THE Action: Check the PMC’s communication param-
COMMUNICATION eters such as baud rate match the ones of
PARAMETERS I/O device.
Too many data have received at once.

RECEIVED DATA HAS
OVERRUN Action: Check the communication parameters
about flow control.
803
Displayed error
Meaning and action
message
Others function is using this channel.

OTHERS FUNCTION IS
USING THIS CHANNEL Action: Use the other channel, or stop the func-
tion.
Setting parameters of communication are not cor-

BAD COMMUNICATION rect.
PARAMETER Action: Check the communication parameters
such as baud rate.
Others function such us FANUC LADDER–II is

OTHER FUNCTION IS using I/O function.
USING I/O Action: Wait until function that using I/O function
do finish, or stop the function.
Can not input/output of sequence program, be-

cause On–line function is using sequence pro-
SEQUENCE PROGRAM gram.
IS IN USE BY ONLINE Action: Wait until On–line function, do finish the
FUNCTION using I/O function. In general, both of I/O
function and On–line function should not
be used at the same time.
804
9. STARTING AND STOPPING
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
9 STARTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
(1) Starting a sequence program (RUN)

When a program is stopped, clicking the [RUN] soft key causes the
program to start and the status line display to change to “PMC RUN.”
The sequence program starts from the beginning. The soft key
changes to [STOP].
(2) Stopping a sequence program (STOP)
When a program is executed, clicking the [STOP] soft key causes the
program to stop and the status line display to change to “PMC STOP.”
The soft key changes to [RUN].
WARNING
If the sequence program is stopped while the machine is
operating, the machine may behave in an unexpected way.
Before stopping the sequence program, ensure that there
are no people near the machine and that the tool cannot
collide with the workpiece or machine.
Otherwise, there is an extreme risk of death or serious
injury, as well as the likelihood of the tool, workpiece, and
machine being damaged.
(3) Automatic operation of a sequence program

When AUTOMATIC LADDER START is set to AUTO (bit 2 of the
keep relay K900 = 0) on the setting screen, a sequence program can be
executed automatically when the power is turned on.
805
10. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN
SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
10 MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM
806
B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM
10.1 The following screen is the menu screen of the miscellaneous data in
sequence program.
MENU SCREEN OF The screen of each data is called in this screen.
MISCELLANEOUS
DATA IN SEQUENCE
PROGRAM
MISC. Data Menu

The following chart is the flow of the viewer/editor screens in the
miscellaneous menu.
PMC Main Menu
[<] [MISC DATA]
Misc. Data Menu
Viewer
[TITLE] [SYMBOL COMENT] [MESSAGE] [I/O MODULE] [SYSTEM PARAM]
Function
Title Data Symbol/Comment Data Message Data I/O Unit Allocation System Parameter
Viewer Viewer Viewer Viewer Viewer
Note1 Note2
Note5 Note3 Note5 Note3,4 Note5 Note3,4 Note5 Note3 Note5 Note3,4
[<] [EDIT] [<] [EDIT] [<] [EDIT] [<] [EDIT] [<] [EDIT]
Title Data Symbol/Comment Data Message Data I/O Unit Allocation System Parameter
Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor
[ZOOM] [ZOOM] Note2

[<] [NEW ENTRY] [<] [NEW ENTRY]
Editor Symbol/Comment Data Message Data

Function Entry Editor Entry Editor
807
NOTE
1 The contents of the title data are as same as the one of the
title data screen in the PMC diagnosis menu. As for the
description of the viewer/monitor screen of the title data,
please refer to Section II–3.1.
2 This screen can be also displayed by pressing [I/O
MODULE] in the I/O link monitor screen in the PMC
diagnosis menu. The screens and the operations are
completely same. As for the description of the
viewer/monitor screen of the I/O unit allocation data, please
refer to Subsection IV–3.6.3.
3 The [EDIT] soft key in each viewer appears only when
Programmer function is enabled: to enable Programmer
function, set ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to ”YES” at
GENERAL screen of PMC Settings. While Online Monitor
function is active, you can not reach any editor screens. To
use the editor functions, you have to disable Online Monitor
function at PMC Setting screen: choose ”NOT USE”.
4 To edit the symbol/comment data, the message data, the
system parameters, you need to stop the ladder program.
The following message appears when pressing [EDIT].
”ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO STOP PROGRAM?”
You have to confirm the operations.
5 When pressing [<] in each editor screen to exit, the following
message appears if the auto save function is enable. (To
enable this function, set ”WRITE TO FROM(EDIT)” to ”YES”
in the EDIT/DEBUG screen of PMC settings.)
”DO YOU WANT TO WRITE PROGARM INTO FLASH
ROM?”
If you select ”NO”, the warning message ”WN09
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH
ROM” appears in PMC alarm screen. You can confirm that
present sequence program has not been saved yet.
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to stop the ladder
program. Stopping the ladder program in a wrong timing, or
with machine in improper status, may cause unexpected
reaction of machine. At stopping the ladder program, a
safety mechanism and watch by the ladder program is not
operated. You have to make it sure that ”machine is in
proper status”, and ”nobody is near the machine” when you
run/stop the ladder program.
808
10.2
VIEWER/EDITOR OF
SYMBOL/COMMENT
DATA
10.2.1 In the viewer screen of the symbol/comment data, you can confirm the
symbols and comments which are defined for bit or byte addresses used
Viewer Screen of
in the ladder program. To display the viewer screen of the
Symbol/Comment Data symbol/comment data, press the soft–key [SYMBOL COMENT] in the
misc. menu screen. The following operations are available in this screen.
D Display of the editor screen of the symbol and the comment data
[EDIT]
D Search for addresses, symbols and comments [SEARCH]
809
10.2.1.1
Screen structure
The size of symbol data The size of comment data The total size of symbol/comment data
Display area of symbol/comment
Key input line Message line
(1) The size of the symbol data and comment data is displayed above the
screen.
(2) In the message line, some messages like error messages are displayed.
(3) Up to fourteen symbols and comments can be displayed in the display
area.
10.2.1.2
Operations
The soft–keys in viewer screen of symbol/comment
Search
Editing of symbol/comment data
(1) Operations by soft–keys

a. [EDIT] Call for the editor screen of symbol/comment data
This key displays the editor screen of symbol/comment data. When
the programmer function(Note 1) is enabled, this key is available. If
the online monitor function(Note 2) is enabled, the editor screen can
not be used.
810
b. [SEARCH] Search for addresses, symbols and comments

This key searches the addresses corresponding to input string, or
the symbols and the comments including input string. And this
makes them display on the screen. Both bit addresses and byte
addresses can be searched.
The cursor keys and the page keys can change the display place on the
screen.
NOTE
1 To enable the programmer function, set the setting
“PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to “YES” in “GENERAL” screen
in PMC setting.
2 To disable the online monitor function, set both “RS–232C”
and “F–BUS” to “NOT USE” in “ONLINE” screen in PMC
setting.
10.2.2 In the editor screen of symbol/comment data, you can define new symbols
Editor Screen of or comments with addresses and edit the symbols or the comments which
have already been defined. To display this screen, press the soft–key
Symbol/Comment Data [EDIT] in the viewer screen. The following operations are available in this
screen.
D Search for addresses, symbols and comments [SEARCH]
D Change or new entry of a symbol/comment [ZOOM]
D New entry of a symbol/comment [NEW ENTRY]
D Deletion of a symbol/comment [DELETE]
D Deletion of all symbols/comments [CLEAR ALL]
811
10.2.2.1
Screen structure Free Size of Symbols and Comments Free Size of Comments
Editing Area
(1) The free size of the symbols and comments is displayed above the
screen.
(2) In the message line, some messages like error messages are displayed.
(3) Up to fourteen symbols and comments can be displayed in the editing
area.
10.2.2.2
Operations
The soft–keys in the editor screen
Search Alter or New Entry Delete
New Entry All Delete

a. [SEARCH] Search for addresses, symbols and comments
The operation is same as the one in the viewer screen. Refer to
”Operations by the soft–keys” in the viewer screen.
812
b. [ZOOM] Alter or new entry

This key calls the entry screen in which you can edit the data on the
cursor or register a new data
c. [NEW ENTRY] Registration of new data
This key calls the entry screen in which you can register a new data.
d. [DELETE] Deletion of the entry data
The data on the cursor is deleted.
e. [CLEAR ALL] Deletion of all entry data
All of symbols and comments are deleted.
(2) Collective input of symbol/comment
An address, a symbol, and a comment can be input altogether.
You can input the address, the symbol and the comment separated by
any characters except for alphabets and numbers as follows. You can
also omit the symbol or the comment.
”Address”/”Symbol”/”Comment”/ ”Input”–key (”/” is a character
except for alphabets and numbers).
Ex.1) The case of input of an address, a symbol, a comment
G0.4 / *EMG / EMERGENCYSW / ”Input” key
Ex.2) The case that the comment is omitted
G0.4 / *EMG / / ”Input” key
G0.4 / *EMG / ”Input” key
G0.4 / *EMG ”Input” key
If you want to alter the symbol and comment which have already been
entered with the address, move the cursor and input a new symbol and
a new comment without the address.
Ex.3)
/ *EMG / EMERGENCYSW / ”Input” key
In this case, if you omit the input of symbol or the comment, the data
remains as original.
The cursor keys and the page keys change the display place on the
screen.
813
10.2.3 In the entry screen of symbol/comment, you can register a set of symbol
Entry Screen of and comment data associated with any address as a new entry data. To
display this screen, press the soft–key [ZOOM] or [NEW ENTRY]. The
Symbol/Comment following operations are available in this screen.
D Change of input mode [INPUT MODE]
D New registration of symbol and comment data [ADD LINE]
D Deletion of address, symbol and comment data [DELETE]
D Abortion of the edit [CANCEL EDIT]
814
10.2.3.1
Screen structure
Free Size of Symbol/Comment Data Free Size of Comment Data
Display Area of Symbol/Comment Data
Editing Area
(1) The free size of the symbols and comments is displayed above the
screen.
(2) In the message line, the messages like error messages are displayed.
(3) Up to twelve symbols and comments can be displayed in the editing
area.
(4) The address, the symbol and the comment that are displayed in the
editing area can be edited.
815
10.2.3.2
Operations
The soft–keys by pressing [ZOOM]
Change of Input Mode Delete
Alternation of the Data New registration Abortion of Edit
The soft–keys by pressing [NEW ENTRY]
Change of Input Mode Delete
New registration Abortion of Edit

a. [INPUT MODE] Change of input mode
By pressing this key, The input mode is changed as follows, The
message ”INSERT” when the Insert mode or ”ALTER” when the
alter mode is displayed above the screen.
Whole string input → Insert Mode → Alter mode
D Whole string input

The cursor indicates the whole of the string. The original whole
string is altered into the input string.
D Insert mode
Input string is inserted at the cursor. Only ”input” key inserts a
space.
D Alter mode
Input string replaces the string after the character on the cursor.
By input only ”Input” key, a space replaces the character on the
cursor.
b. [ADD LINE] New registration
This key registers the new entry data. This key is effective when
pressing the soft–key ”[NEW ENTRY]” in the editor screen. If
input address has been already registered, the confirmation for
overwriting is displayed.
816
c. [DELETE] Deletion of the data

D Whole string input mode
The whole string on the cursor is deleted.
D Insert mode, Alter mode
One character on the cursor is deleted.
d. [CANCEL EDIT] Abortion of editing
This key aborts the editing and goes to the editor screen.
e. [<] Alternation of data, New registration
The contents of the edit are registered. In the case that pressing the
soft–key [NEW ENTRY] in the editor screen, this key registers the
new entry data. If input address has been already registered, the
confirmation of overwrite is displayed.
In the case that pressing the soft–key [ZOOM] in the editor screen,
this key replace the entry data. If you change the address into new
entry address, the original data is deleted and new entry data is
registered.
screen.
817
10.2.4
Alarm Message and Alarm Messages Meanings and Countermeasures
Countermeasure
Meaning:
ILLEGAL PMC Wrong address is specified or the string includes
some spaces.
ADDRESS
Countermeasure:
Input proper address for PMC–NB6.
Meaning:
PMC ADDRESS MUST No PMC address is input for new entry.
BE ENTERED Countermeasure:
Input PMC address.
Meaning:
ADDRESS IS No PMC address is input for edit.
REQUIRED Countermeasure:
Input PMC address.
Meaning:
The input symbol includes some spaces.
BAD SYMBOL NAME
Countermeasure:
Delete the spaces.
Meaning:
Input symbol is too long.
TOO LONG SYMBOL
Countermeasure:
Correct the symbol within 6 characters.
Meaning:
TOO LONG COMMENT The length of the comment is too long.
STRING Countermeasure:
Correct the comment within 30 characters.
THE ADDRESS Meaning:

The address which has existed is input.
ALREADY HAS AN
Countermeasure:
ENTRY
Specify new address.
Meaning:
THE SYMBOL NAME IS The symbol which has existed is input.
ALREADY USED Countermeasure:
Specify new symbol.
Meaning:
There is no space for edit.
OUT OF SPACE Countermeasure:
Delete unnecessary symbols and comments.
Keep the space for the sequence program.
818
10.3
VIEWER/EDITOR
SCREEN OF
MESSAGE DATA
10.3.1 In the viewer screen of the message data, you can confirm the message
data that is displayed on NC screen by DISPB instruction. To display this
Viewer Screen of
screen, press the soft–key [MESSAGE] in the misc. menu. The following
Message Data operations are available in this screen.
D Display of editor screen of message data [EDIT]
D Search for message data [SEARCH]
D Display of characters of which codes are enclosed by ”@”.
[DOUBLE CHAR]
819
10.3.1.1
Screen structure Message Address Request Monitor
Message No.
Brief Display of Message
Detailed Display of Message
(1) The message address, the message request monitor, the message
number and the message data are displayed in the screen. The message
request monitor shows the status of the signal of the message address
(A address). One line data in the message data are displayed in the area.
(2) In the detailed display area, all of message data, which are indicated
by the cursor, are displayed.
displayed.
820
10.3.1.2
Operations
The soft–keys of the viewer screen
Search Change of the display of the message
Go to the editor screen

a. [EDIT] Call for the editor screen of message data
This key displays the editor screen of the message data. When the
programmer function(Note 1) is enabled, this key is available. If the
online monitor function(Note 2) is enabled, the editor screen can not
be used.
b. [SEARCH] Search for addresses, message number and message
data
This key searches the addresses or the message number
corresponding to input string, or the message data including input
string. And this makes them display on the screen. If you input a
byte address, the bit 0 of the address can be searched.
(Ex.) If searching ”A2”, The cursor indicates ”A2.0”.
c. [DOUBLE CHAR]
This key converts the character codes enclosed by ”@” into the
character that can be display on the screen.
Ex. Japanese character: ”@B6C532@” →
Chinese character: ”@0248733E6F44643B5F01@100”
→
screen.
NOTE
in PMC setting.
setting.
821
10.3.2 In the editor screen, you can edit the message data which can be displayed
Editor Screen of on CNC screen by the DISPB instruction. To display the editor screen,
press the soft–key [EDIT] in the viewer screen. The following operations
Message Data are available in this screen.
D Search for message data [SEARCH]
D Edit for 1 entry data [ZOOM]
D Display of characters programmed with codes enclosed by ”@”.
[DOUBLE CHAR]
D Select of entries [SELECT]
D Deletion of entries [DELETE]
D Move of entries [CUT]&[PASTE]
D Copy of entries [COPY]&[PASTE]
D Deletion of all entries [CLEAR ALL]
822
10.3.2.1
Screen structure
Message Address
Message No.
Area of Message data
Detailed Display of Message Data
(1) The message address, the message request monitor, the message
number and the message data are displayed in the screen. The message
request monitor shows the status of the signal of the message address.
One line in the message data is displayed in the area.
(2)In the detailed display area, all of message data, which are indicated
by the cursor, are displayed.
displayed.
823
10.3.2.2
Operations
The soft–keys in this screen

Pasting of entries
Search Change of message display
Selecting of entries
Editing of entries
Deletion of entries
Copy of entries
Cut of entries
Deletion of all entries

a. [SEARCH] Search for addresses, message No and message data
This operation is same as the one in the viewer screen refer to
”operations by soft–keys” in the viewer screen.
b. [ZOOM] Editing of entry
To edit the entry data on the cursor, this key displays the entry
screen.
c. [DOUBLE CHAR]
This operation is same as the one in the viewer screen. Refer to
d. [SELECT] Select of entries
This key is used for specifying some entries, which become the
object for editing commands such as [DELETE]. To press this key,
The selecting mode starts from the place on the cursor. If you move
the cursor, or use the search function, you can select plural entries.
Then, you can use the soft–keys for editing command such as
”delete”, ”move”, ”copy”.
e. [DETELE] Deletion of entries
This key deletes the selected entries.
f. [CUT] Cut of entries
This key cuts the selected entries. The cut information is moved
into the buffer for pasting and deleted from the message data.
g. [COPY] Copy of entries
This key copies the selected entries into the buffer for pasting.
824
h. [PASTE] Pasting of entries

This key replaces the data on the cursor with the contents of the
buffer for pasting. If you have pressed the soft–key [PASTE], the
buffer keeps the contents until the system is cut the power supply
or you use the [COPY] or [CUT].
i. [CLEAR ALL]Deletion of all entries.
This key deletes all of the message data.
(2) Collective input of message data
You can input a message No. and a message string altogether.
Input the No. and the string that be set apart by ”;” as follows.
”Message No.” ; ”Message string”
Ex. 2001 ; ABCDEFG
screen.
10.3.3 In this screen, you can edit the contents of the messages. To display this
Entry Screen of screen, put the cursor on a message line where you want to edit and press
the soft–key [ZOOM] in the editor screen. The following operations are
Message Data available in this screen.
D Change of input mode [INPUT MODE]
D Change of message no. edit and message string edit
[<=>]
D Insertion of ”@” [@]
D Display of characters of which codes are enclosed by ”@”.
[DOUBLE CHAR]
D Select of entries [SELECT]
D Deletion of entries [DELETE]
D Move of entries [CUT]&[PASTE]
D Copy of entries [COPY]&[PASTE]
D Abortion of edit [CANCEL EDIT]
825
10.3.3.1
Screen structure Message Address Message Request Monitor
Message No.
Simple Display of Message Data
Editing Area of Message No. Editing Area of Message String
(1) The message address, message request monitor, message number, and
message data are displayed from left to right on the screen. The
message request monitor shows the status of a message address signal.
The displayed message data contains the first one line of data.
(2) You can edit the message No. and the message strings in each area.
displayed.
826
10.3.3.2
Operations
The soft–keys in the entry screen Pasting of Characters
Input of ”@” Change of message display
Change of input mode Cut of Chara.
Delete of chara.
Change of Editing Area Select of Characters
Copy of Chara.
Abortion of edit

a. [INPUT MODE] Change of input mode
By pressing this key, the input mode is changed as follows. The
meanings is same as the one in the symbol/comment screen. As for
the detail, please refer to ”operations by soft–keys” in entry screen
of symbol/comment.
Whole string input → Insert Mode → Alter mode
D Whole string input

The cursor indicates the entire string, which is replaced with an
input string.
D Insert mode
An input character is inserted to the cursor position. One space
is inserted when the input key is pressed without key–in of a
character.
D Alter mode
An input character replaces the character at the cursor position
and subsequent ones. The character at the cursor position is
replaced with a space when the input key is pressed without
key–in of a character.
b. [< = >] Change of the editing area
This key is used for the move of the cursor between the area of the
message No. and the area of the message string. The editing object
depends on the place of the cursor.
c. [@] Input of ”@”
To display the Japanese character, the Chinese Character, or the
Special character, the character codes must be enclosed by two
”@”. By using this soft–key, You can insert ”@” or alter a character
into ”@” easily. This soft–key is effective when ”INSERT” mode
or ”ALTER” mode. When ”Whole input” mode, the soft–key
disappears.
827
d. [DOUBLE CHAR]
This operation is same as the one in the viewer screen. Refer to
e. [SELECT] Select of characters
This key is used for specifying some characters, which become the
object for editing commands such as [DELETE]. To press this key,
The selecting mode starts from the character on the cursor. If you
move the cursor, you can select plural characters. Then, you can use
the soft–keys for editing command such as ”delete”, ”move”, ”copy”.
f. [DETELE] Deletion of characters
This key deletes the selected characters.
g. [CUT] Cut of characters
This key cuts the selected characters. The cut information is moved
into the buffer for pasting and deleted from the message string.
h. [COPY] Copy of characters
This key copies the selected characters into the buffer for pasting.
i. [PASTE] Pasting of characters
This key replaces the data on the cursor with the contents of the
buffer for pasting. If you have pressed the soft–key [PASTE], the
buffer keeps the contents until the system is cut the power supply
or you use the [COPY] or [CUT].
j. [CANCEL EDIT]
This key aborts the edit operation.
screen.
NOTE
As for the detail of input format of special character code like
Chinese character, refer to Section I–5.44, ”DISPB
functional instruction”.
10.3.4
Alarm Message and Alarm Messages Meanings and Countermeasures
Countermeasure
Meaning:
In the collective input, there is no ”;” at the 5th
INPUT INVALID column.
Countermeasure:
Input ”;” after the message no.
Meaning:
In the number contains illegal characters. Or the
ILLEGAL NUMBER number under 4 digits is specified.
Countermeasure:
Input 4 digits number.
Meaning:
THE NUMBER IS OUT The number from 1000 to 9999 is not input.
OF RANGE Countermeasure:
Input the number from 1000 to 9999.
828
Alarm Messages Meanings and Countermeasures
Meaning:
CLOSING ”@” IS NOT A pair of ”@” is not input.
Countermeasure:
FOUND
Input Japanese character or Chinese character
enclosed by ”@”.
Meaning:
BAD NUMBER OF The number of the character’s code between
CHARACTERS IN ”@” and ”@” is not even number.
”@–@” Countermeasure:
Input proper character’s code.
Meaning:
ILLEGAL CHARACTER There are illegal characters between ”@” and
”@”.
IN ”@–@”
Countermeasure:
Input proper character’s code.
BAD NUMBER OF Meaning:

The number of 2byte–codes is not multiple of 4.
CHARACTERS FOR
Countermeasure:
2–BYTE CODE
Input proper 2byte–codes.
Meaning:
ILLEGAL 2–BYTE The input 2byte–codes is illegal.
CODE Countermeasure:
Input proper 2byte–codes.
Meaning:
CLOSING CONTROL There is no control code ”01” for closing 2byte–
CODE ”01” IS NOT codes.
FOUND Countermeasure:
Input the control code ”01”.
Meaning:
CONTROL CODE ”XX” The start code ”02”, the terminate code ”01” or
IS REPEATED the umlaut code ”0d” are duplicated.
(XX: duplicated code) Countermeasure:
Delete duplicated code.
Meaning:
CLOSING ”]” IS NOT The control codes ”[”,”]” is not a pair.
FOUND Countermeasure:
Specify a pair of ”[”,”]”.
Meaning:
BAD NUMERICAL DATA The format of numerical data is illegal.
FORMAT Countermeasure:
Specify proper data.
Meaning:
BAD PMC ADDRESS The address of the numerical data is invalid.
FOR NUMERIAL DATA Countermeasure:
Specify proper address for PMC–NB6.
829
10.4
VIEWER/EDITOR
SCREEN OF SYSTEM
PARAMETER
10.4.1 In this screen, you can confirm the system parameters which affect the
execution of the ladder. To display this screen, press the soft–key
Viewer Screen of
[SYSTEM PARAM] in the misc. menu. The following operations are
System Parameter available in this screen.
D Display of the edit screen of system parameter [EDIT]
830
10.4.1.1
Screen structure
Display Area for system parameters
Message Line
Key Input Line
displayed.
(2) In the display area for system parameters, the parameters such as the
counter type, the FS0 operator’s panel, and the ladder execution ratio
of level1 and level2 are displayed.
10.4.1.2
Operations
The soft–keys of the view sceen
System Parameter Edit
[EDIT] Call for the editor screen of system parameter

This key displays the editor screen of the system parameters. When the
programmer function(Note 1) is enable, this key is available. If the online
monitor function(Note 2) is enable, the editor screen can not be used.
831
NOTE
in PMC setting.
setting.
10.4.2 In the screen, you can edit the system parameters. To display this screen,
press the soft–key [EDIT] in the viewer screen of the system parameters.
Editor Screen of
The following operations are available in this screen.
System Parameter
D Setting of the counter type [BINARY] / [BCD]
D Setting of parameters for F0 operation panel
D Setting of execution rate of ladder level1/2
D Initialize of each parameter [INIT]
832
10.4.2.1
Screen structure
Editing Area for System Parameter
Message Line
Key Input Line
displayed.
(2) In the editing area for system parameters, the parameters such as the
counter type, the FS0 operator’s panel, and the ladder execution ratio
of level1 and level2 are displayed. Each parameter can be changed.
10.4.2.2
Operations
The soft–keys of the editor screen

COUNTER DATA TYPE:
FS0 OPERATOR PANEL:
Other parameters:
(1) COUNTER DATA TYPE

You can specify whether the counter value is used in binary or BCD
by functional instruction CTR. Set the parameter by the soft–key
[BINARY]/[BCD] or the cursor.
833
NOTE
After changing a counter data type, set up the counter value
again.
(2) FS0 OPERATOR PANEL

You can specify the Series 0 operator’s panel is connected. When YES
is selected, specify the actual addresses of DI and DO connected to the
operator’s panel, the address of the key image transferred from the
operator’s panel, and the address of the LED image to be transferred
to the operator’s panel.
a. KEY DI ADDRESS
DI actually connected (X0 to X127).
b. LED DO ADDRESS
DO actually connected(Y0 to Y127).
c. KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
image to be referenced by the user program. Usually specify an
d. LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
image to be generated by the user program. Usually specify an
(3) LADDER EXEC RATIO
Specify the ladder execution ratio of both level 1 and level 2 in this
parameter.
Defaut value 150 Setting range 1 to 150
– In case that you don’t use level 3 ladder, set the parameter to
maximum value (150).
– In case that you use level 3 ladder, level 3 ladder may not run well
under the maximum value (150). Set the parameter to decrease the
ladder execution time of level1 and level 2.
The ladder execution time of level1 and level2 is calculated as
following formula.
”Ladder execution time of level1 and level2” =
5msec “LADDER EXEC”
100
The ladder execution time of level3 is calculated as following formula.
”Ladder execution time of level3” =
7.5msec – ”Ladder execution time of level1 and level2”.
For example, in case that ”100” is set to the parameter, the ladder
execution time of level1 and levle2 is assigned 5msec in ladder
execution cycle(8msec) and the ladder execution time of level3 is
assigned 2.5msec.
834
V. FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B
PMC–SA1/SB7
MANIPULATION
1. SCREEN OPERATION
FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B
B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION PMC–SA1/SB7
1 SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B

PMC–SA1/SB7
837
1. SCREEN OPERATION
PMC–SA1/SB7 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
1.1 For the PMC–SA1, the operability and function have been improved as
follows, as compared with the Series 21i–A PMC and the Series
SCREEN OPERATION 16i/18i/21i–A loader control PMC–SA1.
FOR PMC–SA1 D Edit functions which is embedded in PMC control software
D Reinforcement of programmer protection function
1.1.1 When pressing soft–key [PMC] in CNC system menu screen, PMC main
Structure of Software menu appears. The following is the summary of PMC screen tree. The
hatched part below indicates the screen that was changed in the Series
Key in PMC 16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC SA1. The other screens are the same as those of
the PMC–SA1. See ”II. PMC Operation (CRT/MDI)” and ”III. PMC
Programmer”.
[PMC] [PMCLAD] LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR

[PMCDGN] [TITLE] TITLE DATA
[STATUS] SIGNAL STATUS
[ALARM] ALARM
[TRACE] SIGNAL TRACE
[IOCHK] I/O LINK CONNECTING CHECK
[PMCPRM] [TIMER] TIMER
[COUNTR] COUNTER
[KEEPRL] KEEP RELAY
[DATA] [G.DATA] DATA TABLE
[SETING] SETTING
[RUN]/[STOP] START AND STOP OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM
[EDIT] [TITLE] TITLE DATA EDITOR
[LADDER] LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
[SYMBOL] SYMBOL DATA EDITOR
[MESAGE] MESSAGE DATA EDITOR
[MODULE] I/O UNIT ADDRESS SETTING
[CROSS] CROSS REFERENCE
[CLEAR] CLEARING SEQUENCE PROGRAM
[I/O] INPUT AND OUTPUT OF SEQUENCE
PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER
[SYSPRM] SYSTEM PARAMETER
[MONIT] [ONLINE] ONLINE SETTING
1.1.2 The following system keep relays are added.

Addition of System Item Meaning PMC–SA1
Keep Relays EDIT ENABLE Allows editing the ladder program. K18.6
ALLOW PMC STOP Allows start /stop of ladder program. K19.2
Please refer to ”5. SETTING FUNCTION” for detail.
838
1. SCREEN OPERATION
1.2 The following points are changed for improvement of operation and
feature for PMC–SB7.
SCREEN OPERATION
D Edit functions which is embedded in PMC control software
FOR PMC–SB7
D Display in Japanese
D Ladder monitor/editing screen
D Integration of Signal waveforms(ANALYS) and trace(TRACE)
D Extension of symbol data to 16 characters
D Reinforcement of programmer protection function
NOTE
Japanese characters are not displayed for the soft key
count 5+2 type monitors (8.4” color LCD and 7.2”
monochrome LCD). Japanese characters in comment data
are displayed as ”**”.
839
1. SCREEN OPERATION
PMC–SA1/SB7 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
1.2.1 When pressing soft–key [PMC] in CNC system menu screen, PMC main
Structure of Software menu appears. The following is the summary of PMC screen tree. The
shaded parts are the improved screens for PMC–SB7.
Key in PMC
[PMC] [PMCLAD] [EDIT] LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR

Refer to chapter 6
COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION
Refer to chapter 7
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
Refer to chapter 8
[PMCDGN] [TITLE] TITLE DATA
[STATUS] SIGNAL STATUS
[ALARM] ALARM
[TRACE] SIGNAL TRACE Refer to chapter 9
[IOCHK] I/O LINK CONNECTING CHECK
[PMCPRM] [TIMER] TIMER
[COUNTR] COUNTER
[KEEPRL] KEEP RELAY
[DATA] [G.DATA] DATA TABLE
[SETING] SETTING SCREEN Refer to chapter 5
[RUN]/[STOP] START AND STOP OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM
[EDIT] [TITLE] TITLE DATA EDITOR
[LADDER] LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
[SYMBOL] SYMBOL DATA EDITOR
[MESAGE] MESSAGE DATA EDITOR
[MODULE] I/O UNIT ADDRESS SETTING
[CROSS] CROSS REFERENCE
[CLEAR] CLEARING SEQUENCE PROGRAM
[I/O] INPUT AND OUTPUT OF SEQUENCE
PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER
[SYSPRM] SYSTEM PARAMETER
[MONIT] [ONLINE] ONLINE SETTING
840
1. SCREEN OPERATION
1.2.2 In symbol/comment display/editing screen, you can edit maximum 16

Expansion of Symbol characters of symbols. Other screens which shows the symbols can
display and handle the symbols up to following character length.
Size
Max. display
Screens Search length Remark
character length
Symbol/comment editing 16char. 16 char.
Ladder monitor/editing 7char. 16 char. 16 characters display is available in additional in-
formation line
Program list 6 char. 16 char.
Signal status 7 char. 16 char.
Cross reference 7 char. – 16 characters display is available in specifying ad-
dress (type 1) screen
Trace 7 char. 16 char. 9 characters display is available in setting screen
The symbol characters exceeding the displaying field are omitted in each
screen. Search function fully compares 16 characters in all screens which
have search function.
1.2.3 The following system keep relays are added.

Addition of System Item Meaning PMC–SB7
Keep Relays EDIT ENABLE Allows editing the ladder program. K901.6
ALLOW PMC STOP Allows start /stop of ladder program. K902.2
TRACE START Starts the tracing automatically after K906.5
power turns on
Please refer to ”2. SETTING FUNCTION” for detail.
841
2. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
2 SETTING FUNCTION
842
B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION
2.1 There are following setting parameter screens on PMC–SB7.

SWITCHING D Setting screen for general functions (See V–2.2 for details.)
SCREENS FOR D Setting screen for multi–language alarm/operator message display
function (See 2.3 for details.)
SETTING
D Setting screen for selectable I/O link assignment function (See V–2.4
PARAMETERS for details.)
D Setting screen for OVERRIDE mode of the forced input/output
function (See II–4.4.1 for details.)
The flow of switching above setting screens is as following chart. Each
setting can be also set on System Keep Relay screen. Setting screen of
multi–language display function, selectable I/O link assignment function
and OVERRIDE mode of the forced input/output function and System
Keep Relay screen can be protected by programmer protection function.
PMC main menu
[PMCPRM] [KEEPRL]
[SETING]
Keep Relay
[<] (K0–K99)
General function
Page Down The screen protection
The screen protection [NEXT]

[PREV] Keep Relay
(K900–K919)
Multi–language Display Function
The screen protection

[NEXT]
[PREV] [PREV]
Selectable I/O Link Assignment

Selectable I/O Link Assignment Function
Function caution screen
EFFECTIVE GROUP SELECTION
[YES]
The screen protection [NEXT]
[PREV]
[NEXT]
OVERRIDE mode of
the forced input/output function
843
2.2
SETTING SCREEN
OF GENERAL
FUNCTION
Setting screen for PMC–SB7

D TRACE START(PMC–SB7:K906.5)
MANUAL (0): Executes the tracing with [EXEC] soft–key.
AUTO (1): Starts the tracing automatically after the power turns
on.
D EDIT ENABLE(PMC–SB7:K901.6, PMC–SA1:K18.6)
NO (0): Prevents editing of the sequence program.
YES (1): Allows editing of the sequence program.
NOTE
This setting effects some PMC functions.
Please refer to ”2.6 Programmer protection function”
D WRITE TO F–ROM(PMC–SB7:K902.0, PMC–SA1:K19.0)

NO (0): Does not write to flash ROM automatically after editing of
sequence program.
YES (1): Writes to flash ROM automatically after editing of sequence
program.
D RAM WRITE ENABLE(PMC–SB7:K900.4, PMC–SA1:K17.4)
NO (0): Prevents forcing function.
YES (1): Allows forcing function.
NOTE
Please refer to ”2.6 Programmer protection function”
844
D DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN(PMC–SB7:K900.7, PMC–SA1:K17.7)

YES (0): Displays PMC parameter data table control screen.
NO (1): Does not displays PMC parameter data table control screen.
D HIDE PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7:K902.6, PMC–SA1:K19.6)
NO (0): Allows PMC parameter display and output.
YES (1): Prevents PMC parameter display and output.
NOTE
Please refer to ”2.6 Programmer protection function.”
D PROTECT PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7:K902.7, PMC–SA1:K19.7)

NO (0): Allows PMC parameter change and read.
YES (1): Prevents PMC parameter change and read.
NOTE
D HIDE PMC PROGRAM(PMC–SB7:K900.0, PMC–SA1:K17.0)

NO (0): Allows sequence program display.
YES (1): Prevents sequence program display.
NOTE
D IO GROUP SELECTION (PMC–SB7:K906.1)

HIDE (0) : The selectable I/O link assignment function screen is
not displayed.
SHOW (1) : The selectable I/O link assignment function screen is
displayed.
D LADDER START(PMC–SB7:K900.2, PMC–SA1:K17.2)
AUTO (0): Executes the sequence program automatically after
the power turns on.
MANUAL(1): Executes the sequence program by [RUN] soft–key.
D ALLOW PMC STOP(PMC–SB7:K902.2, PMC–SA1:K19.2)
NO (0): Prevents run/stop operation of the sequence program.
YES (1): Allows run/stop operation of the sequence program.
NOTE
845
D PROGRAMMER ENABLE(PMC–SB7:K900.1, PMC–SA1:K17.1)

NO (0): Disables embedded programmer function.
YES (1): Enables embedded programmer function.
NOTE
846
2.3
MULTI–LANGUAGE
ALARM/OPERATOR
MESSAGE DISPLAY
FUNCTION SETTING
SCREEN
MESSAGE SHIFT VALUE

Enter a desired message display request bit shift amount.
A value from 0 to 1999 can be entered. The initially displayed value
is 0.
Entered data is maintained even after the power is turned off.
MESSAGE SHIFT START ADDRESS
Enter a shift start bit address in the message display request bit area.
Valid range of A–address can be entered. The initial value is A0.0.
Entered data is maintained even after the power is turned off.
NOTE
1 Data entered for MESSAGE SHIFT START ADDRESS is
valid only when a value other than 0 is entered for
MESSAGE SHIFT VALUE.
2 When K906.4=1, setting in keep relay, K916–K919 is
effective for a multi–language alarm/operator message
display function. In this case, the screen shows the setting
in K916–K919. Moreover, the setting that is modified in this
screen is written to keep relay.(SHIFT VALUE is written to
K918–K919, START ADDRESS is written to K916–K917.)
847
2.4 This caution screen is displayed for the operator’s attention when the
operator is going to switch to the setting parameter screen for the
CAUTION SCREEN selectable I/O link assignment function.
OF THE SETTING
PARAMETER FOR
THE SELECTABLE
I/O LINK
ASSIGNMENT
FUNCTION
The caution screen of the setting parameter for the selectable I/O link
assignment function
[YES]: This softkey switches to the setting parameter screen for the
selectable I/O link assignment function.
[PREV]: This softkey switches to the previous setting parameter screen.
[NEXT]: This softkey switches to the next setting parameter screen.
WARNING
If you modify this setting parameter without care, the I/O
assignment data may not match I/O devices and turning on
the power may result in unexpected malfunctions of
machine. So, it is required that the operator of this function
should be an expert who fully understands the sequence
program and the operation of PMC. It is also strongly
recommended to the developer of machine that this setting
screen should be protected from careless use by ordinary
operators after the machine is shipped into the field.
848
2.5 You can set the group of optional I/O device that is connected with each
machines.
SETTING
PARAMETER
SCREEN FOR THE
SELECTABLE I/O
LINK ASSIGNMENT
FUNCTION
The setting parameter screen for the selectable I/O link assignment
function
EFFECTIVE GROUP SELECTION (channel 1: K910–K911, channel2:
K912–K913)
You can select effective I/O group in I/O link assignment data.
1 : I/O group is effective.
0 : I/O group is no effective.
The ”*” mark means that the group is set as the basic part by the
parameter ”BASIC GROUP COUNT” on the system parameter screen.
The value can not be set into this parts.
849
2.6
PROGRAMMER
CAUTION
PROTECTION This section contains important information for developers
FUNCTION of application system controlled by PMC. Improperly
implemented application system may increase possibility of
defects in its safety. Careful examinations and
considerations on using and implementing with the
functions explained especially in this section are strongly
required.
PMC system provides various embedded programmer functions such as

edit, diagnosis and debugging which help the programming and
debugging of sequence program. To use these functions which may even
disable safety mechanism realized by sequence program, it is required
that the operator of these functions should be an expert who fully
understands the sequence program and the operation of PMC. It is also
strongly recommended to the developer of machine that these functions
should be protected from careless use by ordinary operators after the
machine is shipped into the field. Furthermore, if these functions partly
need to be used in the field for any purpose such as the maintenance or
adjustment, the developer of the machine should implement any means
to enable these functions after forcing the machine in safe mode or should
let the operator know and strictly follow proper procedure to ensure the
safety.
The setting parameters described in this section are provided for the
developer of machine to be able to properly program the sequence or
control the parameters for necessary conditions on which the operator is
allowed to use PMC programmer functions safely by eliminating careless
operation which may cause ”stopping the ladder”, ”changing sequence
program” or ”changing important setting data”.
These parameters can be set on the setting screen or in some system keep
relays (:PMC–SB7: K900 to 919,PMC–SA1: K17 to 19).
850
2.6.1 If you set ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE ” to ”YES”, it enables the

PROGRAMMER following functions as a supervisor mode.
ENABLE (PMC–SB7: – Ladder editing screen
– Title data editing screen
K900.1, PMC–SA1:
– Symbol/comment data editing screen
K17.1) – Message data editing screen
– I/O unit address setting screen
– Cross reference screen
– Clear of sequence program
– Clear of PMC parameter
– Start/stop of ladder
– Forcing function
– Override function*1
– Setting of multi–language message display function
– I/O screen
– System parameter screen
– Online setting screen
– Setting screen for the I/O link assignment data selection function
– Setting screen for keep relay K900 or after
– Input/output of sequence program or C language application
– Input/output of PMC parameter
– Storage of sequence program or C language application to F–ROM
NOTE
The override function also requires the setting of
”OVERRIDE ENABLE” in the setting parameters.
CAUTION
Set this setting to ”NO”(0) before shipment of the machine.
If this setting is left as ”YES”(1), the operator may stop
execution of the ladder program by mistake. If you want to
protect this setting, please make a sequence that always
writes 0 in this bit by your ladder. Or please control the
machine to force to translate into safety state by sequence
program using the way described in ”3.3.1 (7)” when the
ladder stops.
851
2.6.2 If you set ”HIDE PMC PROGRAM” to ”YES”, it disables the following
HIDE PMC PROGRAM functions which have the sequence program display.
(PMC–SB7: K900.0, – Ladder monitor screen
– Ladder editing screen
PMC–SA1: K17.0)
– Title data editing screen
– Symbol/comment data editing screen
– Message data editing screen
– I/O unit address setting screen
– Cross reference screen
– Clear of sequence program
– Clear of PMC parameter
– System parameter screen
– Output of sequence program or C language application
NOTE
Even if this parameter is set to ”YES”, these functions do not
be hidden except for Ladder monitor/editing screen if
”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” is set to ”YES”.
2.6.3 If you set ”EDIT ENABLE” to ”YES”, it enables the following functions
which can edit the program.
EDIT ENABLE
(PMC–SB7: K901.6, – Ladder editing screen*1
– Title data editing screen*1
PMC–SA1: K18.6)
– Symbol/comment data editing screen*1*2
– Message data editing screen*1*2
– I/O unit address setting screen*1*2
– Cross reference screen*1
– Clear of sequence program*1*2
– Clear of PMC parameter*1*2
– Setting of multi–language message display function
– System parameter screen*1
– Setting screen for keep relay K900 or after
– Input of sequence program or C language application *2
– Storage of sequence program or C language application to F–ROM
NOTE
1 Even if this parameter is set to ”YES”, these functions which
have program display are invalid if ”HIDE PMC PROGRAM”
is set to ”YES”.
2 These screens with stop of ladder program require below
setting ”ALLOW PMC STOP”.
852
CAUTION
Set this setting to ”NO”(0) before shipment of the machine
if you want to prohibit operator form editing the program. If
you want to protect this setting, please make a sequence
that always writes 0 in this bit by your ladder.
2.6.4 If you set ”HIDE PMC PARAM” to ”YES”, the following functions about
PMC parameter are protected.
HIDE PMC PARAM
(PMC–SB7: K902.6, – It is impossible to show Timer, Counter, Keep Relay and Data Table
screens.
PMC–SA1: K19.6)
– It is impossible to output PMC parameter in PMC I/O screen.
NOTE
The following operations are necessary to output PMC
parameter from I/O screen like Series 16i/18i/21i–A. The
following two methods can be used to make it possible to
output data for them.
D If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (usually,
this method should be used when the machine is
operating.)
i) Set NC to EDIT mode.
ii) The parameters are released from protection; so data
can be outputted.
D If the sequence program can be stopped (STOP state),
for example, while it is being debugged.
ii) The parameter protection is released; so data can be
outputted.
WARNING
also likely.
853
2.6.5 If you set ”PROTECT PMC PARAM” to ”YES” or K902.7/K19.7 = 1,

PROTECT PMC PARAM the following functions about PMC parameter are protected.
(PMC–SB7: K902.7, – It is impossible to change Timer, Counter, Keep Relay and Data Table
PMC–SA1: K19.7) screens.
– It is impossible to input PMC parameter in PMC I/O screen.
NOTE
1 The following operations are necessary to change the data of each PMC parameter screen like
Series 16i/18i/21i–A. The following two methods can be used to make it possible to enter data
for them.
D If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (usually, this method should be used when
the machine is operating.)
i) Place the NC in MDI mode or bring it to an emergency stop.
ii) Set “PWE” on the NC setting screen to 1 (see the following table).
iii) Alternatively, set the program protect signal (KEY4) to 1 (only if counters or data tables
are involved).
iv) The parameters are released from protection; so data can be entered for them (see the
following table).
PWE KEY4
TIMER f
COUNTER f f Alternative
KEEP RELAY f
DATA TABLE f f Alternative
v) After entering data for the parameters, return “PWE” or the KEY4 signal to the previous
state.
D If the sequence program can be stopped (STOP state), for example, while it is being
debugged.
ii) The parameter protection is released; so data can be entered for them.
2 The following operations are necessary to input PMC parameter from I/O screen like Series
16i/18i/21i–A. The following two methods can be used to make it possible to enter data for
them.
D If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (usually, this method should be used when
the machine is operating.)
i) Bring the NC to an emergency stop.
ii) Set “PWE” on the NC setting screen to 1.
iii) The parameters are released from protection; so data can be entered for them.
iv) After entering data for the parameters, return “PWE” to the previous state.
D If the sequence program can be stopped (STOP state), for example, while it is being
debugged.
ii) The parameter protection is released; so data can be entered for them.
854
WARNING
also likely.
2.6.6 If you set ”ALLOW PMC STOP” to ”YES”, it enables the following
functions which require stop/start of ladder program. *1
ALLOW PMC STOP
(PMC–SB7: K902.2, – Symbol/comment data editing screen*2
– Message data editing screen*2
PMC–SA1: K19.2)
– I/O unit address setting screen*2
– Clear of sequence program*2
– Clear of PMC parameter*2
– Start/stop of ladder
– System parameter screen*2
– Input of sequence program or C language application *2
NOTE
1 Even if this parameter is set to ”YES”, these functions which
have program display are invalid if ”HIDE PMC PROGRAM”
is set to ”YES”.
2 These editing screens require above setting ”EDIT
ENABLE”.
CAUTION
Set this setting to ”NO”(0) before shipment of the machine.
If this setting is left as ”YES”(1), the operator may stop
execution of the ladder program by mistake. If you want to
protect this setting, please make a sequence that always
writes 0 in this bit by your ladder. Or please control the
machine to force to translate into safety state by sequence
program using the way described in ”3.3.1 (7)” when the
ladder stops.
855
2.6.7 If you set ”RAM WRITE ENABLE” to ”YES”, it enables both the forcing
RAM WRITE ENABLE function and the override function.
(PMC–SB7: K900.4,
PMC–SA1: K17.4) NOTE
The override function also requires the setting of
”OVERRIDE ENABLE” in the setting parameters.
2.6.8 If you set ”DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN” to ”NO”, the data table control
DATA TBL CNTL screen does not be displayed.
SCREEN (PMC–SB7:
K900.7, PMC–SA1:
K17.7)
2.6.9 If you set ”IO GROUP SELECTION ” to ”SHOW”, the setting screen for
IO GROUP SELECTION the selectable I/O link assignment function is enabled.
(K906.1)
2.6.10 PMC I/O screen is always displayed regardless of the running state of
programmer protection function.
Protection of Each
However, Following function is executable according to state of each
Function of I/O Screen setting parameter.
Protect functions individually Use all programmer protection functions

Operation
Related Enable Prohibit Related Enable Prohibit
setting operation operation setting operation operation
Both
K901.6/K18.6 One of
INPUTTING LADDER parameters
K902.2/K19.2 them is 1
are 1
OUTPUTTING LADDER
K900.0/K17.0 Set to 0 Set to 1 K900.1
(FDCAS,M–CARD)
/K17.1 Set to 1 Set to 0
INPUTTING PMC (Caution 2)
K902.7/K19.7 Set to 0 Set to 1
PARAMETER*1
OUTPUTTING PMC
K902.6/K19.6 Set to 0 Set to 1
PARAMETER*2
NOTE
1 Set NC to “Emergency Stop” state and set “PWE” of NC
setting screen to input PMC parameter.
2 Set EDIT mode to output PMC parameter.
856
CAUTION
1 When allowing input/output operation in the field, it is
recommended that each setting of protection is set to allow
only necessary operation.
2 It is recommended that the programmer function
(K900.1/K17.1) should not be used to enable input/output
functions because enabling this parameter also enables
stopping and editing ladder. This parameter should be used
only when debugging ladder.
Following functions are executable unconditionally.

DELETE Deletes the file of FDCAS and M–CARD
LIST Displays the list of FDCAS and M–CARD
FORMAT Initializes M–CARD
D Example of setting that prohibits edit and I/O of ladder and permits I/O
of PMC parameter.
Setting of Keep Relay Setting of Setting Screen Meaning
K900.0/K17.0=1 HIDE PMC PROGRAM to ”YES” Prohibits display and output of ladder
K900.1/K17.1=0 PROGRAMMER ENABLE to ”NO” Disables programmer function
K901.6/K18.6=0 EDIT ENABLE to ”NO” Prohibits editing
K902.2/K19.2=0 ALLOW PMC STOP to ”NO” Prohibits PMC run/stop
K902.6/K19.6=0 HIDE PMC PARAM to ”NO” Enables display and output PMC parameter
K902.7/K19.7=0 PROTECT PMC PARAM to ”NO” Enables modification and input PMC parameter
857
2.7 i) If you want to prohibit completely operator from accessing the

sequence program;
EXAMPLE FOR
D PROGRAMMER ENABLE
SETTING (PMC–SB7: K900.1, PMC–SA1: K17.1) ”NO”
PARAMETERS D HIDE PMC PROGRAM
(PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0) ”YES”
D EDIT ENABLE
(PMC–SB7: K901.6, PMC–SA1: K18.6) ”NO”
D ALLOW PMC STOP
(PMC–SB7: K902.2, PMC–SA1: K19.2) ”NO”
ii) If you want to allow operator only monitoring the sequence program;
D PROGRAMMER ENABLE
(PMC–SB7: K900.1, PMC–SA1: K17.1) ”NO”
D HIDE PMC PROGRAM
(PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0) ”NO”
D EDIT ENABLE
(PMC–SB7: K901.6, PMC–SA1: K18.6) ”NO”
D ALLOW PMC STOP
(PMC–SB7:K 902.2, PMC–SA1: K19.2) ”NO”
NOTE
Please use the password function of sequence program for
particular operator. Please refer to FANUC LADDER–III
operator’s manual B–66234EN ”5.4 PROTECING LADDER
PROGRAMS BY PASSWORD”
iii) If you want to allow operator monitoring and editing the sequence
program;
D PROGRAMMER ENABLE
(PMC–SB7: K900.1, PMC–SA1: K17.1) ”NO”
D HIDE PMC PROGRAM
(PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0) ”NO”
D EDIT ENABLE
D ALLOW PMC STOP
(PMC–SB7: K902.2, PMC–SA1: K19.2) ”NO”
NOTE
PROGRAMS BY PASSWORD”.
iv) If you want to allow operator monitoring and editing the sequence
program which requires stop of ladder;
D PROGRAMMER ENABLE
(PMC–SB7: K900.1, PMC–SA1: K17.1) ”NO”
858
D HIDE PMC PROGRAM

(PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0) ”NO”
D EDIT ENABLE
D ALLOW PMC STOP
NOTE
PROGRAMS BY PASSWORD”.
WARNING
work–piece or machine. Incorrect operation of the machine
user. Damage the tool, work–piece, and/or the machine is
also likely.
v) The case that operator who familiar with the machine and the ladder
sequence operate all the PMC programmer functions;
D PROGRAMMER ENABLE
D HIDE PMC PROGRAM
(PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0) ”NO”
WARNING
work–piece or machine. Incorrect operation of the machine
user. Damage the tool, work–piece, and/or the machine is
also likely.
859
2.8
KEEP RELAYS USED
IN THE SYSTEM
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K17 DTBLDSP TRCSTAT MEMINP AUTORUN PRGRAM LADMASK
or
K900
#7 DTBLDSP 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is displayed.

1 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is not displayed.
#5 TRCSTAT 0 : Starts trace function when the execution soft key is pressed.
1 : Starts trace function automatically at power on.
: This flag is effective on PMC–SA1.
#4 MEMINP 0 : The forcing function and override function are disabled.
1 : The forcing function and override function are enabled.
#2 AUTORUN 0 : The sequence program automatically starts at power on.
1 : The sequence program starts when the [RUN]soft key is pressed.
#1 PRGRAM 0 : The built–in programmer function does not operate.
(Also, the programmer menu is not displayed)
1 : The built–in programmer function operates.
(The programmer menu is displayed.)
#0 LADMASK 0 : Functions which have the sequence program display are enabled.
1 : Functions which have the sequence program display are disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K18 IGNDINT EDITLAD CHKPRTY CALCPRTY TRNSRAM TRGSTAT DBGSTAT IGNKEY
or
K901
#7 IGNDINT 0 : The system initializes the LCD when the screen is switched to the
PMCMDI screen.
1 : The system does not initialize the LCD when the screen is switched to
the PMCMDI screen.
: This flag is effective when PMC C program is used. This flag is used
to determine whether the system initializes the LCD or not when the
screen is switched to PMCMDI screen. When this flag is on, PMC C
program must initialize the LCD.
#6 EDITLAD 0 : Editing of sequence program is disabled.
1 : Editing of sequence program is enabled.
#5 CHKPRTY 0 : The system ROM and program ROM/RAM are checked for parity
errors.
1 : The system ROM and program ROM/RAM are not checked for parity
errors.
#4 CALCPRTY 0 : The built–in programmer function performs RAM parity calcuration.
1 : The built–in programmer function does not perform RAM parity
calcuration.
#3 TRNSRAM 0 : A ladder program is not automatically sent to the backup RAM after
on–line editing is completed.
1 : A ladder program is automatically sent to the backup RAM after
on–line editing is completed.
860
#2 TRGSTAT 0 : The trigger stop function does not automatically start at power on.
1 : The trigger stop function starts automatically at power on.
#1 DBGSTAT 0 : The automatic break processing of C language debug function does
not start at power on.
1 : The automatic break processing of C language debug function start at
power on.
: This flag is effective when PMC C program is used.
#0 IGNKEY 0 : Function keys are enabled for a user program on the PMCMDI screen.
1 : Function keys are disabled for a user program on the PMCMDI
screen.
: This flag is effective when PMC C program is used. When this flag is
set to 1, the PMCMDI screen cannot be switched to the CNC screen
by using function keys. Program which invariably sets this flag to 0,
or which switches the PMCMDI screen to the NC screen, must be
prepared.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K19 PTCTPRM HIDEPRM ALWSTP C–REJECT FROM–WRT
or
K902
#7 PTCTPRM 0 : Modification of PMC parameters and input PMC parameters from the
outside are enabled.
1 : Modification of PMC parameters and input PMC parameters from the
outside are disabled.
#6 HIDEPRM 0 : The display of PMC parameters and the output of PMC parameters to
the outside are enabled.
1 : The display of PMC parameters and the output of PMC parameters to
the outside are disabled.
#2 ALWSTP 0 : The execution/stop operation of a sequence program is disabled.
1 : The execution/stop operation of a sequence program is enabled.
#1 C–REJECT 0 : The system activates PMC C program.
1 : The system does not activate PMC C program.
#0 FROM–WRT 0 : Sequence program is not automatically written to F–ROM after
editing.
1 : Sequence program is automatically written to F–ROM after editing.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K906 TRCSTAT MSHIFTKENBL NOEOUTPUT IOCHK IOSELSCN OVRRIDE
#5 TRCSTAT 0 : Starts trace function when the execution soft key is pressed.
1 : Starts trace function automaticcaly at power on.
: This flag is effective on PMC–SB7.
#4 MSHIFTKENBL 0 : Setting a multi–language alarm/operator message display function in
keep relay is disabled.
1 : Setting a multi–language alarm/operator message display function in
keep relay is enabled.
861
NOTE
If this bit is turned on, setting in multi–language
alarm/operator message display function setting screen is
overwritten by the value of K916–K919.
Please set K916–K919 previously before the bit is turned
on.
#3 NOEOUTPUT 0 : Contents of E address is output when PMC parameter is output at I/O

screen.
1 : Contents of E address is not output when PMC parameter is output at
I/O screen.
#2 IOCHK 0 : I/O Link connection check function is enabled.
(Caution2) 1 : I/OLink connectino check functino is disabled.
#1 IOSELSCN 0 : Setting screen for the selectable I/O Link assignment functino is
disabled.
1 : Setting screen for the selectable I/O Link assignment functino is
enabled.
#0 OVRRIDE 0 : Override function is disabled.
1 : Override function is enabled.
CAUTION
1 Be sure to set any unused areas to 0.
2 When the I/O devices are linked on the several abnormal
status, for example, a failure of the I/O devices, a failure of
the I/O device’s connection and a change of the setting of
the I/O devices by unintentional operation, there is
possibility that the machine may not work normally. If this
function is effective, it is possible to inspect the abnormality
of the I/O devices in power on. It is recommended that this
setting is set to initial value (0) to troubleshoot the I/O
devices easily.
K916– message shift start address

K917
Specify bit offset from A0.0 for start address of message shift. Bit offset
of Ax.y can be calculated as x 8+y.
e.g.) A0.0 → 0 8+0 = 0
A249.7 → 249 8 + 7 = 1999
: This area is effective when K906.4=1.
862
K918– message shift value

K919
Specify shift amount of message shift.

: This area is effective when K906.4=1.
NOTE
These settings are invalid if the value is out of range of A
address.
863
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
3 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7)
Pressing soft key [PMCLAD] displays the sequence program

dynamically. On the screen, you can monitor the LADDER Program
works.
The LADDER Diagram Editor screen allows you changing the LADDER
Diagram, adding relays and functional instructions, and changing the
action of LADDER Diagram.
LADDER Diagram Monitor/Editor function consists of following
screens.
a) LADDER Diagram Monitor screen
Displays LADDER Diagram and the current status of relays and
others.
b) Collective Monitor screen
Displays only selected ladder diagram and the current status of relays
and others.
c) LADDER Diagram Editor screen
Edits LADDER Diagram by the net.
d) Net Editor screen
Edits the structure of a net in LADDER Diagram
e) PMC Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen
Refers the contents of a data table of functional instruction.
f) PMC Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen
Edits the contents of a data table of functional instruction.
g) Program List Viewer screen
Chooses the subprogram to be displayed at LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen.
h) Program List Editor screen
Edits LADDER Diagram by the subprogram. Also chooses the
subprogram to be displayed at LADDER Diagram Editor screen.
i) Step Sequence Monitor screen
Displays Step Sequence Diagram and the current status of step,
transition and others.
j) Subprogram List Viewer screen
Chooses the subprogram to be used at step sequence.
NOTE
You can hide [PMCLAD] soft key at PMC Main Menu by
setting the keep relay of K900.0 to 1.
864
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7)
These screens can be reached as described bellow.
PMC Main Menu
[<] [PMCLAD]
Monitor
Function
[LIST]
Program List NOTE 1
Step Sequence Viewer screen
Monitor screen [ZOOM]
[LIST] [ZOOM] [LIST] [ZOOM]

[ZOOM]
[BACK] [SWITCH]
Ladder Diagram Collective Monitor

Monitor screen screen
[SWITCH]
[<] [EDIT]
[LIST]
Ladder Diagram Program List

Editor screen Editor screen
[ZOOM], [<]
[<] [CREATE], [MODIFY]
Net Editor screen Editor

Function
Fig. 3 Relation of monitor and editor screen
NOTE
1 When [PMCLAD] soft key is pressed, the screen which was displayed last time among Ladder
Diagram Monitor screen, Collective Monitor screen Step Sequence Monitor screen and
Program List Viewer screen is displayed. When [PMCLAD] soft key is pressed at first time after
CNC power is on, Program List Viewer screen is displayed. Changing the ladder program by
I/O function will also make Program List Viewer screen appears at [PMCLAD] soft key again.
See ”Program List Viewer screen” for more detail.
2 [EDIT] soft key in Ladder Diagram Monitor screen appears only when Programmer function is
enabled. To enable Programmer function, set ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to ”YES” at
GENERAL screen of PMC Settings or set keep relay K900.1 to 1. Or, set ”EDIT ENABLE” to
”YES” or set K901.6 to 1. While Online Monitor function is active, you can not reach Ladder
Diagram Editor screen. To use Ladder Diagram Editor function, you have to disable Online
Monitor function at ”RS–232C” and ”F–BUS” on ”PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR”:
choose ”NOT USE”.
3 Refer to ”VI. STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION” of ”7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7)” for the Step
Sequence Monitor screen in the figure.
865
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
3.1 LADDER Diagram Monitor screen shows the on/off status of contacts
and coils, and the contents of address specified for parameter of functional
LADDER DIAGRAM instructions.
MONITOR SCREEN Press the [PMCLAD] soft key on the PMC main menu to call the ladder
diagram screen. You can use following operation at this screen, including
”Forced I/O function (Forcing mode)”, by which you can force the relay
or the address parameters of functional instructions to a new status or
value.
D Switch subprogram to show [LIST]
D Search for address or others [SEARCH]
D Show data table of functional instructions [TABLE]
D Go to LADDER Diagram Editor screen [EDIT]
D Calling collective monitor screen [SWITCH]
D Forced I/O function (Forcing mode) ”number” + INPUT key
866
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
3.1.1
Screen Structures Title information (REMARKS) Current subprogram Current position Range to search
Message line Key input line Additional information line

1 Title information (REMARKS) of the LADDER program, the
current subprogram, and the current position information of the
Diagram displayed in this screen, are displayed above the
LADDER Diagram.
When you select a subprogram to be displayed, range for search
function is indicated at right of the top line as ”LOCAL” or
”GLOBAL”. In case of ”LOCAL”, the range for search function
is restricted within the current subprogram. In case of ”GLOBAL”,
on the other hand, search function searches whole of LADDER
program, and switch current subprogram automatically according
to the result of searching.
2 In the additional information line near the bottom of the screen, the
following information of the address under the cursor when the
cursor is shown.
D Net number of the net with the cursor
D Address and its symbol and comment information
D Current value
3 In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be
4 In the ladder diagram display area, relays can be displayed in one
of the following patterns: 9 by 8, 9 by 9, 8 by 6, 9 by 6, 8 by 5, and
9 by 5 (number–of–relays–in–row by number–of–relays–in–
column). For details, see ”Setting the screen.”
5 A gage is displayed at the right–hand side of the screen. This gage
indicates the current display position relative to the entire ladder
program.
867
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
(b) LADDER Diagram

1 Nets wider than the screen width are displayed as ”Continuous
Net” using continuous marks (”>A1>”). Same continuous marks
mean they are connected with each other.
(c) Monitor
1 Contacts and coils are displayed in different colors according to the
status of the signal. The status of power flow is not displayed.
2 The contents of address parameters of functional instructions are
not shown in default setting. With the extended functional
instruction format, you can see the contents of the parameters. See
”Setting Screen” for the detail.
(d) Displaying Symbols and Comments
1 Above each of contacts and coils, the address is displayed. For an
address assigned a symbol, you can specify that the symbol is
displayed instead of the address. You can also specify that the
symbol is displayed in color. For details, see ”Setting the screen.”
2 When a comment is set for the address of a contact, it is displayed
below the contact. You can specify the display format of the
comment. You can also specify that the comment is displayed in
color. For details, see ”Setting the screen.”
3 When a comment is set for the address of a coil, it is displayed in
the right margin of the screen in the wraparound mode. You can
specify that this area is used to display a relay instead of a comment
(to increase the number of relays that can be displayed in a row).
You can also specify that the comment is displayed in color. For
details, see ”Setting the screen.”
868
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
3.1.2
Operations
Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen on PMC–SB7
Main soft keys of LADDER
Diagram Monitor screen
Program List LADDER Diagram Editor Screen Settings
Display Data Table Collective Monitor Function
Search soft keys Search Write Coil Pick UP Search next
Search Functional Switch range

Jump to Instruction Search previous
Top/Bottom
Search Address or Net

1 [LIST] or [BACK ]
[LIST] is displayed when the LADDER program is chosen and
displayed from the Program List Viewer screen. [BACK] is
displayed when the LADDER program is chosen and displayed
from the Step Sequence Monitor screen.
The screen display is switched into the Program List Viewer
screen.
[LIST]: Goes to Program List Viewer screen. On the Program
List Viewer screen, subprogram displayed on Ladder
Diagram Monitor screen can be changed.
[BACK]: Goes to Step Sequence Monitor screen
2 [SEARCH] Search & Jump
return to the ”Main soft keys”. ”Search soft keys” consists of
followings:
D [TOPBTM] Jump to Top/Bottom
Jumps to the top of LADDER Program. If the top is displayed
already, then jump to the bottom.
D [SEARCH] Search Address/Net
Searches the PMC address or the net according to the preceding
string. You can specify both of bit address and byte address.
When digits are entered, the digits are supposed to be a net
number and the screen will jump to the net of the net number.
When a string other than digits is entered, the string is examined
as a symbol for some PMC address at first. If the string matches
a symbol, then the address that the symbol means will be
searched for.
If no symbol matches the string, then the string is examined as
PMC address at next. If the string indicates correct PMC
address, then the address will be searched for.
869
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
When cursor is hidden, the net that has the specified net number
or contains the specified address will be shown at the top of the
screen.
When cursor is shown, the cursor moves to the relay or the
parameter to show the found address directly.
D [W–SRCH] Search Write Coil
Searches for the write coils with the address that entered string
means. Any contacts with the address are ignored.
D [F–SRCH] Search Functional Instruction
Searches for the functional instructions by its SUB number or
its mnemonic name such as ”TMR” or ”END2”.
D [PICKUP] Taking of ladder net into collective monitor screen
The ladder net which executes the monitor is taken into the
collective monitor screen.
D [PREV] Search previous
Repeats to search the same thing backward (upward).
D [NEXT] Search next
Repeats to search the same thing forward (downward).
D [GLOBAL] / [LOCAL] Change range for searching
Changes the range for searching between GLOBAL and LOCAL;
GOBAL means whole of program, and LOCAL means within the
displaying subprogram. Current range for searching is indicated
at right of the information line at top of screen.
3 [TABLE] Go to Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen
4 [EDIT] Go to LADDER Diagram Editor screen
Goes to LADDER Diagram Editor screen. This soft key appears
only when Programmer function1 is enabled. And activating
Online Monitor function2 disables this soft key.
NOTE
1 To enable Programmer function, go to GENERAL screen of
PMC Settings, and choose ”YES” at item ”PROGRAMMER
ENABLE”.
2 To deactivate Online Monitor function, go to ONLIEN screen
of PMC Settings, and choose ”NOT USE” at settings of
”RS–232C” and ”F–BUS” (if appears).
5 [SWITCH] Calling collective monitor screen

The screen display is switched into the Collective Monitor screen.
6 [SETING] Screen settings
Goes to setting screen for LADDER Diagram Monitor screen. You
can change various settings for LADDER Diagram Monitor screen
at the screen. Use Return key [<] to return to LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen. See ”Settings for LADDER Diagram Monitor”
section for the detail.
870
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
7 [<] Calling PMC main menu

The screen display is switched to the PMC Main menu.
1 Cursor move keys, Page change keys
With cursor hidden, you can move diagram in the screen by
up/down Cursor move keys and Page change keys.
Operations of the cursor movement keys when the cursor is not displayed
↑ ↑
PAGE
Scrolling
Upward search ← →
PAGE ↓
Downward search
↓
With cursor displayed, you can move the cursor by all cursor move
keys and Page change keys. When cursor is placed on some relay
or some address parameter of a functional instruction, the
information about the address under cursor is displayed at
”Additional Information Line”.
2 ”number” + INPUT key
When cursor is shown, you can force the value of the address under
cursor by entering new value as ”number” + INPUT key. In this
screen, Forced I/O function is limited only to Forcing mode. This
Forced I/O function asks you to confirm your intention before it
takes effect. Once it is confirmed that you actually want to change
value by this function, you can change the value of the same relay
or parameter without further confirmation. However, after you
move cursor or you operate other functions, you will be asked when
you use the Forced I/O function again.
WARNING
1 You have to pay special attention to use Forced I/O function
to change status of signals. Inappropriate use of Forced I/O
function may cause unexpected reaction of machine. You
have to make it sure that nobody is near the machine when
you use this function.
2 As you use Forcing mode of Forced I/O function to change
status of signal, however, the signal may look proof against
Forced I/O function, because LADDER program or I/O
device writes into the signal repeatedly. In this case, even
if the signal looks unchanged, actual signal may be
changed in very short moment. You should be careful for
the reaction of machine to such signal changes.
871
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
NOTE
1 Forced I/O function is enabled when ”RAM WRITE ENABLE”
setting is set to ”YES” in GENERAL screen of PMC Settings.
If the setting is ”NO”, INPUT key will be just ignored.
2 Parameters of timer functional instructions, TMR, TMRB,
and TMRC, which have special monitor formats, are not
supported by Forced I/O function.
(c) Notes for Search function

1 The string followed by [SEARCH] is treated as symbol first. In
case that the symbol ”D0” is assigned to the bit address ”R0.0”, the
operation ”D0” + [SEARCH] will search the bit address ”R0.0”,
instead of byte address ”D0”.3
2 To search the symbol that consists of only digit characters, which
will usually be treated as net number, you can use leading space to
specify explicitly the string is symbol. For example, while ”123”
+ [SEARCH] will search the 123rd net from top of the LADDER,
”_123” + [SEARCH] (”_” is space) will search address with
symbol ”123”.
3 When the range for searching is GLOBAL, and the target is found
in other than displaying subprogram, the screen will automatically
switch to the subprogram to which the found target belongs.
Searching GLOBAL net number that current subprogram does not
contain, for example, the subprogram that contains the net of the
net number will appear in the screen, displaying the net.
(d) Shortcuts
1 Right/left cursor move keys that are following some string means
searching forward/backward. You can use following strings for
this search operation:
D Digits for net number
D ”1” for top, ”0” for bottom
D ”S” + digits, for Functional instructions
D Other string for symbol or bit/byte address
D Leading space always makes the string treated as a symbol or
address.
Example: ”_123”+[SEARCH] (”_” means space) will search
the symbol ”123” instead of the 123rd net.
2 When cursor is hidden, left/right cursor move keys without string
act just like [PREV]/[NEXT] soft keys.
3 String followed by [SEARCH] soft key in ”PMCLAD Main soft
keys” starts searching directly. In this case, [SEARCH] soft key
acts just like right cursor move key.
4 [SEARCH] soft key in ”Search soft keys” without string searches
the address or the functional instruction under cursor forward. If
cursor is hidden, or cursor is placed neither on a relay nor on a
functional instruction, this operation just repeats the last successful
search forward, just like [NEXT] soft key.
872
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
5 [W–SRCH] soft key without string searches forward a write coil

of the same address with relay under cursor. If cursor is hidden, or
cursor is not placed on a relay, this operation will search a write coil
of the bit address that is searched at last successful search. If the
last search was not made with bit address, the last entered string for
searching is used to determine what bit address is to be searched for
a write coil.
6 [F–SRCH] soft key without string searches forward the same
functional instruction with one under cursor. If cursor is hidden,
or cursor is not placed on a functional instruction, this operation
will search a functional instruction that is searched at last
successful search. If the last search was not made for functional
instruction, the last entered string for searching is used to determine
what functional instruction is to be searched.
7 [LIST] soft key following string that indicates subprogram,
switches subprogram on LADDER Diagram Monitor screen.
Examples for strings to specify subprogram are following:
”L1” Level 1
”P10”, ”10” Subprogram ”P10”
”0”(zero), ”G” Whole of LADDER program (Global)
3.1.3
Setting the Screen
(a) Setting items

LADDER Diagram Monitor Setting screen contains the setting items
below:
D ADDRESS NOTATION
Diagram are displayed as corresponding symbols, or the addresses
themselves.
873
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
SYMBOL
themselves.
ADDRESS (default)
All addresses are displayed as the addresses themselves even if
they have a symbol.
D FUNCTION STYLE
Change the shape of functional instructions. There are three
options as below. You have to choose other than ”COMPACT” to
show the current values of address parameters of functional
instructions.
COMPACT
Occupies least space in diagram. Monitors of current values of
address parameters are omitted.
WIDE (default)
Extends the box horizontally to reserve spaces for the monitors
of current values of address parameters. The box becomes
wider than COMPACT.
TALL
Extends the box vertically to reserve spaces for the monitors of
current values of address parameters. The box becomes taller
than COMPACT.
Display styles of functional instructions
ACT
SUB 4 R0110
CMPACT
DEC 0
ACT
SUB 4 R0110 = 00
WIDE
DEC 0
ACT
SUB 4 R0110
TALL
DEC = 00
0
The displays of current values of address parameters change their

format according to each parameter. Refer to the table in ”Display
Format for Parameters” for detail.
When you place the cursor on an address parameter, its current
value is displayed in the ”Additional Information Line” in both
formats of binary decimal, and BCD (or hexadecimal binary).
874
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
D SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT

Changes the display format of the comment displayed under each
contact.
NONE
Displays no comment under each contact. In this mode, more
contacts (8 by 9 or 9 by 9 (number–of–contacts–in–row by
number–of–contacts–in–column)) can be displayed on the
screen by the space for the comment.
1 LINE
Displays the comment in 1 line of 15 half–size characters (in 1
line of 7 Japanese–language characters) under each contact. The
width of each contact and the number of contacts that can be
displayed on the screen vary depending on the number of
characters in each comment. The number of contacts that can be
displayed on the screen is from 4 by 6 to 9 by 6
(number–of–contacts–in–row by number–of–contacts–in–
column).
2 LINES (default)
Displays the comment in 2 lines of 15 half–size characters each
(in 2 lines of 7 Japanese–language characters each) under each
contact. The width of each contact, the number of lines for each
comment, and the number of contacts that can be displayed on
the screen vary depending on the number of characters in each
comment. The number of contacts that can be displayed on the
screen is from 4 by 5 to 9 by 5 (number–of–contacts–in–row by
number–of–contacts–in–column).
Comment display formats
875
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
D SHOW COMMENT OF COIL

Determines whether to show coil comments.
YES (default)
Right margin of 14 characters is reserved for display of coil
comments. You can set
NO
instead of showing coil comment. The screen position bar is
also displayed at the right edge of the screen in this option.
Show Coil comment setting
YES NO
D SHOW CURSOR
Determines whether to show cursor.
YES (default)
Cursor is displayed. Cursor move keys will move the cursor.
When the cursor is placed on bit or byte addresses, the
information of the address is displayed at ”Additional
Information Line”. When you search something with the cursor
displayed, the cursor goes directly where it is found. This
option is recommended for search operation with LADDER
program that contains many large nets.
NO
Cursor is not displayed. Up/down cursor move keys will scroll
the contents of screen directly. When you search something
with the cursor hidden, the net, which contains it, will appear
at the top of the screen.
Shows how the ladder diagram is displayed. You can set the colors
of the lines, relays, symbols, comments, and function command
parameters that are components of the ladder diagram. At right, the
monitor display of a symbol, OFF contact, ON contact, function
command parameter, and comment appears as an example. The
display of this example is changed according to the settings.
For colors, you can set the display color for each of the five types
of components of the ladder diagram.
ADDRESS COLOR
Sets the color of symbols and addresses. Enter a number or
increase or decrease the number using the left and right arrow
keys. You can specify one of 14 numbers from 0 to 13.
876
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
DIAGRAM COLOR
Sets the color of the entire ladder diagram. Set the color in the
same way as for symbol color.
ACTIVE RELAY COLOR
Sets the color of relays in the on state. The color of the relays
in the off state is the same as for the ladder diagram. Set the color
in the same way as for Symbol color.
PARAMETER COLOR
Sets the color of the monitor display of function command
parameters. The monitor display appears only when a value
other than ”Compact” is set for Function command display
form. Set the color in the same way as for Symbol color.
COMMENT COLOR
Sets the color of comments. Set the color in the same way as for
Symbol color.
Determines whether a net number is counted as ”LOCAL” starting
from the top of current subprogram, or is counted as ”GLOBAL”
starting from the top of whole program. This setting also affects
the expression of net number at searching nets by number.
LOCAL
number information at upper right of the screen is displayed in
the format ”displaying range / nets in subprogram NET”.
GLOBAL (default)
Net number starts from 1 at top of Level 1 program. Net number
is defined identically at whole of program. The net number
information at upper right of the screen is displayed in the
format ”displaying range / subprogram range NET”.
Definition of Net number
LOCAL GLOBAL
1 1
2 2
3 3
|
48
49
50
Current 1 Current 51
| |
Subprogram Subprogram
19 69
1 70
|
98

continue to search.
877
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
YES (default)
Downward search will continue to search from top of LADDER
when reaches to bottom. Upward search will also continue to
search from bottom when reaches to top.
NO
Search process will fail when reached top or bottom, and
displays an error message at Message Line.
Wrap search
YES NO
Not found
[PREV] [NEXT] [PREV] [NEXT]
Not found
(b) Soft keys

LADDER Diagram Monitor Setting screen has the soft keys of options
and following:
878
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
3.1.4 The following table shows all monitor formats for each parameter of each
Display Format for functional instruction.
Parameters
NOTE
1 ”Variable” in ”Monitor Format” field means that this parameter
changes its size according to the other parameter. Refer to
the descriptions for each functional instruction for detail.
2 Functional instruction with ”*” mark has Data table.
1 END1 – – 18 XMOV 1 Constant
2 END2 – – 2 4–digits BCD
3 TMR 1 Special 3 4–digits BCD
4 DEC 1 2–digits BCD 4 4–digits BCD
2 Constant 19 ADD 1 Constant
5 CTR 1 Special 2 4–digits BCD
6 ROT 1 Constant 3 4–digits BCD
3 4–digits BCD 20 SUB 1 Constant
7 COD * 1 Constant 3 4–digits BCD
2 2–DIGITS BCD 4 4–digits BCD
3 4–digits BCD 21 MUL 1 Constant
8 MOVE 1 Constant 2 4–digits BCD
2 Constant 3 4–digits BCD
3 2–digits HEX 4 4–digits BCD
4 2–digits HEX 22 DIV 1 Constant
9 COM 1 Constant 2 4–digits BCD
10 JMP 1 Constant 3 4–digits BCD
11 PARI 1 1–byte binary 4 4–digits BCD
14 DCNV 1 No monitor 23 NUME 1 Constant
2 No monitor 2 4–digits BCD
15 COMP 1 Constant 24 TMRB 1 Special
2 4–digits BCD 2 Constant
3 4–digits BCD 25 DECB 1 Constant
16 COIN 1 Constant 2 Variable binary
2 4–digits BCD 3 Constant
3 4–digits BCD 4 2–digits HEX
17 DSCH 1 Constant 26 ROTB 1 Constant
2 4–digits BCD 2 Variable binary
5 Variable binary
879
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
27 CODB * 1 Constant 40 NUMEB 1 Constant
2 Constant 2 Constant
3 1–byte binary 3 Variable binary
4 Variable binary 41 DISPB* 1 Constant
28 MOVOR 1 2–digits HEX 42 EXIN* 1 8–digits HEX
2 2–digits HEX 43 MOVB 1 1–byte binary
3 2–digits HEX 2 1–byte binary
29 COME – – 44 MOVW 1 2–bytes binary
30 JMPE – – 2 2–bytes binary
31 DCNVB 1 Constant 45 MOVN 1 Constant
2 No monitor 2 4–bytes binary
3 No monitor 3 4–bytes binary
32 COMPB 1 Constant 47 MOVD 1 4–bytes binary
2 Constant or 2 4–bytes binary
Variable binary 48 END3 – –
3 Variable binary 51 WINDR 1 2–bytes binary
33 SFT 1 4–digits HEX 52 WINDW 1 2–bytes binary
34 DSCHB 1 Constant 53 AXCTL 1 Constant
2 Variable binary 2 8–digits HEX
3 Variable binary 54 TMRC 1 Constant
4 Variable binary 2 Special
35 XMOVB 1 Constant 55 CTRC 1 2–bytes binary
2 Variable binary 2 2–bytes binary
3 Variable binary 56 CTRB 1 Constant
5 Variable binary 58 DIFD 1 Constant
36 ADDB 1 Constant 59 EOR 1 Constant
2 Variable binary 2 Variable HEX
3 Constant or 3 Constant or
Variable binary Variable HEX
37 SUBB 1 Constant 60 AND 1 Constant
38 MULB 1 Constant 61 OR 1 Constant
39 DIVB 1 Constant 62 NOT 1 Constant
3 Constant or 3 Variable HEX
Variable binary 64 END – –
4 Variable binary 65 CALL 1 No monitor
880
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
No. Name Parameter Monitor Format

66 CALLU 1 No monitor
68 JMPB 1 No monitor
69 LBL 1 No monitor
70 NOP 1 Constant
71 SP 1 No monitor
72 SPE – –
73 JMPC 1 No monitor
Functional Instructions of Special monitor format
TMR Displays in ”Current/Preset” format by seconds

Displays in ”Current/Preset” format by BCD or binary according to the Counter Type setting in LADDER
CTR
Program.
TMRB Displays current value by seconds (Preset value is displayed by milliseconds)
The 2nd parameter shows preset value, and the 3rd parameter shows current value as their monitor
displays.
These two monitor displays changes their format according to the 1st parameter as below:
1st Parameter Precision Display Format
0 8 ms by seconds
1 48 ms by seconds
TMRC 2 1 second HH:MM:SS

3 10 seconds HH:MM:SS
4 1 minute HH:MM:ss
5 1 ms by seconds
6 10 ms by seconds
7 100 ms by seconds
CTR Displays setting value with binary format.
881
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
3.2 Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen shows the contents of
data table that belongs to some functional instructions.
FUNCTIONAL To reach this screen, at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, press
INSTRUCTION DATA [TABLE] soft key that is displayed when the cursor is on the following
TABLE VIEWER functional instructions which have a data table.
SCREEN D Functional Instruction COD (SUB7)
D Search for data table number. [NO.SRCH]
D Search for data value. [V.SRCH]
D Change the displaying data digits. [BCD2],[BCD4]
(These soft keys can be operated only at Functional Instruction
Data Table Viewer screen of Functional Instruction COD.)
Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of Functional

Instruction COD.
882
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
3.2.1
Screen Structures ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
Functional instruction Number of data Data length Data type
name
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
Area for Data Table
Message line Key input line
1 The functional instruction name, the number of data table, data length
and data types are displayed above the Data Table.
2 In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be
3 In case of functional instruction COD, the data of 6 lines and 14
In case of functional instruction CODB, the data of 4 lines and 14
3.2.2
Operations Soft keys of Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of functional instruction COD.
Search for Display Display BCD4

Search for data
data value BCD2 digits
table number
Soft keys of Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of functional instruction CODB.
Search for data Search for

table number data value
883
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
1 [NO.SRCH] Search for data table number

Then the cursor is displayed on the data of the target number.
2 [V.SRCH] Search for data value
Then the cursor is displayed on the target data.
3 [BCD2] Display BCD2 digits
Changes the display data type to 2 digits of BCD. This operation only
switches the display data type. So it does never edit the data on
memory.
4 [BCD4] Display BCD4 digits
Changes the display data type to 4 digits of BCD. This operation only
switches the display data type. So it does never edit the data on
memory.
You can scroll screen by right/left cursor move keys and Page change
keys.
884
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
3.3
PROGRAM LIST
VIEWER SCREEN
3.3.1 Program List Viewer screen (Detail) shows the detail information that are
program size, program net count and so on for program.
Detail Screen
Title information
(REMARKS) Total program count
Program of operation target
Message line Key input line Area for Program List

1. The title information (REMARKS) of the Ladder Program and the
total program count are displayed above the Program List.

3. In the area for Program List, 14 data can be displayed at maximum.
1. Kind of subprogram is displayed in the ”L/S” field.
L: LADDER
S: Step Sequence
2. Program name is displayed in the ”PROG NO.” field for each
program.
There are three kinds of program names.
COLLECT : It means the collective program.
GLOBAL : It means the whole program.
LEVELn (n=1,2,3) : It means the Ladder level 1, 2 and 3.
Pm (m=1 to 2000) : It means subprogram.
3. The symbol is displayed in the ”SYMBOL” field for each program.
If no symbol is set into the subprogram, the ”SYMBOL” field will
be blank.
885
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
4. The comment is displayed in the ”COMMENT” field for each

program.
If no comment is set into the subprogram, the ”COMMENT” field
will be blank.
5. The program size is displayed in the ”SIZE (BYTE)” field for each
program.
If the program size is not over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in byte.
If it is over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in kilo (1024) byte with
”K”.
Ex.) The case that program size is not over 1024 byte.
1023 bytes : ”1023” is shown.
Ex.) The case that program size is over 1024 byte.
20000 bytes : ”19.5K” is shown.
6. In the ”NET COUNT” field for each program, total number of nets
in the program and first net number of the program in the whole
Ladder program are displayed as follows.
Total number of nets in the program* / First global net number of
the program in the whole Ladder program*
* Maximum is 99,999.
Displayed with ”–––––” in the case of step sequence program.
7. The status of protection is displayed in the ”P” field for each
program.
Following icons mean the status of protection.
P : Monitoring and editing program are disabled.
R : Monitoring program is enabled. Editing program is
disabled.
(Blank) : Monitoring and editing program are enabled.
886
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
3.3.2 Program List Viewer screen (Brief) shows less information than Program
Brief Screen List Viewer screen (Detail), to increase the number of items. The program
type, the status of protection and the name or symbol are displayed for
each program.
Title information
Program of operation target Total program count
(REMARKS)
Area for Program List
Message line Key input line Additional information line

1. The title information (REMARKS) of the Ladder Program and the
total program count are displayed above the Program List.
3. In additional information line near the bottom of the screen, the
following information is displayed for the program under the
cursor.
D program name
D symbol, comment
D program size
D total number of nets
D First global net number of the program in the whole Ladder
program.
NOTE
”total number of nets” and ”First global net number of the
program in the whole Ladder program” aren’t displayed in
the case of step sequence program.
887
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
4. In the Program List area, the programs 14 lines and 5 columns can
be displayed in maximum.
The following items are displayed in Program List area of Program
List Viewer screen.
The meanings of these items are the same as the items of Program List
Viewer screen (Detail).
D Program type.
D Status of protection
D Program name or symbol. (See ”Screen Setting for Program List
Viewer screen” section for selecting this item.)
3.3.3
Operations Soft key of Program List viewer screen
Search for program
Display the contents of program Screen Settings

1 Changes to LADDER Diagram Monitor screen or Step Sequence
Monitor screen. If you press [ZOOM] soft key without strings, the
program under the cursor is displayed at LADDER Diagram
Monitor screen or Step Sequence Monitor screen.
If you entered program name (See (c) 1. for detail) or symbol before
pressing [ZOOM] soft key, the program according to the preceding
string is searched and the program is displayed at LADDER
Diagram Monitor screen or Step Sequence Monitor screen.
But, when the selected program is protected to monitor, you have
to unlock the protection.
NOTE
When software option of step sequence function is not
specified, and you tries to display a step sequence program,
a error message ”CANNOT DISPLAY STEP SEQUENCE
PROGRAM” is displayed and screen doesn’t change.
2 [SEARCH] Search for program

Searches the program. If you entered program name (See (c) 1. for
detail) or symbol and press [SEARCH] soft key, the program
according to the preceding string is searched, the cursor points the
program.
3 [SETING] Screen Settings
Goes to setting screen for Program List Viewer screen. You can
change various settings for Program List Viewer screen at the
screen. Use Return key [<] to return to Program List Viewer screen.
See ”Settings for Program List Viewer screen” section for the
detail.
888
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
4 [<] key
The screen display is switched into the PMC Main menu.
You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page change
keys.
And if you entered program name (See (c) 1. for detail) or symbol
and press Right cursor move key, the program according to the
preceding string is searched, the cursor points the program.
2 INPUT key
You can operate same as [ZOOM] soft key.
(c) Note of searching operations
1 When program is searched by program name, the strings that show
each program are as follows.
GLOBAL : ”0”(Zero) or ”G”
LEVEL1, 2, 3 : ”L” + Number Ex.) ”L1”, ”L01”, etc
Pn : Number or ”P” + Number Ex.) ”1”, ”P1”, ”P01”
2 Search function by [SEARCH] soft key or Right cursor move key
tries to suppose the given word as an item to be searched in
following order.
(i) The string for GLOBAL or LEVEL : ”0”(Zero), ”G”, ”L” +
Number
The number for subprogram : Number
(ii) Symbol
(iii) The string for subprogram : ”P” + Number
889
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
3.3.4
Setting Screen
(a) Setting items

Program List Viewer/Editor screen contains the setting items below:
D VIEW FORMAT
Determines whether the list data in the Program List Viewer/Editor
screen are displayed as detail format, or brief format themselves.
DETAIL (default)
The Program List Viewer/Editor screen shows Detail
information for each program.
The items of detail information are program type, program
name, symbol, comment, program size, program net count and
status of protection.
BRIEF
The Program List Viewer/Editor screen shows less information
than DETAIL, to increase the number of items. The program
type, the status of protection and the name or symbol are
The detail information of program that is pointed by the cursor
is displayed on additional information line.
D ADDRESS NOTATION
Viewer/Editor screen are displayed as corresponding symbols, or
the addresses themselves.
SYMBOL
themselves.
ADDRESS (default)
All addresses are displayed as the addresses themselves even if
they have a symbol.
890
3. LADDER DIAGRAM
D SORT BY
Viewer/Editor screen are displayed in order of program number, or
symbol name themselves. And When ADDRESS NOTAION is
SYMBOL, this determination is enabled. So if ADDRESS
NOTAION is ADDRESS, the programs are always displayed in
order of program number.
PROGRAM NUMBER (default)
The programs are displayed in order of program number.
SYMBOL
Programs that have a symbol are displayed in order of the
symbol name. Programs without symbols are displayed in order
of program number after programs with the symbols.
GLOBAL, LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3 are out of target of
sort.
D PROTECTED PROGRAM
Determines whether protected programs in the Program List
Viewer/Editor screen are displayed or not. On each screen, the
protected program means as follows.
On Program List Viewer screen : the program is protected to
monitor.
On Program List Editor screen: the program is protected to edit.
SHOW (default)
The protected programs are displayed in the Program List
HIDE
The protected programs are not displayed in the Program List
D FRAME NET IN SUBPROGRAM MODE
Frame net means functional instruction END1, 2 and 3 on LEVEL
1,2,3, and functional instruction SP and SPE on subprogram.
It determines whether the frame net in the LADDER Diagram
Monitor/Editor screen are displayed or not, when you selected the
program and press [ZOOM] soft key in the Program List
SHOW (default)
The frame net is displayed in the LADDER Diagram
HIDE
The frame net is not displayed in the LADDER Diagram
891
4. COLLECTIVE MONITOR
FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
4 COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7)
On Collective Monitor screen, a monitor of the necessary ladder nets can

be displayed by specifying ladder nets.
892
B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7)
4.1 The calling operation of Collective Monitor screen is as follows.

CALLING SCREEN (1) Calling from Program List Viewer screen
Press soft key [ZOOM] after moving the cursor to ”COLLECT”
program position on Program List Viewer screen.
Fig. 4.1(a) Program List Viewer screen

(2) Calling from Ladder Diagram Monitor screen
Press [SWITCH] soft key on Ladder Diagram Monitor screen.
Fig. 4.1(b) Ladder Diagram Monitor screen
893
4.2 Collective Monitor screen is as follows. Any ladder diagram is not

displayed first. Ladder nets selected by the operation of a coil search and
SCREEN picking up nets is added. 128 nets or less of ladder net can be added on
CONFIGURATION Collective Monitor screen. When adding more new nets, most recently
added 128 nets are displayed.
Fig. 4.2 Collective Monitor screen (Initial screen)
894
4.3
SCREEN
Collective Monitor screen
OPERATIONS
Program List Viewer Jump to the ladder diagram net Initialization of Collective Monitor screen
Pick up a ladder diagram net Switches to Ladder Delete a net Screen setting
Diagram Monitor screen.
Fig. 4.3(a) Soft key of the Collective Monitor screen

1. [LIST] Calling Program List Viewer screen
Calls Program List Viewer screen. On Program List Viewer screen,
you can switch subprograms to be displayed on Ladder Diagram
Viewer screen.
2. [PICKUP] Picking up ladder nets.
3. [JUMP] Jump to a ladder net.
On Ladder Diagram Monitor screen, search the ladder net at a
cursor position on Collective Monitor screen and jumps to the
ladder net.
4. [SWITCH] Switches to Ladder Diagram Monitor screen.
Switches to Ladder Diagram Monitor screen.
5. [ERASE] Quits to display a ladder diagram net on the screen. (1
net)
Quits to display a ladder diagram net (only 1 net) which is picked
up on Collective Monitor screen.
6. [ERSALL] Quits to display a ladder diagram net on the screen. (all
nets)
Quits to display ladder diagram nets (all net) which is picked up on
7. [SETING] Screen settings
Calling the setting screen for Collective Monitor screen. You can
change each settings of a ladder diagram display. Return to
Collective Monitor screen when press the return key [<].
D Specification of monitored ladder diagram
The operation for picking up ladder nets which you want to monitor
on Collective Monitor screen is as follows.
1. Specification of ladder nets on Collective Monitor screen
– Specify the address by key input
Pick up ladder nets by inputting the address used with the coil.
– Specify the address from ladder diagram net on Collective
Monitor screen
Specify any relay by cursor on the ladder diagram net which is
picked up already. The net, which uses the relay which you
specified for coil, is picked up.
895
2. Specify the ladder net on Ladder Diagram Monitor screen

Specify a ladder diagram net on Ladder Diagram Monitor screen
and the net is picked up on Collective Monitor screen.
D Pick up a ladder net on Collective Monitor screen
You can pick up a ladder net on Collective Monitor screen. The
operation for picking up ladder nets is as follows.
a) Specification of address
1. Enter the address which you want to monitor. (Ex. R14.7)
3. The net with the coil, which you specified by 1, is picked up to
the top of screen.
b) Specification of address from the ladder net on the screen
1. Move the cursor to a relay on the ladder net which uses address
that you want to monitor.
3. The net with the coil, which uses the address that you specified
by 1, is picked up to the top of screen and the cursor moves to
the specified coil position.
Fig. 4.3(b) Collective Monitor screen

D Pick up a ladder net on Ladder Diagram Viewer screen
You can pick up a ladder net on Ladder Diagram Viewer screen. The
operation for picking up ladder nets is as follows.
1. Press [SEARCH] soft key on Ladder Diagram Viewer screen. Then
soft keys for search are displayed.
2. Move the cursor to any ladder nets which you want to pick up.
3. Press [PICKUP] soft key and the net, which is specified by 2, is
picked up to a top of Collective Monitor screen.
4. As for the ladder net which is picked up to Collective Monitor
screen, ”F” mark is displayed at the left side of the selected net.
896
Fig. 4.3(c) Ladder Diagram Viewer screen (Soft key for search)
897
4.4
ALARM MESSAGE
AND
COUNTERMEASURE
Message that may be displayed during Collective Monitor function
Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents
THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND Specify the address used with write Specified address was not used for the
coil write coil.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Specify the defined symbol or address. Specified symbol was not defined.
WRITE COIL NEEDS BIT ADDRESS Specify the bit address The byte address was specified when
specifying the address used with write
coil.
SOME NETS ARE DISCARDED Not all the nets of picking up object All nets were not picked up because
can be picked up. Select the net of there were the nets of picking up ob-
picking up on Ladder Diagram Viewer ject more than 128 nets.
screen and pick up the net manually.
898
5. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
5 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7)
899
5.1 In Ladder Diagram Editor screen you can edit Ladder program to change
its behavior. To reach Ladder Diagram Editor screen, press [EDIT] soft
LADDER DIAGRAM key at Ladder Diagram Monitor screen. Following operations are
EDITOR SCREEN available at Ladder Diagram Editor screen.
– Delete by net [DELETE]
– Move by net [CUT] & [PASTE]
– Copy by net [COPY] & [PASTE]
– Change address of contacts and coils ”bit address” + INPUT key
– Change parameters of functional instructions
”number” or ”byte address”+ INPUT key
– Add new net [CREATE]
– Change construction of net [MODIFY]
– Make changes effective [UPDATE]
– Abandon changes [RESTORE]
Fig. 5.1 Ladder Diagram Editor screen
CAUTION
1 You can edit a ladder regardless of whether the ladder is
running/stopping. But, when you are going to execute the
edited ladder, it is necessary to update the ladder. By exiting
Ladder Editor screen, or pressing [UPDATE] soft key, update
the edited ladder. As for the protection of the editing operation,
please refer to ”5.3 Example for setting parameters”.
2 If the power is turned off before the edited sequence program
is written to flash ROM, the result of the edit is erased.Use the
input/output screen to write the sequence program to flash
ROM. When K902#0 is set to 1, a confirmation message
appears at the termination of editing, asking whether to write
the sequence program to flash ROM.
900
5.2
SCREEN Title information(REMARKS) Displayed subprogram Display position information
CONFIGURATION
Cursor
Display position
Ladder diagram display area
Message display line Key input line Additional information display line
Fig. 5.2 Ladder Diagram Editor screen

(a) Screen configuration
It is the basically same as Ladder diagram Monitor screen, except that
no monitor displays of relays and parameters of functional instructions
are displayed.
(b) Ladder diagram display
1. Style of a ladder diagram is basically the same as Ladder diagram
Monitor screen, except that functional instructions are drawn
always in ”COMPACT” format that has no monitor displays.
2. Cursor is shown always. And the net, which will be an object of
following editing operations, is emphasized in screen.
901
5.3
SCREEN
Soft keys on the Ladder Diagram Editor screen
OPERATIONS
Program List Add new net Make changes effective
Cut net Paste net
Change to search soft keys Edit net Select multiple nets Delete net Copy net
Abandon changes RUN/STOP a sequence program
Setting screen
Fig. 5.3 Soft keys on Ladder Diagram Editor screen

1. [LIST] Call Program List Editor screen
Calls Program List Editor screen. On Program List Editor screen,
you can select a subprogram to be edited on Ladder Diagram Editor
screen.
2. [SEARCH] Search and jump menu
Switches to the search soft keys. To return to the main soft keys,
press the Return key [<]. The search soft keys are quite same with
ones of Ladder diagram Monitor screen.
3. [MODIFY] Call Net Editor screen
Calls Net Editor screen to modify structure of the selected net.
4. [CREATE] Create new net
Create and add new net to cursor position. Pressing this soft key
reaches Net Editor screen, so that new net is constructed.
5. [UPDATE] Make changes effective
Updates running the ladder program to currently edited ladder
program, so that the all modifications will take effects, and remains
Editor screen. If it succeeds to update running ladder, edited ladder
starts to run.
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running ladder
program. If you modify the ladder program in wrong way, or
update the ladder program with the machine in improper
status, it may cause unexpected reaction of the machine.
You have to make it sure that ”modifications you make on
the ladder program is appropriate”, ”machine is in proper
status”, and ”nobody is near the machine”, when you update
the ladder program.
902
6. [SELECT] Select multiple nets

Selects multiple nets for following operations such as [DELETE],
[CUT], [COPY]. Pressing [SELECT] soft key leads to a mode to
select one or more nets for following editing operation. Use cursor
move keys and search functions to select nets, as you like. Being
in mode to select nets is indicated by dented [SELECT] soft key,
and the information of selected nets is shown in additional
information line at near bottom of screen.
7. [DELETE] Delete net
Deletes selected nets. The nets deleted by [DELETE] soft key are
lost. If you delete wrong nets by [DELETE], you have to abandon
the all modifications you have made, and restore the ladder
program to the original one before editing operation.
8. [CUT] Cut nets
Cuts selected nets. The cut nets are preserved in Paste Buffer, and
disappear from diagram. The contents of the Paste Buffer before
[CUT] operation are lost. [CUT] and [PASTE] soft keys are used
to move nets.
9. [COPY] Copy nets
Copy selected nets into the Paste Buffer. No change on diagram
will be made. The contents of the Paste Buffer before [COPY]
operation are lost. [COPY] and [PASTE] soft keys are used to copy
nets.
10.[PASTE] Paste nets
Pastes nets at cursor position, which were stored into the Paste
Buffer by [CUT] or [COPY] soft key. Pressing [PASTE] soft key
while selecting nets using [SELECT] soft key alters the selected
nets with the nets in the Paste Buffer. The contents of the Paste
Buffer will remain until turning CNC power off.
11.[RESTORE] Abandon changes
Abandons all changes, and restores the ladder program to the one
at entering Ladder Diagram Editor screen, or last updated one using
[UPDATE] soft key. This soft key is useful when you make wrong
modifications and hard to recover from them.
12.[SETING] Screen settings
Calls setting screen for Ladder Diagram Editor screen. You can
change various settings for Ladder Diagram Editor screen at the
screen. Use the Return key [<] to return to Ladder Diagram Editor
screen.
13.[RUN]/[STOP] Run and stop the ladder program
Controls the ladder program execution. [RUN] soft key makes the
ladder run and [STOP] soft key makes the ladder stop. Both soft
keys will confirm your intention. When you are sure to run or stop
the ladder program, press [YES] to take an action.
903
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to run/stop the ladder
program. Running/stopping the ladder program in a wrong
unexpected reaction of machine. At stopping the ladder
program, a safety mechanism and watch by the ladder
program is not operated. You have to make it sure that
”machine is in proper status”, and ”nobody is near the
machine” when you run/stop the ladder program.
14.[<] Exit Editor

Updates running the ladder program to edited ladder program, so
that the all modifications will take effects, and exits Editor screen.
When Ladder Diagram Editor screen is active and the function keys
such as <SYS> key will not work, the data under edit is deleted.
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running the
ladder program. If you modify the ladder program in wrong
way, or update the ladder program with the machine in
improper status, it may cause unexpected reaction of the
machine. You have to make it sure that ”modifications you
make on the ladder program is appropriate”, ”machine is in
proper status”, and ”nobody is near the machine”, when you
update the ladder program.
(b) Operations using other keys

When cursor is placed on some relay or some address parameter of
a functional instruction, the information about the address under
cursor is displayed at ”Additional Information Line”.
2. ”bit address” + ENTER key
3. ”number” or ”byte address” + ENTER key
Changes parameter of functional instructions under cursor. But,
there are some parameters that can not change by this operation. If
you see a message that means that this parameter can not be
changed, use Net Editor screen to change the parameter.
(c) Shortcut operations
1. Same shortcut search operations with Ladder Diagram Monitor
screen are available. For their detail, see descriptions about
Shortcut operations of Ladder Diagram Monitor screen.
2. Same shortcut operations using [LIST] soft key with Ladder
Diagram Monitor screen are available.
904
5.4
SETTING SCREEN
Fig. 5.4 Ladder Diagram Editor Setting screen

(a) Settings
There are the following settings on Ladder Diagram Editor Setting
screen:
– ADDRESS NOTATION Default: ADDRESS
Specifies whether to display each bit and byte address in the ladder
diagram with the symbol or address.
– SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT Default: 2 LINE
Changes the display format of the comment displayed under each
contact.
– SHOW COMMENT OF COIL Default: YES
Specifies whether to display the comment of each coil.
– DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING
Changes the color for ladder diagram. You can set the colors of a
line, relays and etc. that are components of the ladder diagram.
ADDRESS COLOR Default: Green (1)
DIAGRAM COLOR Default: Black (6)
SELECTED NET COLOR Default: Yellow (2)
PROTECTED NET COLOR Default: Light blue (5)
COMMENT COLOR Default: Light blue (5)
– SUBPROGRAM NET NUMBER Default: GLOBAL
Specifies whether to display the ”LOCAL” numbers, which are
assigned to the nets only in the subprogram, or ”GLOBAL”
numbers, which are assigned to the whole ladder program when a
subprogram is displayed. The setting also affects the expression of
net number information at searching nets by number.
– WRAP SEARCH ENABLED Default: YES
Specifies whether to return to the beginning of the ladder program
and continue search operation when the search operation reaches
the end of the ladder program.
905
– FORCE POSTPROCESS AFTER EDIT Default: NO

Decides whether the post–processing after editing ladder program,
which makes ladder program ready to run, will be always done, or
will be done only when ladder program is actually modified, at
exiting Ladder Diagram Editor screen.
(b) Soft keys
The following soft key is available on the Ladder Diagram Editor
Setting screen.
– [INIT] Initializing all settings
906
5.5 In Net Editor screen, you can create new net, and modify existing net.
NET EDITOR 1. Modifying existing netWhen [MODIFY] soft key is used to reach Net
Editor screen, this screen is in ”MODIFY MODE ” to modify existing
SCREEN net.
2. Creating new net When [CREATE] soft key is used to reach Net
Editor screen, this screen is in ”CREATRE MODE” to create new net
from nothing.
Following operations are available at this screen:
– Place new contacts and coils ”bit address”+ [ ], [ ], etc.
– Change type of contacts and coils [ ], [ ], etc.
– Place new functional instructions [FUNC]
– Change type of functional instructions [FUNC]
– Erase contacts, coils, and functional instructions
[ ]
– Draw/erase connecting lines [ ], [ ], [ ]
– Edit data table of functional instructions [TABLE]
– Insert line/column [INSLIN],[INSCLM],[APPCLM]
– Change address of contacts and coils ”bit address” + INPUT key
– Change parameters of functional instructions
”number” or ”byte address”+ INPUT key
– Abandon modifications [RESTOR]
5.5.1
Screen Configuration Displayed subprogram Display position information Edit mode
Cursor
Ladder diagram display area
Message display line Key input line Additional information display line
Fig. 5.5.1 Configuration of Net Editor screen

1. It is basically same with Ladder diagram Editor screen, except that
only one net is in this screen, and that position bar at right edge of
screen does not appear at this screen.
907
2. Current edit mode is indicated at right of the top line as ”CREATE

MODE” or ”MODIFY MODE”. When [MODIFY] soft key at Ladder
Diagram Editor screen is used to reach Net Editor screen, the screen
is in Modify mode, and when [CREATE] soft key is used, it is in Create
mode.
3. Current net number is displayed at right of the top line. The net number
is same with the net number in previous Ladder Diagram Editor
screen.
4. Net Editor screen expands image of net horizontally for a wider net
according to its width, while Ladder Diagram Monitor/Editor screen
folds nets wider than screen width. When net width is expanded over
screen width, attempt to move cursor out of screen will scroll net
image to the direction. The net of maximum size occupies area of 1024
elements, but actually available area may be little less for internal use
according to the internal condition: ”element” means the space that is
5.5.2
Screen Operations Soft keys on the Net Editor screen
Functional Left vertical Go to

A contact Normal coil instructions next net
connection
B contact Inverted coil Horizontal

connection Delete Right vertical
connection
Set coil Edit Data table Insert line Append column
Reset coil Abandon changes Insert column
Fig. 5.5.2(a) Soft keys on the Net Editor screen
908

1. [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ s ], [ R ], Enter
and change relay
Place relays (contacts and coils), or change type of existing relays.
When one of these relay soft keys is pressed at cursor on blank
place, new relay of the soft key is placed under the cursor. When
the soft key follows a string that means a bit address, the bit address
is assigned to the newly placed relay. If no bit address is given, last
entered bit address is automatically used for the new relay. If no bit
address has been entered yet, the new relay will have no address
assigned to it. Contacts can be placed at other than rightmost
column, and coils can be placed at rightmost column only. Moving
cursor onto an existing relay, pressing a relay soft key of different
type changes the type of relay under the cursor. But, changing coil
to contact, and changing contact to coil are forbidden. It is basically
same with Ladder diagram Editor screen, except that only one net.
Sample of contacts and coils
2. [FUNC] Enter and change functional instruction

Places functional instruction, or changes type of existing
functional instruction. When [FUNC] soft key is pressed at cursor
on blank place, new functional instruction will be placed under the
cursor. List of available functional instructions is displayed, then
choose type of functional instruction to be entered. When [FUNC]
soft key follows a string that means number or name of a functional
instruction is entered directly, without the list screen. Moving
cursor onto an existing functional instruction, pressing [FUNC]
soft key changes the type of functional instruction under the cursor.
3. [ ]Draw horizontal connection
Draws horizontal connection line. Or alters an existing relay to
horizontal line.
4. [ ]Erase relays and functional instructions
Erases relays and functional instructions under cursor.
5. [ ], [ ]Draw and erase vertical connection
Draw vertical connection line upward from right or left edge of
relay or horizontal line under cursor. Or erase existing vertical
lines. If the relay or line under the cursor has no vertical line
upward, these soft keys have solid arrows, and indicate that
pressing them means drawing lines. On the other hand, if a vertical
line already exists under the cursor, arrows in these soft keys
become pale ([ ], [ ]), and indicate that pressing them
means erasing lines.
909
[ ]
[ ]
Drawing and erasing vertical connection line

6. [NXTNET] Go to next net
Finishes editing current net, and goes to next net. If [MODIFY] soft
key at Ladder Diagram Editor screen is used to reach Net Editor
screen, [NXTNET] will finish modifying current net, and the next
net will be an object of further editing operation.
Net 1 Editing Net 1 Editing

Net 2 Net 2a
Net 2a Net 3a
Net 3 [NXTNET] Net 3
[MODIFY] Net 4 Net 4
: :
: :
Action of [NXTNET] soft key in Modify mode (modifying an existing net)

If [NXTNET] soft key at Ladder Diagram Editor screen is used to
reach Net Editor screen, [NXTNET] will finish creating current
net, insert it into the ladder program, and start with blank to create
another new net to be inserted next to the current net.
Net 1 Editing Net 1

Net 2 Net 2 Editing
Net A
Net 3 [NXTNET] Net A
Net B
[CREATE] Net 4 Net 3
Net 4
:
: :
Action of [NXTNET] soft key in Create mode (creating new net)

7. [TABLE] Edit data table
Reaches Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen to edit
data table of functional instruction under cursor. This soft key
appears only when cursor is a functional instruction that has data
table with it. For detail of editing operation of data table, see
descriptions of ”Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen”.
910
8. [RESTOR] Abandon changes

Abandons all changes, and restores net to the one at starting editing
this net. If [CREATE] soft key at Ladder Diagram Editor screen is
used to reach Net Editor screen, it will be back to blank net, and if
[MODIFY] soft key is used, it will be back to the old net before
modifications in this screen.
9. [INSLIN] Insert line
Inserts one blank line at cursor position. Diagram elements at or
below vertical cursor position will be shifted downward by one
line. Inserting line at middle of functional instruction box will
expand the box vertically to make a space between the input
conditions.
[INSLIN]
Fig. 5.5.2(b) Action of inserting line

10.[INSCLM] Insert column
Inserts one blank column at cursor position. Diagram elements at
or on right of horizontal cursor position will be shifted to right by
one column. And if there is no room to shift the elements, a new
column is added and the Diagram area will be expanded to right.
[INSCLM]
Action of inserting column
911
11.[APPCLM] Append column

Inserts one blank column at right of cursor position. Diagram
elements on right of horizontal cursor position will be shifted to
right by one column. And if necessary, net will be expanded to
right.
[APPCLM]
Action of appending column

12.[<] Exit editor screen
Analyzes current editing net, and store it into the ladder program.
If some error is found in the net, it still remains Net Editor screen,
and an error message will be displayed. According to a kind of
error, cursor may indicate where the error is detected.
(b) Operations using other keys
Net Editor screen expands image of net horizontally for a wider net
according to its width, while Ladder Diagram Monitor/Editor
screen folds nets wider than screen width. When net width is
expanded over screen width, attempt to move cursor out of screen
will scroll net image to the direction. The net of maximum size
occupies area of 1024 elements, but actually available area may be
little less for internal use according to the internal condition:
”element” means the space that is occupied by single relay.
3. ”number” / ”byte address” + INPUT key
912
5.6 Valid net must have following structure:

STRUCTURE OF
VALID NET Convergence point
Input section Output

section
Structure of valid net

”Input section” consists of contacts and functional instruction, and the
result of operations of input section is led to ”Convergence point”. After
the convergence point, there is ”Output section” that consists of coils
only. The ”Convergence point” is the nearest point to right power line,
where all connections join with each other to gather into single
connection.
Input section Convergence point Output section
Sample of valid net

Input section consists at least one relay or functional instruction, however,
output section may contain nothing.
Example of net with no output section

Valid net is also restricted in following rules:
– Only one function instruction is available for a net.
– Functional instruction can be placed only at last (rightmost) of input
section.
– Only coils can be contained in output section.
913
5.7 Pressing [FUNC] soft key at Net Editor screen reaches Functional
Instruction List screen at which you choose a functional instruction to be
FUNCTIONAL entered from list of all available functional instructions.
INSTRUCTION LIST
SCREEN
Fig. 5.7 Functional Instruction List screen

Operations at this screen are below:
1. [SELECT] Select a functional instruction
Selects a functional instruction. The function instruction under
cursor at that time is chosen, and entered into the editing net.
2. [NUMBER], [NAME] Rearrange functional instructions list
Rearrange functional instructions list in two ways. [NUMBER]
soft key arranges the list in numerical order with their identifying
numbers, on the other hand, [NAME] soft key arrange it in
alphabetical order with their names. At beginning, the list is
arranged in alphabetical order.
3. [<] Quit selecting
Quits selecting functional instruction, and return to Net Editor
screen.
914
5.8 At Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen, you can edit the
contents of data table that belongs to some functional instructions. To
FUNCTIONAL reach this screen, at Net Editor screen, press [TABLE] soft key that is
INSTRUCTION DATA displayed when the cursor is on the following functional instructions
TABLE EDITOR which have a data table.
SCREEN – Functional Instruction COD (SUB7)
– Functional Instruction CODB (SUB27)
(Function instruction DISP(SUB49) is not be able to use)
Following edit operations are available at this screen.
– Change the data table value. ”number” + ENTER key
– Change the data length. [BYTE], [WORD], [D.WORD]
(These soft keys can be operated only at Functional Instruction Data
Table Editor screen of Functional Instruction CODB.)
– Change the number of data [COUNT]
– Initialize all of data [INIT]
Fig. 5.8 Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen
915
5.9 At Program List Editor screen you can create new program and delete a
program in addition to the function of Program List Viewer screen. To
PROGRAM LIST reach this screen, press [LIST] soft key at Ladder Diagram Editor screen.
EDITOR SCREEN Following operations are available at Program List Editor screen. For
more detail of these operations, refer to the descriptions of each key to
operate.
– Create new program [NEW]
– Delete a program [DELETE]
Fig. 5.9(a) Program List Editor screen (Detail)

List Editor screen. The default viewer format is Detail viewer format.
Fig. 5.9(b) Program List Editor screen (Brief)
916
5.9.1
Screen Operations Display the contents of program Screen Settings Delete a program
Search for program Add new program
Fig. 5.9.1 Soft keys of Program List Editor screen

Goes to Ladder Diagram Editor screen.
Searches for a program. Pressing [SEARCH] soft key after
entering a program name or symbol name searches for program
corresponding to the input character string and moves the cursor to
the program.
3. [SETING] Screen settings
Calling the screen for setting of Program List Editor screen. You
can change various settings for Program List Editor screen. To
return to Program List Editor screen, press the return key [<].
4. [NEW] Create new program
If you entered program name or symbol and press [NEW] soft key,
the program will be checked its existence. If such program is not
found, new program will be created. The created program is
inserted automatically into the program list and the cursor points
it. The following ladder nets are created automatically according
to the type of created program by this operation.
Subprogram : Functional instruction SP, SPE
5. [DELETE] Delete a program
Deletes a program. If you entered no strings and press [DELETE]
soft key, the program under the cursor is deleted. If you entered
program name or symbol and press [DELETE] soft key, the
program will be checked its existence, and will be deleted if such
program is found.
But, GLOBAL, LEVEL1 and LEVEL2 should always exist on
program list. If you delete these programs, the contents of program
are abandoned. But these programs do not disappear on program
list. If the status of protection of the program is enabled to edit, this
This soft key is not displayed in the case of step sequence.
6. [<]
The screen display is switched to the Ladder Diagram Editor
screen.
917
5.9.2
Setting Screen
Fig. 5.9.2 Program List Editor (Setting) screen

(a) Settings
There are the following settings on Program List Editor (Setting)
screen:
– VIEW FORMAT Default : DETAIL
Specifies whether to display Program List Editor screen in
”DETAIL” or ”BRIEF” mode.
– ADDRESS NOTATION Default : ADDRESS
Specifies whether to display each subprogram on Program List
Editor screen with the address or symbol.
– SORT BY Default : PROGRAM NUMBER
Specifies whether to display each subprograms on Program List
Editor screen in order of program numbers or symbols. When
ADDRESS NOTATION is SYMBOL, programs without symbols
are displayed in order of program number after programs with the
symbols. GLOBAL, LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3 are out of
target of sort.
– PROTECTED PROGRAM Default : SHOW
Specifies whether to display protected programs. The protected
program for this setting means programs which cannot be edited on
Program List Editor screen.
– FRAME NET IN SUBPROGRAM MODE Default : SHOW
Frame net means functional instruction END1, 2 and 3 on
LEVEL1, 2, 3, and functional instruction SP and SPE on
subprogram. This setting specifies whether to display these frame
nets when the contents of a program are displayed by pressing
[ZOOM] soft key on Program List Editor screen.
918
5.10
ALARM MESSAGE
AND
COUNTERMEASURE
Messages that may be displayed during PMC program editing
OVERLAPPED COM If COME is missing, add it in proper There is no COME that corresponds to
position. If the COM is unnecessary, this COM.
remove it.
END IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found

END1 IN COM position. If COM is unnecessary, re- between COM and COME.
END2 IN COM move it.
JMPE IN COM JMPE and corresponding JMP must JMPE is found between COM and
have same COM/COME status. Re- COME, and JMP and corresponding
view JMP range and COM range, to JMPE have different COM/COME sta-
adjust not to overlap with each other: it tus.
is possible that one range includes the
other completely.
SP/SPE IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between COM and
position. If the COM is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
COME WITHOUT COM If COM is missing, add it in proper There is no COM that corresponds to
position. If the COME is unnecessary, this COME.
remove it.
DUPLICATE CTR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, re- Plural CTRs have the same number as
(WARNING) move them. If all of them are neces- their parameter. (This is warning.)
sary, assign other number to parame-
ter of them to make them unique. (If
two or more instructions with same pa-
rameter number will never be active
simultaneously at one time, the Ladder
program has a possibility to work cor-
rectly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
ILLEGAL CTR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign cor- CTR has parameter number that is out
rect number not to exceed the maxi- of range.
mum number defined by each PMC
model.
919
DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, re- Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same
(WARNING) move them. If all of them are neces- number as their parameter. (This is
sary, assign other number to parame- warning.)
each other.)
ILLEGAL DIFU/DIFD NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign cor- DIFU or DIFD has parameter number
rect number not to exceed the maxi- that is out of range.
model.
NO END Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in END, END1, END2 or END3 is not
NO END1 proper position. found.
NO END2
NO END3
DUPLICATE END1 Remove extra END1, END2 or END3. Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are
DUPLICATE END2 found.
DUPLICATE END3
GARBAGE AFTER END Remove unnecessary nets, and move There are some nets after END, END2
GARBAGE AFTER END2 necessary nets to proper position so or END3, which will not be executed.
GARBAGE AFTER END3 that they will be executed.
OVERLAPPED JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper There is no JMPE that corresponds to
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, this JMP.
remove it.
JMP/JMPE TO BAD COM LEVEL JMP and corresponding JMPE must JMP and corresponding JMPE have
have same COM/COME status. Re- different COM/COME status.
view JMP range and COM range, to
adjust not to overlap with each other: it
is possible that one range includes the
other completely.
COME IN JMP COME and corresponding COM must COME is found between JMP and
have same JMP/JMPE status. Review JMPE, and COM and corresponding
COM range and JMP range, to adjust COME have different JMP/JMPE sta-
not to overlap with each other: it is tus.
possible that one range includes the
other completely.
END IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found

END1 IN JMP position. If JMP is unnecessary, re- between JMP and JMPE.
END2 IN JMP move it.
END3 IN JMP
SP/SPE IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between JMP and
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, JMPE.
remove it.
920
JMPB OVER COM BORDER JMPB and its destination must have JMPB and its destination differ in
same COM/COME status. Review COM/COME status.
range of JMPB and COM range, to ad-
just not to overlap with each other: it is
possible that one range includes the
other completely.
JMPB OVER LEVEL JMPB can only jump to the same pro- JMPB jumps to different program level.
gram level, or within a subprogram. If
the JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in
proper position. If it should be JMPC,
correct it.
LBL FOR JMPB NOT FOUND If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If Can not find proper LBL for JMPB.
LBL is missing, add it in proper posi-
tion.
JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a subpro- JMPC is used in other than subpro-
gram to level 2. If the JMPC is unnec- gram.
essary, remove it. If it should be JMPB
or JMP, correct it.
LBL FOR JMPC NOT FOUND If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.
LBL is missing, add it in proper posi-
tion: JMPC jumps into level 2. If it
should be JMPB or JMP, correct it.
LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a subpro- Destination of JMPC is not level 2.
gram to level 2. If the JMPC is unnec-
essary, remove it. If another LBL of
same L–address that the JMPC is in-
tended to jump exists in the subpro-
gram, assign different L–address to
these two LBLs. If it should be JMPB
or JMP, correct it.
JMPC INTO COM LBL for JMPC must be located out of JMPC jumps to LBL between COM
any COM and COME pair. If the JMPC and COME.
is unnecessary, remove it. If the LBL is
located wrong, move it to correct posi-
tion. If the L–address of JMPC is
wrong, correct it.
JMPE WITHOUT JMP If JMP is missing, add it in proper posi- There is no JMP that corresponds to
tion. If the JMPE is unnecessary, re- this JMPE.
move it.
TOO MANY LBL Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this er- There are too many LBLs.
ror still occurs, adjust the construction
of program to use less LBLs.
DUPLICATE LBL If some of these LBLs are unneces- Same L–address is used in plural
sary, remove them. If all of these LBLs LBLs.
is necessary, assign other L–address-
es to them to make all LBLs unique.
OVERLAPPED SP If SP is missing, add it in proper posi- There is no SP that corresponds to

tion. If the SPE is unnecessary, re- this SPE.
move it.
921
SPE WITHOUT SP If SP is missing, add it in proper posi- There is no SP that corresponds to

tion. If the SPE is unnecessary, re- this SPE.
move it.
END IN SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper posi- END is found between SP and SPE.
tion. If END is in wrong place, move it
to proper position.
DUPLICATE P ADDRESS If some of these SPs are unnecessary, Same P–address is used in plural
remove them. If all of these SPs is SPs.
necessary, assign other P–addresses
to them to make all SPs unique.
DUPLICATE TMRB NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, re- Plural TMRBs have the same number
(WARNING) move them. If all of them are neces- as their parameter. (This is warning.)
each other.)
ILLEGAL TMRB NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign cor- TMRB has parameter number that is
rect number not to exceed the maxi- out of range.
model
DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, re- Plural TMRs have the same number
(WARNING) move them. If all of them are neces- as their parameter. (This is warning.)
each other.)
ILLEGAL TMR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign cor- TMR has parameter number that is out
rect number not to exceed the maxi- of range.
model.
NO SUCH SUBPROGRAM If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. Subprogram that is called by CALL/
If the subprogram is missing, create it. CALLU is not found.
UNAVAILABLE INSTRUCTION Confirm that this ladder program is cor- Unsupported instruction for this PMC
rect one. If this program is correct one, model is found.
all these unsupported instructions
have to be removed.
SP IN BAD LEVEL SP can be used at top of a subpro- SP is found in wrong place.

gram. Correct it so that no SP exists in
other place.
922
LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN This ladder program must be all Ladder program may be broken by
cleared once, and remake ladder pro- some reason.
gram.
NO WRITE COIL Add proper write coil. Write coil is necessary, but is not
found.
CALL/CALLU IN BAD LEVEL CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2 CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.
or in subprograms. Do not use any
other places.
SP IN LEVEL3 If END3 is located wrong, move it to SP is found in level 3.

correct position. If the SP is unneces-
sary, remove it.
Messages that may be displayed during net editing on PMC program editor screen
TOO MANY FUNCTIONAL Only one functional instruction is al- Too many functional instructions are in
INSTRUCTIONS IN ONE NET lowed to constitute a net. If necessary, one net.
divide the net into plural nets.
TOO LARGE NET Divide the net into plural nets so that Net is too large. When a net is con-
step number in a net may become verted into the object, the net exceeds
small. 256 steps.
NO INPUT FOR OPERATION Coil without input, or coil connected to No signal is provided for logical opera-
output of functional instruction that has tion.
no output, causes this error. If coil is
not necessary, remove it. If necessary,
connect it to meaningful input.
OPERATION AFTER FUNCTION IS Output of functional instruction can not No logical operation with functional
FORBIDDEN be connected to a contact, nor to con- instruction output is permitted, except
junction with other signal that will be write coils.
implemented by logical–or operation.
WRITE COIL IS EXPECTED Add proper write coil to the net. Write coil is expected, but not found.
BAD COIL LOCATION Coil can be located only at rightmost Coil is located in bad position.
column. Any coil located at other place
must be erased once, and place nec-
essary coils in correct place.
SHORT CIRCUIT Find contact with terminals connected Some contacts are connected with
by short circuit, and correct connec- short circuit.
tions.
FUNCTION AFTER DIVERGENCE IS Functional instruction can not be used Functional instruction is used in output
FORBIDDEN in output section of net. If necessary, section of net.
divide the net into plural nets.
ALL COIL MUST HAVE SAME INPUT Left terminals of all coils in a net must When a net contains more than one
be connected to same input point. coil, the coils should not have any con-
tact beside them affects only of the
coils.
923
BAD CONDITION INPUT Check the connection of all condition Some condition input of functional
inputs of the functional instruction. Es- instruction is not connected correctly.
pecially for functional instruction that
has more than one condition input,
check if connections to condition in-
puts interfere with each other.
NO CONNECTION Find gap that is expected to be con- There is signal connected to nowhere.
nected, and correct the connection.
NET IS TOO COMPLICATED Examine every connection, and find Net is too complicated to analyze.
unnecessarily bending connection, or
coils that are connected to different
point.
PARAMETER IS NOT SUPPLIED Enter all of the relay addresses, and Relay with blank address, or blank pa-
parameters of functional instructions. rameter of functional instruction, is
found.
924
5.11 Some functional instructions may cause the ladder program to take a long
time to stop or make it unable to stop, if their ACT or RST condition
NOTE ON remains on for no apparent reason. If the ladder program does not stop,
PROGRAMMING all operations aimed at changing the ladder program will take longer to
end or will never end.
To avoid such problems, when you code a ladder program using
functional instructions, you need to design the ladder structure based on
a thorough understanding of the control conditions of the individual
instructions you use.
Listed below are typical cases in which the ladder program will not stop.
D A low–speed window function is used for a WINDR or WINDW
functional instruction, and its ACT condition remains on.
D In an EXIN or AXCTL instruction, not only the ACT condition but
also the RST condition remain on.
D The jump destination label is present before a JMPB instruction.
D In a JMPC instruction, the jump destination label points to the same
JMPC instruction.
If the ladder program takes long to stop or does not stop for any of these
reasons, the following operations will be affected.
1. Stopping the ladder program using a soft key on the screen.
2. Reading a new ladder program from a memory card or other medium,
by using the data input and output screen.
3. Updating the ladder program with changes made using the ladder
diagram edit screen.
If any of the above phenomena occurs, the functional instruction causing
the problem needs to be fixed. Check the functional instructions
mentioned above to see whether there is any ACT or RST condition
remaining on, and correct the ladder program according to the following
procedure.
1. Put the machine in safe condition and turn off the power of the NC.
2. Turn on the power of the NC while holding down the ”CAN” and ”Z”
keys simultaneously, to restart the NC with the ladder program halted.
3. In the ladder diagram edit screen, redesign the logic associated with
the problematic functional instruction. When done, set the ACT or
RST condition to off. If the same operation is repeating because of an
inadequate JMPB or JMPC instruction, review the jump condition
and, if necessary, change the ladder structure.
4. Write the resulting logic to flash ROM using the I/O screen.
5. Run the ladder program.
If the ladder program does not stop or cannot be changed even after you
make the correction, there may be other functional instructions that have
the same condition settings. Check for other functional instructions
having the same condition settings, besides the one you have corrected,
and repeat the above procedure to correct them all.
925
6. SIGNAL TRACE
6 SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7)
The signal trace function for PMC–SB7 has both the signal wave form
display function and the signal trace function for PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6
and has improved specification and operation.
PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6 PMC–SB7
Used condition The signal wave form display function Basic function as PMC control soft-
is provided in the ladder editing card. ware
Trace points 16 points 32 points
Sampling resolution 8ms (Fixed) 8ms to 1sec (Variable)
Maximum sampling time 10sec. (Fixed) Sampling time is expanded according

to number of trace points and resolu-
tion.
Ex.)
98sec. when 16 points and 8ms reso-
lution (Variable)
100 minutes when 32 points and 1
sec. resolution.
Display of trace result Sampling graph does not be displayed Sampling graph is displayed dynami-
dynamically in signal wave form dis- cally during the execution of trace.
play function.
On/off status of each bit is displayed in

signal trace function
On the trace screen, you can trace specified signals. The result of the trace
is displayed as the time chart of signals. There are two tracing modes.
– ”Time Cycle” mode: Samples the state of the signals at every
specified cycle time.
(Same specification as the signal wave
form display for PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6)
– ”Signal Transition” mode: Samples the status of the signals when
the signals that are watched at every
specified time are changed.
(Same specification as the trace function
for PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6)
926
6. SIGNAL TRACE
6.1 Pushing the [TRACE] soft key on PMC Diagnosis screen displays the
Signal Trace screen.
SIGNAL TRACE
SCREEN (INITIAL
SCREEN)
Signal Trace screen (Initial screen)
927
6. SIGNAL TRACE
6.2 Pushing the [SETING] soft key on the Signal Trace screen displays the
”Parameter Setting” screen. ”Parameter Setting” has two screens. The
SETTING OF TRACE page key changes these screens.
PARAMETER
Setting screen of Trace Parameter (Page 1)

a) SAMPLING/ MODE
Determines the sampling mode.
– TIME CYCLE: Samples at every specified cycle time.
– SIGNAL TRANSITION: Samples when the signal changes.
b) SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION
The resolution of sampling is inputted. The default value is the
minimum resolution (8msec). The range of the value is from 8msec to
1000msec. Inputted value is rounded down to the multiple of 8msec.
c) SAMPLING/ TIME
This parameter is displayed when ”TIME CYCLE” is set on
”SAMPLING MODE”. The execution time of trace is inputted. The
value of ”SAMPLING RESOLUTION” or the number of specified
signal address changes the range of the value that is able to input. The
range is displayed on the right side.
d) SAMPLING/ FRAME
This parameter is displayed when ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on
SAMPLING MODE”. The number of sampling is inputted. The value
of ”SAMPLING RESOLUTION” or the number of specified signal
addresses changes the range of the value that is able to input. The range
is displayed on the right side.
e) STOP CONDITION
Determines the condition to stop the trace.
– NONE: Does not stop the tracing automatically.
– BUFFER FULL: Stops the tracing when the buffer becomes full.
– TRIGGER: Stops the tracing by trigger.
f) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as stop trigger.
928
6. SIGNAL TRACE
g) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE

enabled. Determine the trigger mode when the trace is stopped.
– RISING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising up of
the trigger signal.
– FALLING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by falling
down of the trigger signal.
– BOTH EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising up or
h) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ POSITION
enabled. Input the ratio of the sampling time or number which
specifies the position where specified trigger condition is on. If you
would like to examine the transitions of the signal before the trigger
condition, you should set a big value in this parameter. If you would
like to examine the transitions of the signal after the trigger condition,
you should set a small value in this parameter.
Example: The case that sampling time is 10 second and trigger
position is set as ”10%”.
Trigger position
1sec 9sec
–1 0 9 (SEC)
i) SAMPLING CONDITION
When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE”, this
parameter is enabled. Determine the sampling condition.
– TRIGGER: Samples the status of specified signals when
the specified sampling condition is on.
– ANY CHANGE: Samples the status of specified signals when
the signals change.
j) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as sampling trigger.
k) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE
enabled. Input trigger mode that determines the condition of specified
trigger.
– RISING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up of the trigger signal.
– FALLING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
– BOTH EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up or falling down of the trigger signal.
– ON: Samples the status of specified signals during
the trigger signal is on.
– OFF: Samples the status of specified signals during
the trigger signal is off.
929
6. SIGNAL TRACE
6.3 a) Setting addresses

In page 2 of Parameter Setting screen, you can set the addresses or
SETTING OF symbols that should be sampled.
SAMPLING
ADDRESS
Setting screen of Trace Parameter (Page 2)

In case of inputting discrete bit addresses, any bit address can be inputted.
Moreover, when you input byte address, all bits of the address (bit0–bit7)
are set automatically. Maximum 32 points of signal address can be
inputted.
NOTE
Increasing the number of the signal address changes the
capacity of
”SAMPLING TIME” or ”SAMPLING FRAME” in page 1. If the
capacity
is changed, the following warning message is displayed.
(The ”n” on the message means the maximum value that is
able to input.)
a) In case of ”TIME CYCLE” mode
”SAMPLING TIME IS REDUCED TO n SEC.”
b) In case of ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” mode
b) Soft keys
Soft keys on the Setting screen of sampling address are as follows
– DELETE: Clears the value of the edit box on the cursor.
– SYMBOL: Changes the address display to the symbol display.
However, display of the address that is not defined the
symbol does not change. This soft key also changes
to ”ADDRESS”. The following soft keys are
displayed.
– MV.UP: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor for the
signal above one line.
930
6. SIGNAL TRACE
– MV.DWN: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor for the

signal below one line.
– DELALL: Clears all of the value of the edit box.
c) Trigger setting
When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE” and
”ANY CHANGE” is set on ”SAMPLING CONDITION”, it can be set
whether to use the setting address as the signals that should trigger the
sampling in the setting signals. As for the signal address where the
trigger was set, ”F” is displayed right. Soft keys on the Trigger setting
screen are as follows
– TRGON: Sets the Trigger on.
– TRGOFF: Sets the Trigger off.
The default setting is trigger on for all signals.
931
6. SIGNAL TRACE
6.4 On trace screen, pushing [START] soft key starts the execution of trace
after you set the trace parameter correctly. The followings are the screen
EXECUTION OF examples of the trace execution by ”TIME CYCLE” mode and ”SIGNAL
TRACE TRANSITION” mode
Execution of Trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)
Execution of Trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)

The result of trace is immediately displayed during execution of the trace.
When the stop conditions that is set in parameter setting screen is satisfied
the execution is finished. Pushing [STOP] soft key aborts the execution.
In ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” mode, graphic display is not refreshed until
any signal for sampling trigger changes.
932
6. SIGNAL TRACE
6.5 When the execution is finished, the result of trace is displayed. The
followings are the screen examples of trace by ”TIME CYCLE” and
OPERATION AFTER ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” mode.
EXECUTION OF
TRACE
Result of Trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)
Result of Trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)

The cursor indicating current position is initially displayed on the original
point (0 point). The position of the cursor is displayed in ”CURSOR
POSITION” in the upper of the screen. The cursor can move horizontally.
After the execution, following operation is enabled.
a) Scroll of screen
– Cursor up/down key and Page up/down key
Enables the vertical scroll for the specified signal
– Cursor right/left key, [NEXT>>] soft key and [PREV<<] soft key
Enables the horizontal scroll of the graph.
933
6. SIGNAL TRACE
b) Automatic calculation of the selected range

Pushing [MARK] soft key marks the current position and displays the
mark cursor. If the mark cursor duplicates with the current position
cursor, the current position cursor has priority of display. The ”MARK
POSITION” that shows the position of the mark cursor and ”RANGE”
that shows the range between the mark cursor and the current position
cursor are displayed in the upper of screen. Moving the current
position cursor changes these values. Pushing [MARK] again releases
the select range mode.
Result of Trace screen (Mark cursor display)

c) Zoom in/Zoom out of waveform
Pushing [Z.IN] soft key magnifies the display of chart. Pushing
[Z.OUT] soft key reduces the display of chart. Pushing these soft keys
also change the scale value of the graduation on the graph. When trace
is just finished, the default zooming level was the most magnified
level. In [Z.OUT] mode, ”X” is displayed as following screen example
when the transitions of signal cannot be expressed accurately enough.
The limitation of [Z.OUT] displays all of result of the trace in one
page.
934
6. SIGNAL TRACE
Result of Trace screen (Zoom out display)

d) Exchange of sampling signal
Pushing [MV.UP] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by the signal
cursor for the signal one line above. Pushing [MV.DWN] soft key
exchanges the signal indicated by the signal cursor for the signal one
line below. The result of the operation is cancelled by the execution of
trace or putting the power off. When you would like to preserve the
order of displayed signals against the executing or powering off,
please change the order on ”SAMPLING ADDRESS” screen.
935
6. SIGNAL TRACE
6.6 Trace execution is automatically started after power–on by setting a PMC

parameter.
AUTOMATIC START
OF TRACE SETTING
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K906
#5 0 : Starts trace execution when soft key [EXEC] is pressed.

1 : Automatically starts trace execution after power–on
This PMC parameter is set by the following item on the Setting screen of
PMC Parameter.
– SIGNAL TRACE START = 0 (0: MANUAL 1: AUTO)
936
6. SIGNAL TRACE
6.7 If there is the result data of trace after trace execution is finished, you can
output the file to the memory card.
OUTPUT OF RESULT
OF TRACE a) Operation
When softkey [PUNCH] is pushed, it changes to [EXEC][CANCEL].
If [EXEC] is pushed, output starts. When output is finished, the
softkey returns to the initial status of the result of trace screen.
b) File name
The outputted file name is ”PMCTRACE.000”.
If there exists the same file name in the memory card, the extension
is incremented and the file name changes to PMCTRACE.001,.002
(max is 999).
c) Format of output
The file is outputted to the text format.
The String data of the item and the setting name is outputted to the
form enclosed by single quotation marks (’).
The data is divided into four blocks i.e. header part, first page data of
parameter setting, second page data, and data of the trace result.
D Header
The ID ’PMC TRACE DATA’ that expresses the kind of the data
is outputted at the head of the data. And the edition number is
outputted to the next line. ’Edition’, 1.
D First page data of parameter setting
Setting, , ,
Setting Number, Setting Item Name, Setting Value, Strings
:
:
ID String data.
”Setting”.
Setting Number Numerical data.
The thing which gave a number in order
from the top is outputted toward the setup
item. (It starts from 1.)
Setting Item Name String data.
The item name which is the same as the
setting screen of trace parameter. The data
displayed under ”Sampling” (”MODE”,
”RESOLUTION”, ”TIME”) are connected
and outputted. (Refer to the following
output example.)
Setting Value Numerical data.
Numerical data are outputted as it is. A
number is given in order from the left, and
the data (”TIME CYCLE”, ”SIGNAL
TRANSITION”) that an item is chosen are
outputted. (It starts from 1.)
937
6. SIGNAL TRACE
Strings String data.

A unit is outputted when Setting Value is
numerical data from the first. The item
changed into the number by ”Setting Value”
outputs original string data. Empty column
in the case of the one except for this are
outputted.
NOTE
1 As for the setting item which is invalid, only a Setting
Number and Setting Item Name are outputted, and Setting
Value and Sstrings become empty coloulm. (But, a comma
isn’t omitted.)
2 The data whose item name changes according to other
settings output the displaying item name. (Example : In such
cases as ”SAMPLING TIME / SAMPLING FRAME” which
varies according to the setting of SAMPLING MODE.)
3 As for the SAMPLING STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS and
SAMPLING TRIGGER ADDRESS, an address is outputted
in the Setting Value. The symbol is outputted in the Strings.
When a symbol isn’t set up, an address is outputted in the
Strings as well.
4 SAMPLING STOP TRIGGER POSITION outputs the
position where specified trigger condition is on and the
number of sampling frames behind the percentage. (This is
because it has the possibility that an error arises when
changing the frame position held inside the percentage.)
D Second page data of parameter setting

Extension1, Data1, Data2, Data3,......
ID String data.
”ADDRESS”, ”SYMBOL”, ”COMMENT”,
”CHECK”, in the order, four.
ADDRESS SAMPLING ADDRESS
SYMBOL The symbol specified in
the SAMPLING ADDRESS.
COMMENT The comment specified in
the SAMPLING ADDRESS.
CHECK When ”ANY CHANGE”
is set on ”SAMPLING CONDITION”,
it shows whether to use the trigger.
Data The case of ”ADDRESS”, ”SYMBOL”,
”COMMENT”, string data.
The case of ’Check’, numerical data.
TRGON is ”1”.
TRGOFF is ”0”.
938
6. SIGNAL TRACE
NOTE
1 The SAMPLING ADDRESS is outputted where there is a
setting.
Therefore, empty coloulm isn’t outputted for the item of
”ADDRESS”.
2 Nothing is outputted when a ”SYMBOL” and ”COMMENT”
aren’t established. Empty coloulm is outputted. Commas
are not omitted until the place where SAMPLING
ADDRESS is set.
D Data of the trace result

ID, Sampling Address1, Sampling Address 2,......
Number of Frame, Data1, Data2, Data3,......
:
:
ID String data.
”Data”.
Number of Frame Numerical data.
The position of the frame number ”0”
becomes a trigger formation position.
When a trigger isn’t concluded, the moment
when sampling stopped becomes ”0”.
Data Numerical data.
”0” or ”1”.
It is decided that data continue to EOF(END
OF FILE), and the data size isn’t set up.
Tracing result output example (A tab isn’t actually outputted though it is
inserted to make it easy to see.)
’PMC TRACE DATA’
’Edition’, 1
’Setting’, , ,
1, ’Sampling mode’, 2, ’SIGNAL
TRANSITION’
2, ’Sampling resolution’, 8, ’MSEC’
3, ’Sampling time’, 2000,
4, ’Stop condition’, 3, ’TRIGGER’
5, ’Stop trigger address’, ’X10.0’, ’SYMBOL1’
6, ’Stop trigger mode’, 1, ’RISING EDGE’
7, ’Stop trigger position’, 50(1250/2500), ’%’
8, ’Sampling condition’, 1, ’TRIGGER’
9, ’Sampling trigger address’, ’X10.1’, ’SYMBOL2’
10, ’Sampling trigger mode’, 3, ’BOTH EDGE’
’Address’, ’R0000.0’, ’R0000.1’, ’R0000.2’, ’R0000.3’, ’R0000.4’,

’R0000.5’, ’R0000.6’, ’R0000.7’, ’R0001.0’, R0002.0’
’Symbol’, ’ZRN_M’, , , ’*SPA1’, ’*SPA2,
’MX–RD’, ’RSTN’, ’RSTMA’, ’MO1X’, ’MO2X’
939
6. SIGNAL TRACE
’Comment’, ’ZRN MODE’, ’TIME CNT.AUX1(MEM)’ , , , , ’READ

STROBE’, ’NORMAL RESET PB’, ’INIT_M&RSTM
(RST–>MACRO)’, ’OPTIONAL STOP1’,’OPTIONAL STOP2’
’Check’, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
0, 1, 1, 1
’Data’, ’R0000.0’, ’R0000.1’, ’R0000.2’, ’R0000.3’, ’R0000.4’,

’R0000.5’, ’R0000.6’, ’R0000.7’, ’R0001.0’, ’R0002.0’
–6, 1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
–5, 0,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1
–4, 1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0
–3, 0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1
–2, 0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1,0,0
–1, 1,1,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1
0, 1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
1, 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
2, 1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
3, 0,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1
4, 1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0
940
7. SELECTABLE I/O LINK
ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION (PMC–SB7)
7 SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION

(PMC–SB7)
941
ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
(PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
7.1 This function enables the common use of a sequence program for several
machines which have different I/O device configuration with each other,
OUTLINE by setting the parameter to enable/disable each group in I/O link
assignment data.
Machine A Machine B
I/O devices I/O devices
CNC Power Connection CNC Power I/O

Mate Unit Mate Unit
I/O link assignment data I/O link assignment data

X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate) X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate)
X8 1.0.1 OC02I (Connection Unit) X24 1.0.1 I D32E (I/O Unit)
The I/O link assignment data of both the machine

A and the machine B are merged.
Off line programmer
I/O link assignment data
X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate)
X8 1.0.1 OC02I (Connection Unit)
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
X24 2.0.1 ID32E (I/O Unit)
Make ROM format file with I/O link assignment data that is used in both the machine A
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
and the machine B.
CNC
A sequence program issentto CNC.
Set effective I/O groups on parameter.
Power Mate Enable Power Mate Enable

Connection Unit Enable Connection Unit Disable
I/O Unit Disable I/O Unit Enable
Machine A : I/O devices Machine B : I/O devices

Mate Unit Mate Unit
942
ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
The I/O devices that are used in all machines can be set as basic part of
configuration that is always effective.
Basic part

Mate Unit Mate Unit
The I/O link assignment data of the machine A and

the machine Bare merged.
Off line programmer
X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate) Basic part (always connected)
X8 1.0.1 OC02I (Connection Unit) Optional group by parameter
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
X24 2.0.1 ID32E (I/O Unit) Optional group by parameter
Determine the basic part and the optional part of I/O link assignment data.
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
CNC
Set effective I/O group on parameter.

The sequence program issent to CNC
Power Mate Basic Power Mate Basic

Connection Unit Enable Connection Unit Disable
I/O Unit Disable I/O Unit Enable

Mate Unit Mate Unit
NOTE
When you set a basic part, you have to assign devices of
basic part continuously from group 0. And the basic part is
connected with the top of the link.
943
ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
Basic part Optional part
CNC Power Connection I/O OK

Mate Unit Unit
CNC Power Connection I/O NG

Mate Unit Unit
Optional part
Basic part
This function requires setting the following parameters. These parameters

can be set for each channel. See V–8 and V–2.4 for details.
1) ENABLE SELECTION:
Enables/Disables this function in the system parameter.
2) BASIC GROUP COUNT:
Sets the counts of group in basic part in the system parameter.
(This part must be assigned continuously from group 0.) The basic
groups in I/O link assignment data are always effective on all
machine configurations.
3) EFFECTIVE GROUP SELECTION:
Sets the group of optional I/O device that is connected with each
machine in the setting parameter. This parameter doesn’t affect the
basic part.
NOTE
I/O Link expansion option is necessary to use channel 2 of
I/O Link.
944
ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
7.2 There are three machines which have different configurations of I/O
devices, each other.
EXAMPLE
D Configuration A
A machine which has a distribution I/O machine operator’s panel and
a connection panel I/O connected with channel 1 of NC.
Channel 1
CNC Distribution I/O machine Connection panel I/O

operator’s panel
Group 0 Group 1
Channel 2
No connection
D Configuration B
A machine which has a distribution I/O machine operator’s panel and
a Power Mate connected with channel 1 of NC.
Channel 1

operator’s panel
Group 0 Group 1
Channel 2
No connection
D Configuration C
A machine which has the configuration A on channel 1 and two beta
amplifiers on channel 2.
Channel 1

operator’s panel
Group 0 Group 1
Channel 2
CNC Beta amp. Beta amp.
Group 0 Group 1
These machines can use a common sequence program which has I/O link
assignment data that includes all I/O device configurations. The contents
of parameters for each I/O device configuration are as shown in next page.
945
ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
(1) The contents of I/O link assignment data in sequence program

Channel 1
Address Group Base Slot Name I/O Device

X0000 0 0 1 CM12I Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel
: : : : : :
X0020 1 0 1 CM03I Connection panel I/O
: : : : : :
X0030 2 0 1 FS08A Power Mate
: : : : : :
Channel 2

X0200 0 0 1 OC02I Beta amp.
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
(2) The contents of parameter

D Configuration A
i) System parameter
1CH ENABLE SELECTION = YES
BASIC GROUP COUNT = 1
ii) Setting parameter
Group NO. : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
(CH1) * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group NO. : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
(CH2) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
946
ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
D Configuration B
i) System parameter
Group NO. : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
(CH1) * 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group NO. : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
(CH2) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D Configuration C
i) System parameter
Group NO. : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
(CH1) * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group NO. : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
(CH2) 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(3) The actual contents of I/O link assignment data modified by the
parameter
D Configuration A
Channel 1

operator’s panel
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
Channel 2
No connection
947
ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
D Configuration B
Channel 1

operator’s panel
: : : : : :
X0030 1 0 1 FS08A Power Mate
: : : : : :
Channel 2
No connection
D Configuration C
Channel 1

operator’s panel
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
Channel 2

: : : : : :
: : : : : :
948
ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION
7.3 1) If PMC–parameters are cleared, cycling the power of CNC links only
the basic part.
NOTES
2) After selecting the assignment data, the I/O devices are linked with
shifted group number of effective I/O link assignment data.
You can check the result of connection by ”5. I/O Link Connecting
Check Screen”.
Before selection After selection
Group 0 Effective Group 0
Group 1 Not effective Group 1
Group 2 Effective Group 2
Group 3 Not effective
Group 4 Effective
3) You can not exchange the order of the I/O group number.
WARNING
1) If a sequence program in which ”ENABLE SELECTION” is
set to ”YES” is executed with the PMC control software that
is not applied to this function, ”ENABLE SELECTION” is
ignored and all I/O link assignment data are effective.
2)The [IOSTRT] key on I/O unit address setting screen has
been removed because improper use of this key may
increase mistake of setting the I/O assignment data which
causes wrong linking of the I/O devices and it may result in
unexpected malfunctions of machine. If you want to have
the machine linked with I/O devices under the selected I/O
link assignment data, you have to turn off and on power after
the confirmation of the correct connection of the I/O devices.
3) If a sequence program in which the system parameter for
this function is set is de–compiled and compiled on the
FANUC LADDER–III or Ladder Editing Package that does
not support this function, the system parameter for this
function is initialized and all of I/O link assignment data
becomes effective. Please set the system parameters
again, when writing the sequence program into the CNC.
949
8. SYSTEM PARAMETER
8 SYSTEM PARAMETER (PMC–SB7)
System parameter screen

(1) ENABLE SELECTION
This parameter enables or disables Selectable I/O link assignment
function.
This parameter is set by softkey [NO] or [YES ].
NO: Don’t use Selectable I/O link assignment function.
YES: Use Selectable I/O link assignment function.
The default setting is [NO].
If the parameters of both channel 1 and channel 2 are [NO], the setting
screen for this function explained on ”3.22 Setting parameter” is not
displayed.
WARNING
According to actually connected I/O devices, please set the
setting parameter(K910–K913 described in 3.2.2) correctly
to enable this function.
950
8. SYSTEM PARAMETER
(2) BASIC GROUP COUNT

This parameter determines the number of groups in the basic part of
the I/O link assignment data. You can set the group count for basic part
by entering (0–16) followed by softkey[INPUT]. The default is 0.
Example:
3: basic part 0–2 group
optional part 3–15 group
NOTE
For other system parameters, see Chapter 4 in Part III.
951
9. I/O LINK CONNECTING
CHECK SCREEN FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
9 I/O LINK CONNECTING CHECK SCREEN
The I/O Link connecting check screen displays the types and ID codes of
the connected I/O devices for each group. When I/O device is not
connected, any I/O device is not displayed. If there is a problem of input
or output signals for I/O devices, check the connection of I/O Link by
referring to this screen.
Available channel mark
I/O Link Connecting Check Screen

Available channel mark :
If channel is available, an ”*” mark is displayed. The status in this
example screen shows that the channel 2 is not available.
NOTE
1 I/O Link expansion option is necessary to use the channel
2 of I/O Link.
2 For I/O devices and ID codes, sample I/O link
configurations, and an example of the I/O link connecting
check screen, see Subsection 3.8.1 in Part II.
952
B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 10. ONLINE FUNCTION
10 ONLINE FUNCTION
There is the following function in the online function of FANUC

LADDER–II, FANUC LADDER–III or Ladder Editing Package.
– Ladder monitor display
– Online ladder editing
– PMC parameter display and editing
– Signal state monitor display and modifications
– Input/output to and from the PMC (loading from the PMC, storing to
the PMC)
– Writing to flash ROM
– Trace execution and result display
– Trace parameter display and editing
When you use the online function, the setting of communication
condition is necessary in advance.
CAUTION
function.
[PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], [SYSPRM], [USRDGN], [DBGLAD],
[GDT], [USRMEM]
Also, you can not use the above screens at PMC during the
online communication.
4 It is recommended that the on–line function be used when
the ladder is debugged. An on–line connection may be
broken depending on the operational status of CNC/PMC.
953
10. ONLINE FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15
10.1
ONLINE SETTING
SCREEN
Fig. 10.1 Online monitor setting screen

Meanings of Soft key
EMG ST: Terminates communication forcibly. Use this key if
communication becomes abnormal and the connection
cannot be terminated normally.
INIT: Initializes the parameters to their default values.
NOTE
1 In case of configuration of CNC with which neither Ethernet
nor HSSB is available, the item of ”HIGH SPEED I/F” is not
displayed.
2 In case of display which has 5+2 soft key, two pages are
used for this setting screen.
Switch the page by < Page Up > or <Page Down> key.
954
10.2 To communicate with FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC LADDER–III or

Ladder Editing Package, you need to put the PMC system in waiting
SETTING OF ONLINE situation of the connection. There are two ways for setting this, setting at
CONNECTION PMC screen and setting in NC parameter. Also, there are three connection
types, for example Ethernet, RS–232C or HSSB.
10.2.1 To display the soft key [MONIT] in the PMC main menu screen, set
”PROGRAMMER
How to Set at PMC
ENABLE” to ”YES” in the setting screen. When pushing the soft key
Screen [MONIT]→[ONLINE], the online setting screen is displayed. (Fig. 7.1)
1. Case of connection by RS–232C (FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC
LADDER–III)
(1) Check that ”NOT USE” is selected at the ”RS–232C” item.
(2) Set the parameter of ”CHANNEL” and ”BAUD RATE”.
(3) Move the cursor to the ”RS–232C” item with Up or Down Cursor
key.
2. Case of connection by Ethernet (FANUC LADDER–III, Ladder
Editing Package)
Cursor key.
3. Case of connection by HSSB (Ladder Editing Package)
Cursor key.
NOTE
1. When both ”RS–232C = USE” and ”HIGH SPEED I/F =
USE” are selected, the PMC system will communicate with
the application which is connected at first. If PMC system is
already connecting with an application, it can not connect
with other applications.
2 When you use the online function by Ethernet, the setting
of Ethernet parameters at CNC is necessary in advance.
955
10.2.2 You can enable and disable the online connection for Ethernet, HSSB and
Setting of Online RS–232C by NC parameter No.24 without setting on the PMC online
monitor setting screen. This NC parameter is made effective immediately
Connection by NC after setting the parameter.
Parameter If the value of this parameter is changed, the item ”RS232C”and ”HIGH
SPEED I/F” in the online monitor screen are automatically changed too.
Please refer to following table.
Contents of NC parameter No.24.
Each item of the online monitor
NC parameter screen after setting
Meanings
No.24
RS–232C HIGH SPEED I/F
0 The settings on the online monitor setting screen are effec- This does not affect ”RS–232C” and
tive. ”HIGH SPEED I/F”.
1 Enables ”Channel 1 of RS–232C” and disables ”HIGH USE (Channel 1) NOT USE
SPEED I/F”.
2 Enables ”Channel 2 of RS–232C” and disables ”HIGH USE (Channel 2) NOT USE
SPEED I/F”.
10 Disables ”RS–232C” and enables ”HIGH SPEED I/F”. NOT USE USE
11 Enables ”Channel 1 of RS–232C” and ”HIGH SPEED I/F”. USE (Channel 1) USE
12 Enables ”Channel 2 of RS–232C” and ”HIGH SPEED I/F”. USE (Channel 2) USE
3 to 10 3 to 1013 to 254 Reserve (Don’t use this setting.) (Reserved) (Reserved)
13 to 254
255 Terminates communication forcibly.It is the same effect as NOT USE NOT USE
soft key [EMG ST].
How to set the parameter
(1) Display the No.24 of NC parameter.
(2) To connect by Ethernet or HSSB, input ”10”, ”11” or ”12”.
To connect by RS–232C, input ”1”, ”2”, ”11” or ”12”.
NOTE
1 Even if the setting of the online monitor screen of PMC is
changed, the value of No.24 in NC parameter is not
changed.
2 When you use the ladder editing package on the open CNC
or you use the FANUC LADDER–III to edit the ladder and
do not use the ladder monitor and the ladder editor on CNC
screen, the setting of this parameter should be used
956
10.3
ONLINE FUNCTION
BY ETHERNET
10.3.1 When you try to connect FANUC LADDER–III or Ladder Editing

Setting of Ethernet Package (Window version) with CNC by Ethernet, it is necessary to set
some Ethernet parameters. The setting of Ethernet parameters can be set
Parameters in the following Ethernet parameter screen of CNC. Please refer to
”FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPERATOR’S
MANUAL” (B–63354EN) about the detail of the setting screen and
setting parameters. The setting item necessary for Ethernet connection for
PMC online function is as follows.
– IP ADDRESS (Set the IP address of CNC. 192.168.0.1
etc.)
– SUBNET MASK (Set the mask address of the IP address.
255.255.255.0 etc.)
– ROUTER IP ADDRESS (If you use the router, set the Router IP
Address.)
– PORT NUMBER (TCP) (8193 etc.)
Fig. 10.3.1(a) Ethernet Board
Fig. 10.3.1(b) Embedded Ethernet
957
Fig. 10.3.1(c) Ethernet Card (PCMCIA)
10.3.2 The procedures for online connection with PMC and the offline
Starting online programmer (FANUC LADDER–III, Ladder Editing Package for
windows) by Ethernet are as follows.
communication by (Example: FANUC LADDER–III)
offline programmer
(1) Start up FANUC LADDER–III, and click the [Communication] on
(Ethernet connection) [Tool] menu.
(2) Select the [Network Address] tab and push the <Add Host> button.
Input the ”IP Address” and ”Port No.” inputted by ”7.3.1 Setting of
Ethernet parameters”.
958
(3) Select the [Setting] tab, and add the IP Address to ”Use device”.
(4) Push the <Connect> button for start of the communication.

Ladder Editing Package can be connected by the same operation too. Refer
to ”FANUC LADDER–III OPERATOR’S MANUAL”(B–66234EN) as for
the detail of operation of FANUC LADDER–III. Refer to ”LADDER
EDITING PACKAGE (Windows) OPERATOR’S MANUAL”
(B–63484EN) as for the detail operation of Ladder Editing Package.
959
NOTE
function.
[PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], [SYSPRM], [USRDGN], [DBGLAD],
[GDT], [USRMEM].
960
10.4 The communication status of RS–232C and HIGH SPEED I/F are
displayed at the online monitor screen during the online communication.
COMMUNICATION
STATUS
Fig. 10.4 Online monitor setting screen

USE TIME: The maximum time in the communication processing is displayed.
RS–232C: The communication condition of RS–232C is displayed.
HIGH SPEED I/F: The communication condition of HIGH SPEED I/F is displayed.
ETHER_BOARD: Displayed during the communication with Ethernet board.The IP address of the commu-
nication partner is displayed.
EMB_ ETHERNET: Displayed during the communication with embedded Ethernet.The IP address of the
communication partner is displayed.
HSSB: Displayed during the communication with HSSB.
961
The display messages and the meanings are shown in the table of below.
INACTIVE The communication is inactive.
STOPPING The communication is being stopped.(Wait for
the termination of communication)
STARTING The communication is being started.(Wait for the
termination of communication over another com-
munication path)
STAND–BY The communication is active and in standby
mode.
CONNECTED The communication is active and being con-
nected.
NO OPTION The port can be not opened because there is not
option of RS–232C.
BAD PARAMETER Invalid open parameters are specified.
TIMEOUT ERROR A time–out has occurred and communication is
aborted.
TIMEOUT(K) ERROR A time–out has occurred and communication is
aborted.
BCC ERROR A Block Check Code (packet parity) error has
occurred.
PARITY ERROR A parity error has occurred.
OVER–RUN ERROR A reception overrun has occurred and the com-
munication can not recover.
SEQUENCE ERROR Packets are out of sequence.(Incorrect proce-
dure)
DATA ERROR Incorrect packets have been received through
retry process.
QUEUE OVERFLOW The transmit/receive queue has overflowed.
DISCONNECTED Communication has been terminated success-
fully.
NO CONNECTION The cable is disconnected.
PORT BUSY ERROR The RS–232C port is already used.
962
10.5 If any errors have occurred during Ethernet connection, the contents of the
errors are displayed at ”ETHLOG” screen of CNC. Refer to this screen
ABOUT when the communication does not start.
CONNECTION LOG
OF ETHERNET
Fig. 10.5(a) The Log screen of embedded Ethernet
Fig. 10.5(b) The Log screen of Ethernet
963
Connection Log Meanings and countermeasures

SnpErr:PDU=m,n,[x] date time An error has occurred during the online communication.
m, n : Online communication information that is internal information of a system.
SnpErr:PDU=n,[x] date time
x : Error information
SnpErr:TaskTimeOut[x] date time 6001 PMC does not support the Ethernet.Confirm the Series/Edition of PMC
software.
6003 Unsupported command data was received.Confirm the Series/Edition of
6004 There was an error in command dataConfirm the Series/Edition of Ether-
net board software.
6005 PMC does not receive command data.Confirm the communication status
at the online setting screen of PMC.
6010 PMC does not receive command data.Confirm if ”HIGH SPEED I/F=USE”
is selected and other application is not connected at the online setting
screen of PMC.
6011 Time–out error occurred at PMC.Increase the value of ”Time Out” in [Net-
work Address] of [Communication] menu for FANUC LADDER–III or
6012 PMC does not receive command data because it is busy for proces-
sing.Confirm the communication status at the online setting screen of
PMC.
6013 Time–out error occurred at PMCIncrease the value of ”Time Out” in [Net-
work Address] of [Communication] menu for FANUC LADDER–III or
6101 PMC received an unsupported function code.Confirm the Series/Edition
of PMC software.
date time: The time when the error occurred.
Ex.) ”0323” means March 23rd.
”1858” means 6:58 PM.
”21161714” means 21st 4:17PM 14 seconds.
964
B–61863E/15 Index
Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later
ƠAơ ƠBơ
About connection log of Ethernet, 616, 963 Block step, 997
About the FS15i PMC–NB6 programmer, 510 Brief screen, 887
About the FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 programmer, 510

ADD (addition), 249
ADDB (binary addition), 251
ƠCơ
C input/output, 568
Addition of system keep relays, 838, 841
CALL (conditional subprogram call), 341
Additions to sequence programs, 1113
Calling screen, 893
Address, 61
CALLU (unconditional subprogram call), 342
Address change, 770
Caution screen of the setting parameter for the selectable I/O link
Address change of sequence program, 544 assignment function, 848
Address of counter (C), 110 Cautions for subroutines, 389
Address of data table (D), 114 Chinese character code, Hiragana code, and special code list, 1588
Clearing the PMC parameter, 557
Address of keep relay and nonvolatile memory control (K), 112
Clearing the sequence program, 424, 556
Addresses, 374
Clearing the sequence program and condensation of the sequence
Addresses between PMC and CNC (PMC´NC), 79 program, 556
Addresses between PMC and machine tool, 80 CNC ³ Offline Programmer, 1522
Addresses between PMC and machine tool (PMC´MT), 80 COD (code conversion), 199
Addresses for message selection displayed on CRT (A), 108 CODB (binary code conversion), 202
Coding (step 5), 39
Addresses, signal names, comments, and line numbers, 374
COIN (coincidence check), 230
Alarm message (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/
SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6), 1553 Collation of program, 1105
Alarm message (PMC–SB7), 1560 Collation of source programs, 1105
Alarm message and countermeasure, 818, 828, 898, 919 Collective monitor function, 765
Alarm message list, 1552 Collective monitor function (PMC–SB7), 892

Collective monitor screen, 1044
Alarm screen (ALARM), 440, 651
COM (common line control), 207
ALLOW PMC STOP (PMC–SB7: K902.2, PMC–SA1: K19.2), 855
COME (common line Control end), 213
Alter, 1085
Comments, 375
Alteration of sequence programs, 536
Communication Status, 615
AND, 128
Communication status, 961
AND (logical AND), 320 COMP (comparison), 226
AND. NOT, 128 Comparison with the function of FS15–B (PMC–NB/NB2), 662
AND. STK, 131 Compatibility of ladder diagram, 1031
Applicable FANUC ladder editions, 1515 Compatibility of PMC between Series 15i–MODEL A and B, 1551
Applications, 382 Compatibility of PMCs for Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL A and B,
1533
Arbitrary functional instructions, 305
Compatibility with CNC basic software, 1508
Area managed by the system program, 103 Compatibility with Series 21–MODEL B, 1550
Assignment of built–in I/O card, 100 Compatible with Series 0, 1546
Assignment of I/O module addresses, 82 COMPB (comparison between binary data), 228
Automatic operation when the power is turned on, 424 Component units, 512, 1059, 1510
Automatic start of trace setting, 936 Component units and connections, 511, 1058, 1509
Automatic tracing function at power on, 443 Compress the sequence program, 557
AXCTL (axis control by PMC), 348 Compressed input by [COMAND] key, 1122
Condense, 1512
i–1
Index B–61863E/15
Note
Condense command – release of deleted area, 1133 Data transfer between NB (4047 series) and NB (4048 series), 1528
Configuration and operation of step–sequence programs, 988 Data transfer between NB/NB2 (4048 series) and FANUC LADDER,
1527
Configuration of command, 1130
DCNV (data conversion), 222
Confirming the ladder mnemonics, 627
DCNVB (extended data conversion), 224
Connecting component units, 517
Debugging, 597
Connecting the I/O card, 1501
DEC (decode), 177
Connecting the I/O unit, 1501
DECB (binary decoding), 179
Connecting the operator’s panel for FS 0 with FS16, FS18, FS21, or
Power Mate, 1497 Delete, 1089
Connection, 1501 Delete of sequence program, 539
Connection of components, 1511 Delete of symbol data and comment, 550
Connections of units, 1060 Deleting a sequence program, 1116
Constitution, 771 Deleting title data, 528
Continuous data entry, 685 Deletion of a tool management data (*low–speed response), 1354
Deletion of programs, 1106
Convergence of selective sequence, 993
Descriptions of displayed items, 593
Convergence of simultaneous sequence, 995
Detail screen, 885
Conversion, 1495
Details of basic instructions, 122
Copy a ladder program [CPYLAD], 587
DIFD (falling edge detection), 317
Copy I/O module data [CPYMDL], 588
Difference of status of signals between 1st level and 2nd level, 54
Copy message data [CPYMSG], 587
DIFU (rising edge detection), 316
Copy symbol data and comment data [CPYSYM], 587
Direct editing by ladder diagram, 1108
Copy the sequence programs [CPYALL], 588
DISP (message display) (PMC–SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/
Copy title data [CPYTTL], 587 SC3/SC4 Only), 268
Copying a sequence program, 1119 DISPB, 282
Copying message data (COPY), 555 Display format for parameters, 879
Copying the sequence program, 542 Display of ladder diagram, 1091
Corresponding function, 1030 Display of signal status (STATUS), 439
Counter screen (COUNTR), 476, 686 Display PMC input/output signals and internal relay (PMCDGN),
647
Creating a program, 387
Displayed items, 596
Creation of interface specifications (steps 1 to 3), 38
Displaying and setting the configuration status of I/O devices
Creation of ladder diagram (step 4), 38 (IOCHK), 454
Cross reference display, 558 Displaying input code (DSPMOD), 555
CTR (counter), 182 Displaying of sequence program, 1015, 1034
CTRB (fixed counter), 188 Displaying run status, 1045
CTRC (counter), 190 Displaying the contents of memory (M.SRCH), 444
Displaying the GDT (global descriptor table), 591
Displaying the memory allocation information of a user program
ƠDơ
Coded in C., 594
Displaying the running state of a user task (USRDGN), 452
Data display and setting (title, symbol, ladder program, comment,
message, I/O module), 1078 Displaying title data, 437
Distribution I/O connection I/O module and distribution I/O opera-
Data input to and output from other devices, 581
tor’s panel I/O module assignment methods, 94
Data keys and screen scroll key, 1066 DIV (division), 261
Data number, data attribute, data length, data area, 1487 DIVB (binary division), 263
Data table (DATA), 482, 689 Divergence of selective sequence, 993
DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (PMC–SB7: K900.7, PMC–SA1: Divergence of simultaneous sequence, 994
K17.7), 856
Dividing display of ladder diagram, 501
Data transfer between NB (4047 series) and FANUC LADDER,
1527 Do–while statement, 1579
i–2
B–61863E/15 Index
Note
DSCH (data search), 234 Examples of structured programming, 381

DSCHB (binary data search), 237 Exclusive control for functional instructions, 1011
DUMP display on ladder diagram, 493 Execution method, 386
Execution of a sequence program, 563
Execution of step sequence, 984
ƠEơ Execution of Trace, 659
Execution of trace, 932
EDIT ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K901.6, PMC–SA1: K18.6), 852
Execution procedure of sequence program, 43
Editing a character string in message data, 554
Execution time, 407
Editing character strings of symbol data and comment data, 551
EXIN (external data input), 293
Editing character strings of title data, 529
Expansion of symbol size, 841
Editing end, 1092
Extended ladder instructions, 999
Editing for Power Mate–MODEL D (PMC–PA1/PA3), 1507
Editing function of ladder diagram, 1025, 1052
Editing ladder mnemonics, 626
Editing of sequence program (EDIT), 527
ƠFơ
Editing symbol data and comment at once, 544 F keys (F1 to F0), 1064
Editing the sequence program (EDIT), 625 FANUC LADDER (system P series), 1518
Editor screen of message data, 822 FANUC LADDER system floppy loading, 1073
Editor screen of symbol/comment data, 811 FANUC LADDER, FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC LADER–III,
ladder editing packages, 1516
Editor screen of system parameter, 832
FDLIST command – file attribute display, 1131
Emergency stop signal (*ESP), 1502
File editing function, 1126
Enabling automatic debugging at power–on, 601
Floppy list screen, 795
END (end of a ladder program), 340 For MDI Units other than Standard MDI Units (for FS20 PMC–SA1
End of block step, 998 and SA3), 424
END1 (1st level sequence program end), 167 For statement, 1581
END2 (2nd level sequence program end), 168 For the FS15 (PMC–NB), 505
END3 (end of 3rd level sequence) (PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB/ For the FS16 (PMC–SC, PMC–SC3, or PMC–SC4), 505
NB2/NB6/NB7 only), 169 Forced input/output function, 461, 674
Ending edit of a sequence program, 1122 Forced input/output screen, 679
Ending ladder mnemonics editing, 630 Forcibly stopping the sequence program, 565
Entering data on the program check screen (*low–speed response) Format and details of the control data of the WINDR functional
(not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1229 instruction, 1375
Entering title data, 528 Format and details of the control data of the WINDW functional
Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor (*low–speed instruction, 1428
response), 1233 Formats and details of control data, 1147
Entry screen of message data, 825 FS15i PMC–NB6 operating procedure, 425
Entry screen of symbol/comment, 814 FS16i–LA assignment, 93
EOR (exclusive OR), 318 FS16i/18i/21i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 operating procedure, 425
Error codes list (for FANUC Ladder P–G), 1139 Function, 385, 1143, 1369, 1451, 1495
Error details, 634 Function for displaying signal waveforms (ANALYS), 446
Error list, 638 Function for storing data in memory, 445
Error messages (for EDIT), 618 Function of copying symbol and comment data, 552
Error messages (for I/O), 620 Functional instruction data table editor screen, 915
Error messages (for ladder mnemonics editing), 632 Functional instruction data table viewer screen, 882
Error messages ansd solutions, 773 Functional instruction list screen, 914
Example, 945 Functional instruction TRSET, 1000
Example for setting parameters, 858 Functional instruction WINDR, 1371
Example of step sequence programs, 1572 Functional instruction WINDW, 1373
i–3
Index B–61863E/15
Note
Functional instructions, 135 Input/output method to office programmer (P–G Mate/Mark II)
(fixed 9600bit/sec.), 635
Functions for displaying memory areas and debugging the program
(MONIT), 589 Input/output of ladder program with P–G and floppy cassette/FA
card, 1123
Functions of processing, 1056
Inputting a multi–byte character (D.CHAR), 555
Insert, 1088
Insert of sequence program, 536
ƠGơ Interlocking, 56
General rules, 1005 Internal relay addresses (R), 101
Graphical symbols, 971 Interrupt enable/disable/clear, 407
Interrupt processing, 405
Interrupt program, 405
ƠHơ Interrupt–type PMC function, 402
Help screen, 1092 IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1), 856
HIDE PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7: K902.6, PMC–SA–1: K19.6), 853

HIDE PMC PROGRAM (PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0),
852 ƠJơ
Hierarchy of monitor, 1035
JMP (jump), 214
How to pick up a ladder diagram net, 768
JMP Instructions with Label Specification, 391
How to set at NC parameter, 610 JMPB (label jump), 345
How to set at NC parameter (Power Mate–D/H), 611 JMPC (label jump), 346
How to set at PMC screen, 609, 955 JMPE (jump end), 219
Jump, 996
ƠIơ
I/O error messages, 585 ƠKơ
I/O Link connecting check screen, 456 Keep relay (KEEPRL), 476
I/O link connecting check screen, 952 Keep relay screen (KEEPRL), 687
I/O Link connection unit assignment, 89 Keep relays used in the system, 860
I/O Link–II parameter setting screen, 458 Key switch signals (Xn, Xn+2), 1502
I/O screen, 779 Keyboard of system P series, 1063
I/O screen error messages (PMC–NB6), 801
I/O signals to CNC, 53
I/O unit address setting (MODULE), 546 ƠLơ
I/O Unit MODEL B assignment, 91 Label, 996
If else statement, 1583 Label addresses (JMPB, JMPC, LBL) (L), 118
Implementation techniques, 381 Ladder debugging function, 602
Infinite number of relay contacts, 378 Ladder diagram display, 492
Initial block step, 998 Ladder diagram editor function (PMC–SB7), 899
Initial step, 991 LADDER diagram editor screen, 720
Input of program, 1093 Ladder diagram format, 373, 377
Input PMC parameters from MDI panel, 474 LADDER diagram monitor (PMC–SB7), 864
Input signal processing, 52 Ladder diagram monitor and editor, 697

LADDER diagram monitor screen, 700, 866
Input with a katakana identification code, 555
Ladder diagram monitor screen, 1044
Input/outpupt signal processing, 406
Ladder password function, 426
Input/output ladder/PMC–parameter by DPL/MDI, 635
Ladder screen, 1018, 1028
Input/output method to FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE (fixed
4800bit/sec.), 635 Lader diagram editor screen, 900
i–4
B–61863E/15 Index
Note
LBL (label), 347 MOVOR (data transfer after logical sum), 206
Level up of input/output function with memory card, 1520 MOVW (transfer of 2 bytes), 313
Limitations in SYSTEM P Mate, 1108 MUL (multiplication), 257
Limitations with the SYSTEM P Mate, 1072 MULB (binary multiplication), 259
Limited function, 1551 Multi–language alarm/operator message display function setting
screen, 847
Line numbers, 375
Multiple data input, 474
List of window functions, 1144
LOAD key (system program loading key), 1064
ƠNơ
Loading of floppy, 1072
Loading the standard ladder (for Power Mate–D/F PMC–PA1 and
PA3), 425 NB/NB2 data compatibility, 1527
Location search, 1089 Net editor screen, 907
Low–speed response and high–speed response of window function, New–register of a tool management data (*low–speed response),
1143, 1370 1344
Nonvolatile memory, 364
NOP (no operation), 362
ƠMơ NOT (logical NOT), 324
Memory card list screen, 786 Note on programming, 925
Menu screen of miscellaneous data in sequence program, 807 Notes, 949
Message data input, 554 Notes on input/output signals over a network, 55
Message data setting (MESSAGE), 553 Notes on using an MDI keyboard without cursor keys (when using
the FS20 PMC–MODEL SA1/SA3), 584
Method for entering PMC parameters, 684
NUME (definition of constant), 265
Migration from the PMC–NB/NB2 to the PMC–NB6, 1532 NUMEB (definition of binary constants), 266
Migration from the PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6 to the PMC–SB7, 1533
Migration from the Series 0 and Series 21–B to Series 0i–A, 1546
Migration of ladder programs between different models, 1529
ƠOơ
Migration of ladder programs from Power Mate–D/H to Power Mate
i–D/H, 1530 Offline Programmer ³ CNC, 1524
Miscellaneous data in sequence program, 806 On–line debugging function (only for Power Mate–D/H and Power
Mate i–D/H), 636
Miscellaneous item, 379
On–line edit, 503
MMC3 R (MMC–III window data read), 326
Online function, 607, 953
MMC3W (MMC–III window data write), 329
Online function by Ethernet, 957
MMCWR (reading MMC window data) (other than PMC–PA1/PA3),
308 Online function by ethernet, 612
MMCWW (writing MMC window data) (other than PMC–PA1/PA3), Online setting screen, 608, 954
310 Operation, 441, 444, 446, 558, 591, 594, 597, 1069, 1522
Modification procedure, 1496 Operation (PMC–SB7), 1033
Modifying the converted sequence program, 1496 Operation after execution of trace, 660, 933
Modifying the ladder mnemonics, 628 Operations, 571, 869, 883, 888
Modifying the values of signals by forced input/output, 469 Operations to enable the forced I/O function, 678
Monitor time screen, 1023 OR, 128
Monitoring elapsed time, 1022 OR (logical OR), 322
MOVB (transfer of 1 byte), 312 OR. NOT, 128
MOVD (transfer of 4 bytes), 315 OR. STK, 131
MOVE (logical product transfer), 204 Other setting screens, 487
Moving a sequence program, 1120 Other window functions, 1493
Moving the sequence program, 543 Outline, 942
MOVN (transfer of an arbitrary number of bytes), 314 Outline of leveled up contents, 1521
i–5
Index B–61863E/15
Note
Output of program, 1098 Program input, 1123

Output of result of trace, 937 Program list editor screen, 760, 916
Output signal processing, 52 Program list viewer screen, 753, 885, 1036
Outputting to and inputting from flash ROM, 788 Program output, 1124
Outputting to and inputting from floppy, 791 PROGRAMMER ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K900.1, PMC–SA1:
K17.1), 851
Outputting to and inputting from memory cards, 782
Programmer menu screen, 1074
Outputting to and inputting from other input/output devices, 796
Programmer protection function, 850
Override signals (*OV1 to *OV8) and program protect key signal
(KEY), 1502 Programming, 972
Programming from keyboard, 1084
PROTECT PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7: K902.7, PMC–SA1: K19.7),
854
ƠPơ Protection of each function of I/O screen, 856
Paper command, 1101 PSGN2 (position signal output 2), 358
Parameter, 1511 PSGNL (position signal output), 354
Parameter display on ladder diagram, 494
Parameter menu (PMC–SB7), 1505
Parameter screen, 447, 598 ƠRơ
Parameter setting and display, 1075 R keys (R0 to R3), 1065
Parameter setting screen, 441, 559 RAM WRITE ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K900.4, PMC–SA1: K17.4),
PARI (parity check), 220 856
RD, 124
Password and switching screen, 776
RD. NOT, 125
Password protection, 774
RD. NOT. STK, 130
PMC address (S ADDRESS), 1001
RD. STK, 129
PMC basic instructions, 120
Reading a character string of the CNC program being executed in the
PMC basic manu, 643 buffer, 1241
PMC data setting and display (PMCPRM), 683 Reading a custom macro variable (*low–speed response), 1166
PMC data table, 368 Reading a custom macro variable (low–speed response), 1379
PMC I/O signal display and internal relay display (PMCDGN), 436 Reading a parameter (*low–speed response), 1158
PMC ladder diagram display (PMCLAD), 491 Reading a parameter (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
21–TA), 1238
PMC menu selection procedure by softkey, 430
Reading a parameter (setting data) (low–speed response), 1378
PMC operation for loader control function, 429
Reading a skip position (stop position of skip operation (G31)) of
PMC parameter format, 1540 controlled axes, 1186
PMC parameters setting and display (PMCPRM), 472 Reading a skip position (stop position of skip operation (G31)) of
PMC programmer (CRT/MDI or PDP/MDI) [ladder editing function], controlled axes (low–speed response), 1386
1509 Reading a tool management data (*low–speed response), 1356
PMC programmer (DPL/MDI) (only for the Power Mate–D/F/H), Reading a tool offset, 1150
621
Reading a tool offset (low–speed response), 1375
PMC screen transition and related soft keys, 645
Reading a workpiece origin offset value, 1377
PMC system alarm messages (PMC–SB7), 1570
Reading a workpiece origin offset value (not supported by the Power
Port setting screen, 799 Mate–D or –F), 1154
Power Mate assignment, 92 Reading A/D conversion data, 1199
Preparation before operation, 1072 Reading A/D conversion data for the feed motor, 1395
Priority of execution (1st level, 2nd level and 3rd level), 45 Reading actual spindle speeds, 1301
Procedure, 1505 Reading an estimate disturbance torque data, 1410
Processing I/O signals, 51 Reading and writing of nonvolatile memory data, 367
Program collation, 1125 Reading and writing the laser command data and laser setting data,
1456
Program configuration list (main screen), 1015, 1025
Reading clock data (date and time) (not available for Power Mate–F),
Program editing, 1078 1231
i–6
B–61863E/15 Index
Note
Reading clock data (low–speed response), 1407 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis, 1243, 1408
Reading CNC status information, 1247 Reading the remaining travel, 1245, 1409
Reading CNC system information, 1148 Reading the servo data of control axes, 1337
Reading detailed alarm information (*low–speed type), 1333 Reading the servo delay for controlled axes, 1188, 1387
Reading diagnosis data (*low–speed response), 1197 Reading the tool life management data (number of tool groups)
(low–speed response), 1398
Reading diagnosis data (low–speed response), 1394
Reading the tool life management data (tool group number) (low–
Reading diagnosis data (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series speed response), 1397
21–TA), 1240 Reading the tool life management data (tool life counter type) (not
Reading fine torque sensing data (statistical calculation results), 1305 available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1253
Reading fine torque sensing data (store data), 1307 Reading the tool offset data according to the specified tool number,
1413
Reading load information of the spindle motor (serial interface),
1235 Reading the wire diameter offset, 1460
Reading tool lefe management data (cutter compensation number 1)
Reading machining distances, 1480 (low–speed type), 1416
Reading modal data, 1192 Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No. (1):
Reading modal data (low–speed response), 1388 tool No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1217
Reading model data, 1476 Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No. (2):
tool order No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA),
Reading of the comment, 1455 1219
Reading of tool setting data, 1485 Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No.1) (low–
speed response), 1403
Reading real parameters (low–speed type), 1418
Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No.2) (low–
Reading set data (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), speed response), 1404
1239
Reading tool life management data (number of tool groups) (not
Reading setting data, 1471 available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1205
Reading setting data (*low–speed response), 1162 Reading tool life management data (number of tools) (low–speed
response), 1398
Reading signals automatically at power on, 451
Reading tool life management data (number of tools) (not available
Reading the absolute position (absolute coordinates) of controlled for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1207
axes, 1182
Reading tool life management data (tool diameter offset number 1)
Reading the absolute position on a controlled axis, 1383 (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1287
Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay on controlled axes, Reading tool life management data (tool group No.) (not available
1190, 1387 for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1203
Reading the actual spindle speed, 1227 Reading tool life management data (tool group number) (not avail-
able for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1283
Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes, 1180
Reading tool life management data (tool group numbers) (low–speed
Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes (low–speed response), type), 1414
1383 Reading tool life management data (tool information (1) : tool No.)
Reading the CNC alarm status, 1171, 1475 (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1221
Reading the CNC alarm status (low–speed response), 1380 Reading tool life management data (tool information (2): tool order
No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1223
Reading the current program number, 1176
Reading tool life management data (tool information 1) (low–speed
Reading the current program number (8–digit program numbers) response), 1405
(not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1281 Reading tool life management data (tool information 1) (low–speed
Reading the current program number (low–speed response), 1381 type), 1417
Reading the current screen number, 1330 Reading tool life management data (tool information 1) (not avail-
able for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1289
Reading the current sequence number, 1178
Reading tool life management data (tool information 2) (low–speed
Reading the current sequence number (low–speed response, 1382 response), 1406
Reading the estimate disturbance torque data, 1277 Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No.
(1): tool No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA),
Reading the load current (A/D conversion data) for the spindle mo- 1213
tor, 1412
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No.
Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of controlled (2): tool order No.) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
axes, 1184, 1385 21–TA), 1215
Reading the machining time (low–speed response), 1411 Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No.1)
(low–speed response), 1401
Reading the measured point, 1481
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation num-
Reading the parameter (*low–speed response), 1464 ber 1) (low–speed type), 1415
i–7
Index B–61863E/15
Note
Reading tool life management data (tool length offset number 1) (not Search of empty pot (*low–speed response), 1342
available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1285
Search of sequence program, 540
Reading tool life management data (tool life counter type) (low–
speed response), 1400 Search of specified relay coil points in ladder diagram, 498
Reading tool life management data (tool life counter) (low–speed Search of tool management data (*low–speed response), 1364
response), 1399 Searching a sequence program, 1117
Reading tool life management data (tool life counter) (not available Searching for an address (SRCH), 554
for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1211
Selectable I/O link assignment function (PMC–SB7), 941
Reading tool life management data (tool life) (low–speed response),
1399 Selecting the PMC programmer menu, 623
Reading tool life management data (tool life) (not available for Pow- Selection of program menu by soft keys, 1108
er Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1209
Selection of programmer menus by softkeys, 518
Reading tool life management data (tool No.) (not available for Pow-
er Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1225 Sequence program, 42
Reading tool life management data (tool number) (low–speed re- Sequence program check and write into ROM (steps 8 to 11), 40
sponse), 1406
Sequence program copy function, 587
Reading tool setting data by specifying tool number, 1491
Sequence program creating procedure, 3
Reading value of the P–code macro variable (*low–speed response), Sequence program entry (steps 6, 7), 40
1249
Sequence program examples, 411
Registering the tool life management data (tool group) (*low–speed
response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1255 Sequence program generation (LADDER), 531
Remove command – file copy, 1134 Sequence program input, 532, 1110
Rename command – file attribute change, 1132 Sequence program memory capacity, 59
Repetitive operation, 44 Sequence program processing time, 57
Respomse time, 406 Sequence program structuring, 49, 380
Restrictions, 396, 588 SET, 131
ROM format program, 1095, 1102, 1105 Set items, 569
ROT (rotation control), 193 Setting, 404
ROTB (binary rotation control), 196 Setting and display screen, 475
RST, 133 Setting and displaying system parameters (SYSTEM PARAM), 624
Setting function, 842
Setting I/O commands, 1123
ƠSơ Setting menu (SETING), 691
Scratch command – deletion of files, 1133 Setting of Ethernet parameters, 612, 957
Screen configuration, 894, 901, 907 Setting of I/O device, 1067
Screen display, 466 Setting of online connection, 608, 955

Setting of online connection by NC parameter, 956
Screen for displaying general settings (GENERAL), 692
Setting of sampling address, 930
Screen for displaying setting data related to C language function, 696
Setting of Trace Parameter, 653
Screen for displaying the setting data related to editing and debug-
ging, 693 Setting of trace parameter, 928
Screen for displaying traced data, 601 Setting parameter screen for the selectable I/O link assignment func-
tion, 849
Screen for setting/displaying online monitor parameters (ONLINE),
694 SETTING screen, 484
Screen of ladder debugging function, 602 Setting Screen, 890
Screen operation (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2), 1014 Setting screen, 905, 918
Screen operation for FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7, 837 Setting screen of general function, 844
Screen operation for PMC–SA1, 838 Setting the screen, 873
Screen operation for PMC–SB7, 839 Setting the transfer speed ([SPEED] soft key), 582
Screen operations, 895, 902, 908, 917 Setting/clearing OVERRIDE, 470
Screen Structure, 867 Setting/operation for enabling forced input/output, 465
Screen Structures, 883 SFT (shift register), 232
i–8
B–61863E/15 Index
Note
Shift of tool management data (*low–speed response), 1366 Storage to a memory card, 575
Signal address conversion (from the PMC–MODEL L/M to the Storage to Flash ROM, 573
PMC–MODEL SB/SC), 1494
Storing the sequence program into FLASH ROM (I/O) (only for the
Signal diagnosis screen, 450 Power Mate–H and Power Mate i–D/H), 633
Signal names, 375 Structure of software key in PMC, 838, 840
Signal status display (STATUS), 650 Structure of valid net, 913
Signal trace function (PMC–SB7), 926 SUB (subtraction), 253
Signal trace screen (initial screen), 927 SUBB (binary subtraction), 255
Signals for connecting the operator’s panel, 1502 Subprogram list viewer screen, 1041
Subprogram numbers (CALL, CALLU, SP) (P), 119
Soft key menu of ladder debugging function, 603
Subprogramming and nesting, 385
Soft key–based PMC menu selection procedure, 642
Substitution of sequence programs, 1113
Source program, 1093, 1098
Summary of specification of ladder program, 29
SP (subprogram), 343
Switch statement, 1585
SPCNT (spindle control), 332
Switching screens for setting parameters, 843
SPE (end of a subprogram), 344
Symbol and comment display, 497
Special uses of the R3 key, 1107
Symbol data and comment input, 550
Specification, 1004
Symbol data display, 1121
Specification and display of system parameters (SYSPRM), 1512
Symbol data search (SRCH), 550
Specification of PMCs, 5
Symbol data setting (SYMBOL), 549
Specification of step sequence, 1003 Symbols used in the ladder diagram, 376
Specifications, 384, 392, 446, 597 System alarm messages (C language function for PMC–NB/
Specifications of password, 775 NB2/NB6), 1567
Specifying addresses, 1505 System alarm messages (PMC–SB5/SB6/NB6), 1568

System alarm messages (PMC–SC), 1565
Specifying and displaying system parameters (SYSPRM), 520
System diagram of soft key, 1514
Specifying and displaying title data (TITLE), 528
System floppy, 1072
Specifying the number of the program for I/O Link, 1315
System parameter (PMC–SB7), 950
Start and stop of a sequence program, 564
Starting and stopping sequence programs, 805
Starting and stopping the on–line debugging function, 636
Starting and stopping the sequence program (RUN/STOP), 631
ƠTơ
Terminology, 975
Starting ladder mnemonics editing, 626
The operation, 771
Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet
connection), 613 The value of functional instruction parameter, 495
Starting or stopping the trace function, 442 Time monitor, 1049
Starting the sequence program, 565 Time monitor function, 1049
Step, 989 Time monitor setting screen, 1050
Step operation [STEP], 604 Time screen, 1021
Step sequence basics, 974 Timer addresses (T), 116
Step sequence corresponded C language, 1576 Timer screen, 1021

Timer screen (TIMER), 475, 685
Step sequence method, 968
Timer set time address, 175
Step sequence monitor screen, 1037
Timer, counter, keep relay, nonvolatile memory control, data table,
Step sequence screen, 1016, 1026 365
Step sequence state screen (subprogram), 1047 Title data display (TITLE), 648
Step sequence state screen (whole), 1045 Title data editor screen, 649
Stop function of break with condition [BRKCTL], 605 TMR (timer), 170
Stop of ladder diagram display by trigger of signal, 499 TMRB (fixed timer), 172
Storage and control of sequence program (steps 12 to 14), 41 TMRC (timer), 174
i–9
Index B–61863E/15
Note
Trace function (TRACE), 441 Writing of tool setting data (*low–speed response), 1489
Trace screen, 443, 652 Writing real parameters (low–speed type), 1448
Transfer between data area and non–volatile memory, 1451 Writing setting data (*low–speed response), 1164
Transfer to and from a FANUC FD Cassette, 571 Writing setting data (low–speed type), 1472
Transfer to and from a FANUC LADDER, 571 Writing the feedrate, 1443
Transfer to and from a ROM WRITER, 583 Writing the measured point (*low–speed response), 1483
Transition, 992 Writing the parameter (*low–speed response), 1466
Writing the superposition move command, 1441
Writing the tool life management data (cutter compensation number
(1) : tool number) (*low–speed response) (not available for Power
ƠUơ Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1267
User PMC Screen (PMCMDI), 504
(2) : tool operation sequence number) (*low–speed response) (not
available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1269
1), 1437
ƠVơ Writing the tool life management data (cutter compensation number
Viewe/editor screen of message data, 819 2), 1437
Writing the tool life management data (tool condition (1) : tool num-
Viewer screen of message data, 819 ber) (*low–speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F,
Viewer screen of symbol/comment data, 809 Series 21–TA), 1271
Viewer screen of system parameter, 830 Writing the tool life management data (tool group number), 1434
Viewer/editor of symbol/comment data, 809 Writing the tool life management data (tool information 1), 1438
Viewer/editor of system parameter, 830 Writing the tool life management data (tool information 2), 1438
Writing the tool life management data (tool length compensation
number 1), 1436
Writing the tool life management data (tool length compensation
ƠWơ number 2), 1436
Writing the tool life management data (tool length offset number (1) :
What is a sequence program?, 36 tool number) (*low–speed response) (not available for Power
While statement, 1577 Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1263
Window function description (FS16–W), 1459 Writing the tool life management data (tool length offset number (2) :
tool operation sequence number) (*low–speed response) (not
Window function description (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB), 1449 available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1265
Window function description (FS16/16i/0i–P), 1484 Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter type), 1435
Window function description (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6), 1368 Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter type) (*low–
speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
Window function description (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/ 21–TA), 1261
SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4),1142
Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter), 1435
WINDR (reading CNC window data), 299
Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter) (*low–
WINDW (writing CNC window data), 302 speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
21–TA), 1259
Writing (registering) tool life management data (tool group number)
(*low–speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series Writing the tool life management data (tool life), 1434
21–TA), 1291
Writing the tool life management data (tool life) (*low–speed re-
Writing a custom macro variable, 1431 sponse) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1257
Writing a custom macro variable (*low–speed response), 1169 Writing the tool life management data (tool number), 1439
Writing a data on the program check screen, 1432 Writing the tool life management data (tool number) (*low–speed
response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1275
Writing a parameter (*low–speed response), 1160
Writing the tool management data (tool condition (2) : tool operation
Writing a parameter (setting data), 1430 sequence number) (*low–speed response) (not available for Power
Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1273
Writing a tool management data (*low–speed response), 1349
Writing the tool offset data according to the specified tool number,
Writing a tool offset (*Low–speed response), 1152 1440
Writing a tool offset data, 1429 Writing the torque limit override, 1433
Writing a workpiece origin offset value (*low–speed response) (not Writing the wire diameter offset (*low–speed response), 1462
supported by the Power Mate–D or –F), 1156
Writing tool life management data (cutter compemsation number 1),
Writing each tool data (*low–speed response), 1360 1446
i–10
B–61863E/15 Index
Note
Writing tool life management data (tool group numbers), 1444 Writing, reading, and comparing sequence programs and PMC pa-
rameters, 778
Writing tool life management data (tool information 1), 1447
Writing, reading, and verifying the sequence program and PMC
Writing tool life management data (tool information 1) (*low–speed parameter data, 566
response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 210TA), 1298
WRT, 126
Writing tool life management data (tool length compensation number
1), 1445 WRT. NOT, 127
Writing tool life management data (tool length offset number 1)
(*low–speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
21–TA), 1294
Writing tool life management data (tool radius offset number 1) ƠXơ
(*low–speed response) (not available for Power Mate–D/F, Series
21–TA), 1296 XMOV (indexed data transfer), 239
Writing value of the P–code macro variable (*low–speed response), XMOVB (binary index modifier data transfer), 242
1251
i–11

! " # #$
# %# " & $

' ()*+!
,- &.

! "
# $% & & &#&
'+ /
()*+ -0. %% $!!'($
!$))$ &!%!$*&$$
(

&))(&($)
$
$!!($
%! )+#& !$(! $$'%$

,
!-./01234
!5./5036 $

,
!-./0123-4
!5./503-6 7$78#7
'& -()*+
!7/$$ $)+!&!$%'$!+!$
$
(
( & & # $!&) # $

$ ,
!-6 8!%9
$978
%:8
;
'! ,
()*+ :)''
:,<) 6!78$=
,<) 6

%,<) 6>
%
,<) 6%
%
' ()*+
,-&. ,<) 6

%
,<) 6>$78%,<)
-0. 6!78
%,<)
6!8
%,<)
-0-203345 ,,6( 6:=
!55?25
%$)
7408 -
,-" . $
#
)+ #

' /1)*+ 7408 -
,-" .7$ $>$$!5
%$)%$>$$
7408 -
,-" $ !5
%$)%
8,,39-/
1 6,3//- 0

5
/995
' 85()*+ -0. ( ;83()'' -0.!
-03/
,3/1-508 -0
.
- 0 6,/ 0 % < ,- 0

&
' /
()*+ -0. /1)''' - 0 44 08 - "-3 30 9//59-
08 -/0
-2$

-0

33,/5/

(
' 85()*+ /
()*++ -0.
./(
' -()*+' ()*+& -04

/-
-
/- -- - /- --
• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

Model PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/ SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/ SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/ SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/ SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/ SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/ SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation, Inc.

©Copyright 2005 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

This programming manual describes the method of generating

Product Name Abbreviations Applicable CNC

FANUC PMC–MODEL PA3 PMC–PA3 FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F/H

FANUC PMC–MODEL SA1 (Note 1) PMC–SA1 FANUC Series 18–MODEL A/B

FANUC PMC–MODEL SA2 (Note 1) PMC–SA2 FANUC Series 18–MODEL A

FANUC PMC–MODEL SA3 (Note 1) PMC–SA3 FANUC Series 18–MODEL A

FANUC PMC–MODEL SA5 (Note 1) PMC–SA5 FANUC Series 21i–MODEL A

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB (Note 1) PMC–SB FANUC Series 16–MODEL A

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB3 (Note 1) PMC–SB3 FANUC Series 16–MODEL A/B

Product Name Abbreviations Applicable CNC

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB5 (Note 1) PMC–SB5 FANUC Series 16–MODEL C

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB6 (Note 1) PMC–SB6 FANUC Series 16–MODEL C

FANUC PMC–MODEL SB7 PMC–SB7 FANUC Series 16i–MODEL B

FANUC PMC–MODEL SC (Note 1) PMC–SC FANUC Series 16–MODEL A

FANUC PMC–MODEL SC3 (Note 1) PMC–SC3 FANUC Series 16–MODEL A/B/C

FANUC PMC–MODEL SC4 (Note 1) PMC–SC4 FANUC Series 16–MODEL B/C

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB PMC–NB FANUC Series 15–MODEL B

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB2 PMC–NB2

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB6 PMC–NB6 FANUC Series 15i–MODEL A

Name of manual Reference items Application

Product name Abbreviation CNC for

FANUC PMC-MODEL NA PMC-NA FANUC Series 15-MODEL B

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S–1

I. PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.2.7 Distribution I/O Connection I/O Module and

4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

5.17 MOVOR (DATA TRANSFER AFTER LOGICAL SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

5.64 END (END OF A LADDER PROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

6. NONVOLATILE MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

7. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

8. MISCELLANEOUS ITEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

9. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

10. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

11. INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

11.2 SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

II. PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI)

2. PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

3.8 DISPLAYING AND SETTING THE CONFIGURATION STATUS OF I/O

4. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

5. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

6. USER PMC SCREEN (PMCMDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

III. PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI)

2. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

2.2 CONNECTING COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

3. SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER MENUS BY SOFTKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

4. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . 520

5. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

6. EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

6.2 STARTING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565